Goetschius Applied Counterpoint

..
CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
MUSIC
BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME OF THE
SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND

THE GIFT OF
HENRY W. SAGE
1891
Cornell University Library
MT 55.G59
Counterpoint anglled In the...".n.Y.'S
PXiSVIJi, ,fH «
3 1924 022 381 143

Cornell University
Library
The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in

the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924022381143
NINTH EDITION
COUNTERPOINT APPLIED
In the Invention, Fugue, Canon
and other polyphonic forms
An Exhaustive Treatise on the Structural and Formal Details of the

Polyphonic or Contrapuntal Forms of Music
FOR THE USE OF
General anto Special g>tubents of ifflussic
PERCY GOETSCHIUS, Mus. Doc.

(Royal Wiirttemberg Professor)
AUTHOR OF
"The Material Used in Musical Composition," "The Theory
and Practice of Tone-Relations," "The Homophonic
Forms of Musical Composition" "Models of
the Principal Musical Forms," "Exer-
cises in Melody-Writing," etc.
Price, net, $3.00
NEW YORK
G. SCHIRMER, INC.
Copyright, 1902
Bv G. SCHIRMER, INC.
Printed in the U. S. A,
DEDICATED TO
HORATIO W. PARKER
IN CORDIAL RECOGNITION OF HIS
ACHIEVEMENTS" IN THE SERIOUS
FORMS OF MUSICAL
WRITING.
PREFACE.
This book is a sequel to the Homophonic Forms, and the system

pursued in its preparation corresponds in every detail to that of the
latter.
Experience in practical teaching has confirmed the author's belief

that no further preparation for the exercise of contrapuntal writing is
necessary than the course of harmony given in the Material used in

Musical Composition (or any equally exhaustive treatise), together with
the course of study prescribed in the Homophonic Forms. But these
courses, especially that in harmony, must be exceedingly thorough two ;
years of diligent application to Material is by no means too much, pos-

sibly not enough, for the acquirement of the only basis upon which
practical contrapuntal facility can rest, naturally and securely.
.Nevertheless, the first Division of the present book is devoted to
the specific details of contrapuntal discipline, partly because of their
inseparable bearing upon polyphonic form, and partly as a concession,
— for the benefit of students not familiar with the method of harmonic
discipline peculiar to the Material.
The other Divisionsowe their design to the author's conviction that
the quickest and surest means of acquiring contrapuntal skill consists
in the practical application of the contrapuntal method to the composition
of polyphonic forms. Hence the title of the book.

Therefore, this volume, like the preceding, " undertakes no more
than the systematic enumeration and exhaustive explanation of all the
formal designs and methods of structural treatment in the polyphonic
domain of music composition, as revealed in classic or standard
writings." i
Further, " the student must regard the conscientious analysis of all
the carefully collected references, as a very significant and distinctly

essential part of his study." On the other hand, it will probably
not be necessary for every student to do all of each Exercise. The
tasks have been made extremely comprehensive, not because they are
indispensable, but rather in order to meet the wants of every class of
students.
vi PREFACE.
The following works, to which constant and vital reference is made,

should be owned by the student
Of Bach, the Well-tempered Clavichord, Vols. I and II the 2- and ;
3-voice Inventions the English Suites the Organ Compositions (Peters

; ;
compl. ed.), Vols. II, III, IV, V, and VI.

Of Mendelssohn, Pfte. Works, op. 35 and op. 7 Organ Composi- ;
tions, op. 37 and op. 65.
Besides these, frequent reference is made to —

Bach, The Art of Fugue, French Suites, Partitas, and other clavichord
works
Handel, Clavichord Suites
Klengel, 48 Canons and Fugues
And Oratorios and similar choral works of Handel, Mendelssohn,
Bach, Beethoven, Brahms, etc. These and all other cited compositions
may be obtained, for inspection at least, at any large music store.
Like its predecessor, this book is designed not only for the practical
composer, but also for the general music-student. The latter, while
studying and analyzing with the same thoroughness as the special
student, will simply omit the prescribed Exercises.
PERCY GOETSCHIUS.
Boston, Mass., September, 1902.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
(The figures m parentheses refer to paragraphs.)
'
DIVISION ONE.
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF 2-VOICE POLYPHONY.
PAGE
Chapter I. The Conduct of the Single Melodic Part 1
Conjunct movement (1, 2). Disjunct movement (3, 4, 5). Natural
and acquired tendencies (6). Repetitions (8). Ties (9). Rests (10).
Harmonic influence (11). Minor (12). Summary (13). Exercise 1.
Chapter II. Association of Two Melodic Parts 19

Essential tones (14,15). Exercise
Unessential tones (16, 17).
2.
Diatonic harmony (18). Chromatic harmony (i8,f). Exercises 3 and
4. Modulation (19). Notation of minor (20). Summary (21). Ex-
ercise j.
Chapter III. Rhythmic Relation of the Melodic Parts 55

Exercise 6.
Chapter IV. Various Modes of Imitation 61

imitation (26).
Strict Free imitation (27). Unessential melodic
changes (28). Essential melodic changes (29). Unessential rhythmic
changes (30). Essential rhythmic changes (31). Complex forms (32).
Miscellaneous (33). The contrapuntal associate (34). The stretto
(36). Exercises 7, 8, 9, and 10.
DIVISION TWO.
THE INVENTION -FORMS.
Chapter V. The Two-voice Invention 96
Structural factors: Motive, imitations, counterpoint, episodes (38).
Sectional form (39). The first section (40). Influence of harmonic
bent; episodes; sequence; unusual species of imitation (41). Exercise
11. The second section (42). Exercise 12. The third (as final) sec-
tion (43). Additional sections (44). Exercise 13. The Invention in
2-Part Song-form (45). Primary grade (46). Genuine 2-Part form;
Part I (47) ; Part II (48). Exercise 14.. The Invention in Three-Part
Song-form primary grade (49). Genuine 3-Part form (50). Exer-
;
cise ij. The "Gigue" (51). Two or more motives (52). The Lyric
Invention (53). Student's attitude toward the prescribed tasks (54).
Exercise 16. The natural species of Double-counterpoint (55-58).
Exercise 17.
Chapter VI. Rules of Three- voice Polyphony 136

Association of 3 parts (59). Details of 3-voice Polyphony (61-63).
Leading part (64). Summary (65). Exercise 18.
Chapter VII. The Three-voice Invention 146

Sectional form (66). First section (67). Exercise 19. The remain-
ing sections (68). Exercise 20. Other structural designs: 2-Part
Song-form (69a, i) Gigue-form (69^)
; 3-Part Song-form (6<)d, e)
; ;
Vlll CONTENTS.
FAGB
animated counter-motive in Part II (70); Song-form with Trio (71).
Exercise 21. Distinctions of style (72). Exceptional species : Inven-
tion in Contrary motion (73a) independent lower part (73*).
; Exer-
cise 22.
Chapter VIII. The Invention for More than Three Voices . . . .164
Details of 4-voice Polyphony (75). The 4-voice Invention (76).
First section (77). Remaining sections (78). Exercise 23. Other
structural designs (79). Distinctions of Style (80). The 5-voice In-
vention (81). Exercise 24.
Chapter IX. Free Polyphonic Forms 174

Distinction between homophonic and polyphonic forms (82). The
Prelude (83). The Toccata (84). The Fantasia (85). Mixed forms
, (86). Homophonic forms with polyphonic episodes (87). Exercise 25,.
DIVISION THREE.
CHORALE - FIGURATION.
Chapter X. Small Species of Chorale-figuration 185
Cantus firmus (90). Harmonization (91). Thematic accompani-
ment (92). Table of chorales, Exercise 2b. Independent Pedal-
part (93). Embellished cantus firmus (94). Motive derived from
chorale (95). Independent parts (96). Exercise 27. Three-voice elab-
oration (97). Five-voice (98). Exercise 28.
Chapter XI. Large Species of Chorale-figuration 197

Invention with chorale (99). C. f. in Soprano (100). Exercise 20.
C. f. in Bass (102). In Tenor (103). In Alto (104). In alternate
voices (105). Exercise 30. Chorale as Invention-group (106). Exer-
cise 31. Chorale as Aria (107). Ritomelle with chorale (108).
Chorale-fantasia (109). Exercise 32. Chorale-invention (no). Cho-
rale-variations (in). Exercise 33.
DIVISION FOUR.
THE FUGUE.
Introductory 212
Fugue-subject (113). Exercise 34. Construction of the " Response "
(114). Real Response (115). Tonal Response (1 16-120). Exercise 33.
Chapter XII. The Four-voice Fugue ... 224

The Exposition (121). The first " Counterpoint " or counter-theme
(122). Exercise 36. Order of voices (123). Irregular expositions
(124). Episode (125). Cadence (126). The Fughetta (127). Exercise
37. The sectional form (128-131). Retaining the contrapuntal asso-
ciate (132). Exercise 38. Additional rules (133, 134). Exercise
3g.
Two-Part Song-form (135). Three-Part Song-form (136). Exercise
40. Special design (137). Exercise 41.
Chapter XIII. The Fugue with Less or More than 4 Parts .242 . .
The 3-voice Fugue (138-144). The 2-voice Fugue (145). The 5-voice
Fugue (146). Fugue with six or more parts (147). Exercise 42.
Chapter XIV. Miscellaneous Fugue-forms .... 249
The Concert-fugue (148). Prelude (149). Exercise 43. Fugue for
String-quartet, etc. (150). Vocal Fugue (152). Exercise 44. Fugue
CONTENTS. j x
PAGE
with chorale (154). Chorale as Fugue-group (155). Chorale-Fugue
(156). Group-Fugue (157). Exercise 45. Fugue in Contrary motion
(158). Fugue in Augmentation or Diminution (159). Irregular spe-
cies (160). Exercise 46.
Chapter XV. The Doubi.e-Fugue 261

Incipient form (162).Fugue with Thematic counterpoint (163).
Exercise 47. Genuine Double Fugue (165). First species (167). Ex-
ercise 48. Second species (168). Exercise 41). Artificial Double-
counterpoint (169). Double-cpt. in 12th (170). In nth (172). In
10th (173). In 13th (174). Duplication in thirds (175). Double-cpt.
in 9th and 7th (176). Other varieties of Double-cpt. (177). Exercise
jo. Third species of Double-Fugue (178). Irregular (4th) species
(179). Exercise Ji.
Chapter XVI. The Triple-Fugue 282

Inversions (181). First species (182). Second species (183). Third
species (184). Quadruple-cpt., etc! (185). Exercise 32.
DIVISION FIVE.
THE CANON.
Introductory 288
Leader and Follower (187).
Chapter XVII. The Round-canon . 289

Definitions and rules (188). Lyric canon (189). Exercise jj.
Chapter XVIII. The Progressive Canon 293

2-voice canon, in the 8ve, Unaccompanied (191). In the 2d (193).
In the 7th (194). In the 3d and 6th (195). In the 5th and 4th
(196). Exercise 34. In Contrary motion (197). In Augmentation
(198). In Diminution (199). Exercise 55.
Chapter XIX. Two-voice Canon, Accompanied 302

Auxiliary part (201).
Instrumental (200). Significance of canon-
form (202). Canon as conventional style (203). Exercise 56. Two-
voice canon, Vocal, Accompanied (204). Exercise 57.
Chapter XX. Canon for More than Two Parts . 309

Three-voice canon (205). In Contrary motion (206). Four-voice
canon (207). Exercise 58.
Chapter XXI. Double-Canon, etc 313

Definitions (208). Triple-canon (209). Exercise jg.
Chapter XXII. Canon as Chorale-elaboration 315

Chorale as canon (210). Accompanied (211). Canon with chorale
(212). Exercise 60. " Canonic " compositions (213).
APPLIED COUNTERPOINT.
INTRODUCTION.
The most concise definition that may be given of good and correct
Polyphony is, that it consists in the harmonious association of
INDIVIDUALLY PERFECT and COORDINATE, BUT INDEPENDENT, MELODIES.
Correct polyphonic writing is, therefore, subject to the following three
conditions :
—
Condition i : Perfect Melody ;
Condition 2 : Harmonious Union ;
Condition 3 : Independence of Parts ;
each of which will be successively treated in the chapters of Divi-

sion One.
DIVISION ONE.
THE FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF THE SIMPLE
(TWO-VOICE) POLYPHONIC STYLE.
CHAPTER I.
CONDITION 1 " PERFECT MELODY."

: THE CONDUCT OF
THE SINGLE PART OR VOICE*
Conjunct Movement.
1. The first and most comprehensive rule of polyphonic melody is,
to lead each single part as smoothly and evenly as possible. Conjunct

movement (that is, stepwise ascending or descending progression along
the line of the prevailing scale) is therefore preferable to disjunct
movement (that is, by leap or skip), as a general rule. Disjunct move-
ment is, however, by no means undesirable, but should be used in
moderate proportion to the stepwise movement.
* An exhaustive exposition of the fundamental laws of melodic progression may be found in the
author's " Exercises in Melody-Writing." Thorough understanding of Chapters I-V of that book
will facilitate (possibly supersede) the study of the above chapter.
I
APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 2.
mmm
Bach.
Ex.
1.
-XT
See par. 6.
Disj. Conj
-•—*- & Disj. .
mm
Conj.
2. Diatonic conjunct movement is preferable to chromatic.

a. Chromatic successions are least objectionable in slow movement
(with tones whose time-values represent whole beats, or at least half-
beats) ; and are generally better in ascending than in descending
direction, especially when moderately rapid.
1. (Ex. 83-10.)
iw
Ex. 3e*
2-E^=a
Chrom.
%
t3=t Chrom.
-¥ 1 etc.
^f---MM &-M--Fi)
i^BBE
2.
Lento,
^ Chrom.
Bach.
See also Ex. 82-1 ; 26-5.
b. A chromatic succession should, if possible, be approached in the

corresponding direction ; and requires, almost certainly, to continue in
the same direction. For illustration
/*/*/< \\,\ \ \ Possible.-
^MEgs&jj^jE^îa
/* /*
Ex.
3.
Upward. Downward. ?? ??? (See par. 5.)
c. It is generally unmelodious to separate a chromatic succession by

inserting an intermediate neighboring-tone, in quick movement
-^ — Better.
?feSjBp^P
Ex.
H— I
' r^: >-
Disjunct Movement.
3. Disjunct progressions are qualified as narrow leaps (major or

minor 3rds), and wide leaps (all skips beyond the intervals of the 3rd).
Permissible Skips.
a.Narrow leaps are generally permissible.

Wide leaps, or leaps in general, are always permissible when both
tones are common to the momentary chord, i.e., if they occur during chord-
repetition. For instance

Par. 3. PERMISSIBLE SKIPS.
Bach.
Ex.
5. ¥=X\ etc.
G I- •V - • I = VI 7 -
See also Ex. 52-2.
b. A skip of any reasonable extent (rarely beyond an octave) may
be made downward to any tone whose natural tendency is upward ; or
upward to any tone whose tendency is to descend that is, the skip ; —
may be made in the direction opposite to that of the natural tendency.
(These tendencies are defined in par. 6, which see.) Thus
mm
1.
Ex.
6a. £ -F-
C major or minor.
3+ 4+
iin =«* anggpig

5 2.
ii
Bach.
Further
<fe #3^ 3^S -*^-»—*- I^H
N.B. N.B.
These skips are, however, objectionable in the other direction (i.e.,
that corresponding to the natural tendency) ;

— unless in obvious and
perfect accord with par. 30 (during chord-repetition). For example
4.
Ex.
6b.
I
E§5 ??
bfcs I
<-. Almost any leap, no matter how unusual or awkward in itself,
may be justified by ,r^#<?»«-progression, i.e., by the reproduction of a
melodic figure upon other, higher or lower, scale-steps. Thus
Bach.
Ex.
7.
-£
«* s dTi
N.B.
l^lil N.B. N.B.
4 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 3.
To be feasible, such a line of sequences should start from a figure that is fault-
less. The rectitude of the initial figured the justification of all reasonable sequence-
shifts (or reproductions) of it.
d. Unusual, and otherwise doubtful, skips sometimes occur at (im-

mediately after) an accented tone. For example
Bach.
N.B. N.B.
This particular passage represents, simply, a continuous scale-passage, with two

shifts to the next higher octave-register, —
a device which is very common and
effective in contrapuntal melodies, and possible in either direction. The rule at d,
however, applies to other cases also (Ex. 16).
Objectionable Skips, and Exceptions.
4. On the other hand, skips are distinctly faulty

a. After any tone which is obviously inharmonic or dissonant, i.e.,
foreign to the prevailing chord.

To this rule there are two important exceptions
(1) It is always possible to leap a 3rd, from a neighboring-note to

the opposite neighboring-note (of the same essential tone) usually, the
essential tone follows and concludes the group, — 'as it
;
also begins it
That is to say, the figures -±_

o o
are always correct, in any reasonable movement (fast or slow), at any point in the
measure, and whether the harmony remains the same, or is changed, during the
group. The figure contains a " Double appoggiatura," and results from inserting
the upper and lower neighboring-tones successively between the principal tone and
its recurrence.
Not infrequently, especially in 3-tone groups, the recurrence of the

principal tone is dispensed with. The license then consists in leaping
down a 3rd from the upper neighboring-note ; it is rarely applied in the
opposite direction (leaping upward a 3rd from the lower neighbor).
Par. 4. OBJECTIONABLE SKIPS AND EXCEPTIONS.
This is called the " unresolved upper neighboring-note." For ex-

ample :
N.B. N.B.
o o _o o
ib\fe
ir
-J
f*:* t 5& 1
'
'
r r r r
(2) It is possible to make an indirect or " ornamental " resolution
of a Suspension, and of similar dissonant tones. Thus

JL.
Bach. 2. IS
Bach.
I
± J-.
Ex.
IO.
3:
V T
im
*#^p
*
IP
e
r
F V 7 I—
The interposed tones (marked x x), inserted between the Suspension and its
resolving-tone, usually belong to the resolving-chord, as seen in the above illustra-

tions ; but brief diatonic passing-notes may be added. Thus
1. ^8.
r\ r\ r"
1 Lower neighbo r appogg of a,
Ex. X=X
*-•- 2.
(
Interposed harmonic tone

.)
( of I ).
3. Passing-note.
1 1.
4. Resolving-tone.
r
aV I-
i a a 4. « a
gjgd^g^^
IJBach.
1. Suspension.
2. 5. Chord-tones.
3. 4. 6. Passing-notes.
7. Resolving-tone.
'
I D I-
b. A skip, narrow or wide, to any inharmonic or dissonant tone

(whereby the latter is deprived of its legitimate " preparation "), is, as
a very general rule, objectionable. But it is by no means unpermissi-
ble, especially in the lighter (freer) styles of polyphony. See the g%.
in the preceding illustration ; and the following
N.B.
Bach.
fey ——o-
A I
APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 4.
c. The leap of an augmented 4th is usually, for one reason or
another, very objectionable and the progression by an augmented 2nd,

;
diminished 3rd, major 7th, augmented 5th or 6th, or other awkward

intervals, should be avoided. They are best justified (1) by chord-
repetition (par. 3a)
Bach.
Ex.
wfebes I etc.
rjO^J
13.
— G V-
q^—fBI—
ach
\
. 3.
-W-
_
m
..
.N.B.
_ Bach.
or (2) by sequence-formation (par. $c) :
N.B. Bach.
Ex.sfe
or (3) when occasioned by such distribution of the tones as represents

the alternate appearance of two adjacent parts (correct in their respective
movements)
1. N.B. Bach.
Ex.
15.
N.B.
mm I
F
Bach.
^te=f^fcf
j^- j^frj
a PP arentl y :
=^F-raj|
Compare Ex. 7.
or (4), as shown in par. 3d, by occurring at (after) an accented tone,-

especially when the latter is the Tonic .-
Bach.
% etc.
'
g# minor.
g$ Tonic. Tonic.
Par. 5. OBJECTIONABLE SKIPS AND EXCEPTIONS.
5. After a wide leap (beyond a 3rd) the part should turn, and
progress in the opposite direction. See Exs. 6a, 7, 8, 12, 13. To this
very important and general rule there are a few exceptions, as

follows
a. The part may continue in the same direction after a skip, if it
passes on into a tone which belongs to the same chord, whether the har-
mony changes meanwhile, or not. Thus
correct in
ther
1
*-&^p*=^ J
==fl=Ff=-f r
direction.
direi
CI F V7
The following successive skips are all very doubtful, because their
aggregate effect is not harmonious :
Doubtful, in either di-
S:î&îgig rection, because these

are not legitimate chord-
forms.
Compare par. 3a.
b. It is almost always correct to pass on diatonically in the same

direction, after a wide leap, if the direction of the part is then changed
i.e., it is usually sufficient to change the direction at the second tone
after the leap. For example :
Bach.
Ex.
19a. E15 iiii
-•—p-
*=t=
=r=t
*
=t=5
EEEEE=f=f
r~r
^0
N.B.
In this example the whole structure suggests a distribution of the tones of two
adjacent parts (noted in Ex. 15), equivalent to :
Ex
19b. msm<uû -$--
-r
jLkL
*=Z
*=
1
Besides, the formation is sequential (par. y).
c. The part need not turn, after a wide leap, if it remains, even
briefly, upon the same tone —
whether the latter be reiterated,
;
Ex.
20a.
Xr N.B.
or simply held, for a pulse equivalent to repetition,
Ex.
20b.
I
#=£
N.B.
J- "^
•"*"*
:
4&
or embellished by either neighboring-tone
~~2
Bach .
Bach.
^Sli^S
'
1.
Ex ^.-^^zE^z^^zn^
I
.
20C. El J
Ex. 15.
Active Tones.
6. The natural or inherent tendencies of certain scale-steps (called

Active steps because of their strong natural inclination to move) are as
follows
That of the yth scale-step (Leading-tone) is to ascend diatonically
that of the 6th scale-step to descend diatonically ; and that of the 4th
scale-step to descend diatonically.
Besides these, there are a number of acquired tendencies, as fol-
lows (all diatonic)
That of all chord-seiienths, chord-ninths, and diminished sths and 7ths

to descend; that of all raised (altered) scale-steps to ascend ; that of all
lowered scale-steps to descend ; and that of Suspensions to pass into
their respective resolving-tones.
Rule. — These natural and acquired tendencies should be respected, as
far as is consistent with reasonable freedom of melodic movement.
For illustration of the natural tendencies (these being the most sig-
nificant in the conduct of single melodic parts )
Bach. Bach.
6 5
Kx. •t=* %tc.^tâeT=F^ fletc.
See also Ex. 1 ; Ex. 6a, Nos. 1 and 3.

Par. 6. ACTIVE TONES.
As indicated, the regular resolution of all active tones is effected

diatonically (i.e., stepwise). To the above rule there may be, both as
concerns direction and distance, the following
Exceptions.
a. An active tone may leap to any tone that belongs (or might
belong) to the same chord ; compare par. 3a. The leap may be made
either upward or downward, though always best in the proper direction
(that corresponding to the resolution). Thus
Bach. 2. Bach.
Ex.
22. . iiîiii^lfe^gpsi] N.B m '
M I.'
4 5 Bach. Bach.
G V„
fer^
S3^F I
m
Such disjunct movements from the active tones constitute, often,
examples of the indirect (or " deferred ") resolution, referred to in par.
4a, (2). That is, the unexpected tone or tones are simply interposed
between the active tone and its resolution. Thus :
Ex.
23.: gr^^g^^^giî^lg
Direct res. Deferred res. Direct. Deferred Direct. Deferred.
As a rule, if only one tone of the same chord intervenes, the obligation remains,
and the resolving-tone should follow though this depends largely upon whether
;
the interposed tone lies in the direction of the resolution or not, — if the active tone
progresses in the proper direction, its obligation is at least partly cancelled. For
illustration
n Good. Better. ?? Good.
Ex.
-*==£
24.
N.B. 3 4
^^ 6 (?)
Better. 7 7- 7— —
iIE m. e*E=e =t=p:
1
(?) Good. Good. Best.
IO APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 6.
If two tones of the same chord follow the active tone, its resolution may be
evaded ; or if the active tone passes to another active tone, the resolution of the
latter is sufficient. Thus
•7 7 8 4 3 6 5
Ex.
25. i
ElS
X =£
33=!
Better, but not necessary.
-3
m
6 S
3-
ih t-
3. The
m
Better, but not necessary.
.^==t
N.B.
See par.
natural tendency of these active scale-steps

m
6/>.
Always good
--*-•-
(par. 86).
S£
may be
^ counter-
b
acted by approaching them stepwise in the corresponding direction (i.e.,
that in opposition to their tendency) ; in which case they may continue

in the (false) direction, along the scale.
Bach.
Ex.
26.
i 3fc^
N.B.
m m*^^mme 7
•--0=+-
N.B.
±
^»-..»
Bach.
B maj.
4. Bach.
etc.
O 8 7 6 _____
Ff maj.
Bach.
d min. N.B.
N.B. — This is merely an obvious corroboration of par. i, in its

broadest application.
c. An active scale-step, when approached thus in the " opposite ''
direction, has the option either of passing onward (as in Ex. 26), or of
turning and fulfilling its natural obligation. But, if approached in the
Par. 6. ACTIVE TONES. II
direction corresponding to its tendency, it is very difficult indeed for

the active tone to turn and progress incorrectly. The most natural ex-
ception (possibly the only defensible one) when mere melodic embel-
is
lishment, or deferred resolution, is involved, — i.e., when one of the

tones is a neighboring-note, or obviously an interposed tone. For
example
7 6 7 Exceptional. *i Bach.
:
j^.jjii ^gjâii^.ipg=a
As a rule, very doubtful.- N.B.
*2) Bach. N.B. * 3 ) Bach.
N.B. ~~ " ~ '

I
Sequence.
N.B. *4) Bach. N.B. Bach.

6 5 • -t*^
i9^BEEEfcS
-$**$ 4- _^rlZ:r* F maj. » 5 )
EI* S^z jg>TJ=^J=|] etc.
C IV- Sequence.
*i) The 4th scale-step is here evidently an auxiliary (embellishing) tone; and
fj is taken, in preference to fj, because of the prevailing C-major key. — *2) Same
as note *i). — *3) An embellishment of the Leading-tone a, as in Ex. ga, neatly
conducted into a sequence of the preceding figure. — *4) A deferred resolution of
both the 6th and 4th steps. — *5) Like note *i) ; Bo is taken, instead of bit, to pre-
vent the impression of C major.
7. Care must be taken to avoid any- awkward conditions at the

transition from one beat- into the next. In approaching an accented
fraction of the (following) beat, with a fairly rapid figure, the latter
must be so calculated as to reach the desired point at precisely the
right moment, —
not too soon (so that awkward anticipation results),
nor too late (so that an equally awkward leap is necessary). Supposing
c to be the tone to be reached, in a rhythm of four tones to the (pre-
ceding) beat;
Ex.
28.
IIE
1.
tsS
g^g^l
(Par. 10.)
Good.
ISE
In measure 1 the run is
££
faulty because it
S Good.
reaches the c too soon ; in measure 2

I
it is calculated to reach c too late ; measure 3 is correct.
As a rule, after moving stepwise toward the desired tone (at the be-
ginning of the next beat), it is necessary to continue and enter the new
beat stepwise, — not with a leap. If a leap be necessary, it should be
made earlier in the figure, according to the prevailing harmonic condi-
tions :
«3^
L_l -•- -•- -•-
Good. Good. C I
Good.
ii^p^spp^gf N.B.
In the last measure, the awkward leap into o is avoided by inserting an accented
passing-note ; this is a very common and excellent device.
While it is usually better to continue thus, and enter the next beat
diatonically in the same direction, there is no objection to turning at
the transitional point:
3. (Ex. 9*.)
i^s All poor.

P=i^P=
=t
Good.
•^^^ All good.
=P=F3
ip
Good.
8. The reiteration of a tone should be avoided in rapid rhythmic

succession. It is, however, entirely permissible in slow movement ; i.e.,
after a tone of full-beat value or more, — more rarely after one of half-
beat value ; always good after a tie.
2 Moderato. Bach - Bach.
He
-
Moderate
Ex.
29.
*=t
??
Too rapid.
Good.
i feas
± Good. m
Pai. 8. REPEATED TONES. 13
4. N.B. Bach.
± •
T
—— L 1 1 J I
T- T-^T
N.B. N.B.
a. Rapid reiterations are justified when occurring several times

in succession, especially in sequences
Bach. 2. Allegro.
Ex.
3S;g g8|i^^ [giEl=giiî i
fE^SEg I
P^=P—!«-•-
ISSHI
3. The most natural remedy, in case of objectionable reiterations, is
to leap up or down an octave, —
always an effective and permissible
progression :
Ex.
31.
9.
m The tie
zMzzjz
is
*m . instead
one of the most effective devices for obtaining the

:
^ ^p^
? ?
desirable rhythmic independence of the several parts ; it serves to pro-

cure time-values of an extent — and at locations — not provided for by
the ordinary characters of notation. The tie extends the duration of a
tone from one beat into the next, or, with still more striking effect, from
the last beat or beats of one metric group into the first beat of the fol-
lowing group (i.e., at, or over into, the accented pulses).
a. A — from a long or heavy note, of

long tie a whole at least (or
possibly half) beat value — everywhere is possible.
b. On the contrary, a short — as a from any value

tie than rule, less
a half-beat of the prevailing meter, moderate tempo, — should be in

avoided.
Bot h of these rules coincide, in rhythmic principle, with par. 8.

14 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. g.
c. As a general rule, the second tone (the one into which the tie
extends) should not be of longer duration than that of the first (preced-
ing) tone.
d. A brief tie, from a tone of less than half-beat duration (see b), is
best justified when it gives rise to a Suspension
I
^3^^ Bach.
Ex.
32.
Tsr.B.i- r
or when several such (brief) ties occur in succession, as syncopated

form of an entire passage :
1. Sj_; S. _ S. Bach.
Ex.
33.
mFP=ggg l
-*
/
—— • h*
I
* — i
Bach.
™r*' i-— ^2 ^tr3T^^ 1 «j r— '1
-1 — r^.—. ^
ttM
Mife: X 1 etc.
e. After a tie of fairly long duration, the part may progress either
quickly or deliberately ; if the tie is brief, however, the, part should pro-
gress with corresponding promptness, as indicated at c.
f. A tie may be followed :
(1) by the same tone (reiteration, par. 8) ;
(2) by the next higher or next lower tone (which progression

provides for any " resolution " that may be necessary,
— for example, in case of a Suspension) ;
(3) by the tone a 3rd above or below, either as harmonic skip,

involving no further obligation, or as opposite neigh-
boring-note of the resolving-tone, in case such be neces-
sary. See par. 4a (1) ;
(4) or by any still more remote tone, belonging to the mo-

mentary chord, — again either as harmonic skip, or as
interposed tone before resolution. See par. 4a (2).
Par. g. TIES. IS
The choice of these possible, and equally good, progressions depends

principally (often solely) upon the location of the essential tone required or
desired at the beginning of the next beat, and is governed in any case by
the rules of par. 7, which see.
Given the tied note c, followed in the next beat by c:
1. Given : Solution ( 4 notes to a beat )
Ex.
H =f-F+—h=R— F=F-r—R=h-F-F^=F
z
34. II: h I
Susp.
(
3 notes to a beat ) :
—^ =p=s=
•-
f m-m-W-'- ThrH^P -*-*-*
|=l:|=J=tr± =t=t
I
C I C IV
2. Given: Solution (4 notes):
ilN^lfe FP=! zw=*=?=W=i

—
s,
(Crooked.) (Possible.) (3 notes) :
l^Pî
(?) (2 notes)
tt
:
§^ S izt :t»:
1-
gi
1*=*=0-
i
(s.)
4.
Given Solution
For
itai exactly the reverse of 2.
^t?^
(s.f)
f ???
If- ^f3**- ^^3Tfep=g ^g^jz^grpz^j
^jJgagigjE^^g^^
ci ci
Efrti
(?)
16 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. io.
5.
the reverse of
For
X I 4.
CIV
6.
Given : Solution p- p-,. p^»^^
GV (s.?)
10. Brief rests (3) may be inserted at the beginning (generally only
at the beginning) of almost any beat, but especially any accented beat.
The rest should not occur, as a rule, after any inharmonic tone (on
account of the resolution) nor after any very short tone,
; occupying the —
last unaccented fraction of the preceding beat; nor in the course of a
beat, in such a manner as to impair the rhythm
Ex. r
35. ^#fj .p^ ??
Longer rests (-1 , X, etc.) are good almost anywhere, but under pre-
cisely the same limitations
Bach.
± BE &E= i
Ex.
36.
iweje& r . -1
*H^=£
-*
— I-
I
Bach.
te
IS3 *^ -p«-
1
I
i ir » -*-
S^
ga^=^>
J £.
^*
=•=*= 3=t 1
See also Ex. 37, No. 2.
Par. ii. HARMONIC INFLUENCE. 17
11. The influence of harmonic laws upon the conduct of each single
part (even when isolated, —
temporarily unattended by other parts), is
obvious from many passages in the foregoing rules especially par. 30, ;
4, 5a, 6a, gf. The next chapter will demonstrate in detail the manifest
necessity of basing the polyphonic complex upon a harmonic fundament,
and of regarding the polyphonic style simply as an advanced stage in
the manipulation of the self-same originalfactors of Harmony, charac- —
terizedby that superior freedom and independence which advanced
growth brings. But, aside from the controlling influence exerted by
harmonic law upon the co-operation of two or more simultaneous parts,
the same influence is present even in the conception and movements of
the single, unaccompanied part ; for example, the direct derivation of a
melody from a harmonic source, or its dictation by a harmonic purpose,
is plainly shown in such motives as the following (all from Bach) :
3^:Pl|p^^
B I IV V-
etc.
a.
IW ffiRs=^=*
^g
a I IV
IK
V7
-*-=*-
-+±*
mplfe^]
I— eV — I — Ab I IV— V
I
4.
e# I y — I II VI V7 I
See also Exs. 5, 7, 14, 15, 22, Ex. 30-1, etc.
Such evidences of harmonic design are most palpable in melodies in disjunct

movement (i.e., with many skips) but are more vague in melodies in preponderantly
;
conjunct movement. Hence it is that, according to the rule of par. 1, conjunct or

stepwise progression is a characteristic distinction of the polyphonic style of compo-
sition, in which the parts are more emancipated from the governing power of har-
monic bodies the homophonic style, in which this power constantly prevails,
;
being distinguished, on the contrary, by greater frequency of skips, and disjunct move-
ment generally.
12a. The above rules apply, with no essential modifications, to

the minor as well as the major mode. The only noteworthy addition
is, that in the ascending scale-progression in minor the 6th step (as de-
fined by the signature) is generally raised ; and in the descending scale-
progression, the yth step is generally lowered. See par. 20.
b. Further, all of the given rules are most binding in prominent
parts, namely, the uppermost and lowermost of the polyphonic complex ;
but are subject to a certain degree of license in the inner part or parts.
c. All reasonable violations of the rules are palliated (and even
completely justified) by "thematic authority," — that is, when called
forth by deference to, or confirmation of, any perfectly apparent and rec-
ognizable thematic design, involved by the Imitation of a motive or fig-

ure (par. 24), by the Sequence (par. 3c), or any other sufficiently obvi-
ous and plausible melodic purpose.
Summary.
13a. Conjunct movement is almost invariably good.

Principal exception, Ex. 27, measures 1-3.
b. Skips are good between chord-tones, and justifiable by correct

harmonic conditions.
Principal exceptions, Ex. 66, par. 4a, \c.
c. Any essential (harmonic) tone may be preceded by its two (upper

and lower) neighbors. Par. 4a, (1).
d. After a wide skip, the part turns, either immediately Or at the
second next tone.
Principal exception, par. §a.
e. Any progressions are possible which represent the successive (or
alternate) distribution, in one part, of tones which would constitute two
(or possibly more) strictly regular adjacent parts.
Ex. 15, Ex. 19.
f. The tendency of active tones should be respected, and all " reso-
lutions " properly effected.
Principal exceptions, par. 6a and 6.
g. The direction of comparatively rapid figures must be governed

by the essential tone (or first tone) of the following beat. . Par. 7.
h. The movements of a melodic part must corroborate some ra-
tional harmonic purpose ; especially applicable to disjunct movement.
Par. n.
Cause for almost any irregularity is afforded by the Sequence, or
*'.
any other entirely obvious and defensible thematic purpose. Par. $c,
Ex. 14. Ex. 30; Par. i2£.
Par. 14. HARMONIOUS UNION. 19
EXERCISE I.
A. Analyze, thoroughly and minutely, the progressions of the solo part at the
beginning of every Fugue in the Well-tempered Clavichord of
J. S. Bach, for about
S or 6 measures (even after another part may have joined the first). Every move-
ment, from tone to tone, and the collective relations from measure to measure, are
to be tested and demonstrated with reference to the above rules.
B. Write a large number of original melodic sentences (40 or 50), of from one
to three or four measures in length, illustrating each rule and exception given in
Chapter I., successively. Terminate each sentence upon the first unit of the final
measure employ every variety of measure (from f to J/), and all the keys, major
;
and minor alternately. Imitate the rhythm and style of the Bach models.
CHAPTER II.
CONDITION 2: "HARMONIOUS UNION." THE ASSOCIATION

OF TWO PARTS (VOICES).
14. The simultaneous conduct of two parts must, naturally, yield a
harmonious result; not necessarily wholly, but preponderantly so. The

consonant intervals must, therefore, dominate all Essential tones, while
the equally desirable and necessary dissonant intermixtures must be
limited to the Unessential tones.
The fundamental distinction between Essential and Unessential
tones is partly a question of harmony, but more largely (at least
in the present connection) one of rhythm, or, rhythmic prominence.
Hence, the Essential tones are those which represent and obviously
govern an entire metric unit of moderate duration, that is, the full beats
in somewhat rapid tempo, and the half-beats in ordinary or deliberate
tempo, — possibly the quarter-beats in decidedly slow tempo. The

essential tones, in order thus to govern their beats or half-beats, will
usually appear at the beginning, or upon an accented fraction, of the
same ; but not necessarily, as the harmonic quality of the tones (their
relation to the momentary chord) is decisive in all doubtful cases.
The Unessential tones are those whose relation to the chord, or the
beat, render them manifestly secondary to the essential tones.
Rules for Exclusively Essential Tones.

15. The consonant, or at least harmonious, intervals which are to
govern the association of Essential tones, are of three grades : Primary
consonances, secondary consonances, and mild dissonances.
a. The primary consonances are

The 3rds, major and minor ; and
the 6ths, major and minor.
The quality (major or minor) depends upon the momentary key

and the choice between 3rd and 6th isdictated by the harmonic demands
or preference. They are not affected by the enlargement (through an
octave of double-octave separation) to 10th, 13th, etc.
These intervals are invariably permissible, at any point, during notes

of any reasonable time-value, in practically any order and connection.
An unbroken succession of 3rds (or of 6ths), while inevitably har-
monious, and therefore desirable in moderation, nevertheless militates
against the necessary independence of the two parts, and should, for
that reason, not be protracted beyond 3 or 4 (5) at a time, as a rule.
For illustration (adapted from Bach, with omission of the unessential
tones contained in the original)
2. C a — d
TWZU
3 3 3 8 6
etc. SEE
m
&UeSJ-
ii^^^r^r r
F-
The complete form

r
of these illustrations is given in Ex. 44, Nos.

^
:fct
Bfr
1, 2, 3.
1 etc.
b. The secondary consonances are

The perfect 8ve, or unison ; and those
perfect 5ths which represent strong triads (those of the
Tonic and Dominant).
The octave is useful, and quite common ; it may represent the du-
plication of any scale-step excepting the Leading-tone (step 7), but is
best as Tonic, Dominant, or Subdominant if it occurs at the weaker ;
steps (2nd, 3rd or 6th) its effect must be carefully tested. The perfect
5th is rare, and always requires to be tested.
Neither of these intervals can occur in succession (8-8, or 5-5), nor
should they be interchanged (8-5, or 5-8), as a rule, when the tones
are Essential.
Par. 15. ESSENTIAL TONES. 21
Neither of them should be approached in parallel direction, when

the upper part makes a wide leap, — always excepting during chord-
repetition. A wide leap in either direction, in connection with the per-
fect 5th, is objectionable, especially in the upper part.
For illustration
Leading-tone.
Ex.
39.
i ±±±a ^r
fe±
C major.
asr
r
j
1
(10) (10)
Good.
if Fair,
-
?
Wrong.
v 1 ' in L L « 6
Good.
??? J j „
j^J^J:
it
j_8 6J
f^
(_6_
5>:
^
V- zn,
See also Ex. 40, B; Ex. 44, Nos. 4, 5.
c. The mildly dissonant intervals, permitted to dominate occasional

Essential tones, are
The diminished 5th;
the augmented 4th
'JJinV 7 —
;
the diminished 7 th ;
\ b ya Incomplete (Dim< ?th chord) _
the augmented 2nd ; )
and those minor 7ths and major 2nds which represent good chords of
the seventh.
The diminished and augmented intervals are by no means infrequent;
but the major 7ths are very rare.
None of these intervals can be used in succession, nor, as a rule,
interchanged ; i. e., they should occur only in connection with the

primary consonances (3 or 6), or, more cautiously, with secondary ones
(par. 15^).
They must not be introduced abruptly the wide leap, in either part, ;
toward any of them should be avoided, excepting during chord-repe- —

tition. If a chord-7th or 9th is involved, it must be properly resolved.
22 HffLJEV COUNTMRrOJNT. Par. 15.
For illustration
Ex.
40.
^V I
,•-
I
1 1
7 j !
n r ^ti i
f
1 1
mm^
Never.
II 7 9
B. N.B. Bach.
i
ps 1
3 s
v
pÊ
m
See also Ex. 44, No. z, and Nos. 6-9.
d. Additional general rules :

It is mainly important that each part, alone by itself, should con-
stitute a perfect, well-designed melody ; therefore the rules of melodic
conduct, given in Chap. must be strictly regarded.
I.,
And any other factor which imparts design

the use of the Sequence, or
and purpose to the melody, is of great importance. See par. ijc; and
par. 216.
Further, a good harmonic result must also be achieved, and for that
reason the fundamental principles of chord-succession (detailed in
par. 18, to which reference should be made) must be respected. Wide
leaps, particularly, are to be tested chiefly with reference to these
principles.
Exercise 2. ESSENTIAL TONES. 21
It is very difficult to justify a wide leap in both parts at the same

time, excepting during chord-repetitions.
The two parts should be led, generally, in opposite directions, though
by no means necessarily. One part may, at almost any time, remain
upon the same tone (reiteration, par. 8) while the other part progresses.
See par. i-jf.
EXERCISE 2.
To each of the following given melodies a second part is to be added, according

to the rules of par. 15. The two parts are to be essentially similar in rhythm, i.e., a
tone in the added part for each tone of the given part ; with an occasional exception,
as indicated. Every tone, throughout, is to be regarded as essential.
No modulations are to be made.
Each melody is to be manipulated twice first as upper part, where it is written,
;
and then, transferred to a lower octave, as lower part. The respective added parts
must differ from each other.
One staff, or two staves, may be used if two, the customary G-clef and F-clef.
;
(Should the student chance to be familiar with any of the C-clefs, he may use them
also if not, their use should be deferred.
; It is unwise to add to the already suffi-
ciently formidable difficulties of the polyphonic style, the difficulty of learning these
unfamiliar clefs. After the former have been fully mastered, the student can quickly
learn as much about the C-clefs as their comparatively limited uses in modern
composition — Instrumentation — call for.)
*2 ) *
3)
i E: ±F± -o—
iI
71
*i)
r
~ s- * * » -s- XT tk.
*2)
mI -f?
S:3 ¥g
l*-f^
BJgSigil
4.
IIE* -f -•=±4.
tdE^SÊd
I
-w
i -r~-
dt=£i
£3ib±=i
i^M E^
24 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 16
^kmiff^^m^^s^m
IK
8.
**t
I K-^SfF
*2>
^ -r—»-w m
-l^» —r
r
#^
il ES pi
*i) The two parts need not begin together; if the given melody begins on the
accent, the added part may rest one beat and vice versa, as indicated in most of the
;
melodies.
*2) Longer tones in the given part may be accompanied by two tones (even
beats) in the added part and, occasionally, two tones of the given part by one in the
;
added part.
*3) Close upon the Tonic-octave, or unison.

*4) Do not neglect par. 1 5^-
Unessential Tones.
16. The may constitute any interval, harmonious
unessential tones
or dissonant. But every exceptional interval (not enumerated in the
preceding paragraph) must appear as obvious modification of an unobjec-
tionable one, — as transient (passing) note, neighboring-note, or sus-
pension and must be employed in such a manner as to confirm the
;
distinction between unessential and essential tones. That is, the objec-
tionable interval must be followed immediately, or very soon, by one or
another of the perfectly good intervals ; thus, 4-3-, or 4-6, or 4-5-6
possibly 4-2-6, or 4-2-3 ; but not 4-2-5-7, or any similar succession.
For example
etc.
••*/
78
Pav. 16. UNESSENTIAL TONES. 25
Concisely stated: some good

must "govern" the ordinary
interval (par. 15)
beat, or half-beat, of moderate duration If, for any reason,
(par. 14, last clauses).
an exceptional interval governs the beat, the effect will be poor. No reasonable
interval-association is impossible, but all exceptional intervals must be palpably
unessential, and less prominent than the good ones. The operation of this principle
may be tested in the examples which follow, — or in any models of good counterpoint
in standard literature.
Further, of the two tones which form an objectionable interval, that

one which is obviously non-harmonic (foreign to the chord) should gen-
erally enter without leap, though this is not strictly necessary (Exs. 12,
32) ; but it must progress conjunctly (stepwise) ; excepting the two leaps
of a 3rd shown in Ex. 90 (" double-appoggiatura ") and Ex. 90 (unre-
); and the
solved upper neighboring-note " ornamental resolutions of ''
•the suspension, Exs. 10, 11.

-
Wrong.
Ex.
42 -EME I
1.
=Jz
=
gâ= ^H-rJ— ^y 1
Passing-notes. (+)
i
. T^M ^f r
^=P=? r u Pf
2. Neighboring-notes. (O) Wrong. 3. Suspensions.
WW
4. Per missib le.
I"! °r-2
*=£- etc.
Ill
+?
r I
I
a <o o) e
S-o- s.
1 v IV
But an unessential tone that might be regarded as harmonic, as

a part of the momentary chord, may leap along that chord-line
without objection ; or may make any reasonable leap even during a
change of chord.
Ex.
43.
iWWPpa rI- VI— I IV
Review par. 3a, and par. 4a and b.
26 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. . dX. 16.
For general illustration (unessential tones in parenthesis)
2. (Ex. 38-2.)
1. (Ex. 38-1.) Bach.
IN
3 3 U)6 (5) 3 3 (4) 6 («) 3 (2) 3 (4) 6 (5 4) 6 (7) 8 6 (5 4)
^mmmmmm Bach. 3. (Ex. 38-3.)
% 8 (7) 6 (5) P (5 4) 3
a (5 4) 3 (4 5) 3 (2) 1 4augm.
6 (7) 8 (7) 6 (5) 6 6 (5 4) 3 3 6
4. _«_ .«. Bach.

-)=*-
we=i^=5; .— SIB
i 3±E --C:
1
Bach.
3853 8653
r* IPB
6. 1 |
~ 1
,
1
1 __^____ Bach.
q^fcj'
<^ S
E±^
38 6DS3
t±±i t±== ^3
5-
r
a
*~» .
Par. 17. UNESSENTIAL TONES. 27
7. Bach.
_1
=1 fe: ~s— ^ —^»J=
—a~
gjl IE -• (2 P^»-
=£^ 3
a+ e 6
8. Bach. 9. Bach.
^3 S^
itnrcaj
afc.**
5
r-
a a
4+
IO. Beethoven. 11.
1— Fun 1
«M B =£
?
:
•-•*
»— •-F-'-r-
F -0- F ^y ci 3 5
f
'
I i
3 5 6 . I S 8 6
3 I
I
I
3 3 8
Bach.
Si
17a. The interval most to be shunned, between two essential (or
even semi-essential) tones, is the perfect 4th. It is tolerated, as a rule,
only between strictly unessential, and brief, tones.
rir r' r f >-

2. Bach.
*i) These 4ths, though occupying the accented fractions, are all distinctly
unessential.
*2) Here the perfect 4th appears, each time, to govern the beat ; but relief
(apparently sufficient) is afforded by the consonant interval which accompanies it,

*3) The perfect 4th is best justified by constituting a brief tonic-6-4 chord (I2).
This is obviously the case here, and at the first 4th in No. 2.
b. Each part must progress in a strictly correct melodious manner

(see par. i$d). In perfectly good 2-part polyphony it must be entirely
feasible to dissociate the parts and obtain a perfectly good and intelligible
melodic result in each alone. So important is this principle, that it
sometimes overpowers the otherwise rigorous rules of part-association

(detailed in par. 15, 16, etc.). That is to say, if each one of two asso-
ciated parts pursues a definite and obviously justifiable melodic purpose,
they may be conducted with a certain degree of indifference to their con-
trapuntal details. In the conscious fulfilment of a broader melodic
aim, the mind of the hearer may waive the demands of euphony to a
certain (limited') extent. (Compare par. 13*.) For example
Allegro. Bach.
Ex.
46. etc.
ign^îî N.B. 9
bV r
The lower of these two parts has the original Motive (par. 38a) ; the upper one
has, simultaneously, the same Motive in "contrary motion" (par. 29a); — each,
therefore, moves according to manifest " thematic authority."
c. For this very reason, it is eminently desirable that each part (but
especially the more rapid part, in protracted uniform rhythm) should
exhibit well-defined and regular formation, i.e., should be compounded
of more or less lengthy and regularly recurring symmetrical figures, that
impart recognizable design to the tone-succession, and prevent it from

being a shapeless, rambling, unintelligible, and apparently aimless^
melodic line.
This emphasizes the importance of the Sequence, without which truly

good and intelligible polyphony can scarcely be imagined. But it refers
also to all othermeans by which the evidence of clear form and broader
melodic design may be established, and which are quite as necessary
as the sequence, —
especially at those places where the sequence itself
threatens to become tiresome from overuse. The beginner should
never employ, at a time, more than three (four ?) sequences of a figure
(unless the figure be a very brief one). For example
iEffi i=i
Ex.
47. *.
f. ...^«. gf _ . f f- -
;-~S:. :trP=
9Wff=EJ *—
N.B. N.B.
Bach.
i^î^Si^
^=P:
^5
e^ ;S3î N.B>
feH" N.B.
i
The succession of figures in the lower part forms a thoroughly intelligible and
coherent melodic line ; but the groups differ from exact Sequence just sufficiently to
avoid monotony. See also Exs. 88, 92.
d. As stated in par. \$b and c, it is a part of the limitation of the

secondary intervals, that they can only appear singly, not in succes- —
sion. Thus, perfect octaves cannot appear in immediate succession
under any circumstances ; and even when separated by one tone, they
are quite as objectionable as immediate octaves, if the intermediate tone
is distinctly unessential:
Wrong._
But an " oblique " succession of perfect octaves is generally per-

missible, if one of the tones of the octave itself is obviously unessential
or better, if it is evident that the two parts maintain their respective
melodic independence :
Bach.
1 I I I
Ji
Ex.
49.
f min. I
« ^p -J- '- -i- I.
Bach. Bach.
A succession of perfect 5ths is not permitted between essential tones,

unless one semi-essential tone, or at least two unessential tones, inter-
vene. When each 5th embraces an unessential tone, or when one of
the tones of the second 5th alone is plainly unessential, the succession
is not objectionable. Thus
Bach.
J* Bach.
7 <* 5
j-tz-j^Tj I *}
SOa.P^
&=r-
&=5
m f1 I
gH I, IV Ic f VI
CI 3 V7 Ix el
A wide leap to or from a tone that is obviously the Fifth of the

momentary chord, must be made with caution. It is generally bad
when the chord-fifth forms the interval of a perfect 5th with the lower
part (and is taken by wide leap, — especially parallel with the other
part). But is harmless
(1) During chord-repetition and ;
(2) When the chord is so inverted that the interval of a perfect 5th
disappears
1. (Good.) Bach.
Ex.
50.
i^=
A-
X
-+* ah
SB3^^ 3t±3t I
=— -I
F I-
??? Good.
5
I I I P
I
I
C V7 C V7 I1
*. The direct succession of any other secondary intervals (i.e.,
parallel 7ths, 2nds, 4ths, etc.) is permissible only when at least one of
the tones involved is distinctly unessential, and very brief. Thus
Bach. 2. Bach.
N.B,
7 (7) g
6 7 ( 71 6
Ex.
51.
tirrrf u£*a'f f^fr

Bach.
° N.B. !
§3fH 1
b I f# VI
*V I- -ell •V
* Par. 4a, (1).
f. Partly because of the risk of such disagreeable successions as

those involved by parallel movement of the two parts ; and partly
because such parallel conduct deprives both parts of a certain degree
of their respective melodic individuality ; it appears desirable to lead
the parts in contrary directions, as a very general, though by no" means
binding, rule. Illustrations of wholly or largely opposite motion (at

the points where both parts move) are found in Ex. 42-1 ; Ex. 44-2 ;
44-4 ;
44-6 ; Ex. 46 ;
— of almost totally parallel motion, in Ex. 44-3 ;
— of largely parallel motion, in Ex. 38-2 ; 44-7.
For illustrations of unusually protracted parallel motion, see Bach, 2-voice Inven-
tion, No. 8, meas. 5, 6 2-voice Invention, No. 14, meas. 14-16. See, also, 2-voice
;
Invention, No. 9, meas. 1, 2, 4 (contrary), meas. 3 (parallel).
Harmonic Influence.
18. Strict observance of the above detailed rules must lead to a
thoroughly acceptable musical result ; but inasmuch as these details
themselves are very largely dictated by the principles of harmony and
correct chord-progression (without which no style of music can be fault-
lessly constructed), it follows that constant regard of fundamental har-
monic laws must facilitate the application of the detailed contrapuntal
rules. As already stated (par. n), the influence of the original har-
monic principles is chiefly exhibited wherever disjunct movement is
employed but it is never absent, and is the remote power which directs
;
even conjunct movements. The laws of harmonic (chord) succession

may be summarized as follows
I. Diatonic (within one key).
a. Tonic chords (I or VI) can progress into any other chord of

the same key, or of a different key (usually related by adjacent signa-
ture).
b. Dominant chords (V-V 7-V9- V-V

the indicating incomplete7 9
,
forms *) pass, legitimately, into Tonic chords. Other progressions are,

however, possible, through the agency of Inversion (i.e., into inverted
forms of the otherwise inaccessible chords).
c. Second-dominant, or sub-dominant chords (the II-IV-II 7-
IV **) pass, naturally, into Dominant chords. But their progression
into Tonic chords is entirely permissible ; best, however, into inverted
forms of the latter.
d. Subordinate Triads (II, VI, III,) cannot progress into their respective prin-
cipal Triads (IV-I-V) except by inverting the latter.
c. The III passes legitimately into the IV or VI ; into other chords rarely,
and only upon inversion, as above.
* Triad and 7th-chord on the Leading-tone. See the Author's " Mat. of Mus. Corop.," par. 187
par. 198.
** Idem, par. 206, 407.
Par. 18. HARMONIC INFLUENCE. 33
f. Any chord may be repeated within the same rhythmic group,

but, as a rule, not into a unit which is more accented than that upon
which the chord began. This rule, however, is also moderated some-
what by inversion, i.e., change of bass tone at the accent.
II. Chromatic.
g. If the chromatic inflection is employed, any reasonable chord-

succession is feasible, subject to par. 2a, and b.
The most vital of these rules are a, b, and c, — particularly b.
For illustration
^SS
*k»
l» • (i-
m 5 (8) (3) 3 (4 2) 3 (8)

Ex.
*3)
52. (7) 6 (4) 6 6 (8)
—— —
J±eE|=^^gEi *5 F-lbi ! i !
r—
CI- ,V 7 - I V- -IV X V-
Bach.
* -!* •-
=e=rf p—
3 (6) 6 (5-) 3 (5) 3 (S)
H 1
3 .
i
(a)
.i i
3
.
(5-) 3
(a) 6 (5)
1 if
(II) *4)
1
VI- *V-
fLp. Bach.
6 (6) a (8X4) 3 3
3 -
u * 6) a (5-) 4+6 3 3 7, 5 (6) 4+ <S> 6 BACH.
J;
i 53fc ;•—
1
a#V 7 I-
ff -C#II 7
I
(I)
I
V7
l
"Hlfr
«JM
Bach.
3 3 _ _ 3
"
j-
*i) See par. 4a, (1). — *2.) . See par. 10.

•3) The effect of this semi-essential perfect 4th is moderated by the embellish-
ing tone e (par. 170).
*4) The ear places the simplest and best construction upon every harmonic
effect ; therefore this is more likely to sound like (and to be) a Dominant chord, than
the subordinate II.
*5) Comp. note *4). In this whole example the harmonic formations are very
clear. See also par, 30.
*6) The majority of these 8th-notes are essential.

*7) *8)There are here two striking illustrations of the rule given in par. 17*.
The progression of the upper part, at note *7), is not interrupted, though it collides
quite harshly with the lower part at the accent. Compare par. 7. The still harsher
collision at note *8) is justified by the sequential formation of the lower part. Comp.
par. 13*.
Par. 18. HARMomC WFLUENCR. 35
*9) The skip of an augmented 2nd" is justified by chord-repetition and straight-

forward part-progression (par. 4<r). *io) Comp. note *y). —
See also Ex. 51-3 (harmonic analysis).
h. In the conduct of the lowermost part, the treatment of the chord

5th (as obvious 6-4 chord) should be guarded. The established rules
apply here also
1. Avoid leaping either to or from a bass tone that is obviously the
5th of the momentary chord, always excepting during chord-repetition.
(Comp. Ex. 50, B.)
2. Avoid a succession of 6-4 chords. These are always betrayed by
parallel fourths between the upper and lowermost parts, when the 4ths
are both essential. (Comp. par. 17^.)
3. Further, it is unwise to place any 6-4 chord in a very conspicu-
ous position ; hence, it should not appear as very first, or as last, chord
of a sentence.
See also par. 62, where these rules are more exhaustively illustrated.
EXERCISE 3.
To each of the following melodies a second part is to be added, according to

paragraphs t6, 17, and
and the following directions:
18,
The rhythm of the added part is to be more active than that of the given part,
so that two, or three, or four tones accompany each beat of the latter, uniformly.
Each melody to be manipulated twice, as in the preceding Exercise, adding upper
and lower part and each melody is to be counterpointed throughout in a uniform
;
rhythm of two, three, or four notes to each beat, in the following order
(1) Adding lower part, 2 notes to each beat;
(2) upper
(3) lower
(4) upper
(5) lower
(6) upper
It will be well to use two staves (G and F clefs). The added part need not be
limited in. compass, but it should not diverge an unreasonable distance from the
given one ; and, as a rule, the parts should not cross.
No modulations (changes of key) are to be made in this exercise.
Rests may be used, sparingly ; as a rule, only at the beginning of an occasional
accented beat. The added part always begins with a rest, as indicated.
Review the directions given in Exercise 2 ; and refer constantly to the rules of
pars. 16, 17, 18, especially the note following Ex. 41; par. 17 b; 17 c; 17// 18*;
\%f g. See also Ex. 8 ; Exs. 9 A
and B Exs. 5 and 17 Exs. 24 and 25
; ; ; par. 7 ;
par. 8; par. 8 b. And review the " Summary," par. 13; par. 21 b.
36 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Exercise ;
Models: (Melody No. i.) Seq.
ppaa^y ftt
iB
I
SP^
EEfTi
:^^r{^^^^fe-rf=g:g-^g(»--p^r---^£l
^BE 1 =~
Ex. 9A.
— p-
i
-•
1 i
-—H-l— I
r f-»- j _ #"•- -P-l— I— -I— I—f-
Par. 10.
Ex.31.
Given Melodies.
1.
fULiU^BJ^j
iI? T— fc
II
^ *l)
^*2) 1
&» -as)
=t=b
«»-
g» g-
~S* -5--
I
^m
3. (Either.)
IS
_^^ t=p: i
-#-
rr
*=t i
Par. 12a. *i)
&m
5. *3) 6.
lti=* it :t^^
1
t
P§»ii§
Exercise 3 TIES. 37
^skms=km^mm i
-&
isbÊd
fggjj -z)-
8.
^g^d^Ê^j^yîia
*i) When the added part has three notes, this figure becomes f J or f H*
(see Exercise 6, note *3).
*2) The added melody may end simultaneously with the given part, but it is
far better to carry it along, as here, up to the next beat. The final tone must be the
Tonic.
*3) When used as lower part, this first tone will be the Root of the Dominant
chord.
EXERCISE 4.
To each of the given melodies of Exercise 3 a. second part is to be added, as

before, in uniform rhythms of two, three, or four notes to each beat, but introdu- —
cing a tie, from the last note of one group (beat) to the first note of the next, as
shown in the subjoined illustrations.
Review, very thoroughly, par. 9, especially/; and observe the following specific
rules for the treatment of the tie

Rule A. The tie may be applied to any of the preceding (uniform) species of
counterpoint with one, two, or three notes to a beat, and results in a faultless synco-
pation of the same, representing, in each case, the next higher grade of rhythmic
motion ; i.e., the original formation of one note to each beat becomes one of two
notes, two notes become three, and three become four. No further serious condi-
tion is involved than that the original formation be uniform rhythm, and faultless.
Thus :
Model A.
1. (One tone to a beat.) (Rhythm of 2.)
(Two tones.) (Rhythm of 3.)
4-
i-==x
-I-
*=& becomes
I l^fTJ 35 r^
iT'r r ~D" r t
UJ ** I—i—!_ *<^,i :
-•
|
u-i wjj-^^frl
* The tie must be omitted here, for an obvious reason,
38 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Exercise 4.
"^ 3. (Three tones.)
(Rhythm of 4.)
-
£=
J
ifptw becomes J
4. (Syncopated form of No. 1.)
Par. 9/-1. 1.
Rule B. A
far more comprehensive and fruitful application of the tie is gov-
erned by the following directions, to which, for that reason, preference should be
given:
(1) The last note of each group (that from which the tie is made) should, as a
general rale, constitute one of the goodinteruals, defined in par. 15 as valid for the
essential tones, — especially par. 15, a and b.
(2) The first note of the next group (that which is tied over from the preced-
ing group) may be any interval, but should be, ifpossible, a dissonant one, representing
a good suspension. If this is the case, it is not so necessary that the preceding inter-
val be a faultless one (par. 15).
(3) If the first note of the group be, thus, a dissonant interval, its movement is
governed by the rules of par. g/; the best progression is the stepwise resolution, up-
ward or downward (most frequently the latter) into one of the " good " intervals «. ;
repetition of the tone, however, before this resolution, is very common and invariably
permissible. For example
Model B. (4138
(413 a (7)6 3 (716S
2
W
•^ . 1
,-^\ J L ^J^tTQ5- ^ -#- -* -=-
r
6 (5)3 (B)3 6(4) (2)8 7 (4)3
. f
(7) 6 6- 8 (7) 6 (7) 6
ifitWi
f^~r
etc. or
Exercise 4. TIES. 39
I
1 I
•—*' 3££
1 etc.
r
or:
ip 33 Par. 4a— 2.
-• — •
\
3=;
~S t± =±= ±i 1
—*a=fei
T
etc.
r r r >
5.
=»t=i
I
^ TL-0-M-*-
=lf"F ^^S^^SSH^
-•- f
1
etc.
W^W** ^ ^
IW 53
Harsh.
5 1 etc.
mmm
6. Faulty (Ex. 48, 49).
8 8
-4
M m •-
*
f=? 3 1 W -•- -•- s- -m-
1
r
(4) It is generally very undesirable to reverse the rule of clauses 1 and 2 above
namely, to tie a poor interval over into a good one
I
«j -- I.
f? 1
T
1 etc.
Note. —
In some of the solutions in J measure the tie may be omitted at the
second and third beats, and used at the bar only in ± measure, it may be omitted at
;
the unaccented (2nd and 4th) beats, or, occasionally, be used at the bar only. Such
omissions should, however, be made uniformly throughout.
The must be omitted, further, at longer, tones in the given melody,
tie for —
and 8, at the second beat of each half-note.
instance, in melodies Nos. 6
Each melody may be manipulated in the six different ways specified in Exercise 3.
Modulation.
19. The rules of harmonic progression, given above, also govern the
movements of the parts in modulation, i.e., in passing from one key
into another.
a. It is always safe, generally necessary, to close each key upon
some form of its Tonic harmony (I or VI) to pass from this into some ;
Dominant or Second-dominant chord of the desired key, and from this

into its Tonic harmony. Comp. par. 180, and \%b and c. This modu-
latory formula is the most common and reliable, whether effected exclu-
sively by diatonic successions, or involving a chromatic inflection (see
par. 19^). It is. least binding for modulation into the Relative key (i.e.,
the key with the same signature) and, of course, it ;

is subject to numer-
ous modifications, especially upon the grounds of par. ijl>, — uncon-
strained melodious conduct of the individual parts. For example :
Bach.
I
W ~-T=t i
Ex. Following
-Mod.- etc.
53. Ex. 52 — 1
*i)
§HE ^1
II
2. Bach.
I
Hj-f=f^£
:S
Following
Ex. 52-2 :^
r-
Mod
, 2)
-*-•-
?=*:
=t=p
SEFfE££
HP
PS
SE
dl FII- •V-
p^l
*i) From a Tonic chord of the first key into a Dominant chord of the desired
(next-related) one.
*2) From a Tonic chord of old key, into a Second-dominant, and then Domi-
nant chord of new key.
Par. 19b. MODULATION. 41
Bach.
MWm
3.
m ^gilpis^
. Mod.
P^^J^^^^^^P^
DI GV- -Vlbll V
-I
1
1-
VI V
r-3 W Bach.
ft3=jt#- I
Mod. Mod._
•4) *5)
ggiEE EEfcEE^BNJ
c I f V I c IV V-
*3) From the VI (subordinate Tonic chord), into Second-dominant and Domi-
nant chord.
*4) Chromatic inflection in Bass.
*5) The/f isa raised fourth scale-step only, —
not the index of a Modulation;
it is evident that no other key than c-minor is present.
b. The principal exception to this fundamental rule of modulation

is occasioned by the chromatic inflection ; this melodic device, as stated
in par. \Zg, if properly applied (par. 2a, b), renders every rational har-
monious succession possible and acceptable.
For illustration :
1. Bach.
Ex.
isiiiSiprpieîH
Mod.. _Mod._
54.
*' *i)
L' -
*2)
gi-v F(I) V-
42 APrLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 19c.
Bach.
pe sa #I
. Mod.
Ex. 41-4.
c I IV CI- c I V
1
3. Bach.
eftfr
Par. igc. MODULATION. 43
i ^ 2. *2)
N.B.
-•-£—*-•-
§=Pf
P3
32 *=*
N.B.
rj + Tr-
I
(dl)
C II- -d VI- V- -G V 7
Bach.
4.
si Bach.
*£
m±
£=F=f= * •
=P=gi=p=
l==r s 1
S
I 9^§=^
c i-
£--
(CI)
-goV 9 -
S
-4=
Bach.
=*=¥
rf=P=
%££^£g=£=2=t iil
k=Ffc=f=P
£8PE3EjeS
gv-
A
-ii-
--
a^mi
(gf)
-c II 7 -
fcJ:
-V7-
£*-
44 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. igc.
Bach.
(AVI)
A I V ell-I
*i) By inserting the sharp, the expected c (as part of the expected I of C major)
becomes and the modulatory current is deftly turned from C into d minor. In
<rf,
the following measure the expected V of d minor is averted by changing the acci-
dental before c from t to —
*2) 'R-Jlat is substituted for the expected h-nalural. In
11.
-
the next measure a sharp is substituted for the natural before/ In each case, the .
expected chord, which would have confirmed the natural harmonic succession, Is
indicated in brackets. —
*3) Gil is substituted for gi *4) Eo is substituted for eS.
— *5) The S, substituted for the expected % before this prominent f, is an almost
unwelcome surprise. —
*6) This unexpected c-natural leads to the unique mod.
into F major. See, further, Ex. 32, third beat ; A instead of the expected J\ — Ex.
57, note *6).
J*-
How peculiarly prolific and potent this seductive little device may
prove to be when skilfully employed, and how perfectly natural and
justifiable its operations may be when prudently conducted, is shown by
the following test, in which, it is true, the best possible conditions are
provided by the sequential formations (comp. par. 13/)
56.
1.
e:
=3=
m
Original form without Modulation
i^=S
:
3—p
« |etc
(iTT)
C I II VI IV 1 VI 11
Modified by Substitutions (accidentals) :
.2.
i t^r
**
i^s («)
(»
(G) is?
Par. igd. MODULATION. 45
i m
<*) (0)
$=x=z
w^=mî 3=*
* 1
(AV)
DV-
or, if
C3—
—« — —
i —
the most extreme treatment be justified or demanded:
—
— (b) (b)*i)
ill
(b) (bb)
p- -1— — .
— — —^—
3 i
1
i
1
l i
f—f- — —tj—^zr^:
r
I f
&
r t-
and :
—ft —3 . — 1
1 — 1
,
11 I I I
.
(ft
*~x«t 1
*2)
*i) The accidentals suggested in the brackets above are doubtless too " ex-
treme " though they might, perhaps, be justly adopted in slower movement.
; *2) —
The comparison of these two widely different terminations of one and the same
series of letters, with the same starting-point, proves that any modulatory design may
be speedily realized by judicious application of this principle of "substitution."
Still, as with all other somewhat irregular fac:o:s of musical texture, its best results
are emphasized with peculiar effectiveness by moderation. A very striking, almost
example of substitution occurs in Bach, Well-tempered Clavichord, Vol. I,
startling,
Fugue 20 (a minor), measure 14, beat 3, gj in tenor, which abruptly follows gtl in the
soprano. This change is due to the modulatory design as a whole.
d. Finally, any reasonable irregularity with regard to the method of

modulation, or the choice of key, is justified at a Cadence, or at any
obvious point of separation between members of the structural design
(i.e., between Sections, Phrases, Motives or Figures ; the latter, especi-
ally, when sequential in arrangement compare par. ; 13/). For illustra-
tion :
_ Cad. Bach.
e=s=H*
Ex..
57.
Bt-aE s
-I
g II- -v
46 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. igd.
m
^
EJpE
Cad.
M
Bach.
ife
•#*•- *
bl-
Se
-V-
f^f^r-^
-I aV 7-
^ i
Bach.
££ 'im^^m^ ^^^mî
Cadence *3) etc.
PS%a ¥
'until
B-
ftt-
-V
^
I- -s#i
1
m
Bach.
iteE *—•-
*4)
£jr£fl
»&
Cad.
j' 3-
£
-.•-«»-#-
±#
bV-
i
^-fs
VI- -Vffll-
:^t i
Bach.
I AV 7 (I)bV VI
Par. 20. MODULATION. 47
Bach.
gSjgjS=gfeggi^
1
1
atj *LlfEFLEr£ir ^
*7)
tS*
V VI Bt»V 7 1- cV 7 I
*i) The irregularity here consists in passing immediately from a minor into g
minor (non-related keys), at —
i.e., after —
the cadence. *2) Similar, —
from b —
minor into a minor. In each of these cases, however, the chords employed accord
with the rule (par. 190). —
*3) Here the keys are related, but the modulatory pro-
cess is irregular —
from I into I. —
*4) Similar (from V of theold key into I of the
new). — *s) This extraordinary series of modulations is justified by the sequential
formation of the lower part. The unessential intervals are in brackets. The A in
Soprano is the minor gth (lowered 6th scale-step) of E. — *6) The at in Bass is
substituted for the expected afl (par. igc). — *j)

Here the chromatic successions
are made in an irregular manner, involving the Cross-relation. They are rectified by
the Sequences.
20. The notation of the minor scale depends chiefly upon the har-
mony, and is subject to the following rules :
a. The harmonic form (lowered 6th step and legitimate leading-

tone) is rarely used, though possible during the Dominant harmony. —
See Ex. 52, Note *g). —
b. The melodic forms, with raised 6th scale-step in ascending and
lowered 7th step in descending, are used during Tonic harmonies.
Thus
Bach.
Ex. s
&gI&=^ 35b
N.B. N.B.
mm£
&^
etc.
58.
^-Fu-ft— L Z —L—L :Mf=£=tt=

t^r
M fe
cl- IV 7
(An illustration in three-part counterpoint is given, because of the superior dis-
tinctness of the harmony.)

48 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 20c.
c. The "ascending" form (with raised 6th step) is used in prefer-

ence to the harmonic form, in descending also, when the harmony is
Dominant ; this is because of the proper leading-tone (7th scale-step),

which is characteristic of the Dominant harmony, and not to be altered.
Thus:
Bach.
e:
fc 3=£ ^^ mi i===t
x
Ex.
69.
I* (Ex. 58 cont.) N.B.
*i)
I ftr=£ 1
c IV 7 -
-V 7-
Bach.
-k
im
¥^ _ E
-1 1
and:
r N.B. and: N.B.
11 *,i * -•- .
.
.
*i) The aft is used, instead of do, because of the 69 which is indispensable in the
Dominant harmony.
*2 ) Here dS is used in Bass, in descending, although it clashes very harshly

with the d\> in the Soprano. —*3) The dp in Bass illustrates the force of the rule in
par. \"]b. It is even doubtful that this d> is an essential tone, though it indicates
the Tonic chord {expected at this accent) quite forcibly, and thus imparts the appear-
ance of suspension-harmony to the upper tones. At all events, whether essential or
not, the do is " picked up " again at the next accented unit (4th beat) and disposed
of in conjunct movement ; and, further, the whole i6th-note passage is sequential.
Par. 2od. MODULATION. 49
d. Inversely, the " descending " form (with lowered 7th scale-step)
may be used in ascending also, when the harmony is Sub- (or Second-}
Dominant; or when it is Tonic, immediately followed by Subdomi-
nant. This, however, is far rarer than the foregoing.
For illustration :
N.B. Bach.
1.
bfi3
TJ-F
ESzzli
*i)
iN^Stf m
M
lîsSSE^^Ki^ f- i
c V 9- -VI- IV- V7
2. N.B. Bach.
ri=jc :tti
a I -V 7 -
IV-
*i) In both of these cases the notation is influenced by the coming Subdomi-
nant harmony. See par. 20^.
e. These exceptional regulations will be seen to corroborate the
general rule that the notation of all passing-notes usually conforms to the
scale represented by the chord upon the momentary beat, — or by the chord
upon the next-following beat (if near enough to be affected by the latter
rather than by its own beat).
Illustrations are very numerous, in classic writings, of this rational principle of

defining the notation of all passing-notes which fall within the limits of a certain
chord, as if that chord were, for the time being, a " Tonic " chord. Apparently, it is
most commonly the coming chord that exercises this dominating power. Exceptions
are found, where the influence of the momentary chord is weighty enough to over-
power that of the coming one and, further, at cadences and other points of separa-
;
tion (alluded to in par. 19^), where abrupt effects are desired.

So APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 2oe.
General illustrations :
l. Mozart.
Ex.
M^£.& Allegro.
N.B.
-3 V R/
Pf 1
61.
^ £4-
F I-
SI
S3
-IV-
_T"*N.B
3Efc^! N.B.
FV dV-
3.
13E
i d min.
bb min.
(Desc.)
( Asc.)
jffcfr M* ip=
*f^g SE53
__^_____
=t ^¥=5=
d I- F IVt>-
Brahms.
=£
-£=t?i
^ C maj.
C maj. (Lowered 6th C maj.
scale-step.)
fe
^^m
v- -C V 9 l7-
*i) There is scarcely sufficient proof that a genuine, decisive modulation from
F into & is here being made ; the distinctive tones («b and «lt) are so unessential in
effect, that they do not appear to cancel the prevalent /?-major impression. The
Par. 2of. MODULATION. Si
m, and ei, near the end of each measure, are chosen to blend with the scale-quality
of the coming chord. The «b on the second beat of the measure conforms to the
momentary chord.
whole measure is, more than likely, the Tonic harmony of F ; the
*2) This
and c are so inflected as to blend with the coming aT-minor chord but * and
letters * ;
would sound quite as well, as far as that measure alone is concerned, or if the
<rfl
key remained unchanged.
*3) A modulation takes place at this point, from d minor into F major,
through the altered IV of the latter (with db, the lowered 6th scale-step) ; this chord
representing the Tonic harmony of b b minor, the passing-notes follow the line of
that scale, in descending succession. The analysis of actual key-conditions is noted
below the brace ; that of the scale-conditions governing each group of passing-
notes, is given between the staves.
f. The same rule applies also to the upper one of the two neighbor-
ing-notes which attend each chord-interval. The notation of the lower
neighbor may either correspond, likewise, to the momentary scale, or it
may be a half-step (minor second) below its principal tone ; the former
notation is generally chosen in stately, more serious polyphony; the
latter in lighter, more lively, music. For example :
Bach.
*i)
te =i^F= *m
Ex. < (e minor)
62.
iifpE '
i
'
i
DVF- ir
*6)
gpEESjpgg^ Jfl
V
a
*
—
4)
. l
I
^ —S^
Pi 5H—
IV
^ ill —^^^>H
i
ell
' '
V
r i
*i) The chord upon this beat is manifestly a II (of D major), but, represent-
ing e minor, the upper neighbor within its radius is written c B. — *2 ) All of these
lower neighbors (marked o) confirm the scale (D major). — *3) The lower neighbor
is here persistently the kalf-step, despite the key, and the cb above. — *4) This
lower neighbor confirms the scale, — as is the case with nearly all the neighboring-
notes in the entire composition (W.- 1. CI., Vol. II, Prelude 2 — which see ). —* 5)
Lower neighbor the half-step, but evidently influenced by the coming chord (key).
*6) The lower neighbor of the Leading-tone (7th step) is almost always a whole-step.
Summary.
21a. In two-part Polyphony, the intervals of the 3rd and 6th pre-
vail, and govern the majority of simultaneous essential tones.
The perfect 8th and 5th, —
diminished 5th and 7th, augmented —
4th and 2nd, — govern occasional essential tones, when they represent
rational harmonies.
All positively objectionable intervals must be the obvious modification
of some permissible interval (defined by the harmony).

b. Each part must be so conducted as to constitute, by itself, a.
perfect, interesting, and well-formulated melody, independent of its
fellow-part. In order to verify this, the student must play or sing his
added part alone, after each melodic task is completed.
Further, the parts are conducted, generally, in opposite directions.
c. The concerted operations of the two parts must be in manifest

keeping with the laws of harmonic (chord-) progression, and modula-
tion.
Principal exception : par. 18/-.
d. Smooth and effective modulatory inflections (transient or defi-

nite) may be made by the substitution of an inflected tone (by an unex-
pected accidental) for the expected scale-tone, at the appropriate time
and place.
Exercise 5. MODULATION. 53
e. Thenotation of passing-notes, within a certain narrow harmonic

range, denned upon the assumption that the chord which governs
is
that range is temporarily the representative of the corresponding key

(usually as Tonic chord), irrespective of its actual name in the prevail-
ing tonaHty.
f. Sequential (or generally symmetrical) formations justify any not

unreasonable dissonance, irregularity of melody, harmonic succession,
or modulation.
EXERCISE 5.
A. Analyze the harmony and the notation of Bach, Well-tempered CI., Vol. I,
Prelude 10 (e minor).
B. Fill out the Bass part of the following phrase, in scale-runs of 32nd-
notes, as on the first (given) beat ; observing the rules of Notation given in par. 20
(particularly 2oe) ; refer to par. 21.?.
iÊk m
1 fc*
W=f=^ ?
E^F
s ¥
mw ^1=^
m * --w- j&i
aî^gî m -S *»F —•- i

54 APPLIED COUNTEKPOIiXT. Exercise 5.
C. Manipulate the following phrase according to the principle of Substitution

expounded in par. 19c (particularly Ex. 56). Any signature may be chosen for the
beginning and the introduction or substitution of modulating accidentals, in the
;
course, is to be freely practised. The Cadence is to be completed, each time, upon

the 3rd beat of the last measure, with the Tonic harmony of the appropriate key
m^ lîM&î^
rx
•-* :etc:
(May be done at the pfte.) ÎSWr

D. Add a second part to each of the following melodies, with reference to pars.
1g and 20, and in the manner described in Exercise 3, namely each melody to be :
used alternately as upper and lower part, and the added part to be in a uniform
rhythm of either 2, 3 or 4 notes to each beat, successively. A few experiments may
be made with ties (syncopation), as showji in Exercise 4. Refer to par. 21, 6, <., d,f.
Jt =i=?c
fef
tft*
0...
£?¥
t=t=t
Model.
(Mel. No. 1.)
£ =t= V fe
LAli
±±i
i==F=t
^
w%tst
3 =^
i EE 3t ±=t&
-g} L&
fo
pE ^^mm^=f illi
isti
ffisre (SZ
\t=5=(:
•-
I
1. *i)
SB
*2)
^fefe^^^^fey
Eli
r etc.
Exercise 5. MODULATION. 55
2.
^g^P-^-^f^îi^î
etc.
E^fefe^
i m S-fP- * l^^^^lii
5.
trHH !
— •-
3t^ 1
6.
^2^3*E^^lfel£gEp|^y
7.
• — *-
I 8.
ite
i^spp^îiB
pi^g^gE^
±3
=jia=sggfg^p
*i) Scan the melody first as a whole, and determine, at least approximately,
where and what changes of key are likely to be necessary.
J
*2) For 3 notes (f ' j* or |" '
J).
* For 3 notes "

J or f -Tl
3) (f
CHAPTER III.
CONDITION 3: "INDIVIDUALITY OF PARTS.'

The Rhythmic Relation of One Part to Another.
22. The fundamental rule is, diversity and contrast between the
rhythms of the separate parts. But the collective effect of the rhythm of
two associated contrapuntal parts is generally that of uniform move-

ment.
5& APPLIEti COUNTERPOINT. Par. 22a.
a. A certain grade of tone-values is adopted as the uniform basis

of motion (most commonly the 8th- or 1 6th-note, sometimes as triplet),
and this fundamental rate is sustained with predominating regularity.

It is rarely pursued in either pari alone, or in both parts at once, for many
successive beats ; but alternates more or less regularly between the
parts, — the part not conducting the fundamental rhythm relaxing,
meanwhile, to tone-values of any reasonable length.
Distinction rhythmic formation must be regarded as the most powerful

in
means of independence and individuality of the several
realizing the necessary
parts of a polyphonic complex. Hence, the fundamental law of Contrasting
Rhythm, and Alternation. Similar rhythm in both parts at once (as in Ex. 46), or
persistent uniform rhythm in either part (as in the examples made in Exercise 3,
etc.), militates against this vital principle of rhythmic individuality, and must be
used sparingly, as an exception to the rule. For example (correct rhythm )
^— I-
Ex.
SE
63.ES5EE5
nES
S ^P
-^
Bach.
i r-
in etc.
See, further, Ex. 44-2 (i6th-triplets at first in lower, and then in upper part).
Ex. 52-1, — the rhythm of i6th-notes in alternating parts during two measures;
then maintained for a time in upper part alone. Ex. 52-2, similar. —
Ex. 55—3. —
In Ex. 46 the fundamental rhythm is maintained in both parts at once in Ex. ;
53—2, it is uniform in each part for some time both cases are somewhat exceptional,
;
as already stated. In Ex. 54—1, the upper part is uniform, but the lower one- diver-
sified.
b. Modifications of the fundamental rate of motion, for the sake of

variety, in either or both of the parts, conform usually to the laws
of regular rhythm ; i.e., comparatively heavy (long) tones should occupy
the heavier beats, and lighter (short) tones the light beats. In other
words, relaxation to longer tone-values should generally occur at ac-
cented pulses, and acceleration to shorter tone-values at unaccented
pulses.
See Ex. 44, No. 1 (lower part, i6th-notes on beats 2-3, 5-6; the 8th-notes on
accented beats 1 and 4). Ex. 44, No. i, the change of rhythm from i6ths to 8ths
Par. 22C. RHYTHMIC RELATION OF PARTS. 57
takes place at the accented unit (lower part). Ex. 45, No. 1, heaviest note at begin-
ning of measure. Ex. 45-2, fundamental rhythm of 8th-notes, accelerated to i6ths
on unaccented fractions of 2nd and 4th beats. Ex. 57-3, fundamental rhythms of
l6th-notes, accelerated to 32nds on unaccented fractions.
c. Still, as long as either one of the two parts is conducted in uni-

form rhythm, it appears easy to justify irregularities of rhythm in the
other part.
See Ex. 44, No. 6 ; the upper part is practically uniform (8ths), while the lower,
near the end, Ex.
47, lower part uniform i6ths, upper part
is distinctly irregular.
irregular.Ex. 52-3, lower part uniform, upper part irregular. Ex. 52-5 similar.
Ex. 54—1, and 3. Ex. 57-5, end of measure 1. Ex. 40, B.
d. The importance of the tie must here again be emphasized^ By

no other means can an equally effective and legitimate result be
obtained, as tending toward the mutual independence of the parts. All
forms of syncopation are simply the consequence of ties {actual,
or — according to their location in the measure — implied), and there-
fore serve the same important end. The treatment of the tie is dejfined
in par. 9, which review.
An especially felicitous illustration of the tie is given in Ex. 44, No. n. See
also Ex. 45-2. Ex. 50-1 (syncopation). In each of these cases the general rhyth-
mic effect is regular, and preponderantly uniform, because of the correct âlternation
of the parts, as shown in par. 2 2«. Ex. 64-3 (syncopation).
The absence of ties will be observed most frequently in two-part counterpoint of
a somewhat lively character and movement, where but little opportunity is afforded
for the check which ties naturally occasion (comp. par. 9^). See Ex. 47 Ex. 52-1, ;
2,4.
Of barely less importance is the occasional rest, which, in the

proper place, and in judicious proportion, is quite as valuable as any
tone, often far more so. See par. 10. Its use is exemplified in Ex. 63 ;
Ex. 64, No. 2 ; Ex. 91.
e. Distinctly irregular rhythmic formations are justified by sequences,

or any other form of symmetrical successive recurrence ; comp. par. 2 if.
For example
1. Bach.
U j^.1*"^ ""•»Wli^ I
to*'* ' «"
^^k^^ * I
**
Ex. *l) 1
etc.
64.
g^^ ^mtrt^
Bach.
Ss-^P^ =r-
Exercise 6. RHYTHMIC RELATION OF PARTS. 59
n j
i
I
i i i
r*T1 n
Al legro.
2. Allegro. ^ (tr)
3. Lento. 4. Allegretto
s '^^m^m ., ft
5. -4rcdarate.
^^5£
m^ 6. Lento.
&- *=!£
«
i^^P^gg|iBigp^ tdrtiii I
3P"
^^^K 7. Moderate.
jt±S=ft
gpjjllg
O. Andante.
8. Jfodemfo.
=p|a
fParTiy'. J. S. Bach.*2
k»fc « 1
|
I 4-i-hCTi —»^ — i
•-!*
)
etc.
2£f PI
3tt * =i=H«=
10. Allegro.
w
fgjg^BfliiSêg
^—
=t=t=t=t ^
^g^mâmm^^m Bach. 11. Allegro.

6o APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Exercise 6.
*3>
Bach.
-^-H-3=t=5
*Z*^J=tt}& ifcifc 1
12. Moderate.
f&¥r^g£ss^gjm&^s^
&*
i<:S^ §=5sF±r^
:
^S T^P» P=S==t
=S«rt=fr
u _ p-^-^ Bach.
13. Moderato. _îT\ u — ^ Bach.
*i) The added part may begin, in each case, exactly with the given one; but it
is better that it do so a little after, or before, the latter. Further, the student should
make several different versions of each task.
*z) After having concluded his own experiments with these last melodic extracts
from 2-voice polyphonic passages of Bach, the student may compare them with the
respective original versions No. g occurs in the 2nd French Suite, " Air," measures
;
1-4; No. 10, in the Art of Fugue, Fugue 9, measures 8-17; No. 11, in the same,
Fugue 13, measures 5-9; No. 12, in the 9th Two-voice Invention, measures 17—29;
No. 13, ciavichord-fugue on " Bach" measures 5-8.
•3) In earlier methods of notation, this figure P^ represented the modem

J j J*
whenever employed in connection with triplets (as here).
Par. 23. IMITA TION. 61
CHAPTER IV.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THEMATIC RESOURCES. THE

VARIOUS MODES OF IMITATION.
23. The necessary co-ordination of two associated contrapuntal
melodies is due largely, it is true, to contrasting rhythmic formation,
whereby mutual independence of melodic effect is achieved. See par.
22a, second clause.
But, besides this independence or individuality, another condition,
that of thematic (or melodic) equality, is vitally essential to a proper
co-ordination of the parts; and this condition of thematic equality is
obtained by the device known as Imitation, — a device peculiarly char-

acteristic of true polyphonic style.
24. Imitation is the highest of the three progressive species of

melodic recurrence.
The first grade, (1) simple " Repetition," is the recurrence of a
melodic figure in the same and upon the same scale-steps. This
voice,
has its natural types in the echo, bird-calls, and other preponderantly
physical manifestations.
The second grade, (2) the " Sequence,'' is the recurrence of a
melodic figure in the sa?ne voice, but upon other scale-steps. This, unless
purely accidental, implies the exercise of a certain degree of mental
power, and therefore enters actively and significantly into the processes
of artistic music.
The third grade, (3) " Imitation " proper, is the recurrence of a
melodic figure in some other voice, either literally or with modifications.
This involves the unanimous co-operation of and
different individuals,
therefore calls forth more comprehensive faculties, enters more

still
deeply into the artistic methods of composition, and becomes the most
vital factor of Polyphony. For illustration
Repetition.
etc.
Imitation.
25. The Imitation of a given melodic figure or motive may occur

either above or below the latter ; and at any time, — though, as a rule,
the temporal relation is regular, i.e., the Imitation appears at the same
part of the (next) metric group, so that the arrangement of accented or
unaccented units is not disturbed (see Exs. 66, 67, etc.).
Further, the Imitation may be effected in a great variety of ways,

affecting both the temporal and interval relations. These various
modes of Imitation, which constitute an important part of so-called
thematic resources, are explained in detail below.
The principal general distinction is that made between Strict (or
Rigid) Imitation, and Free Imitation.
Strict Imitation.
26. An Imitation is strict when it adheres exactly to the successive

interval-progressions of the initial figure (or motive). This is certain to
be the case when it is made upon the same steps of the same scale,
i.e., with the selfsame tones, either in the same register (in which case
it is called an Imitation in Unison) or, as is far more common, in the
next higher or next lower register (called an Imitation in the Octave) ;
possibly in a more distant register, for which, however, no special

designation is necessary.
a. The 8ve-Imitation, because of its perfect agreement with, and
confirmation of, the motive (par. 38a), is the most natural, simple and
frequent, especially for the beginning of a polyphonic section. For
illustration
Bach.
•1) Bach.
Ex.
66.
P^
SISZ
=t
#jpg
•2)
£z3±2
I—I"
m^m P%3>
£ s 3r
1
*o
Par. 26. STRICT IMITATION. 63
3. »-*- -P-0. Bach.

BACH.
#-# -m-P
i %=Z
•-P-
g^^gig
-p-.»-
9fcB-=r^;
\ i
1*0
4. *3) Bach
-Q
it
&|£e it
IB
*6)
*i) The " Motive," or leading figure.

*2) The " Imitation " of the motive, in the upper octave (or, in the upper part,
in the octave).
*3) What takes place here in the leading part during the Imitation, has nothing
to do with the latter, and will be considered later (par. 34).
*4) Imitation of the motive in the lower octave.

*5) Imitation of the motive in the double-octave, above.
*6) Imitation in unison (in lower part).
b. It is also possible to imitate a motive upon other, higher or

lower, steps of the scale, without altering any of the given intervals
(i.e., strictly)
Bach.
Ex.
67.
m
im -0?
'""^
1—*—
ii£y-&ffl
r fete. I
Motive._
Motive.,
jfclf
SOMPjES itr^-
etc.* 3 )
Bach.
11
•2) L I
*i) Imitation. of the motive in the jtk, above; i.e., each tone of the Imitation is
the perfect 5th of the corresponding tone of the motive. It is a " strict " Imitation be-
cause the successive progressions coincide exactly, in quantity and quality, with those
of the motive. This is quickly verified by observing that the Imitation represents the
same scale-steps in B major that the motive does in E major. Consequently, the
melodic and harmonic conditions have remained unchanged (though a change of key
is implied), — and this is the result peculiar to all Strict Imitations.
*2) Imitation of the motive in the 5th, below, — not in the " 5th reckoned down-
ward," but in a " lower part " in the must be borne in mind that
5th. It interval-
relations are always determined by counting upward, along the line of the scale, —
precisely as the scale-steps are numbered, irrespective of their accidental location
above or below a given Tonic. The Imitation in the 5th, of a figure beginning upon
d, willalways begin upon a, whether placed in a higher or lower part.
*3) The Imitation is strict but an inflection of the scale, resulting in a modulation
;
from d into a minor, is necessary, to prevent alteration of the original series of inter-
val-progressions.
c. - But, as seen already in the second of the above illustrations, the

Strict Imitation in any other interval than the octave, is quite likely to call
for inflections of the original scale, equivalent to more or less pronounced
modulations. Thus
Motive..
Bach.
23 — 3 P -
1 §±BE-E
*2).
fc£ -• f-
S Bach.
*3)'
XT.
i l=E:
*= etc.
I
Motive.
Par. 27. FREE JAIJTATION. 65
5 E:
^-T-T-Jt=i:$=*
ft
_etc.
1
Motive.
Motive..
âj- F
l E ,J=a
~tEf
Motive..
=
B?
Motive..
7.
A tf *6 ) ~ 1 «î M il [ -•-"^-Jkj I
J IN
If'etc.
r
l
<
_
*l) Imitation above, in the perfect 4th (strict, each tone in the perfect 4th
— the key changing from G to C).
*2) Imitation below, in the 4th (strict, — modulation from C F). to
*3) Imitation above, in the minor 7th — the same scale-steps in f minor
(strict,
as before in^ minor).

*4) Imitation above, in the major 2nd (strict, —
modulation from C to Z>).
*5) Imitation below, in the 2nd (strict, — e minor toy"| minor).

*6) Imitation above, in the minor 3rd (strict).
*7) Imitation below, in the major 6th (strict, — modulation from C 'to d minor).
Free Imitation.
27. The precision of interval-succession observed in all the above

examples of Strict Imitation, is, however, too whimsical and irksome
to be insisted upon ; and, therefore, such desirable licences, or inten-
tional modifications, as come under head of Free Imitation, are not only-
sanctioned but required, as conducing to greater freedom of manipu-
lation, and to more complete development of the possibilities latent in
the adopted thematic material (Motive).
These licences may affect either the melodic or rhythmic form of the
motive to be imitated ; they may be either essential or unessential in na-
ture (according to the extent and quality of the changes) ;
or they may
even assume complex forms by associating different varieties of modi-
fication. The extent to which the licences of Imitation may be carried,
is subject to but one limitation, namely, the ready recognizability of the

original motive ; that is, all the essential, or striking, characteristics of
the motive should be preserved. Upon this unquestionable recogniz-
ability of the leading figure (motive), the argument of par. 23 depends.
Unessential Melodic Changes.
28. In Free Imitation with Unessential melodic changes, the modi-

fications may affect
a. The quality of one or more of the original interval-successions.
That is, a*perfect interval may be altered to its augmented or diminished form
or a major one to its minor form, or vice versa ; etc.
These qualitative changes are illustrated in the following
1. Im. in 5th. N.B. Bach.
Ex.
i
69.Eip==8
^j-am^tf^f
Motive.
Bach.
-Jr- iP t k ' >*~*^
r I I m - ' n unison,
Motive
ive. "^ I
&g
3. Motive.
3=t J—
y ^J*»etc. Bach.
*—
•-
i *-
I— T-f—
Im. in 6th. *3)
^r—f— 1— tr
1
Im. in 7th.
m Motive.
-r r- r~r r f t +
*4)
3= -*—•-
Im. in 2nd.
r *
=*=2
Bach.
^8
A. A. Klengel.
*i) In order to be a " strict " Imitation in the perfect 5th, each and every tone of
the motive should be answered in that interval, so that the tones of the Imitation
Par. 28b. UNESSENTIAL MELODIC CHANGES. 67
would agree with the Ft major those of the motive do with B major. But
scale, as
this is not the case here : the and second tones {b, ct) are answered in the per-
first
fect 5th(by ft, gt) ; but the next tone, d$, is answered by a\ the diminished 5th,
hence altered in quality of interval-succession. The same is true of the follow-
ing g (answered by dti).
*2) This " later " version does not follow the motive as immediate Imitation of
the latter. But " Imitation " in the broader sense means not only Reproduction
with special reference to the preceding tones of some other part, but the general
Recurrence or reappearance of the motive at different times and in different parts,
in the design of the whole.
*3) In order to be a strict Imitation in the major 6th, these tones should con-
form to .the scale of E major (beginning with gt) ; or, if an Imitation in the minor
6th, they should represent the Eb major scale. Instead of either of these, the tones
are so chosen as to confirm the original scale ( G major). This illustrates the prime
advantage, and even necessity, of occasional qualitative changes ; while infringing
somewhat upon the original melodic and harmonic conditions of the motive (comp.
Ex. 67, note *i), they tend toward a far more desirable modulatory unity.
*4) The motive is simply transferred to the next lower (or 7th higher) step of
the same scale (g minor ) ; this involves such changes in the quality of the interval-
successions as the concession to the prevailing scale demands.
*5) Imitation upon the next higher step of the original scale.
b. Further, the unessential melodic changes may affect the quantity

of one or more of the original interval-successions.
That is, the interval of a 3rd may be enlarged to a 4th or 5th, or contracted to
a 2nd, etc.
For illustration
1. Motive
hh,
Im. in 6th. ^m^ m Bach.
™",.§«£1§3&
2.
m? r*^
BUJ-t
later : *:
N.B. N.B. N.B.
Bach.
jlm. in 5th.
giissiyj N.B.
*i) See Ex. 69, note *2). —

Compare this version with the motive, and observe
what enlargements of the corresponding original interval-successions occur, at the
brackets; —
the first tone (bb) is answered in the 6th (g); the next four tones are
answered in the 5th the next in the 7th and the last four again in the 6th. From
; ;
this it is evident that the " interval of Imitation " cannot, in such cases, be exactly
specified, because of the changes in quantity. It is customary to define the Imitation
according to the interval most frequently used, — though not always, that
generally,
indicated by the very first tone.
•2) Here a contraction from 8ve to 7th occurs. This reveals *another of the
favorable features of the change in interval-quantity, namely, that it alters tke
harmonic aspect of the motive. In this case the original motive, which represents
a "triad " form, is modified to a " chord of the seventh."
*3)
m Motive._ Im. N.B.

=gF3
9
I S EE E£
-t-
-#- -*-
zetc.z
Bach.
At
later
*3) the triad-form of the motive

m EH3 m
Im. *4>
is changed, both by enlargement and con-

traction, to the form of a " chord of the sixth."
At *4) it is changed to a chord of the seventh.
c. As important as these alterations of the melodic and harmonic

form of the original motive may appear to be, in themselves, the par-
ticular object of the unessential melodic changes will be found to
•
consist, chiefly, in facilitating the adjustment of the motive (upon its
periodic recurrences) to the prevailing modulatory conditions, or to any

immediate or general requirement of the total design.
When the motive is imitated in any other interval than the 8ve, —
that is, when it is shifted to other steps of the scale than those which
it originally occupied, — the melodic conditions are changed, of course,
and possibly seriously disturbed. To counteract this, two things may
be done
(1) A modulation may be made (into any next-related key), changing

the scale in such a way that the new location of the motive shall repre-
sent correct step-progressions. Or,
(2) The above quantitative melodic changes may be undertaken in
the Imitation itself, so that the otherwise faulty successions are removed.
Par. 2g. ESSENTIAL MELODIC CHANGES. 69
For example, the following motive, in C major
Ex.
70b.
Q_
BpÊ^PÊl
——»«_-,
zEEEEq—|— —|— 1 1
— I
would,
imitated thus
in the 4 th,
if
y^^^ Q_
—3 ---rJTJ rj 1 ~J
P-ti
l~H
assume an awkward and defective form, if retained in C major without

change of interval-quantity but it may be redeemed, either by chan-
;
ging the key
=3=^= 3-:
mi
1=
$ ¥
(to F major.) (to G major or e minor.)
or by altering the size of the first interval
N.B.
i
-4-
m
or by resorting to both devices ; if transferred to a minor or d minor,
without further change, the result would again be faulty
N.B.
n ITTTI, . I I I I I, .
but would be 1 1 1 1 j, 1. I m [J, I..
?? ??
In a minor. In d minor. In a minor. In d minor.
Essential Melodic Changes.
29. In free Imitation with Essential melodic changes, the following

distinctions of species are made
a. Imitation in contrary motion. Here, the direction of each tone-
succession of the Motive is reversed in the Imitation ; i.e., all ascending
progressions are changed to descending ones, and vice versa. As these
changes, though radical in their nature, affect each and every tone
alike, the result is a legitimate uniform modification though turned ;
" upside down," it is the same melodic line, and invariably recognizable
as such.
The term "inverted motive "is permissible; but it is judicious to restrict the
word " inversion " rigidly to the local relation of two or more parts to each other, as
Involved in so-called double-counterpoint (see par. 55).
7o APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 29a.
For illustration
1. Bach.
Ex. Motive. I
71.
^fc
Im. in Contrary Motion.
Bach.
IS Motive..
fas
cetc.r
1
See 1—
Im. in Contrary Motion.
3=2 Si
The size of the interval-progressions may be in " strict " accordance
with those of the Motive, but this is by no means necessary, or even
desirable. The "interval of Imitation" cannot be defined as in par.
26, obviously, because the melodic lines are not parallel, but contrary
but they appear to revolve, in opposite directions, about a certain
mutual axis, or corresponding tone, and the choice of this tone is sig-
nificant in determining the degree of coincidence, both harmonic and
melodic, between the Motive and its Imitation.
If, for instance, every Mediant (3rd Scale-step) in the Motive is
answered by a Mediant in the Imitation, the several tones of the Tonic

chord and also of the Incomplete Dominant 9th chord (the most im-
portant fundamental harmonies) will reappear, in reverse order.
Thus:
a. Mediant by mediant. ditto.
"9- T becomes,
he
Ex. and: : becomes 1
contra-
72.
C I
motion:
iE
I
*£ C
-a-
8 9
t~^ i
Vn
The harmonic similarity is therefore complete.
This coincidence may also be defined as tonic note responding to dominant notei
for that is the natural consequence of Mediant responding to Mediant.
Par. 29a. ESSENTIAL MELODIC CHANGES. 71
The same is true of the corresponding minor (c minor). And it
applies to these tones either i/i their simple harmonicform, or embellished, —

as basis of an ornate melodic motive.
If, further, each Mediant in the Motive be answered by a Tonic note,
the result will be:
J-
Ex. g^bfx and ~ £pE|=E become ±=3E^ and =£gnjz=jd=H
73. IE
9 7
C I C VI V
which constitutes very nearly the same degree of harmonic coincidence
as above. Consequently, these two varieties of melodic relation,
Mediant responding to Mediant (= Tonic to Dominant) and Mediant
responding to Tonic, — are the best for the Imitation in Contrary motion.
These, and other conditions, are illustrated in the following
Im. in Cont. Motion. Bach.

1. Motive
Motive._
35* 5ggT t=T

G major.
Im. in Cont. Motion.

i-*2)
—
IP "l""!""! 1
11—1 1
I I
1
f
1 1 >, Bach.
N.B. Im. in r*
•
Cont. M. ^^»
Bach. aS
i i 3
d£5S J"1i"[ 1
i Z&p^t-
*+
zzTz
^1 _Motive.-
xt. I
C major.
4. Motive.
#—«- Itp 4=
^1*5 £ as£ffi H«-»-
i=2=
/#
V APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 29b.
Im. in Cont. Motion. Bach.
*i) The Mediant (/) in the motive becomes each time again/ in the Imita-
tion : i.e., Mediant responds to Mediant or Tonic (d) responds to Dominant (a), and
;
vice versa.
*2) Mediant responds' to Mediant (or Tonic to Dominant) up to the 2nd beat of
the fourth measure, when one of the quantitative changes shown in Ex. 70A takes
place.
Here, Mediant responds to Tonic. The same is true of Ex. 71, No. 2.
*3)
Tonic responds to Tonic. See also Ex. 71, No. 1.
*4)
*S) Might just as well have been d$, but for the desirable
modulation.
While such melodic coincidences may, and perhaps should, be adopted as a
means of obtaining the/irst (and best) version of the Imitation in Contrary motion,
it must be understood that when the melodic line or figure of the " Contrary mo-
tion" has been once thus fixed, it may be shifted about to any steps in its own, or
some other, scale —
possibly with such unessential changes as are indicated in par. 28.
Comp. Ex. 69, Note *2).
b. Retrograde Imitation (cancrizans), in which the motive is repro-

duced backward. This alteration so seriously endangers the recogniz-
ability of the motive, that it may scarcely be regarded as a legitimate
or permissible mode of Imitation ; and, in truth, its adoption in modern
Polyphony is extremely rare. See par. 27, last clause.
Ex.
75. IE
1. Motive..
Retrograde Im.
Mozart.
mw
Retrograde Im.
Motive.„
t**
Brahms.
tiiz ***- ^mm

:
u i
y-etc.
f[_I
"
An extraordinary example of Retrograde Imitation may be found in Beethoven's

Pfte. Sonata, op. 106, in Bb major, last movement. The long and unique Subject at
the beginning of the Allegro risoluto reappears in reversed order (i.e., backward) at
Par. 30. UNESSENTIAL RHYTHMIC CHANGES. 73
very nearly its full length, in the first nine measures of the section with the 2% signa-
ture, — in the lower part; the same form follows immediately in the upper part,
and then in the lowermost part. It is characteristic of Bach's conception of pure
Polyphony, that this device does not appear at all in his " Art of Fugue," a work
replete with all the legitimate devices of contrapuntal texture.
Unessential Rhythmic Changes.
30. In Free Imitation with Unessential rhythmic changes, the

following licences occur :
a. The value of the final tone of the motive may be either increased
or reduced. This utterly harmless modification is illustrated in Ex. 67,
No. 1 ; Ex. 68, No. 2 ; Ex. 69, No. 1 ; Ex. 70A, No. 3 ; and Ex. 74,
No. 3, — which see.
b. The value of the first tone of the motive, also, may be increased
or decreased (by beginning the Imitation correspondingly earlier or
later). Neither of these modifications is purely arbitrary, but will, in
the majority of cases, be dictated by the necessity of adjusting the

thematic figure, at either of its extremities, to the general design, —
especially as concerns the harmony and modulation. For illustra-
tion :
Ex &
76-EME3: i
Motive.
Im. in 8ve.
Bach.
later 1*2) etc
*r
T^W'^S^
T& _ etc..
'fw^r^^ feH
2. Motive._
Bach.
Iâî£&£^
fcaEES *3 later :F et&
=3 CZ iii
*^±^
* -#-
»i) The first tone is lengthened, from f g to * g —

*2) The first tone is reduced, from f J to S
*3) Both the first and second tones are lengthened, from g to f
74 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT- Par. 30c.
Îte m later: A££#g

*4>
Bach.
i
*4) The first tone is reduced, and the value of the last tone is also changed.
The reasons for these and similar changes are amply apparent in the context of the
original.
c. More rarely, the value of certain tones in the course of the motive
may be modified, — generally in such a manner that what added to
is
one beat is subtracted from the neighboring beat, so that the rhythm
of the remaining tones, and the effect as a whole, is not disturbed.
These changes are largely arbitrary, and are made more for the sake
of variety and heightened effect, than from necessity of adjustment.
For illustration
Ex.
77.
1.
see?
M
1— 1—' Li wj*
n later •3-=-5-
sss
•1)
Bach.
2. M.
i SE
s|Ee
fet =3=1=
* —j-
r^-*~
- •-
*—*
m
mmsmm
Im. Bach.
N.B.
f-+
later:
~^—h
a *E 1
Im._
N.B. N.B.
3.
~-
A$M.
i
j§§KSf
*-•-*-=+
b-ba^t_b
M._
t=~
HHI^î ,-J—T-J_j__|_4-
*2)
Bach.
3=
later: -•—#-
2*ft
N.B.
*i) The rhythm of the 2nd beat is altered from f P to p _» ; the first and
last tones are also modified.
*z) The value of the 7th and 9th tones is decreased, and, as no equalization
takes place, the second half of the motive appears dwarfed. The first tone is
lengthened.
Par. 31. ESSENTIAL RHYTHMIC CHANGES. 75
Essential Rhythmic Changes.
31. Free Imitation with Essential rhythmic changes involves the

following modifications
a. Imitation in Augmentation. Here the time-value of each tone
and rest is multiplied in uniform ratio. Thus, the length of the motive
is usually exactly doubled, although three-fold and even four-fold aug-
mentation sometimes occurs. This applies naturally to motives in duple
rhythm ; whereas in triple time it is often necessary to resort to uneven
proportions of augmentation, in order to preserve the original arrange-
ment of accented and unaccented tones. This change, though essen-
tial, does not jeopardize the recognizability of the motive, for it has
usually simply the effect of decreasing the tempo without affecting
any of the melodic or rhythmic proportions of the original tones. For
illustration
*l) Bach.
Ex. later
78.
M
4:
Im. in Augmentation.
ail
:-=^
!
2. M. 1
i 1
Im. in Augm.
Bach. 3.
5
^ &=*=F Sft=gl- E^
*2)
?- r(2-
~^=fi-
m
0-0
Bach.
*-fS
Im. in Double-augm.
£• —
=9*&*8
-0- ..
-t-
B •
% i P-
-r~
EtEEEEEl3
-.-.
-m- *3)
§
ttS:
M. Im. in Augm.
Beethoven.
^±f *4)
5. Im. in Augm.
*5)
fesi^ji M.
-1
-V__
N.B.
:¥
N.B.
— i tf~EE£E3
76 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 31b.
*6)
i=^ ^3E
i £2
N.B.
Sf^B
*i) The principle of Augmentation operates from the accented uni:.;., and there-
fore affects, in this case, the initial rest also. — *2) The i-rest contracts te value of
the first (augmented) tone from => to p- It is a four-fold enlargement, — sometimes
called double Augmentation. — *3) This example of Augmentation also involves a
shift of rhythm, — explained in par. 31^. —
At *4) the proportions of Augmentation
are uneven (three- and four-fold). —
Here the proportions of Augmentation aie
*5)
necessarily uneven otherwise, the triple measure would be transformed into "luple.
;
— The version at *6) conforms a little more closely to the prosodic effect of the origi-
nal motive.
b. Imitation in Diminution. This is exactly the reverse of the

above, and has the effect of increasing the tempo without changing the
design of the motive. It is hardly feasible in any other than duple
measure. For example
1. Bach.
Ex.
79.
R
§*£ £j^g X Ie=3e£ i
M. Im. in Diminution.
2.
•—
m& M.
Bach.
£=¥
am *s
=f3
Im. in Dim.
gpggp ussi M.
Beethoven.
m& mIm. in Dim.*2)

later:
*i) The rhythm of these four notes is equalized by cancelling the dots. *a) — A
reduction to one-third of the original values. The prosodic effect of the motive is
totally changed. — *3) A fragment, only, of the motive, in still more extreme Dimi
nution.
c. Imitation in Shifted rhythm ; that is, the reproduction of the

motive at a part of the measure, so that the original arrange-
different
ment of accented and unaccented tones is more or less completely
changed.
Par. 31c. ESSENTIAL RHY1HMIC CHANGES. 77
In 4-4 measure, a shift of two beats simply produces an exchange

of accents, without appreciable change of prosodic effect. This is illus-
trated in Ex. 66, No. 1 (the motive begins in the 3rd beat, the Imitation
in the 1st); Ex. 68, Nos. 2, 3, 4, and 7 ; Ex. 69, No. 4; Ex. 71, Nos.
1 and 2.
In 4-4, or any other variety of duple measure, an entirely new ar-

rangement is obtained by shifting the motive one beat, forward or back-
ward; or, as is more rarely the case, by shifting it a fraction of one or
more beats, so that the original full beats fall between- the pulses, and
the Motive assumes a syncopated form. For example :
Ex.
80,J^ -•-It
w& later
Im. in Shifted Rhythm.
„ Largo.
Bach.
ii=p:
ifeplI"''fei!ilgE^H
Bach.
later teF -P- •- • *-
li -K>~
Im. *z)
^^g=EE
Bach.
3. AH«_|tHt A
ggglater : Eg
[
i Ears±t=t i5B3aai=^
*i) The Motive, as Imitation, is shifted forward one beat. Observe the change
in the location of the accented tones ;
play each version several times, with very
marked accentuations. — *2) In slow tempo, this appear to be the simple ex-
will
change of primary and secondary accents but the difference

; neverthe- in effect is,
less, sufficiently noticeable. — *3) Shifted backward one — *4) Shifted forward
beat.
one-half beat (syncopated Imitation).
In 3-4, or any other variety of triple measure, the prosodic trans-

formations are still more numerous, because the accented tones may be
shifted to either of the two unaccented units, with totally different re-
sults. Besides this, syncopated Imitation is also possible, as above.
For illustration :
Brahms.*i)
Ex.
t=
81.
i- X
M.
*2)
tf
m V
Im. in shifted rhythm.
3E
V 9
»,t-
i or : *3>
& i
*i) This phrase is borrowed from the pianoforte-quartet in A (3rd movement),
merely to illustrate, in a peculiarly effective manner, the two-fold transformation
possible in triple measure. At *2) the motive is shifted forward, and at *3) back-
ward, one beat.
Complex forms of Imitation, such as Contrary motion, and, at

32.
the same time, unessential melodic or rhythmic changes or simultane- ;
ous Contrary motion and Augmentation, Diminution, or Shifted

rhythm, and so on, —
are possible and not uncommon. But it must be
remembered that the more these licences are multiplied, the more
likely they are to endanger', or destroy, that recognizability of the original
motive designated in par. 27 as the inexorable limit, beyond which it
would be inconsistent to pass. For example :
Ex.
82. fe^^g^Ê^ I-
'""'
S^^^SlfSpEi Cont. motion and shifted rhythm
STZIMiiH etc.
»
is! si-
^3 later: -*-«-
t£-«-
Bach.
ill
far. 33 MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES. 79
3.
zq=^^:
z?=«b -•-*
I"
;-*
^pe3
i=t Hî
Bach.
later
i¥
Cont. Motion and
^BE
Augm.
£=£ » • -*-
eB
*l) Imitation in Contrary motion and Diminution; the value of the first tone
abbreviated. — A few other cases of slight complication are shown in Ex. 74, No. 2 :
Ex. 78, No. 3 ; and Ex. 79, No. 2.
33. Finally, more exceptional forms of modified Imitation are oc-

casionally encountered in the polyphony of Bach and others, consisting,
(1) in the addition of intermediate embellishing tones ; (2) in the con-
trary motion of some single interval ; (3) the transposition of a portion
of the motive to a higher or lower octave ; and (4) the partial application
of certain essential modifications (i.e., to certain figures, only, of the
motive). Such miscellaneous changes
justifiable when are most
made for the sake of adjusting the Imitation to
some legitimate and
obvious thematic purpose ; or to facilitate obstinate and awkward, but
manifestly necessary, contrapuntal movements. (Comp. par 12c.) And,
as usual, they should not infringe upon the recognizability of the
original motive. For illustration :
Motive.
N.B. Bach.
m1&±
1
I
ex.
83
5^8=1
5fE 1 P
*i)
Im..
Motive.
u.
SB: later:
m
P \
an d: E: S(Z (Z fc
2
*=—^Fz
—
N.B. N.B.
Bach.
P »
and:
N.B N.B.
80 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 33-
3. Motive. •—
'^g^m^m^^^^^ *=! — —
,
later:
g^^glJ ^J^&^ l
etc.
later: Ss ^sfe^te etc.
N.B.
0**ZU +4-r^ - - Lfllf^^=fl N.B.
^^M^^\ ^ 6. Motive.
'""-^
Cont. motion.
1 — I
N.B. N.B.
N.B. Bach.
«H
# p- #-=—•-
and
ISi±*=£ EE l|p=S=
=t=r
N.B.
I
i& 2=^=^
Motive. Bach.
-z*-
i etc. later:
JS Z ± * * -&—& I
N.B.
< .
N.B.
, 8. Motive.
im g< «
» »l-
^
"5>-
Bach.
later
¥fc^?
i
v*-fvr^--e^L*-
U-J tp=t — N.B.
S^l I
Par. 33. MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES. 8l
9.
iISS
*a
Z*
Motive.
-S *- *=*=*
Bach.
later:
^Hîîi Im.
-»-=-#-
=E=t
P-tP±»
t
*=3=
tr=t^ =t=B»t =#*
Motive.
^j>M~ Im ' modified at each *.
* #
^9±§- -Tczzp:
*-F
t=t=5t=t
:
-
Sigî^m
* 1
^jÊsMfsgpg^
1
1-
1 ,
^ggpjfel
1
., a:
Bach.
fe^Ê^^^S^l^jlt#*±tz-#lt ^-•-3-q-
*5)
11. Motive. Im
H 4—g=g=g=^:
if±±A—— i=q later
*6)
-— jt-
~\ Im.
Bach.
^ N.B.
12. Motive. *7) Bach.
XT .
# _ *
later
â^^ss*
*i) Comp. par. 40, 1 (Ex. 9A).
*2) These last tones are transferred to the lower octave, evidently to avoid
carrying the part too high.
*3) A curious example of partial augmentation.
82 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 35a.
*4) The motive is shifted one beat forward, and embellished, during three meas-
ures.
*5) This final fragment is transferred to another part.

*6) The motive is shifted backward one beat, and the 6th tone is altered, from
the expected g% to d%. Compare No. 5, of this Example.
*7) This well-nigh unrecognizable Imitation is complicated by change of regis-
ter at single tones.
The Contrapuntal Associate.
34. After the leading part has terminated its Motive, and the Imi-
tation of the latter is annunciated in the other part, the leading part
does not discontinue its movement, or even pause briefly, but carries its
melodic line along, apparently independent of the Imitation. This

projection of the motive-melody must, however, constitute a harmonious
contrapuntal associate of the Imitation, and therefore its conduct must
be defined according to the rules of two-part polyphony, detailed in
Chapter II. It is usually called the " Counter-motive," or, briefly, the
" Counterpoint."
35. To the general details of contrapuntal association given in the

second chapter, the following special rules must be added
a. The " Counterpoint "
must be a perfectly natural continuation of
the Motive-melody which precedes it, —
as if the imitatory appearance
of the other part were rather accidental than intentional, and did not
concern the progressive movement of the leading part.
This rule is of the utmost moment in genuine polyphonic texturr
For illustration
1. Imitation. Bach.
Ex. etc.
84.
M I
"• •" '
I '
'
J—
*i) N.B.
i 4-3- w^s^sms
m.^_z5!_
Im. N.B. N.B. Bach.
iN fyfrr-ryr-^j^S^
I *2)
Par. 35b. THE CONTRAPUNTAL ASSOCIATE. 83
3. M..
-1*3)
N.B. *4> N.B. N.B. Bach.
stftg
#
Im.
*i) The leading part runs on, apparently regardless of the Imitation (observe the
N. B.), in sequential projection of its final member. The importance of
collision at
the Sequence is here again vindicated by no other means can melodic evolution be
;
more easily and naturally effected than by the Sequence. See par. 17c. As to the
points marked N. B., see par. lyb and 13*.
*2) Here also, the " Counterpoint " is a nearly sequential continuation of the
motive itself.
*3) The Counterpoint is all derived, somewhat disguised, from the motive.
*4) See Ex. 45, No. 2.
See also, Bach, Well-tempered Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 5, meas. 1-3 Fugue 9, ;
meas. 1-3; 16, meas. 1-4; Vol. II, Fugue 5, meas. 1-4; n, meas. 1-8; 12, meas.
1-8.
The beginning of the Imitation must be properly adjusted

b. (as regards
harmony and modulation) to the termination of the motive. This will
influence the choice of the interval of Imitation (par. 26a, b, c) ; may

induce the employment of the unessential rhythmic changes noted in
par. 30^ / and will possibly necessitate the unessential melodic changes
given in par. 280 and b, at the beginning of the Imitation.
For example
Im. in 8ve.
Ex etc. or
85 :[pl* —J =' 1
M
T=ri
•
*i)
w^§*
Im. in 5th.
r *o wkg& t
in 6th.
i m , , f f , r- -*->-•
Im. in 4th.
^=£=* ge
rti
i
r
N.B. *5) N.B. *5)

"1
*=* etc. or: |etc.
E®l±3 ••-^
r t^f ? -•
M. .
*6)
iS^KT^S
M._
CJ
3t=| better:
I 1
rcr
S3 5= n
^ §£fc W=T
^
Utz.
better
U* B
Eg
1
etc.
*i)*i) The adjustment of the beginning of the Imitation to the termination of

the motive is perfect, both as concerns interval and chord, in each of these cases.
This is to be expected, when either the Imitation in the 8ve or 5th is chosen ; i.e., these
intervals are "safe." — *2) Imitation in the 3rd. It is adjusted well at the very
beginning, but leads to a somewhat hasty and undesirable modulation. — *3) Imita-
tion in the 7th. This is good, because the chord-connection (harmonic adjustment)
is complete. — *4) Imitation in the 2nd. Like the preceding case. -^*5) The size
of the first interval is in one case extended, in the other contracted. — *6) The
objectionable interval at the outset is softened by shortening the first — *7)
tone.
Improved by lengthening first tone. See also Ex. 76, No. 1 ; Ex. 77, No. 3.
c. It suffices, as a rule, to provide thus for harmonic agreement at

and during two of the Imitation.
the first beat or The subsequent beats
may easily be so manipulated, —
either by unessential modification of
the Imitation itself (par. 28a, b), or by consistent and careful conduct
of the " Counterpoint," — as to achieve good harmonic conditions.
Par. 36. THE STRETTO. 85
The Imitation once correctly launched, the succeeding movements

of the contrapuntal associate are determined, as already stated, by the
principles of two-part polyphony, but with more particular regard of
the primary rule given at a above (par. 35).
Examine the methods of adjusting the beginning of the Imitation to the ter-
mination of the motive, in Ex«. 66, 67, 68, 69, 70.^, 71 74, No. 3 83, No. i.
j ;
The Stretto.
36. The Imitation is said to be in "stretto " when it overlaps a por-

tion of the motive ; i.e., when the Imitation sets in before the motive
is finished.
The section of the motive thus covered by a section of the Imitation
is, consequently, at the same time the contrapuntal associate of the
latter; and, therefore, the practicability of the Stretto is conditional
upon reasonable contrapuntal agreement between these sections. This '
depends
(1) upon the choice of Strict or Free Imitation (pars. 26, 27) if ;
Strict, —
if no concessions are to be made, —
then but few Stretti will
be found feasible, though the rules of par. i2<r and par. I'jb (which
see) provide an excuse, at least, for some harshness of effect if Free, ;
then the judicious application of the unessential licences of par. 28 .
a, b, will make almost any Stretto possible. It depends, further,

(2) upon the length of the overlapping section.
The earlier the Imitation appears, the longer will the overlapping section be, and,
consequently, the more protracted the risk of disagreement. Hence, fewer Stretti
will be practicable after only one or two beats (i.e., from the beginning of the mo-
tive) than after a longer period, nearer the end of the motive. But, here again, slight
alterations in interval-quantity will facilitate even such extreme Stretto-Imitations.
Specimens of forms of the Stretto are seen in Ex. 66, No. 3,

incipient
and Ex. 67, No. where the Imitation begins simultaneously with the
1,
final unit of the motive this brief interlinking of the two parts (not
;
strictly "overlapping") involves no more than the rule of par. 35^.
See also Ex. 68, Nos. 1, 5, 6 ; Ex. 69, Nos. 1, 3, 5.
Illustrations of the genuine Stretto :

—
Im. in Stretto. *i)
j-,
l= * =
Ex.
86. EM
1
3 etc.
r^rrrPn^fS^-f'
Motive.
E#jÊ^Ê^d=^^^T- =^ | etc. E =^
(</)
i =^=kU4 fefe
#-»-s-V
Faisst.
n (/) r
^3^^ *—&
itpinrn? ——rrm
1^=se*eeH -4-*-
-f
2 •$
**»£AJ
•2) Bach.
N.B.
E15ee:- -=1— »
^m
I 1
=1
'- if
^jz^:^
•4)
3.
1"*"
S
rX -.
and:
m?E
Q£*A Bach.
Mi
pp^sgpî^ :^ji J.
i
^r^Srr
and
&W? 5 fffiw?
i E 1ff-fte J3Bfedi3l
jFVV»Hbz|EJ_J»^JIg
Par. 36. THE STRETTO. 87
„ 5. „ J^^S r"! --fl rO ft^ ,—1 ^ BACH.
n.b. *^ * ^**« u- a*J 1 -?

N.B.
Bach.
Cont. motion.
?• *
9) ,
fcfc
Bach.
•- f-s-»-r r-#-r
LJ 1 s
3. *") j Bach -
1 1 1 1 ,
j 1 .
f r-air tff^r^fT
*i) In defining a Stretto-Imitation, both the melodic and rhythmic intervals are
specified: At (a) it is a Stretto "in the 5th, after six beats; " at (b) in the 4th, after
one measure ; at (c ) in the octave, after one measure at ; (d) in the 5th, after three
beats; at (e) in the 5th, after two beats; and at (/) in the 6th, after one beat. This
motive is peculiarly adapted for the Stretto, as it yields all of these grades without
a single alteration in interval-quantity.

—
*2) After two beats, in the 5th. The col-
lision at N. B. is justified by the principle of par. 12c. *3) After two beats, in the —
4th, Strict. *4) After one beat, in the octave, Strict. *5) The quantity of the —
first interval-progression is changed, to facilitate the Stretto. *6) The same Stretto —
as in the preceding measure, but with inverted parts, — *7) The Stretto begins in
the 4th, after one-half beat ; at this point g and the Stretto then
the tone is inserted,
continues, at the distance of awhole beat. In the next measure, a change in interval-
quantity is made, for an evident reason. —
*8) Comp. Ex. 10 and context. This is
a Stretto " in Contrary motion." —
*<j) *io) An extraordinary example of the
Stretto :
•first in the 7th, after one beat; and then in Contrary motion, after one beat, without —
changing a single interval, during almost the entire length of the unusually long
motive. The student's experiments with his own motives will contribute most
convincingly to his admiration of such contrapuntal feats as this. — *n) Stretto in
Augmentation. — See No. 3.
also Ex. 85, —
See further, Bach, Well-temp. Clav.,
Vol. I, Fugue 1, meas. 7-8, 17-18 (Tenor and Bass); 6, meas. 21-25; zo meas. >
27-31 (Soprano and Tenor), meas. 64-68 (Bass and Tenor). Vol. II, Fugue 2,
meas. 14-15 (in Augmentation) ; 3, meas. 1-3 (cont. motion) ; 6, meas. 14-15.
EXERCISE 7-
A. Each of the following given Motives is to be extended by an Imitation (in

the specified interval) and a Contrapuntal associate, as shown in the subjoined
model.
As a rule, two staves are to be used, and care should be taken to prevent the
two parts from diverging too widely from each other, very rarely more than two —
octaves apart, usually much less.
Each Motive is to occupy first the upper part, followed by its Imitation in the
lower ; then the lower part, with Imitation in the upper ; and each time a different
Counterpoint must be devised.

Review the summaries, par. 13 and par. 21 ; also par. 220/ par. 35 a, b, c.
This exercise is to be limited to par. 26a, — Strict Imitation in the
Octave.
Motive. Counterpoint..
Imit. in the 8ve._
Im. in 8ve.~
I Vn feragip
^mS^ i
and: N.B.
-*--*-"£*-!«-
HeeS^
.
•-*-
M.. Counterpoint..
Exercise 7. IMITA TION. 89
The student is expected to manipulate this (No. 1 ) again, in his own way. Then
Exercise (sB (page 58), Nos. 3, 4, 5, 2, 6, 7, 8. Then the following: —
2. Moderate*. 3. Adagio. *2)
5ÊS iligllp^ralgl
i^ -t? *i>
5. Allegretto. 6. Moderato.
4. Allegro.
£41ssf ^g 3-3
3E
S^S s=
Ig^sa aiipgg^^gp^giH
*--^=^^ F
8. Allegro.
9. Largo.
m^
IO. Moderato.
tdt=*=sHj*zt
^ggp^gpjgja
11. Andante. 12. Andante.
^tf^g^p^^^^îfl
13. Allegretto. Bach.
14. Allegro. Bach.
ffisplgj^lpii ^^Ba
Bach.
G Maior.
Major, î
17. Bach. 18.
Andante.
ns £gfert
-IS3
I, Allegro,
:i^*
P i^?±t
Handel. 19. Handel.
3^f^#^sâp^gH]
Largo.
Handel.
F Major.
Handel.
22. Padre Martini.

n Allegro.
-f—#- Si=^t "T""! -^
-T^f=£
Ifcttl -' '
! V 3^: î
23 Eberlin. 24. Mattheson.
Allegretto n Allegro.
*3)
25. Klengel. 26. Klengel.

Andante. ,, Moderato.
*4)
*i) Final tone optional, both as regards choice and duration. — *2) The tempo-
indicationsmust not be overlooked they may affect the rhythm of the Counter-
;
point. —
*3) Duration optional and the same in every succeeding case.
; *4) The —
Motive ceases with this tone, whose value, and the continuation of the part, up to
the entrance of the Imitation, are optional. — *5) The tie is optional.
B. A number of these motives (as specified below) to be manipu-

lated according to par. 26^, — Strict Imitation in the 5th.
Each motive, as before, imitated both above and below. Especial attention to
par. 35* {c) will be necessary.
Exercise 8. SMITA TION. 91
M._
Model.
Im. in the 5th_
Motives adapted to this exercise

Exercise 6B, Nos. 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8
Exercise 7^, Nos. 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15, 18, 20, 21, 23, 25.
EXERCISE 8.
A. Manipulate the motives specified below, in various other intervals of Imita-

tion (in the 3rd, 4th, 6th, possibly 2nd or 7th) ; all in Free Imitation, according to
par. 283 and b.
The practicable intervals of Imitation will be determined in keeping with par. 35^;
and must be understood that the unessential melodic changes there referred to are
it
not arbitrary, but should be resorted to only as an expedient, when the Strict Imita-
tion baffles harmonious adjustment, —
or in order to secure better modulation.
Review Ex. 69, Note *3), and Ex. 70^, Note *2). And observe particularly par. 28^.
Im. in the 2d.
m fe
E: ^0£
—
—
»%» i
1 1 1
%
N.B.
Model.
i*Eg^g| P—1—•-! —— 1 I
f-^»
^F=r H^-»4
SS
!
m^m
— t »H*
Im. in 3d. i "3d- r

^P
and:
t^wmmmima
i±
feisîi
For this purpose, employ the following Motives
Exercise 6B, Nos. 1, 5 ;
Exercise jA, Nos. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16, 18, 20, 21, 25.

92 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Exercise g.
B. Manipulate a few motives (Exercise 7 A, Nos. 1, 7, 9, 1 1, 26) with the licences

of par. 30*, and, occasionally, c, —
Imitation with unessential rhythmic changes. Any
interval of Imitation may be used (especially 8ve, 5th or 3rd}.
EXERCISE 9.
A. Manipulate the following motives according to par. 29a (Contrary motion),

in various methods of response (Exs. 72, 73 Ex. 74, Note *4) ;
Exercise 6B, Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Exercise 7A, Nos. 3, 6, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 22, 23, 26.
B. Manipulate the motives specified below, according to par. 31a (Augmen-

tation). Any interval of Imitation may be used, preferably the 8ve, 5th or 3rd.
(
if^=£S
-0
-<
Model.
g^g^TOP^P *i)
ife ^t
ist în
*i) It is necessary, in the contrapuntal associate of an Augmentation (because
of its length and persistently heavy rhythm), to check the rhythmic current from
time to time, — and at any heavy accent.
especially at the outset,
For this purpose, employ Exercise 62?, Nos. 2, 3, 6
Exercise 7 A, Nos. z, 12, 16, 4, 5, 11, 17.
C. Manipulate the following, according to par. 31* (Diminution) :
Exercise 6B, Nos. 3, 7 ;

<•
Exercise 7A, Nos. 4, 19, 26 (10).
D. Manipulate the motives specified below according to par. 31^ (Shifted

rhythm) :
Im ,
lfe
w-
n=^S^^B
£*2 •?*±&I
-v *2)
Model.
T^rrH
r»-_H»-
a~* ": • —££££
1— — '
>
h-^-ri
"• *-*-*-.
**=f*-l — 1
\
*l) The Imitation is to be shifted forward in each case, — generally one beat,
possibly a little more or less. The vacant space that consequently intervenes be-
tween the end of the motive and the beginning of the Imitation, must be very care-
fully filled out, with close attention to the rule of par. 35a, i.e., with strictly analo-
gous material. The interval of Imitation will be almost entirely optional, depending
somewhat upon the current of the "intervening tones."
Exercise 10. IMITA TIOAT. 93
*2) In every case, both Darts must be thus carried on, to the next accented
beat, — with strictly analogous material. For this purpose employ
Exercise 6£, Nos. 4, 5
Exercise 7 A, Nos. 3, 7, 10, 12, 18, 22. 24.
EXERCISE 10.
Manipulate a number of motives in Stretto-imitations, according to par. 36.

This work is almost purely experimental ; the possibility of obtaining one or
more acceptable stretti is to be tested patiently, in each of the seven different inter-
vals of Imitation and at different rhythmical distances. The Imitation will, of course,
always be shifted backward, and tested at each succeeding beat of gradually increas-
ing proximity to the beginning of the motive. The Stretto-imitations in parallel
motion (Ex. 86, No. 1), and in Contrary motion (Ex. 86, No. 6), are both to be
tested; occasionally that in Augmentation also (Ex. 86, No. 8). Unessential
melodic changes (in quantity of interval) may be admitted, to a reasonable extent.
^^mm^ Eg
ES: ^m^m
Model. etc. Ex. 49.
m m
#—f*-H-pe
Good.
_Counterp._
m mm
£ A=T- *—?-
i
>—F-
m
Exercise gDt
Note*2).
-*-•-
:f— 13*
Cont. m. K.B.
For this purpose use any motives of Exercise 6B, Nos. 2-8, or of Exercise J A-
Also a few of the original motives invented in Exercise \B.
DIVISION TWO.
THE INVENTION-FORMS.
Introductory.
37. Polyphonic styles of composition are divided into three classes,

distinguished chiefly by the degree of severity with which the principles
of polyphony, or contrapuntal writing, are applied ; namely : the Inven-
tion, the Fugue, and the Canon.
In the Canon the utmost rigor of thematic treatment prevails. In
the Fugue, the contrapuntal methods are applied with less insistence,
but with reference to certain specific conditions, peculiar to this class.
In the Invention, the polyphonic principles (Imitation, etc.) are applied
in a general way only, with much freedom and with almost,
of detail ;
if not quite, equal regard of the broader considerations of form (struc-

tural design), and of general external effect.
The " Invention " (a
term adopted from one of the musical practices
of the I7~i8th centuries) is, then, the simplest and least constrained of
the three principal classes of Polyphonic Form.
The factors which enter into the construction of an Invention
38.
are: The Motive; (2) The Imitations or recurrences of the
(i)
Motive (3) The Contrapuntal Associates
;
and (4) The Episodic ;
passages (including the Cadences).
The Motive.
a. The Motive is a brief melodic sentence, calculated to be (and
adopted as) the basis and source of the evolution, construction (or " in-
vention "), of the polyphonic composition in view. It is the " theme "
of the structural task.

To this end, it should be simple arid regular in its harmonic design,
and faultless in melodic formation ; but, at the same time, sufficiently
characteristic and suggestive to invite manipulation, and to sustain
interest. For this reason, somewhat striking melodic features may be
admitted, and moderate rhythmic irregularities are appropriate, if not
lecessary, —
hence the frequency of the tie, in effective Motives.
Review, very minutely, as a test of these details, the formation of all the Motives
given in Exercise 6£ (2-8) and Exercise yA.
94
Par. 38. THE MOTIVE. 95
The length of such a thematic sentence concerns mainly the theoretical distinc-
tion made between
a Figure (a small group of about 3 to 6 tones),
a Motive (at least a measure long, compounded of 2 or 3 " figures," and with a
more or less indefinite cadential impression), and
a. Subject (in complete Phrase-form, with a definite cadence).
Some of the " themes " of Exercises 6 and 7 are, properly speaking, Subjects,
though the generic term " Motive " will be applied to all alike, for convenience.
Par. 1
1
3 may be briefly referred to.
The most important rule for the Motive is, that its first tone, or
tones, should impart an unmistakable Tonic impression :
—
See Exercise 6B, Nos. 2, 3, 6, 8, —
beginning with the Tonic note; also Exer-
cise jA, Nos. 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 21, 23, 24. Further, Exercise 7A, Nos.
2, 3, 8, 10, 11, 17,22, 26, — beginning with the Dominant note, followed immediately,
or soon, by the Tonic. In Exercise jA, Nos. 19 and 25, the Tonic note follows
quite late, but the Tonic impression is clear. Exercise 7A, No. 18, is misleading,
as the Tonic note is entirely absent. In Exercise 6B, Nos. 5 and 7 begin upon the
Mediant, followed soon by the Tonic, — Exercise J A, No.
this is perfectly clear.
1 6, is again misleading, because of the long absence of the Tonic, after the initial
Mediant (which imparts the impression of e minor, instead of G major). Exercise 6B,
No. 4, begins with the lower neighbor of the Tonic, and is entirely clear. Exercise
7A, No. 20, is misleading, because the upper neighbor of the Mediant, though un-
accented, imparts a Br> major impression where major is intended. F
The Imitations, or Thematic Components.
b. The Imitations, or successive recurrences of the Motive, consti-

tute the so-called thematic texture of the polyphonic fabric. Compare
par. 38*/, and review Ex. 69, Note *2). The details of this factor are
given in Chapter IV.
The Counterpoint.
c. This term is applied (possibly a little loosely) to all the passages
that are invented as contrapuntal associates of the motive, upon each of
its successive Imitations or recurrences See par. 34.
The Episodic Components.
d. To all those portions of the polyphonic fabric where the motive

is not present in either part, or is represented by only one of its fractional
figures, the term Episodic passage is applied. The necessity for such
elements in effective polyphony, as a foil to the thematic portions, is

obvious ; for the monotony of persistent motive-imitation must be re-
lieved from time to time. But it is equally manifest that episodic pas-
sages should, as a rule, be neither too frequent nor too extended ; and
that they must be in close keeping with the character of the thematic
portions. ^
For the iatter reason, the episodes are usually derived (1) directly
from the motive itself, by using some fraction of the same; or (2) indi-
rectly, by utilizing the whole or some portion of any of the contrapuntal
associates of the motive; or, possibly (3), an entirely new figure maybe
adopted, on condition that it be conceived strictly in the spirit of the
motive, or of the general context, and tha t it reappear at intervals dur-
ing the composition. Finally (4), it is also possible that an episodic
passage, after beginning in touch with the motive, may, by gradual and
consistent stages, develop into a more or less independent character, —
though it can scarcely be justified in becoming quite foreign. For illus-
trations of the episodic components, see Exs. 89, 90, 91.
CHAPTER V.
THE TWO-VOICE INVENTION.

39. An Invention may be constructed, like any homophonic compo-
sition, according to the design of the so-called Part-forms, or Song-
forms. But it is somewhat inconsistent with the polyphonic style to
check the current of thematic development with the emphasis necessary
for the Cadence of a genuine and well-defined Part ;* and it is, therefore,
more common for the structural design of Inventions to consist in a
kind of group-form, or chain-form, the several divisions of which may
most appropriately be called " Sections."
a. The Section of polyphonic designs differs from the Part of homo-
phonic forms in being, as a rule, less regular and definite in character
in terminating with a brief, and less distinct, form of cadence ; and in
maintaining less obvious formative relation (with regard to general
melodic design) to its fellow-divisions. For these reasons, the number
of Sections, also, is entirely optional.
b. Generally, each successive Section undertakes a somewhat differ-
ent method of manipulation, or the development of some special resource
* See the author's " Homophonic Forms 0/ Mus. Cotnp., 1 ' par. 70, par. 72$.
Par. 40. THE FIRST SECTION. 97
of the Motive. But, notwithstanding the comparative independence

thus effected, it is necessary to preserve a certain measure of logical
connection and relation between the Sections, and therefore it is cus-
tomary to revert, from time to time, to some structural feature of an
earlier Section ; thus the idea, at least, of the Homophonic designs*
prevails in the polyphonic designs as well — especially in the Inven-
tion, which, in contents and purpose, is more closely akin to the ordi-
nary (homophonic) Song-forms than are the more advanced grades of
polyphony.
The First Section.
40. The 1st Section, or " Exposition," of the Invention, will exhibit,
as a rule, all enumerated in par. 38.

of the structural factors
a. The Motive may be announced by either the upper or (more
first
rarely) the lower of the two parts generally it appears alone, though it
;
is sometimes accompanied by a few unimportant auxiliary tones, the
better to establish chord, key and rhythm.
Compare Bach, 2-voice Inventions, Nos. 1, 3, 4, 8, with Nos. 7, 13 — the first
measures of each.
b. The first Imitation, in an Invention, is almost always made in
the octave; though occasionally the fifth is chosen, or some other inter-
val which adjusts itself readily to the harmonic design, — any interval
being permissible.
In Bach, 2-voice Inventions, Nos. 1,3, 4, 7, 8, and 13, the first Imitation is in the
lower 8ve ; in No. 10 it is in the 5th ; Bach, English Suite No. 6, 2nd movement
in
of the " Prelude," it is in the 4th ; the same in Bach, Partita II, 3rd movement of
the " Sinfonia " (3-4 time).
c. The details of the Exposition up to this point have been thor-

oughly exemplified in the work of Exercise 7, etc. The next step in the
development of the thematic design is, usually, another immediate
recurrence of the motive, in the first (i.e., leading) part, as^ re-imitation
of the preceding announcement. The interval of this new Imitation is
optional, though 8ve or 5 th is the most usual. Meanwhile the other
* Idem, par. 73^, par. 81a.

98 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 4od.
(second) part continues its movement, as contrapuntal associate of the

Motive, according to par. 35. See, also, par. 41a. For example :
Counterpoint..
M. (Im. in 8.)--
M. (Re-im.) Bach.
J Counterpoint.
*i) This "Counterpoint" to the second recurrence of the Motive closely resem-
bles the first contrapuntal associate (measures 3-4). It is so natural and tempting to
adhere thus to the first Counterpoint, thaj the student must be reminded of the
monotony it involves, and be warned against making it a rule. The recurrences of
the Motive provide amply for the necessary condition of consistency and symmetry
the equally necessary condition of variety devolves largely upon the contrapuntal
associates, which may assume more or less different forms at the successive recur-
rences of the Motive. On the other hand, to guard against excess in this respect, it
is advisable to adhere to a certain counter-motive during two (or three) consecutive
announcements of the Motive, and to return, from time to time, in the following Sec-
tions, tosuch former Counter-motives (i.e., "counterpoints ").
See further: Bach, 2 -voice Invention No. 1, first six beats; the second recur-
rence of the Motive (meas. 2) is a Re-imitation in the 5th. The same is the case in
No. 7, first six beats (Ex. 91). In No. 8, measures 1-3, it is in the 3rd.
d. What follows, after this second recurrence (i.e., the third

announcement) of the Motive, cannot be determined in detail, but only
with reference to the general purpose of the entire first Section, which
involves the following contents :
—
The announcement of the Motive
The Imitation and successive recurrence, as necessary thematic
basis
Par. 40c THE FIRST SECTION; 99
The exhibition of variety (episodic and otherwise) ;
A modulation into theêy in which the Section is to terminate

The establishing of this key ; and
A palpable Cadence in the same.
e. Perhaps the most imperative condition, at the juncture reached

in the above example, is that of variety. This
obtained, (1) may be
by substituting the principle of the Sequence for that of Imitation, —
i.e., reproducing the Motive once or twice in the same part instead of
the opposite part ; or (2) by dropping the thematic thread, and proceed-
ing episodically.
The first alternative, the Sequence (see par. 41c), is illustrated in the
following :
M. (Sequence).
Bach.
M._ 1
gF=P=t
-ft—m-
g=Ê
j__ L _,
*i)
mm
H«— •
g
etc.
IS -m P=
*i) The Motive, instead of being again imitated in the other part, reappears as
Sequence in the same part, upon the next lower step. The first tone is omitted, in
order not to disturb the smooth termination of the preceding announcement. A
clue to the impulses which Jed Bach to choose this particular interval of Sequence,
will be found in par. 41a. See also par. Apg.
*2) This " Counterpoint " differs from the preceding ones. Review Ex. 87,
Note *i). It is retained during the following Sequence.
See also Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, first 11 measures of Prelude
10; —
Motive of 2 measures, accompanied briefly by auxiliary tones followed by ;
imitation in the 8ve; then a re-imitation, again in the 8ve; then a Sequence, a third
above, — the "Counterpoints" constantly differing, up to this point; then another
Sequence, a third above, — the " Counterpoint " as before, but in a lower octave.
The second alternative, the Episode (see par. 38^), is illustrated in

the following
kE±M* +d—hd- =! (i •-
i M.
r*-*-» Jb ;
F^-
Ex.
89. *i)
B ^g: £&
*-•
gi|&
lm._
Bach.
*££fefcEEE££i*:B=g 1
Episode.*2) ,
etc.
s^p5^^?=P^
-*- .».
m
M._
*i) In the original (French Suite No. 5, " Courante"), a number of auxiliary
tones accompany the first announcement of the Motive they are omitted here.
;
*2) TheEpisode " is interpolated already after the first Imitation it is derived
" ;
from the Counter-motive in the upper part (2nd measure), which is retained (or
imitated) in the lower part in a somewhat modified form, and accompanied by a
new contrapuntal figure in the upper part.
Examine, also, Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 6 measures, and endeavor

10, first
to trace the derivation of the episodical passage; Bach, English Suites, No. 1,
" Bourree I," meas. 1-8 ; English Suites, No. 2, " Prelude,'' meas. 1-4 English
;
Suites, No. 4, " Prelude," meas. 1-6. Further:
M.. Counter-motive.
Ex.
f^^SÊîi=^ *F'
90.
BM>-p -
S?S:EtE
Im._
Par. 4oe. THE FIRST SECTION. IOI
,M
-f-m-
,-fL JL .p-
"^^@if :
-U, —"-*-\— »fe m-a-F-i——— —

i I I I
F a-»- F r F \ f
Episode. *2)
m^ - 1- '
— I—3— I— I— M-
Bach.
S^^gliP
*i ) This counterpoint, at the 2nd recurrence of the Motive, corresponds exactly

to the Counter-motive of the first Imitation (meas. 2).
*2) The derivation of this episodic passage is not as obvious as in some

examples, but nevertheless palpably in close keeping with the preceding thematic
portions. The figure marked a may be accounted for in two ways, as shown by the
two slurs : either as part of the Counter-motive, in contrary motion, or (the lower
slur) as imitation of the ending of the Motive ; b bears close general resemblance to
the Motive, though the indicated derivation may appear
tortuous it embraces three ;
beats, andreproduced in slightly modified Sequence; 4 is derived from ay its

is
modified Sequence, e, is admirably utilized in launching the next recurrence of

the Motive. See par. 41b.
102 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 4of .
/. On the other hand, these specific modes of obtaining variety are

sometimes not resorted to until the alternating Imitations have been
extended still farther. For illustration
fe^7^^=^ ^f»f
M..
fc
Ex. M..
91/ *i)
-M-
IS ^^
M._
*i) Auxiliary tones (par. 40a). — *2) Up to this point, the development is
not only exclusively thematic but consists in the unrelieved alternate Imitation of
the Motive. This must be regarded as very exceptional, and illustrates how, even in
the polyphonic style, the determination to realize a clear structural design may some-
times overrule the more specific thematic conditions of the texture it is the preva- ;
lence of " form " over " thematic development." The counterpoint is uniform in the
lower part, but is diversified in the upper part at each successive Imitation, except-
ing the last one. What follows, as Episode, is easily demonstrated.
•3) The conduct of the lower part effectively illustrates the application of the
brief rest (par. 10, which review).
See Ex. 90, meas. 4 and 6.
par. zzd, last clause ;
See Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 8, meas. 1-5 (four announcements of the
also,
Motive before the texture becomes episodic).

Par. 4og. THE FIRST SECTION. 103
In No. ' of the 2-voice Inventions, the Motive is announced five times (the 5th
time in Contrary motion) before the alternative of the " Sequence" is adopted;
and no less than ten consecutive announcements are made before an ". Episode
is. introduced.
Further, Bach, 4th French Suite, " Gavotte," meas. 1-3.
g. The modulatory design of the First Section of an Invention cor-

responds to that of the First Part in homophonic forms, namely : if in
major, the Section generally terminates in its Dominant key ; if in
minor, usually in its Relative (major) key. Exceptionally, these rela-
tions may be exchanged (i.e., the Dominant key from minor, and the
Relative key from major). Or some other next-related key may be
chosen; especially the Relative of the Dominant, — rarely the Sub-
dominant keys.
The influence of this modulatory purpose will probably be evinced
as soon as the original key is sufficiently established ;
generally during
the first or second episodic passage; or during a line of sequential
announcements of the motive.
In Ex. 88, the latter is clearly illustrated ; in measures 7-8 (of the entire Inven-
tion) the lines of d minor waver, and in measures 9-10 the transition into F major is
complete. In Ex. 91, precisely the same course is pursued: measures 1-3 are in e
minor, measures 4—5 in G major. See also Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 1 measures ;
1-3 in C major; during the following sequences of the Motive (in contrary motion)
in the upper part, the digression into G major is initiated, and is confirmed in the
following (5th) measure.
And the remainder of the Section consists, probably, in a compar-

atively brief confirmation of the new key, and a cadence in the latter.
For example
— *3>
££
1
*i>
=t ^fê +E3
Ex.
(Exs, 87 and 88, cont.)
92.
•2)
m -+-P- -t*-0-
*•-
9* =P=F=
M._
wt -t
£±t
\
—y— \-
•-F-
l=t
jM. (Sequence.).
t=s=tt
±* P
*i) This example must be studied in connection with Exs. 87 and 88. The
" Counterpoint," here, differs from the preceding ones it is retained for the next ;
announcement, and then, again, new forms are invented. Review Ex. 87, Note *i).
*2) This announcement of the Motive is an Imitation of the last Sequence in the
upper part (Ex. 88) ; it is followed by a similar line of Sequences, but not in regular
interval-succession, as before.
•3) Compare Ex. 91, Note *3).
104 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 40h.
Bach.
i =B^g g^=g=S g
etc.
9* -i=fC Iti= »= :&

4=t JLzzJz
~=t
.-.M..
*4) The " cadence-formula." See par. 40^.

*5) See also Ex. 93, No. 2, end.
When the Section is extended to an unusual length, the correspond-

ing breadth of design will probably induce (or necessitate) transient
modulations into various next-related keys ; and the prescribed modu-
latory aim of the whole may not assert itself until the Section
approaches its cadence. In this case, further, the cadence is apt to be
proportionately stronger.
See Bach, Well-tempered Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 10, first twenty or thirty
measures ;
—
to be analyzed solely with reference to the changes of key.
h. The Cadences of polyphonic Sections are generally, as implied in

par. 39a, much less decisive than those of homophonic forms, both in
harmonic and rhythmic respect. Still, they assume the aspect of the
Perfect cadence (only excepting a few rare instances where the formal
purpose demands the effect of a Semi-cadence), and, therefore, the
distinctive traits of the former are usually preserved, — especially as con-
cerns the lower part (the Bass).*

But the rhythmic interruption (or pause) is brief ; so much so as to
create the impression of an Elision ;** for the thematic thread is taken
up so promptly that the cadence-group of one Section is, almost always,
at the same time the initial group of the next.
For illustration (from Bach) :
^
2.
1. *v n.b.
Ex.
Tt
rt ^SgEJEj -•-#-
93. Conclusion of Ex. 91

N.B.
^5
•4)
IS B3
G I- I
* " Homophonic Forms," par. 3, par. 6. ** Idem, par. 60.

Par. 4oh. THE FIRST SECTION. 10$
Biîîi pBa^s C 117

G IV V I
^
e Hil^P
4.
=t= n
*i)
#st^^
^ÊSsai c IV II
=J53:
V7- -Il
6.
-Ji=Mz
' 1
—1—
I
*2)
m -p- -»-
p—•- -1*— •—"P-
v-' ts 5=p=
^=j»-
"H
D I V7 I CIV V I V^T" 7
*i) This cadence is much less distinct than the preceding ones, because of
the instability of the lower (Bass) part, and its culminating upon an Inversion of the
Tonic harmony. But the weight of the upper part, resting for some time upon the
Tonic note, is sufficient. — *2) Here, the lower part
again, hasty, though is its final
tones are strictly cadential. — *3) This cadence, on the contrary, unusually is strong,
being the final cadence of the entire Invention. It is permissible thus to add auxili-
ary tones, at any cadence. In Nos. 3 and 5 the leaps in the upper part are equivalent
to two distinct part-progressions (Exs. 15, 19), and give to the cadence the strength
of 3-part texture. — *4) The lower part proceeds immediately with the Motive.
The material of the cadence is very likely, in view of its special

object, to be episodic, and may even be entirely independent of all ante-
rior figures. It is, however, also possible, by ingenious treatment, to
interweave thematic figures with the cadence, — especially when more
than two parts are used.
See Bach, W.-t. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue I, measure 19; —

cadence on 3rd beat,
during thematic announcements (in Stretto) in Tenor and Alto. See also Ex. 96.
Note *i). Ex. 116, last measure.
1 06 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 41a.
Additional General Principles.
41a. Influence of harmonic bent. In determining the progressive

conduct of polyphonic parts, the harmonic and modulatory inclinations
must be respected, and even anticipated.
~~
If the harmonic progression (or, in other words, the choice of the
next chord) is self-defining, or perhaps even imperative, — as, for in-
stance, at certain urgent Dominant or Second-dominant chords, which

demand resolution, — then this, the Harmony, will dictate the movement of
the parts ; and, if necessary, the unessential licences of Imitation (par. 28)
will be summoned, to fit the thematic intention to this harmonic need.
Should the harmonic progression not be self-defining, but optional,
as, for instance, after any Tonic chord, — then the thematic design will
supply the impulse and determine the choice of chord and key ; and either
the Motive, with or without unessential modification, or the Episode,
willbe chosen, as appears most convenient. Review par. 11, par. 18,
and the last clause in the directions to Exercise 6B.
b. The Episodes. It would be very wrong to assume that the above

episodic passages (Exs. 89, 90, 91) proceeded from a deliberate inten-
tion, on Bach's part, to use just these particular fragments of thematic
material, in just this manner. His purpose was a far broader one ; and
the episodes, while responding first of all to the demand for variety,
are simply incidents in the realization of that purpose.
In general, then, the episode is rather an accidental consequence than
an aim ; and its details, — chosen, as they may from a myriadbe, of
equally consistent possibilities, — are influenced by the broad harmonic
conditions noted in par. 410, and determined by such comprehensive
considerations of Form as those specified in par. \od.
It is true, however, that the beginner must work along narrower
lines, until his range of experience widens toward the master's stand-
ard. And the student will therefore, for a time, plan his episodic pas-
sages as more or less mechanical derivations from foregoing thematic
premises ; making generous use of the Sequence (par. 41*:) ; not pausing
long to choose, but accepting the first reasonable suggestion ; and mean-
while analyzing the methods of great polyphonic writers (as found in
the given citations) with the most penetrating scrutiny, — thus enrich-
ing his experience both by experiment and by observation.
As already observed, the number and variety of episodic deductions from ante-
rior thematic figures, is practically unlimited, and the difficulty lies, not in finding a
Par. 41c. ADDITIONAL GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 107
derivative, but in choosing from among the well-nigh infinite range of possibilities.
So that the student who is at first apprehensive of not knowing what to do, will soon
experience the still more real embarrassment of deciding what not to do and this ;
latter consciousness is, in fact, the most trustworthy sign of progress in thematic
musical thought. Fof among so many possible deductions, many grades of excel-
lence will, of course, be represented some episodic forms will be more appropriate,
;
ingenious, and pregnant than others.

But, though the student may for awhile not succeed in finding the best forms,
or even fairly good ones, the simple determination to adopt this deductive process,
in his labors with the problem of musical composition, is, in itself, meritorious and
wise. For such logical processes contribute invariably, at least in some degree, to
the unity and stability of the musical structure. And as the student's experience
increases and his judgment matures, he will more and more readily and unerringly
select the better and best forms. At all events, this dependence is vastly preferable
to relying upon chance, or upon that most delusive of resources, personal inspira-
tion, for the answer to the vital and constantly recurring question, " What next ?
Eminent and indispensable as the impulse of emotional or intellectual ardor (" in-
spiration ") becomes to the advanced scholar and to the master of tone-texture, it is
fraught with delusion and distraction to the beginner.
c. The Sequence. One of the most essential details of effective

polyphony is the Sequence. It is the chief, if not the only efficient,
safeguard against the most characteristic danger that besets the poly-
phonic style, — that of purposeless rambling, or the uncertain, discur-
sive pursuit of a vague thematic scheme.
The Sequence imparts at least regularity and symmetry to the
operations of thematic development ; and, while particularly important
in the more vagrant episodic components, iseven freely used in the
thematic passages themselves (par. 401?). Hence, the pupil may fall
back upon Sequences at almost any time, and drift with them until
some higher structural condition asserts itself. The number of Sequences
should, however, be limited to two or three (i.e., three or four presentations
of the figure at a time, in all). A larger number is permissible only
when the figure is small. See also par. 2 if.
d. Unusual species of Imitation, with Essential changes (par. 29,

31), are very rarely employed in the first Section, excepting the simplest
variety of Shifted rhythm (par. 3 ir, second clause), and Contrary Motion S ;
and even the a rule, be deferred to the second, or a

latter should, as
still later, Section. Both Augmentation and Diminution, excepting when

applied to fragments of the Motive, are almost entirely inappropriate
in the two-voice Invention. The Stretto is most valuable in the later
course of a polyphonic form.

108 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Exercise n.
EXERCISE II.
A.Analyze the following specimens of the First Section of the 2-voice Inven-
tion. The contents of each group or measure must be defined, either as Motive,
Counterpoint, or Episode and when the latter, every figure must be accounted for
;
Bach, 2-v. Inv., No. i, meas. 1-7.

Bach, 2-v. Inv., No. 8, meas. 1-12.
Bach, 2-v. Inv., No. 10, meas. 1-14.
Bach, Well-t. Clav., Vol. I., Prelude 14, meas. 1-12.
Bach, English Suites, No. 4, " Prelude," meas. 1-12.
Bach, Partita (for clavichord), No. 2, " Sinfonia," 3rd movement (3-4 time),
meas. 1-20 (cadence in Dominant key).
Bach, Partita No. 3, " Fantasia," meas. 1-3 1 (largely episodic development
of first half of Motive cadence indefinite).
;
B. Take Motive No. 6 of Exercise 6B, and elaborate it into a moderately brief
First Section, according to the above directions (par. 40, 41). Review par. 22a
and d.
N. B. Begin this, and each of the following examples, on a separate sheet, leav-
ing ample space for the continuation dictated in Exercises 12 and 13.
The same with Motive 6 of Exercise 7 A.
The same with Motive 5 of Exercise 6B.
The same with Motive 4 of Exercise 6B.
The same with Motive 3 of Exercise 7A.
The same with Motive 4, or n, or 2, of Exercise jA.
C. The same with one major and one minor original Motive, — one measure, or
a little more, in length, invented strictly according to par. 380.
The Second Section.
42. The Second Section of an Invention must be conceived mainly

as a continuation of the development of the Motive and its resources,
initiated in the First Section. Its structural factors correspond to those
of the latter (par. 38), but their arrangement is generally less syste-
matic. The general requirements are as follows :
a. The new section may begin after the cadence of the foregoing
has had its full rhythmic value, or it may follow immediately, after an
elision. See par. 40^, second clause. It may begin with an announce-
ment of the Motive (either alone, or with a contrapuntal associate) ; or

with an episodic member. The former is the most natural and most
common. Ex. 93, Note *4).
b. A certain degree of independence is desirable, and therefore the

Second Section, while adhering to the spirit and general character of
Par. 42c. THE SECOND SECTION. 109
the First, may contain some distinctive traits; these may be obtained,
either by adopting for the new section some special resource of the
Motive (for instance, Imitation in contrary motion), or by inventing
more striking and characteristic counterpoints than those of the First
Section, or by introducing new episodic members. In this way, too,
necessary provision may be made for sustaining interest. See Ex. 94,
Note *2).
At the same time, it is desirable (though not indispensable) to

c.
some points of manifest resemblance, or even exact confirmation,

institute ~
between the sections, by repro Hur-i ri some portion of th e precedingp;
section, — of course in a different key, and, if possible, with inverted

parts (i.e., changing the former upper part to the lower, and vice versa).
Review par. 39^. And see pars. 55 and 36.
This parallelism of design is strikingly illustrated in the 1st 2-voice Invention of

Bach ;
— the last five measures of the Second Section (measures 11-15 * tne entire
Invention) almost exactly corroborate the last five measures of the First Section
(measures 3-7) ; but they are transferred to the next higher step ; the former upper
part becomes the lower, and its contrapuntal associate is partly reconstructed, — near
the end of the section.
d. The modulatory aim Second Section is, generally, the''

of the
Relative minor from a major beginning, or the Dominant key from a
minor beginning. "InlTworH, the first two cadences are usually made
in thekeys most closely allied to the original key, that is, the Dominant
and the Relative ; in a major Invention the Dominant cadence comes
first and the Relative next in a minor Invention the Relative comes
;
first, and then the Dominant. Other related keys may, however, be
substituted. Review par. \og, and h.
Section II.
'
*2)
Ex.
94.
no APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 42d.
M. (Cont. Motion.)_ __, M. (Cont. M.)_
'^^g -P
-*-• «t HJS^Îgi
*6)
^"
2=£ A-
*-+-
•s)
¥
M. (Orig. Motion.).
*9)
*-^
*7) ! ! j !
J— I l l
Episode.
S FJPttP3p
^
*8)
f
M.. M._
^ ^n^^^^
++^^
ll sail 3
*i) First review Exs. 87, 88, 92. The Second Section begins, after an elision,
with the Motive in the lower part it is followed, not by an Imitation, but by a
;
Sequence, thus confirming the general structure of Section I, which was very largely
sequential (par. 42c).
*2) This contrapuntal associate, upon one tone, is an obvious lapse of contra-
puntal energy a temporary and intentional subjection of " contents " to " form.''
; it is
The trill, however, lends vitality to the tone and, altogether, it contrasts with the
;
preceding Counterpoints sufficiently to individualize its Section (par. 42*). This is

emphasized by its recurrence, in the lower part, a few measures later.
Par. 43. THE SECOND SECTION. 1 1
•3) Here the Contrary Motion of the Motive appears for the first time. It
is reproduced in the prevailing sequential manner.

*4) Unessential change in quality of intervals ; comp. par. 28^, c ; Ex. yoA, with
Notes.
*5) This counterpoint corresponds to one which appeared near the end of the
First Section (par. 42*). Review Ex. 92, Note *i).
*6) Comp. Ex. 91, Note *3).
*7) Here the original motion of the Motive is re-adopted. The counterpoint
in the lower part is unusually powerful and characteristic. During this the move-
ment into the Dominant key is effected (par. 42^).
*8) The derivation of the Episode is apparent.
*9) See par. 20c.
EXERCISE 12.
A. Analyze the following specimens of the Second Section, defining, as before,

every element particular attention must be given to comparison of each with its
;
foregoing First Section

Bach, 2-v. Inv., No. 7, meas. 7-13 (symptoms of an additional cadence in
the 9th measure).

Bach, 2-v. Inv., No. 3, meas. 12-24 (M. apparently "reconstructed" by
addition of 3 introductory tones par. 42^.) ;
Bach, Partita No. 3, " Fantasia," meas. 31-66.
B. To each of the examples of a First Section, invented in Exercise-n B and

C, add a Second Section, according to the above directions. Review par. 41 a. A,
t', d.
The Third (as final) Section.
43. If the Invention is to embrace but three sections (perhaps the

most common number), the Third Section (or final one) tends to regain
and re-establish the original key. This will determine its general modu-
latory design, which, like all terminal sections of musical form, is
very likely to include a more or less positive presentation of the Sub-

dominant keys.*
a. Whether the Third Section is to constitute the climax of the

form, the definite and intentional culmination of the progressive devel-
opment within the preceding sections, or not, it is at least more sub-
ject than these to the demand for increased interest ; and therefore the
most attractive and ingenious methods of manipulation should be
enlisted. These may consist in the more striking (possibly hitherto
* " Homophonic /'"arms," par. 94^.

untried) species of Imitation or in more characteristic and effective

;
counterpoints, or in more elaborate episodic passages or, perhaps best ;
of all, in one or more forms of Stretto-imitation (par. 36) or in all of ;
these together.
b.Care must be taken, however, not to diverge too widely from

the prevailing character of the foregoing sections and while it is by ;
no means necessary to return to the beginning and corroborate the main

contents of the First Section, as is done in the Third " Part " of the
tripartite Song-forms * (see par. 490), it is still desirable to employ
some method of confirming one or the other of the preceding sections.

Review par. 42 b and c.
See Bach, 2-v. Invention No. 1. The parallelism between Sections I and II,
already cited, is again exhibited in almost exactly the same manner in the Third
Section, which, in measures 19-20, copies measures 3 and 4 (in Section I), and
measures 11 and 12 (Section II), — both parts in the Contrary motion of their for-
mer contents.
c. The final cadence is made in the original key, and, as a rule,

with more emphasis than the intermediate cadences, — frequently
strengthened by auxiliary (inner) tones. See Ex. 93, No. 6.
d. Sometimes, however, this cadence is evaded, by using the chord

of the Vlth step instead of the Tonic, in which case a brief Codetta is
added. For illustration
M.
Section III.
M._
^^^mmm. P~^.
1
* " Homophonic Forms," par. 8i«, 91.

Par. 44. THE THIRD SECTION. "3
M..(Cont. M.) jrall.

*6)
SEES=ljg^lEESE2EfaEEjE3Ef
2^=3^
VI
-,-,, f^— — PF—r—1~FisFfr
h ^^» 1
1
1 ! 1 !
i
1
*l) The Third Section begins, after an elision, with the M., again in the lower
part ; see Ex. 94, Note *i). It immediately modulates down into the Sub-dominant
key; see par. 43; also Ex. 57, No. 1 (par. 19V). *2) The counterpoints, in this
section, differ almost constantly from those of the foregoing sections see Ex. 87, ;
Note *i). But observe Note *5). — *3) This " counterpoint agrees with the preced-
"
ing one. — *4) Comp. Ex. 91, Note — *5) These two measures exactly confirm
*3).
measures 5 and 6 of the First Section (Ex. both — *6) Here the
87), in parts. ex-
pected perfect cadence is evaded, by substituting the VI whatfor the I (par. 43^) ;
follows is a Codetta, in which, again, the Contrary Motion of the M. happens to be

employed, as in Ex. 94, Note *3). —
*7) Unessential change in quantity of intervals ;
par 2 8 b.
Additional Sections.
44. If the Invention is to be extended to four, or perhaps even

more, sections, the above details of Section III will need to be
modified
(1) With regard to the adoption of the most effective and interest-
ing resources of thematic development, which, in this case, are more

likely (though not certain) to be deferred to the final section and ;
(2) With regard to the cadence, which will be made in some other
related key, — preferably in one of the Sub-dominant keys, thus also —
influencing the general modulatory design.
The conditions of individuality and confirmation (par. 42 b and c)
are valid, as before ; while those of par. 43 a, b, c, and d refer, in any

event, to the final section.
EXERCISE 13.
A. Analyze the following miscellaneous examples, as before

Bach, 2-v. Invention No. 1 meas. 1 5 to end. ,
Bach, 2-v. Invention No. 7, meas. 13 to end (possibly four Sections in all,
as intimated in Exercise 12A; brief Codetta).
Bach, Partita No. 3, " Fantasia," meas. 66 to end (four Sections in all, the
third one cadencing, very exceptionally, in the original key).
Bach, Partita No. 2, " Sinfonia," 3rd movement (3-4 time) meas. 20 to end ;
(3 Sections in all ; Section II largely episodic ; Section III very similar

to II, but shorter, and in different keys).
Bach, English Suites, No. 4, "Prelude," meas. 12-20 (Section II, cadence
in original key the auxiliary inner tones may be ignored).
;
Bach, English Suites, No. z, "Prelude," meas. 1-55; one long Section,
with an occasional very vague intimation of cadential purpose. In meas.
47-51 a Codetta is added, with modified repetition in the following 4
measures. The prevalence of the principal key is owing to the Divisions
"
that follow. The auxiliary tones may be ignored. The remainder of
this example is cited in par. 67, which may be briefly referred to.
B. To each of the examples invented in Exercise 11B, and continued in Exer-

cise 12B, add a third (as final) section, according to par. 43. Review far.
41 a, 6, c, d.
C. To the original examples extended in Exercise 1 22?, add a third and fourth
section (par. 44).
D. Write two complete Inventions, one in minor and one in major, with original
(short) Motives ; the number of sections optional, but neither less than two nor more
than five.
The Invention in Two-Part Song-form.
45. While the -'

sectional " form is most consistent with the char-
acter of surh polyphonic compositions as the above, representing the
continuous development of an adopted thematic germ, it is nevertheless
possible to cast them in the mould of some hotnophonic design, like the
Two- or Three-Part Song-forms.

When this is done, the treatment of the " Sections " must be
modified to conform with the more definite specific conditions of the
" Parts." Review par. 39a.
This will probably affect the extent, which is usually greater in
the " Part " than in the " Section " ; and there is generally a marked
distinction in the character of the cadences. As stated in par. 40^,
second clause, and illustrated at the beginning of Exs. 94 and 95, the
" Section" commonly ends with an elision; i.e., the cadence-chord (or
end) of one section is at the same instant the beginning of the next.
Par. 46. THE TWO-PART SONG-FORM. US
This is more rarely the case in the " Part," which is likely to have a
firmer, more decisive (i.e., longer) cadence-interruption.

Further, a certain predominance of the structural idea over the de-
tails of thematic texture will also be evident, when the Part-forms are
adopted, and this will influence the general character ; it may lead to
greater freedom of contrapuntal treatment, in favor of the distinctive
conditions of the homophonic style ; a more definite melodic character,
more regular succession of 4-measure phrase-groups, or even distinct
period-formations may prevail.
46. The primary grade of the Two-Part Song-form. This differs,
when applied to the Invention, but little from a Two-section design, the
main details of which are given in par. 40 and par. 43 i.e., the First ;
Section stands for Part I, beyond the

though possibly extended slightly
limit of the ordinary " Exposition," and ends with a somewhat stronger
form of cadence (par. 40^). The Second Part may be a trifle longer
it should exhibit the traits of confirmation explained in par. \2C ; and
must close with the perfect cadence in the original key, possibly
followed by a Codetta.
This form is illustrated in Bach, 2-v. Invention No. 8. The First Section, or
"PK.rt" (already analyzed), embraces the first 12 measures, — a regularity of design
suggestive of the group of 3 phrases it closes with a distinct perfect cadence in the
;
Dominant key. Measures 12-14 (beginning of Part II) correspond to the beginning
of Part I, with inverted voices ; measure 15 is a new episode ; the following 4 meas-
ures are a sequence of these, with inverted voices; measures 20-25 are thematic, but
new in treatment, involving sequential announcements of the M. in Contrary motion ;
measure 26 to the end exactly corroborates the last 9 measures of Part I, but trans-
posed one fifth lower, in order to close on the original Tonic. See par. 480, second
clause. *
See further, Bach, 2-v. Invention No. 10. Part I closes in measure 14 (already
analyzed as Section I) ; Part II in measure 30, with an evaded cadence, followed by
an extension of 3 measures.
The Genuine Two-Part Form. The First Part.
47. In the genuine (broader) Two-Part Song-form,* the First Part

may be still more extended ;
possibly (though somewhat rarely) embra-
cing two sections, the first of which fulfils the conditions of an " Expo-
sition," with a comparatively light cadence, while the second one carries
out the modulatory design, closing with a strong perfect cadence, —
always in the Dominant key (whether major or minor). More com-
* Homophonic Farms, par. 71-73, 78.

Il6 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 48.
monly, however, these details are all contained in one single (long)
section, which in some cases (e.g., in old Dance-forms) assumes the
character of a Period or Double-period. See par. 45, last clause.
The First Part is very frequently repeated; generally with " 1st
and 2nd ending,'' the second one with a more complete check of the
rhythmic movement.
In the following examples the First Part only is to be analyzed, but with great
minuteness Bach, English Suite No. 1 " Bourree I " the First Part bears many
: , ;
evidences of regular Double-period form, parallel construction; it contains 16 meas

ures, of which measures 9-12 corroborate measures 1-4 almost exactly. It is
repeated.
Bach, French Suite No. 3, " Allemande " ; the thematic germ is unusually small,
only a figure of 4 tones a perfect cadence is made on the Dominant, in the 10th meas-
;
ure, and a Codetta follows a very light cadence in the Relative major key, in measure
;
6, appears to divide the First Part into two sections. The Part is repeated.
Bach, French Suite No. 4, " Gavotte " the Motive is small (5 tones) the form
; ;
of Part I is clearly a " parallel period " it is repeated, with two endings.
;
Bach, French Suite No. 5, "Courante"; Part I is evidently a parallel Double

period of 1 6 measures, with sufficiently obvious semi-cadences every 4th measure
the Contrary motion of the M. occurs in measure 7 ; the evidence of three-voice
writing in measure 8, and the auxiliary tones in measures 1 and 16, may be ascribed
to the influence of the structural idea ; they do not affect the actual two-voice style.
The cadence is extended by a fragment of the Motive. The Part is repeated.

z, " Allemande "
Bach, Partita No. Part I contains two sections, the first one
;
closing in measure 6 on the original Tonic. The copious auxiliary tones assume
sometimes the importance of a third part; but, as intimated above, they do not
seem to affect the prevalent two-voice texture some of them represent merely a ;
device of notation.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 10
Part I is one long section, ;
suggestive of Phrase-group form; on the Dominant, and is repeated, with

it closes
two endings. Same work, Vol.11, Prelude 8; Part I, 16 measures long, suggestive
of large period-form.
The Second Part.

48. The Second Part of a genuine Two-Part Song-form is usually
much more distinctly individualized than any " section " of the smaller
forms. Its thematic basis may be defined in the following ways
a. Most commonly, the same Motive (that of the First Part) is
employed in Part II. It may preserve its original form exactly ; or

may possibly be slightly modified or reconstructed (as already wit-
nessed in Bach, 2-voice Inventions, No. 3, meas. 12-13; an d No. 7,
meas. 13-14). Usually the Motive is announced first alone, or
accompanied only by unessential auxiliary tones, as at the beginning.
Par. 48a. THE TWO-PART SONG-FORM. l\J
In this case (when the same M. is retained) the characterization of

the Part devolves largely upon the contrapuntal associates, which may
be new and more striking than in Part I.
The condition of confirmation still demands fulfilment, as shown in

par. 42<r. This is most effectually realized by the very common device
of ending the two Parts with the same member, — extending through an
optional number of measures (from one up to ten or more). The mem-
ber thus employed must reappear in a different key (Part I closing,
probably, on the Dominant, and Part II on the Tonic *) ; and frequently
the voices are inverted.
The Second Part may also consist of two (rarely more) sections,
and is sometimes repeated.
See Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 8; Part II begins with the
original form of the M., but the counter-motive is entirely new and character-
istic in rhythmic form; it reappears in measures 3, 16, 17, and 18 of the Second
Part; in measure 12 another new counter-motive appears, confirmed in the next
measure. Measures 5-7 of Part II corroborate measures 3-5 of Part I (inverted
voices, and somewhat modified) and measures 9-13 closely follow measures 6-10 of
;
Part I (voices not inverted). The last 5 or 6 beats of the two Parts are identical,
except in key.
Bach, Partita No. 2, " Allemande " ; Part II uses the M. unchanged it embraces
;
two sections (like its First Part), cadencing in the 6th and 16th measures. The
last 4 measures of the two Parts correspond, but in different keys and with inverted
voices. Part II is also repeated.
Bach, French Suite No. "Gavotte"; Part II uses the M. of the First Part,
4,
but much more and often in Contrary motion. There

persistently than the latter,
are no obvious traits of parallelism between the Parts. Both are repeated.
Bach, French Suite No. 5, " Courante " Part II very similar to Part I in form
;
and contents ; the M. is retained without change, the form is well-defined Double-
period Contrary motion again appears, this time in measures 8 and 9 the final
; ;
Phrase (4 measures) corresponds almost exactly to the ending of Part I, excepting

the transposition. Both Parts are repeated.
Bach, English Suite No. 1, " Bourree I"; Part II contains two sections, sepa-
rated in measure 8 the M. is slightly altered from its original form and length from
; ;
measure 13 to 22 the polyphonic character relaxes notably, the sequential succes- —

sions and repetitions in the upper voice (though thematic) and the simple rhythmic
accompaniment in the lower, lend a lyric effect to the passage that contrasts well
with the rest. The Second Part ends in measure 24 a 4-measure Codetta, with ;
nearly exact repetition, follows. Part II is repeated.

Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 17 (entire). The M. consists of
two similar measures, of which, now and then, only one measure is used. Part I
contains two sections, separated in measure 9 the auxiliary tones, the lyric quality
;
of the M., and its general treatment, impart a somewhat homophonic complexion to
m Homophonic Forms, par. 75.

1 1 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 48b.
the whole Prelude. (See par. 83.) Part II utilizes the same M., and adopts a very
similar mode of treatment, so that the Parts are more than ordinarily parallel, through-
out; measures 26-33 correspond closely to measures 10-16 (extended one measure)
with inverted voices. A Codetta of 10 measures follows.
Handel, Harpsichord Suite No. 16, "Gigue" (entire); Part I, a 6-measure
Period Part II contains two sections.
;
b. Quite frequently the Contrary motion of the M. is adopted as

thematic basis for the Second Part. It should be derived from the origi-
nal M. in the manner defined in par. 29a (Exs. 72 and 73), and must
then be shifted (transposed) to the key or harmony with which Part II
is to begin, — possibly with such modifications as may facilitate its
adjustment. Comp. Ex. 74, Note *4), entire. When this is done it is
likely, though by no means certain, that the Contrary motion will be
held in abeyance during the First Part.
The new form of the M. may either extend to the very end of Part
II, or it may be exchanged for the original motion in the later course
of the Part or the two forms of the M. may alternate, more or less
;
regularly, throughout.
This device is a characteristic feature of the so-called Gigue-form
(par. 51), in connection with which it will be more fully illustrated.
See Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 10. The M. of Part I (al-
ready analyzed) appears at the outset of the Second Part, but in Contrary motion,
and extended by sequence to four measures (double its original length). In this new
form it appears twice in the First Section (ending in measure 24 of the Second Part),
and again twice at the beginning of the Second Section the last announcement is ;
followed by a recurrence of a long passage from Part I (measures 33-55, correspond-

ing closely to measures 23-48 of the First Part, with inverted voices for a short
distance) during this parallel passage the original motion of the M. naturally re-
;
asserts itself. The cadence falls in measure 55, but is evaded (by a VI, par. 43</), —
and a Codetta is then added.
Bach, English Suite No. 5, Allemande " M. of one measure in upper part,
••
;
lower part auxiliary the original motion of M. recurs near the end.
;
c. In somewhat rare instances a new Motive is adopted for the

Second Part. Though thus quite independent, it should be intimately
related in general character to the first Motive. As before, the new
thematic form may be retained throughout the Second Part ; but it is
much more likely that the first Motive will reappear, near the end, — pos-
sibly in alternation with the new one ; more rarely in conjunction with it,
when, be by accident or design, they harmonize. For illustration The

it :
First Section partially shown in Ex. go, after being continued in a very
Par. 48c. THE TWO-PART SONG-FORM. 119
similarmanner up to its cadence (Efr major), in the 15th measure, runs

on as follows
Ex.
Meas. 14.
^ .§
EE b_^_y
-!•—
s *i)
Motive
t=E£
2..
-ft — •-
M. 2..
Bach.
^ fc=^
*4>
1
etc.
1-
^fcfe 1
EE35 Ttz*; -•—„,- t-ir^" PI

1 1
*l) Compare the new M. with the first one (Ex. 90) ; they are strictly kindred,
though actual similarity is avoided. Observe, further, that the new M. is introduced
during (across) the cadence (par. \ah, final clause).
*2) The peculiar notation of a (fl) is owing to Bach's conception of this 2nd
beat as Dominant harmony of c minor, with a as ascending passing-note. Comp.
par. 20b (and c).
*3) First half of the Motive. The parts cross here, briefly.
*4) A few measures later the first M. recurs (see Ex. 98).
See also Bach, French Suite No. 3, " Allemande." The M. of Part II, like that
of Part I (already analyzed), is very brief; though strongly suggestive of the first
M. in Contrary motion, it is really new (as its own Contrary motion, further on,
proves). The Part has two sections, separated in the 4th measure its perfect cadence ;
isevaded in the 10th measure (by a VI), and a brief Codetta, for which Contrary
motion is exclusively utilized, follows. This Part is even more persistently the-
matic than Part I, containing scarcely an episodic note. It is repeated.
EXERCISE 14.
A. Write a complete 2-voice Invention (M. original), in the primary grade of

Two-Part Song-form (par. 46). Review par. 41 a, i, t, d.
B. A complete Invention (in major) in broad Two-Part Song-form, according

to par. 47 and 48a, both clauses.
C. A complete Invention (in minor), with Contrary motion of the M. in Part

II, according to par. 48^.
D. A complete Invention (mode optional), with a new M. in the Second Part,

according to par. 48^. A Codetta may be added to each Part. See far. 54.
The Invention in Three-Part Song—form.
49. In all Three-Part forms there is, in addition to the above two
Parts, a more or less distinctly marked return to the beginning, and con-
sequent recurrence of the essential thematic contents of the First Part
or Section ; it is the fulfilment of this structural condition which devolves
upon the Third Part.* This affects, primarily, the cadence of the Second
Part, which should be made upon the Dominant of the original key,
and may therefore influence the later modulatory and thematic design
of the Part.
The Primary Grade.
a. The primary grade of the Three-Part Song-form, when applied to

the Invention, will resemble the Three-section design, explained in par.
40-43, with the significant exceptions, however, that the Third Section
is not to be, as there, merely the continuation of its predecessors, but
must represent the Return of the original key, and must reproduce a por-
tionof the early contents of Section I (perhaps no more than one or two
measures) ; and that, consequently, the Second Section must be so con-
* Homopkonic Farms, par. 81.

Par. 49a. THE THREE-PART SONG-FORM. 121
ducted, near its end, as to lead to this result. (Compare par. 43^.)
For example :
Part ( Section ) I. *i)
^H
Kx. *°
97. M.
iê
Eg
•-f« —— *
S=ffl
^«^w
Meas. 4.
££
e:
H=fc E3S^3^
•v «-*-•-'
M. -tp-
See original. *2)
5 6 7 9 10
§l± i^ffi**-^^'^^
Part ( Section ) II.
^m '3
M.
ffi
53
=3K^3
etc. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
m^m^^^
122 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 49a
Part (Section) III. »6)
*5)
Dom.
» BE
p_.
H.
5^
-I * F •-
1 SSf? ^g^ :g: m.
rit.
55&
i Q= ^^^^^^^
^ *=^=â§^£t fci
=p=s=
*-*-•-
*i) With reference to the uncertainty of definition, compare par. 39a. The
Motive is unusually long, and might be called a "Subject " (par. 38a).
*2) Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 2.
*3) This cadence is very indefinite ; hence the impression of " sectional " form,
and the distinction " primary grade " of the tripartite design.
*4) This measure and the following 7 correspond exactly (excepting the transpo-
sition) to measures 3-10 of Section I, but with inverted parts one sequential meas-
;
ure follows, and then the last measure of the Second Part, leading to a brief but
definite Dominant ending.
*5) The upper part corresponds to the conduct of the lower at the end of Part I.
*6) The purpose of this Third Section to reproduce the initial members of the
First Section, though somewhat indistinct, is nevertheless sufficiently obvious to
establish the tripartite design.
Par. 49a. THE THREE-PART SONG-FORM. 123
Furthermore, Ex. 96 is completed as follows :
r,
II
EEEi 3=i ^s fte
Ex.
98.
^
(Ex. 96 cont.)
Meas,
EE
19.
EEE
*i>
M P=5=
=E=f Eg=E
B^:
M^M
s
*=1
§@
Episode *2)
i_^_
EE f3£3£ eS ^S^
i
Part III.
fgjzgBilg^llgifp^ 3E^
I I
Motive 1..
î
Dom.
(See Ex. 90.)
» Efc
e£&5
*K lgpgf^lgl'^1
IEE 1* SS^SfEE ± is^tel
• rail.
3)
^ EE
M. 1..
r»-Ff-
Ss^^^^SS
ffl?
^T fCi=jC
3=*=* l
*i) First half of Motive 2.
*2) This second member of the Episode (which began in the 17th measure) is
M. than the foregoing.

less closely related to the
•3) Up to this point the Third Part agrees exactly with the initial members of
Part I (see Ex. 90). It is a much-abbreviated recurrence of the latter.
See also Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 14. Part I (already ana-
measure 12 with a strong Dominant cadence in the Second Part many
lyzed) closes in ;
auxiliary tones are used, but the impression of essentially 2-voice polyphony is not dis-
turbed; the Dominant semi-cadence in measures 18-19 indicates the termination of

Part II ; and the following tones are, under these circumstances, a sufficiently evident
return to the beginning, — though no more than one measure is reproduced, and that
with inverted voices. This somewhat vague Third Part is very brief, closing in
measure 22 ; a Codetta, corresponding to the beginning of Part II, follows.
The Genuine Three-Part Form.

50. In the genuine (broader and more clearly defined) Three-Part
Song-form, the details of Part correspond to those given in par. 47,
I
which review ; and the conduct of Part II corresponds to all the details
of par. 48 a, b, and c, — excepting such as concern its cadence, which,
in the Three-Part design, must be made on the Dominant, or, at all
events, upon such harmonies, and in such a manner,, as to prepare

for and lead decisively into the recurrence of the first measures (as
beginning of Part III).
a. As before, the thematic basis of the Second Part may be

(1) The same Motive (usually with new, and more or less char-
acteristic, counter-motives), — par. 48a, first and second clauses ;
(2) The Contrary motion of the original Motive, as in the " Gigue "
form (see par. 51) ; or
(3) A new Motive, — par. 48^
b. The object of the Third Part is, as usual, to re-establish the

principal key, and to re-announce the original Motive and its Imitation as
they appeared at the outset, in a sufficiently accurate manner and through
a sufficient number of measures to identify itself as the corroboration
of the First Part. In some cases, where the design is broad, the
parallelism extends through a large portion of the Third Part (perhaps
with inverted voices, and occasional modifications), or even to the end,
— excepting, of course, the necessary change of modulation and cadence.
But more commonly it is limited to the first two or three measures, and
the remainder of the Part is then elaborated independently, and, as
climax of the form, as ingeniously and effectively as possible. Review
par. 43a, which has peculiarly direct bearing upon " Part III."
When the Second Part has used the Contrary motion of the Motive,
the original motion is resumed at the beginning of Part III, and is then
either retained to the end, or, far more effectively, the two forms of the
M- subsequently appear in more or less regular alternation, or even in
Par. 50b. THE "GIGUE." 1
25
conjunction (as Stretto). And precisely the same principles apply when
Part II is based upon a new motive (as in Exs. 90, 96, 98).
See Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 3 Part I (already analyzed) closes in measure
;
12; Part II contains two well-defined sections, closing in measures 24 and 38; be-
tween the last cadence and the beginning of Part III (end of measure 42) a brief
passage intervenes, which, though largely thematic, serves the purpose of a Re-tran-
sition,* or returning passage Part III corroborates the first 4 measures of the First
;
Part exactly, transposes and inverts the following four, then resumes the original line
(transposed), but cadences on the VI (par. 43^) a Codetta follows. Throughout the
;
Second Part the M., as already seen, is reconstructed by the addition of three prelimi-
nary tones this form recurs once, in the Codetta.
;
Bach, French Suite No. 2, "Air"; the M. (one-half measure) is announced in

the upper part in a somewhat imperfect form, and imitated in slightly altered Con-
trary motion; Part II begins with Contrary motion, but otherwise maintains the
original motion it has two well-defined sections, of 4 measures each
; Part III (the ;
last 4 measures) vague in effect, though the structural purpose is clear during
is ;
the first 2 measures the lower voice agrees almost exactly with the upper voice at
the beginning of Part I.
Bach, French Suite No. 4, " Air " Part I largely episodic the Contrary motion
; ;
of the M. prevails in the Second Part, which contains two sections; Part III corre-
sponds very closely to the First, —
transposed after one and one-half measure,
without other changes.
EXERCISE 15.
A. Write a 2-voice Invention (M. original) in the primary grade of the Three-
Part Song-form (par. 49a).
B. An Invention (in minor) in genuine Three-Part Song-form, according to par.

50: in Part II the same M., but with new and characteristic contrapuntal asso-
ciates. First review par. 41 a-d ; and see par. 54.
C. An Invention (in major or minor), employing the Contrary motion of the

M. in the Second Part.
D. An Invention, with new M. in Part II.
The "Gigue."
51. The adoption of the Contrary motion of the Motive as thematic

basis for the Second Part (already touched upon, in par. 48^ and par.
50a), is so common in the " Gigue " as to constitute a partly, though
not definitely, distinctive trait of that old Dance-form ; and the term
" Gigue-form " is therefore often applied to a polyphonic Invention thus
designed, irrespective of its character. On the other hand, many ex-
* Homophonic Forms, par. 90c

amples of the old-fashioned Gigue may be found in which the Second

Part uses the original Motive, or a new one, as in ordinary forms.
The design of the whole is usually the Two-Part (more rarely
Three-Part) Song-form, with repeated Parts. The most common meas-
ure is
f . Review par. 48^. For illustration, see —
Bach, French Suite No. 2, " Gigue " M. two measures in length, imitated at ;
once in Stretto Part I is divided into two sections by a brief but decisive cadence
;
in the 23rd measure (Relative key) ; Part II uses the Contrary motion for 20 meas-
ures, when two announcements in original motion lead to a Dominant semi-cadence ;
Contrary motion is then resumed, though the next (last) section is largely epi-
sodic ; the evaded form of the cadence occurs 10 measures before the end. Two-
Part form, each Part repeated.
Bach, French Suite No. 6, " Gigue " Part I has two sections, terminating re- ;
spectively in measures 8 and 16; an episodic Codetta of 8 measures is appended,

based upon a motive suggestive of the Diminution of the original M. (par. 31^) ;
Part II uses Contrary motion, chiefly in the lower part, and with extensive epi-
sodic interruptions; its first section ends in measure 10, and its second one 5 meas-
ures from the end the final measures are a partial recurrence of the former Codetta.
;
The preponderant episodic portions, throughout this Gigue, seem to be based upon
an additional (auxiliary) Motive, or several Motives, generated out of the 3rd measure.
Compare par. 52a.
Bach, English Suite No. 1, "Gigue"; M. of 1 measure, imitated in Stretto;

Part I contains two sections, and a Codetta of 4 or 5 measures Part II begins with ;
a curious version of the M, —

the first half only in Contrary motion, the second half
as before this version alternates with the original form during the First Section (5
;
measures), and again during the Second Section, which is its almost exact sequence
a Third Section follows, and the added Codetta corresponds exactly to the former
one.
Bach, French Suite No. 4, " Gigue " ; in the 4th and 5th measures, and once or
twice later, the notation represents three-voice texture, but the effect is distinctly
that of auxiliary tonesPart I has but one section, followed by a Codetta (measure 22)
;
beginning with a quaint modification of the M. (in the lower part), compare par. —
33 ; Part II employs Contrary motion throughout two sections, up to the Codetta its
(7 measures from the end) the Codetta begins with one announcement of the M. in
;
Contrary motion, not included in the former Codetta, and then reproduces the latter
in its full length, with inverted parts.
Bach, English Suite No. 5, " Allemande " in the Second Part a modified form ;
of the Contrary motion is adopted there are occasional brief intimations of 3-voice
;
texture the original motion of the M. recurs near the end.

;
Bach, English Suite No. 4, " Gigue " here also, as in the preceding examples,
;
there is an intimation of 3-voice texture (in measures 5-8 only) the lower part, dur- ;
ing measures 1 and 2, though thematic enough to simulate a genuine Imitation, is

nevertheless only auxiliary, —
the M. is i\ measure in length, and its first real
Imitation begins with the last tone in measure 2 the last 5 measures of Part II ;
correspond to the ending of Part I. Each Part is repeated.

Par. 52. INVENTION WITH ALTERNATING MOTIVES. 1 27
The Invention with Two (or more) Motives in Alternation.
52. A second (new) Motive may appear not only at the beginning
of the Second Part, as specific basis of the latter (par. 48^), but may be
introduced and developed in closer connection and alternation with the
first, or principal, Motive.
a. Such an additional thematic germ may be so unimportant in

character and extent as to subserve, chiefly or entirely, the episodic
purposes, in which case it is to be called an Auxiliary Motive (or
Figure), rather than " 2nd Motive."
An example of this kind has already been seen in Bach, French Suite No. 6,
" Gigue" and others will be cited later.
;
b. When the new M. is more nearly or completely co-ordinate with

the principal (first) one, it may appear at the beginning of the second
(possibly a later) section, and become its thematic basis. Or it may
enter into the polyphonic texture still earlier, — during the First Section,
or Part, — and be utilized thereafter throughout the Invention, in more
or less constant close alternation (not simultaneous conjunction) with the
principal Motive.
As already stated (par. 48^), the new M. must, while asserting a
certain measure of distinct individuality, still be conceived in intimate
consistency of character with the first Motive.
For illustration, see Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 13
Ex.
99. fe^pii^h^g^î Motive 1. Motive 2.
The first used during 2 measures the 2nd M. during the rest
(principal) M. is ;
of Part I (up to measure 6) same arrangement prevails, very nearly, during the
; the
First Section of Part II (measures 6-13) in the remainder of Part II (up to measure
;
18) the 2nd M. appears alone, somewhat modified; in Part III (measure 18 to the
end) the two Motives are employed, in closer alternation.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 23 :
Bach.
Ex.
IOO. ^W»p3£gg Motive r. M. z. ( Auxil.? )
The 1 st M. appears only at the beginning of Part I, with one Imitation, partly
in Contrary motion the 2nd
; M., which, but for its domination, would be regarded
merely as an auxiliary figure, supplies the basis of development up to measure 8,

afterwhich fragments of M. I lead to the cadence (measure 1 2) Part II extends to ;
measure 37; its First Section, ending in measure 17, is episodic, but derived from'
M. 1 an independent episode follows, suggesting a third M. (compare par. 52*-)
;
in measure 23 the second M. again asserts itself, and continues some time, though
fragmentary j measures 29-32 closely resemble the episode of the foregoing section
Part III (measure 37 to end) is much like the First Part, but the 2nd M. is absent.
There are several evidences of 3-voice texture, but scarcely enough to be conclusive.
The whole example belongs, more accurately, to the Prelude-class (Chap. IX).
And the same is true of Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 13, in which
the following contrasting thematic members are discoverable
Motive 1 (introductory). Motive 2 (principal).
Of these, Motive 2 appears to be the more essential and important. The design
is 3-Part Song-form ; Part II contains three well-defined sections ; in the first one
ihe two Motives are announced in conjunction (simultaneously) ; Part III resembles
Part I very closely, but is abbreviated. A coda of 8 measures is appended.
Handel, Clavichord Suite No. 7, " Andante," employs the following Motives
(Comp. Ex. 99.)
Ex.
,02 -ESI & £ 3=
Motive 1. M. 2 (in Sequences).
The design is 3-Part Song-form, Part III somewhat vague and abbreviated.
Handel, Clavichord Suite No. 16, "Allemande," is a very clear exposition of the
following, in almost constant clos« alternation :
103
Motive 1. Motive 2.
The design is 2-Part Song-form, each Part containing two sections, and repeated.
The thematic development is unusually regular and perspicuous.
c. More rarely, three Motives participate in the development of an

Invention ; either (1) as the respective thematic basis of three succes-
sive sections, or (2) in closer and more constant alternation with the first
(principal) M., or with each other, in any order.
An illustration of the first of these methods is found in Bach, Well-temp. Clavi-

chord, Vol. II, Prelude 4 (3-voice polyphony, and therefore to be reviewed in minuter
detail in Chap. VII) a different M. is employed in each one of the first three Sec-
;
Par. 53. THE LYRIC INVENTION. 1 29
tions (beginning in measures 1, 17, 27), the first announced in the upper, the second
and the third in the upper part.

in the inner,
The second method is illustrated in Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II,
Prelude 17 (belonging properly to the " Prelude "-species, Chap. IX); the following
Motives appear, in measures 1 j., and 7 , :
Ex.
104, sag j^giil
Motive 1.
.Motive 2. Motive 3.
Besides these, there are meagre evidences of additional brief auxiliary Motives.
The principal M. (No. 1) is each time accompanied by a body of auxiliary tones,
almost equivalent to two extra voices, but their unessential quality is nevertheless
entirely obvious ; the remainder of the texture is two-voice. The form is sectional
(par. 39) ; each of the four Sections begins with the principal M., and employs both
of the others generously, and with considerable regularity of design (M. 2 occasion-
ally in Contrary motion). Section 2 begins in measure 17, Section 3 in measure 34,
Section 4 in measure 50. The latter has quite a definite semi-cadence in measure
63, suggesting a possible fifth Section from that point to the end. The episode in
measures 52-59 is based upon the first contrapuntal associate of M. 3 (measure 7),
which is so prevalent that it might be regarded as a 4th Motive.
The Lyric Invention, with a Long Theme.
53. The 2-voice Invention may, exceptionally, be based upon a

thematic sentence of greater length than the ordinary Motives, seen in
the above examples. Such a lengthy theme is very likely to represent
the regular 4-measure Phrase, or even 4- to 8-measure Period-form, with
a correspondingly definite melodic design, usually distinctly lyric in
and with a well-marked
character, semi-cadence (upon either a Tonic or
Dominant chord).
Obviously, so extended a Motive cannot be announced (imitated)
effectively very often in the course of an ordinary Invention, at least
not at its full and therefore the development, while none the
length ;
less strictly polyphonic, will necessarily be more largely episodic than

usual ; and in general the structural idea and considerations of " form "
will prevail almost constantly over the thematic purposes (compare par.
45, last clause). The episodic interludes will probably be derived from
13° APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 54.
some figure or figures of the large Motive, though they may be inde-
pendent. (Compare par. 38// and par. 41^/ see also par. 42^.)
See Bach, 2-voice Invention No. 14 the theme is announced in the upper part
;
and extends into the 4th measure it consists of a figure two beats in length, which
;
alternates with its Contrary motion, excepting in the 3rd measure the lower part is ;
"auxiliary" in character, though it is again employed as "counterpoint " to the Imi-

tation of the theme (in measures 6-8) measures 4, 5, and 9-16 are episodic, derived
;
directly from the germinal figure of the theme one more announcement of the entire
;
theme, in the lower part (in shifted rhythm), leads to the concluding cadence. The
entire design appears to embrace but one long section, as Phrase-group.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 24; theme of 4 measures, an-
nounced in upper part and imitated immediately in lower part, with different counter-
point an Episode follows, based during 4 measures upon a new auxiliary figure,
;
and then for 4 more measures upon a figure from the second contrapuntal associate
(measure 7) the Second Section begins in measure 17, announces the theme four
;
times in unbroken succession, using two former and two new " counterpoints " it ;
then becomes episodic (measure 33), the lower part corresponding to the upper one
of the former Episode, during 4 measures, while the following 4 measures are a new
Episode the Third Section (measure 41) announces one-half of the theme, first in the
;
upper, then in the lower part an Episode follows, 8 measures of which correspond
;
very nearly to the first Episode (excepting in key) the remaining measures (53—59)
;
are new Episode and cadence. A Coda is added, containing one announcement of
the theme, and a few effective thematic fragments.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 6 Two-Part Song-form and 5- ;
measure Codetta; theme extending into the 5th measure; both Parts are largely
episodic, — especially Part II, — but constantly in close touch with the contents of
the theme.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. Prelude 1 5 Two-Part Song-form theme

II, ; ;
3 measures long, appearing in a modified form of Contrary motion in Part II (com-

pare par. 51) the extensive episodic passages, which contribute to the Prelude-like
;
character of this Invention (see Chap. IX, par. 83), are strictly congruous, if not of
thematic derivation. The last six measures of the two Parts correspond.
The Student's Attitude Toward the Prescribed Tasks.
54 In working out the required Exercises in these grades of 2-

voice Polyphony, the student need harbor no fear that he may imitate
the given authoritative examples of Bach too closely, and thus perhaps
unconsciously acquire the unwelcome habit of conceiving and writing
in the somewhat antiquated manner of these old-fashioned compositions.
The propagation of this particular style — the multiplication of pieces
for which our modern ears have but little sympathy — • is not the aim of
the student's present labors ; it is simply the exercise of contrapuntal
discipline within the dominion of these forms, as a means to an end, —
Par. 54. THE. LYRIC INVEMTTOtf. 131
an end which may be as modern and original as the student (or the
listener) could desire.
There is but little likelihood that the pupil will wholly escape the
influence of modern musical thought, especially if he be observant (as
successful students invariably are), alert to recognize and to appropriate
the acquisitions of recent times, whether in the polyphonic or in the
homophonic domain of musical creation.
Polyphony is merely a product, resulting from the employment of the
contrapuntal method; and this method may be applied in dealing with
any phase of musLal style, romantic, classic, dramatic, or archaic. The
distinction rests mainly, perhaps, upon the choice of harmonic basis, out
of which all Polyphony must emerge, just as well as Homophony (par.
ii); for this harmonic element which has grown "modern," leav-
it is
ing former simpler customs of harmonic progression behind. The dis-

tinctive contrapuntal " method " adopted for the presentation of the
harmony is, however, not thus subject to the changes of time Polyph- ;
ony is the embodiment of the same principle in the twentieth century

as in the fifteenth but its character and complexion will differ, as the
;
harmonic material becomes richer and more pliable.

There can be no excuse for writing an unattractive Invention in
our day, on the ground that it must be produced by contrapuntal
methods. Nothing is devoid of interest in which the operation of a
quick imagination is discernible and nothing discloses, from the proper
;
point of view, a more powerful and constant stimulus to the imaginative

faculty, than the contrapuntal methods of tone-association.
Brief reference may be made to par. 72 and par. 82. And the following effective
specimens of the modern Invention for two parts should be thoroughly analyzed
Rubinstein, Prelude, op. 24, No. 2 ;

3-Part Song-form ; in Part I the Motive,
4 measures long, appears twice, followed by an episode (measures 9-16) ; Part II

(measure 17) announces the M. once, in lower voice; a long and brilliant episode
follows (measures 21-52), based wholly upon the last measure of the M. in meas- ;
ures 35-36 the figure is somewhat concealed among auxiliary tones a second episode ;
(measures 53-60) is based on the first measure of the M. *. strong Dominant ;
cadence occurs in measure 60, followed by an extraordinary organ-point, as Re-tran-

sition into Part III ; the M. is announced twice in Part III (measures 77-84) ; from
this to the end is episodic Coda, based on first member of the Motive.
Chopin, fitude, op. 10, No. 4 3-Part Song-form ;

the M. lies in the upper ;
part, measures 1-4 the texture is largely episodic, though all derived directly from
;
the M. ; there is an auxiliary harmonic accompaniment almost throughout, but the

whole is distinctively 2-voice Invention-form (Prelude-species, par. 83).
EXERCISE 16.
A. Write two examples of the " Gigue "-form (par. 51), one in major and one
in minor. Review par. 41 a, i, c, d, and par. 54.
B. An Invention, in optional form, with two Motives in close alternation.

Par. 52*.
C. An Invention in three Sections, with a separate Motive for each section, —

returning to the first M. near the end. Par. 52^.
D. An Invention with a longer theme, of lyric character. Par. 53.
The Natural Species of Double-Counterpoint.
55. Double-counterpoint is a process ; but the term is generally-

applied to the product resulting from it. The counterpoint is said to
be " double " when the added voice (i.e., the contrapuntal associate)
presents perfect agreement with the given voice or Motive, in two differ-
ent relations to the latter. These two relations always imply, in Double-
and refer to the agreement of
counterpoint, the distinction of register,
the added part both above and below the given part or, in a word, the ;
counterpoint is " double " when the parts admit of inversion.
a. The inversion of the parts is effected by transferring either

part toward and beyond the other (shifting it up or down, as the case
may be) ; thus, the upper part may be shifted down, past the lower or ;
the lower part shifted up ; or each may be shifted so that they exchange
registers. See Exs. 105, 106, 107.
b. When one of the parts is shifted just an octave (or possibly two
octaves), while the other part remains where it was, it is obvious that
no essential change in theirharmonic relationship takes place, because
each retains its original series of letters (or tones), and the association
or union of the melodies is actually the same as before ; the only differ-
ence being that their respective registers have been exchanged. Each
contrapuntal interval is simply inverted, and the octave-inversion of
an interval, as has been amply tested, is practically identical with the
original interval. For illustration :
(a), the Original Counterpoint.
Ex. -
105.-
e etc.
1
Par. 55b. NA TURAL DOUBLE-CO UNTERPOINT. 133
later
m 6
(3),
3
the Inversion. *i)
2 3 etc
i:
5^
*i) At b the two parts are inverted, the original upper part becoming the lower,
3tg
Bach.
=**%- 1
and the lower the upper. The original upper part remains where it was, and the
lower is shifted upward one octave, beyond the other. That no essential change takes
place in the harmonic relations of the parts, is easily verified by comparing the
contrapuntal intervals.
The result would be precisely the same if the lower part were to
remain, and the upper part shifted down an octave
F7 S - - * j
I
Ex.
106 $H£ 3=
SB
Inversion of Original Counterpoint.
-*-£:
i^ n
Or if each part were shifted one octave (possibly two octaves)
towards and beyond the other:
(a), the Original Counterpoint.
Ex.
107.
ftaiste t*fcM mil
Iftlslgllllfcfeii i
&
(5), the Inversion. Bach.
itzt fe££BE
-J-M-t- l
ms^m^^^^
*,) etc.
*i) Here the original lower part is shifted up one octave, and the upper is
shifted down two octaves.
c. Further, the same result is obtained (without essential change)

when the Inversion of the original counterpoint is transposed. In this
case each voice is shifted toward (and past) the other in such a manner
that the sum of the two shifts equals an octave; for instance, if the
upper voice is shifted down amust be moved up a 4th
5th, the lower
or one a 3rd and the other a 6th; or one a 2nd and the other a 7th.
For example
(a), the Orig. Counterpoint.
(£), the Inversion. *i)
/ etc. later : *2)
I fm mm
û^~igg -
iw. FEE*l
s Bach.
*df. m
etc.
*i) The upper part is shifted down a 7th, the lower up a 2nd (or 9th, which is
the same thing) the original counterpoint is thus transposed bodily, as Inversion,
;
from C major to d minor. That no other change than simple " inversion " has taken
place, is shown by the first contrapuntal interval (a 3rd, becoming a 6th in the
Inversion). See Ex. 86, Note *6).
*2) The inverted form does not need to be enchained with the original counter-
point, as chances to be the case in Ex. 107 ; it may occur and recur at any later
moment in the form.
56. Such Inversions as these, in the octave or in intervals equalling

an octave (or two or more octaves), are so common, so nearly inevitable
in contrapuntal writing, and the product is, as has been shown, so likely
to be exactly equivalent to the original, that this — the Inversion in

Par. 57- NATURAL DOUBLE-COUNTERPOINT. 1 35
the Octave — is called the Natural species of Double-counterpoint. Its

feasibility is almost a foregone conclusion, and therefore all good con-
trapuntal association is, in a sense, naturally double-counterpoint.
57. No specific rules can be given for natural Double-counterpoint.

The best method is to write the counterpoint as usual, and then simply
test the effect of inverting the parts ; any lurking discrepancies can thus
easily be detected and removed. The following general points may,
however, be borne in mind
(1) The Original counterpoint should be as perfect and free from
irregularities as possible.
(2) Some caution should be exercised in the use of the chord-5th,

for certain irregularities that are permitted with it in the upper part
become objectionable in the lower ; this refers particularly to skips to
or from the chord-5th, during a change of harmony. Compare par. 17^,

last clause; (Ex. 50.Z?, No. 2, the last measure, would be much worse in
inverted form). See also par. 62.
A curious instance of characteristic disregard of this rule is seen in the follow-

ing. Its undeniable peculiarity is palliated by broad considerations, that will become
obvious to the more advanced st ucient
(b) Inversion.
, , _ . % N.B. Bach.
M^Mmmmmmn
.
(a) Ong. *i) ^,1 I
Ex.
109,
fj^N-^f- •
N.B. US'ZS-f
^-" -"I I
I
*i) The c% in the lower part is the 5th of the chord (I of f% minor). In the
Inversion, the chord-5th_/J, also, is unpleasantly prominent in the upper part.
(3) If the two parts are kept within an octave (from each other),
the shifting of either part a single octave suffices to effect Inversion.

If the parts diverge more than an octave at any point, however, it will
be necessary to shift each voice an octave (or either voice two octaves)
in order to obtain Inversion throughout ; and so on.
58. Frequent unconscious use has already been made of natural

Double-counterpoint in the preceding exercises. Systematic application
of it may hereafter be made, in the Invention, in many ways that will
suggest themselves to the student. For instance :
In the sectional form, any later section may correspond exactly (or
nearly) to some foregoing section, but with inverted voices, and, of
course, in a different key.
136 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 59-
Or, in the 2-Part Song-form, a portion, or the whole, of the Second

Part may be an inverted reproduction of the First, in the proper key.
This is strikingly illustrated in Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I,
Fugue 10, to which brief reference may be made ; the entire Second
Part (measures 20-38) is an Inversion of Part I (measures 1-19) in a
different key ; the necessary modulation is made in measure 29, first
beat (compare with measure 10).

Or, in the 3-Part Song-form, Part III may corroborate Part I in the
same manner.
See Beethoven, Pianoforte Sonata, Op. 10, No. 2, Finale, measure 87 (ff) to 106.
Beethoven, Violin Son., Op. 30, No. i, Finale, Var. V; meas. 1-8, inverted in
meas. 9-16; meas. 17-24, inv. in meas. 25-32.
EXERCISE 17.
Write a number of 2-voice Inventions, applying the principle of natural Double-

counterpoint, according to the suggestions in par. 58.
CHAPTER VI.
The Contrapuntal Association of Three Melodic Parts

(Voices).
59. Review the definition of Polyphony given in the Introductory
Statement (page 1).
The " harmonious " association of three co-ordinate melodies must

necessarily be controlled by the conditions of chord-structure to a far
greater and more manifest extent than that of only two voices, for —
which latter a schedule of euphonious intervals was found to suffice.
For this reason 3-voice Polyphony exhibits a much more evident
harmonic character than the 2-voice and the chief difficulty in its suc-
;
cessful manipulation consists in respecting and enforcing the control of the

Chord-forms, without fettering the individual parts and interfering with
that independence and melodic smoothness which is, in true Polyphony,
as significant a requisite as that of unanimous action.
60. The chord-forms, i.e., any combination of three or four 3rds, with or with-
out inversion, afford the necessary consonance or general " harmony " of effect.
But an excess of this harmonic (i.e., homophonous) effect must be counteracted, by
modification (through inharmonic adjuncts) sufficient to disguise the chords, as such,
and create the impression of individual voice-movements within the channels marked
Par. 61. THREE-VOICE POLYPHONY. 137
off by the chord-tones. The problem of genuine and effective Polyphony for more
than two parts is, concisely stated, that of achieving this impression of independent
melodic progressions, and still preserving sufficient evidence of the chords to ensure
a harmonious result.
Technically considered, thisis secured by the employment of Suspensions, Pass-
ing-notes (accented and unaccented), and occasional Neighboring tones or Appoggia-

turas, as disguising adjuncts of the predefined chords, as evidences of freedom and
elasticity in a movement whose general direction is dictated by an underlying stern
principle of harmonic necessity. But the manner and the extent of the use of these
inharmonic (dissonant) factors must be vigilantly guarded, and tempered by due
consideration of the demands of euphony and harmony. Review par. \-]b.
Details of Three-Voice Polyphony.
61. a. This imparts a corresponding degree of importance to the

harmonic idea, and greatly emphasizes the rules of chord-succession given
in pars. 18 and 19, which must be carefully reviewed.
b. Of the three parts, two will very likely co-operate temporarily
according to the rules of 2-voice polyphony given in Chapter II ; and the
remaining (third) part aims to secure some essential tone which, with the
essential tones already present, completes some legitimate chord-structure.
This rule is merely stated for the convenience of the student, who, as beginner,
can scarcely expect to conduct three independent parts successfully, all at once, but
will need some such division of the labor as the rule indicates. He must observe
that no attempt can be made to intimate which two of the three parts will be chosen
thus to form the temporary basis of the contrapuntal fabric, or how far the choice
each time extends ; for that depends upon conditions that are either self-evident, or
follow as a matter of course out of later details, — especially par. 64. And in any
case the rule does not refer to a certain pair of voices throughout, but implies a
temporary choice, liable at any moment to be exchanged for another pair. The ulti-
mate consideration is, after all, that the three parts together must represent, in their
simultaneous essential tones, some legitimate chord-form.
Hence, in the preliminary draught of the three-fold melodic asso-

ciation, the intervals of the 3rd, 6th (8ve, etc.), will govern the choice
of simultaneous essential tones, as shown in pars. 14 and 15. For
illustration
Bach.
mZZQ *= E
r
<>f
a-^ —
i«pg ±
d-f-(a).
c
c-e-(g). c-(c)-e.
=t
f-(f)-a. (b)-d-f. e-g-(b). a-(a)-c.
I
138 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 61C.
*i) Assuming (arbitrarily, simply by way of illustration) that Bach defined first
the conduct of the two higher parts, it will be seen that they conform exactly to the
rules of 2-voice counterpoint, and represent, in their essential tones, fragments of

successive chords, whose absent intervals afford the staple out of which the additional
(3rd) part is constructed.
*2) The notes of the lower part correspond to the letters in parenthesis, and
represent, in nearly every case, the tones which complete the chord-structure.
Further
Bach.
c-c-(e)-g. f-a-c-(e).(c). (b)-d-f.f-f-(a).b-(d)-f-a. f<d). (b)-d-f.
*i ) Assuming, as above, the small notes to represent the added (3rd) part, the
same process may be traced. See also Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Fugue 3,
measures' 1-7. Here the process of adding first one part to the given motive, and
then a third to these two, is actually employed the upper and inner parts of meas-
;
ures 3-4 become the inner and lower parts in measures 5-6, with transposition and
very slight change to these a new part is added, above. See par. 66a.
;
Vol. I, Fugue 1 3, first 6 measures the same, in every particular.

;
Vol. I, Fugue 18; the lower and inner parts of measures 3-4 become inner and
upper parts in measures 5-6, with transposition, while a third part is added, below.
Vol. I, Fugue 23 the same.
;
Vol. II, Fugue 16; the same (measures 5-8 increased to three parts in measures
9-12).
Vol. II, Fugue 23 ; the same (measures 5-8 increased to three parts in measures
10-13).
c. As stated in par. 60, second clause, the harmonic points thus

definitely fixed as basis for the conduct of the additional (3rd) part,
Par. 6id. THREE-VOICE POLYPHONY. 139
should be so modified or disguised by means of auxiliary tones, unes-

sential neighboring and passing-notes {inharmonic tones, in a word), as
to counteract the impression of simple chord-succession. This device
is omitted in Ex. no, but plainly seen in Ex. in, No. 2 ; and may be
verified in the other given illustrations, also.
But this is not all ; the insertion of passing-notes must not be
adopted as a device to end alone, or the texture will, after all,
this
amount to no more than "embellished harmony." A higher purpose
— that of independent melodic progressions —
must dictate the employ-
ment of such inharmonic tones ; and while the progressions must neces-
sarily be governed by the chord-contents, their independence must be
ensured by sufficient evidence of thematic purpose. Review, in this
connection, par. 17^, (pars. 131, 2i£); also par. 7.
Of the purely mechanical means of obtaining voice-independence,

d.
none is more efficient and indispensable than the Tie, which advances
in importance in proportion to the number of polyphonic parts asso-
ciated. Review thoroughly par. 22*/, and par. 9, entire. For example
N.B.
g* I
££
l»0
£ 6?ff
-3-r N.B.
*3=t
-T=?=
N.B.
1
Ex.
12
J
A. T
^M
ESe£EEE
* m
gV E VI d-f-a. b-d-f. e-g-b-d. a-c-e.
Bach.
*± 1
jiIE==£ N.B.
&F N.B.
f=*
N.B.
:*J*fc f
g-b-d. a-c-e-g. d-f-a. g-b. c-e-g.
*l) Some of the ties in this sentence result in positive dissonance, by producing
Suspensions ; at other places, on the contrary, the tie simply modifies the rhythm of
its part, without influencing the consonant effect. See also Ex. 57, No. 6 (ties in
lower part) ; Exs. 58, 59, 60 ; Ex. 111, Nos. 1 and 2 Ex. 113.
;
140 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. Cie.
e. The greater the number of parts employed in a polyphonic com-

plex, the greater the likelihood and necessity of indirect coincidence
between a certain pair of them, — to counteract the danger of exces-
sive dissonance from the independent movements of so many individual
parts. This is probably most frequently exhibited in the prevalence of
parallel movement in 3rds or 6ths, between two of the three (or more)
voices, —a
trait which is strikingly common in the best examples of
Polyphony, and affords the surest guaranty of smooth and euphonious

effect. The limit of such a parallel series of 3rds or 6ths can be
defined only by a perfect understanding of the momentous principle
stated in par. 60, and of the " spirit of Polyphony " in general. Some-
times (as if to redeem the independence of the parts, or perhaps for
thematic reasons) the line of parallel 3rds or 6ths is disguised by some
means for instance, in Ex. 112 the inner part is obviously defined in
;
parallel jrds with the upper, from measure 4 to 8 but by embellish- ;
ment, first in one part and then in the other, their indirect coincidence
is completely veiled. See further
Bach.
g-td._ -c-e-g. f-a-c. d-f-a-c.
*i) Measure 1, beat 2, — 6ths between outer parts (up to first pulse of next
beat) ; — 6ths between inner and lower parts (again up
beat 3, pulse of next to first
beat) measure
j beats and — 3rds between outer
2, 1 2, disguised by the omission parts,
of alternate i6ths in upper part (again the extend the following

parallels into beat,
modified by transferring the tone to the higher octave) beat
last — 3rds between ; 3,
inner and lower parts. See also Ex. 57, No. 6 ; Ex. 1 1 1 , No. 2.
Of similar (though far inferior) efficiency is that variety of indirect

coincidence in which two of the parts reciprocate in the embellishment
of chord-tones that lie a 3rd apart, — both using the same tones, but in
contrary direction. Thus
1.
Ex. lt± :fc»

1 14.
tTCr ££T"ttr gG^poanagrcgj

a
Par. 6if. THREE- VOICE POL YPHONY. I 4I
Bach.
N.B. N.B.
N.B.
——
m^nî 4— •-
-3
tt&
a p
Bach uses this device so rarely, as compared with his employment of parallel
it may justly be regarded with suspicion, as a polyphonic factor.
3rds and 6ths, that
See Beethoven, Pianoforte Sonata, op. 106, first movement, measures 55-61.
f. All general rules of contrapuntal association (as those of par.

17 (/and e ; pars. 18, 19, 20) apply alike to every variety of polyphonic
texture, regardless of the number' of parts employed. The rule in par.
1 jf, with reference to conducting the parts in contrary (opposite) direc-
tions, applies to polyphony for three and more parts also, but with cer-
tain modifications. It is evident that all three (or four) parts cannot
move at the same time in different directions ; but it is possible (1) to
hold one part level, while the other two are respectively ascending and
descending (or even moving in parallel direction) ; (2) to carry one
part, at least, in contrary motion with the other two, so that one de-
scends while two are ascending, or vice versa. It is wise to conduct
the two outer parts in opposite directions, as a rule, and to avoid par-
allelmovement in all three parts at once.
Of peculiar value in 3-voice polyphony is the device of modulatory
Substitution expounded in par. 19c, which is to be thoroughly reviewed.
62. The conduct of the lowermost part is of increased importance

in 3-voice polyphony, because of the more pronounced harmonic char-
acter of this species of writing (par. 59), and the consideration due to
those forms (Inversions) of harmony in which the chord-fifth lies lower-
most (i.e., the 6-4 chords).
It is, of course, impossible (and needless) to shun this chord-form

altogether ; but vigilance must be exercised in the treatment of all
obvious 6-4 chords. Former rules apply strictly; see par. 18/2. To
recapitulate
a. Avoid leaping to, or from, a bass tone which is manifestly the

5 th of the momentary chord, —
excepting in chord-repetitions.
b. Avoid a succession of chord-fifths in the lowermost part (i.e., 6-4

chords) when both represent Consonant forms of harmony ; if either of
them is an imperfect 5th, or the inverted form of any Dissonant harmony,
the succession is good. This grave error is most easily checked by
avoiding parallel perfect 4ths with the Bass, in the conduct of any upper
part, when the 4ths are both essential intervals (par. 14).
c. Avoid any very conspicuous 6-4 effect, excepting when the har-
mony is Tonic. Avoid, hence, beginning or ending a Section upon A 6-4
chord. As a rule, the lowermost part should not be announced (or
re-announced after a rest) upon the 5th of the momentary chord ; nor
should it discontinue (pass into a rest) after a tone which is evidently
the chord-fifth.
d. These rules may be said to apply to all 6-4 chords excepting that
of the Tonic ; the latter is largely, if not entirely, exempt.
For example
«
Bach, (c) Tonic 6-4.
(a)
_(b)
Ex.
1 15
bad »
'
'
'
-p-' *+
J
4+^4+ c good
s
I good bad ^ good
63. The rhythmic conditions of 3-voice Polyphony are identical in

principle with those of the 2-voice, as detailed in par. 22, which review.
a. The chief rule is stated in par. 22a: the three voices partici-
pate, with a certain regularity of alternation, in sustaining the adopted
rhythmic movement (of h-notes, J*-notes, — or whatever the prevail-
ing uniform rhythm may be). Rhythmic diversity between the parts
being, as repeatedly emphasized, the principal means of instituting
voice-independence, it is evident that its importance, and the necessity
of its careful treatment, increase in proportion to the number of parts
engaged. Review, very thoroughly, par. 22 a and d.
Par. 63a. THREE-VOICE POLYPHONY. 143
Quite frequently the same rhythm will be given to two of the parts
simultaneously but this similarity must never be carried very far
;
(best not more than 2, 3, or 4 beats), before being transferred to another

pair, or abandoned temporarily in favor of one part alone. See Ex.
114, No. 2, No. 3 ; Ex. 113 ; Ex. 111, No. 1.
One of the three parts may run on in uniform rhythm almost indefi-
nitely, if sufficient provision for diversity is made in the remaining two
parts. See Ex. no
(Soprano); Ex. 113 (Bass); Ex. 114, Nos. 2 and 3.
As a general rule, the most definite and constant aim is, to assign to
each of the three parts, temporarily, a different rhythmic movement, i.e.,
different tone-values ; not obstinately, but as an ever-conscious prefer-

ence. This, and the maintenance of a smooth, uniform, collective rhythmic
effect, satisfy, together, all the rhythmic demands of polyphonic texture.
See Ex. no, — different values in each of the three parts; Ex. 111, No. z, —
during almost every beat the three parts have different values; Ex. 112, the same;
Ex. 113, measure 2. This may best be verified by careful analysis of the given
references.
Finally, the exchange of one rate of rhythmic movement for another

(faster or slower) may, of course, be effected within the same Inven-
tion without confusion, if care be taken to preserve good balance of
total effect (by regularity of recurrence, — on the principle of par. 22*),
and a perfectly clear impression of the fundamental metric design. See

Bach, 3-voice Inventions, No. 1 5 (alternating ^ and ^-movements)
No. 2 ; and Ex. 117, with context (par. 70).
b. The Rest enters into the rhythmic design of Polyphony more

significantly when three ormore parts are used than when there are
but two. Review par. 10, and par. 22^, last clause.
In general, short rests, interspersed promiscuously through the poly-

phonic texture, are of inferior value, and often rather injure than im-
prove the effect. It is far more judicious to interrupt the conduct of
one of the three parts by a longer rest, for a whole measure or more, so
that a decided and noticeable change of volume results.
A part may be thus definitely discontinued (1) at any cadence; or (2)
at any point in the course of a Section where the part reaches a tone
that has no special obligation or tendency to fulfil, — especially when it
is any interval of the Tonic harmony; and, as a rule, only at an accented

beat or the accented fraction of a beat ; rarely, if ever, after any disso-
nant tone that demands resolution.
In 3-voice Polyphony, generally no more than one part should rest

at a time (unless it be very briefly) ; hence, another part must not be
discontinued until the absent part has fairly recommenced ; in other
words, the extremities of a discontinuing and recommencing part should

overlap noticeably.
After a protracted pause, the part may recommence with an an-
nouncement of the Motive. This is the most appropriate and effective
method, but is by no means essential.
c. Further, the part should recommence, after a rest, on an unaccented

beat ; or, still better, on a fraction of the beat, as a very general rule.
For illustration of all these points, see Ex. 112, inner part; Ex. 113, lower part;
Ex. 114, Nos. 2 and 3 ; Bach, 3-voice Inventions, No. 1, measure 13 (Bass), 15 (inner
part), 16 (lower part pauses directly after inner part recommences, overlapping one
beat), 17 (brief rest in upper part). 3-voice Invention No. 2, in measures 5 and —
6, the outer parts pause together during the last beats this is unusual, but the reason
;
is obvious ; the irregular acceleration of the rhythm in the inner part (contrary to the
fundamental principle, par. 63a), is fully justified by its recurrence, or sequence, in the
following measure, and again, at intervals, throughout the Invention. Compare pars.
22^ and 2\f. In this same Invention, measure 4 from the end, the lower part dis-
continues precisely as the upper part recommences, i.e., without overlapping; this is
least confusing when, as here, the parts in question are so distant from each other
that their extremities cannot be confounded. In nearly or quite all of these cases,
the rule of par. 631: is illustrated conclusively.
Leading Parts.
64. It is extremely difficult — for the beginner, almost out of the

question — to lead three polyphonic parts abreast, and preserve the indi-
viduality of each part as if it were alone. Before this supreme com-

mand of simultaneous part-leading shall have been acquired, the student
must adopt some method of systematic division of the labor, by center-
ing his attention upon first one and then another single part for a time.
This is entirely feasible and justifiable, because it is consistent with the
processes of polyphonic texture, that a certain one of the three (or more)
parts temporarily takes the lead, — the other parts meanwhile deferring
to the " Leader," as simple contrapuntal associates, until some other
part, in its turn, assumes the lead.
The choice of temporary " Leader " may be made arbitrarily ; but
it is far more likely to determine itself, as a matter of course, out of the
natural conditions and exigencies of the progressive development. For
example, that one of the 'three parts which has charge of the Motive
Par. 64. THREE-VOICE POLYPHONY. 1 4
invariably assumes the leadership for the time being ; and, during epi-
sodes, that part takes the lead which pursues the most obvious and
important thematic purpose, — as, for instance, the projection of a line
of Sequences, the pursuit of some significant imitatory process, or any
other definite and far-reaching melodic or structural aim.
Further, it is same with the question " how long " a
precisely the
part may abandoning it to some other part
assert the leadership, before
it depends upon the conditions which determine the choice in the first
place ; it may be a measure or several measures, or possibly only a
single beat.
In any case,. the leading part should be written down alone, as far
as it is to extend ; it is then comparatively easy to return and " fill out "
the remaining parts.
This idea is closely allied to that expounded in par. h\b, which
See Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 1 during measure 1 the upper part " leads "
;
during measure 2, the inner part measures 3, 4, and 5, the lower part measure 6,
; ;
the inner; measures 7 to 9 (beat 3) the lower part "leads," first with its Sequences
and then with the Motive; measures 9 (beat 3) to 10 (beat 3), the inner part; meas-
ures 10 (beat 3) to 11 (beat 3), the upper; meanwhile, during the first half of measure
1 1, the lower part claims the lead, and maintains it to the end of the measure; and
so forth. The student is to continue the analysis to the end of the Invention,
with reference to the "leading parts."
Summary.
65. a. The simultaneous essential tones should constitute some
chord-structure ; and the chords should succeed each other according to

the fundamental conditions of chord-progression.
b. The problem of good Polyphony for more than two parts is, to
preserve an equipoise between the Consonance of the chord-forms and

the Dissonance involved by independent part-conduct.
c. Ties are invaluable in effective Polyphony.
d. Parallel movement in jrds or 6ths is the most legitimate and re-

liableguaranty of smooth and euphonious voice-association. At the
same time, a certain degree of Contrary motion should be maintained.
e. The lowermost part must be so conducted as to avoid conspicu-
ous or faulty 6-4 chord effects,

146 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 65!
f. The rhythmic requirements are, to diversify the tone-values of the
several parts, but to maintain a generally, uniform collective rhythmic

effect.
g. Rests — especially of palpable extent — are invaluable in effec-

tive Polyphony for more than two parts. After a rest, the part should
re-enter upon an unaccented fraction or beat.
h. In the execution of a multi-voice polyphonic texture, it is neces-

sary to concentrate the attention upon a certain single part, as temporary
" leader" — the choice and extent depending upon thematic conditions.
EXERCISE 18.
A. Analyze minutely, 'with regard to the above regulations of 3-voice Polyph-

ony
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 1, meas. 2—5 ; 10—14.
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 3, meas. 4-9.
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 4, last 7 measures.
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 12, meas. 3—10.
B. To some of the (corrected) examples of two-part counterpoint made in Exer-

cises 7, 8, and 9, add a third part, — above, below, or between (or all three succes-
sively), as appears most convenient or effective. Begin the third part about one
beat later than the second, — as a rule,upon an unaccented fraction of the beat (com-
pare par. 6y). At least one tie is to be introduced, in the added part, if possible.
C. Extend the Stretto examples made in Exercise 10, to 3-voice Stretti.
CHAPTER VII.
The Three-voice Invention.
66. The structural conditions of the 3-voice Invention coincide

exactly with those of the 2-voice Invention. Review pars. 37, 38, 39.
u. Three polyphonic parts are distinguished, in instrumental music, as Upper,

Inner, and Lower.
In writing for three solo instruments (string or wood- wind), the compass and regis-
ter of the parts depend upon the instruments chosen. If a keyboard instrument is
employed (Pianoforte, Harmonium, Organ), the compass is practically unlimited,
though it is most consistent with the spirit of polyphonic music to confine the move
ments of the parts to the three and one-half octaves in the center of the keyboard
Par. 66b. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 1 47
and, while each of the three parts is entitled to nearly or quite this entire range, and
while adjacent parts may occasionally cross, good balance must be preserved, (1) by
avoiding too wide divergence of the outer parts from each other, and (2) by conduct-
ing the Inner part, as a rule, closer to the Upper than to the Lower part.
If vocal parts are chosen, they should be adjacent voices (Soprano, Alto, and
Tenor, or Alto, Tenor, and Bass), and the compass and register will be defined ac-
cordingly. Further, the treatment of vocal parts constantly calls for more limitation
(in every respect), and more careful consideration, than that of instrumental parts.
This species of writing is, however, not to be chosen at present.
b. The " Sectional " form is, here again, the most fitting. Its
details correspond to those given in Chapter V ; but there are a few

additional considerations, naturally involved by the additional voice,
which call for special explanation.
The First Section, or Exposition.
67. Review par. 40.
The Motive
a. —
which is likely to be a trifle less ample in com-
pass,and less lively in rhythmic character, than the foregoing ones —
may be announced in either one of the three parts, most commonly in
the inner or upper part.
b. Unless occupied with the M., the lower part, at the beginning
(seldom any other voice), is generally utilized as an auxiliary accompani-
ment, of quiet, unpretentious character, and of optional length, — though
usually discontinued several beats before it (as legitimate third voice)
is to announce its Imitation of the Motive.
See Bach, 3-voice Inventions, Nos. 4, 10, 12, 13, 2, —

few measures of each.
first
The more exceptional method of passing immediately out melody of the auxiliary
into the Imitation of the Motive is seen in Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 1, measure
3 the abrupt change of

;
rhythm, and the leap of an octave into the first tone of the
Motive, serve, however, to identify the latter. See, also, 3-voice Inventions, Nos. 6,
7,8, n, 14.
c. The first Imitation of the M. may follow in any voice, — gen-

erally in the next higher or lower one (i.e., the neighbor of the first
voice). The interval of this first Imitation is optional ; but very posi-
tive preference is given to that in the 5th. The necessity of accurate
and natural adjustment, expounded in par. 35^ (which review, thor-

oughly), is here again to be respected, especially when any other Imi-
tation than the 8ve is chosen. Any unessential modifications (pars. 28^,
30 a and b) which serve this important end, are permissible.

148 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 67d.
Bach, 3-voice Inventions, No. 1, first Imitation in the 4th; No. 2, in the 8ve;
Nos. 4,6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, first Imitation in the 5th.
d. The second Imitation (third announcement) of the M. is most

likely to be made in the remaining part ; though in many instances the
latter does not begin its imitatory function until the first two parts have
announced the M. several times (Ex. 116) ; or, as is the best and most
common procedure, until they have interpolated one or more episodic
measures, — not only for variety, but as a means of achieving some
necessary or desirable modulatory purpose.
The interval of Imitation is here again optional, but nearly always
the 8ve of the first announcement is chosen. See, again, par. 35^.
Bach, 3-voice Inventions, No. 1 ; first the upper, then the inner, then the lower
part takes the M., in regular succession; the same in No. 2 and No. 12. — In No. 6,
the order is inner, upper, and lower part, in regular succession ; the same in No. 8. —
In No. 4, the M. appears first in the upper part, then in the inner; then an episode
of one measure intervenes, before the last part takes up the Motive the same in No. ;
11 and No. 14; No. 13 similar. —

In No. 7, the upper part has an additional (3rd)
announcement of the M. before the absent (lower) part follows with its legitimate
Imitation ; the same in No. 10.
e. As concerns the rest of the Section, — the episodic passages,

the modulatory design, and the cadence, — review par. 40 d, e, g,
and h.
For general illustration

*2) m .
mmwc^r
M._ ,
\*
BSS3 g-T- 2
^ffrfi
M._
m
ptfef=^3= =Fi—1^=^ -t-t-
3E
•1)
v-t-
«=
Par. 67e. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 149
^W ^S^
^FSfe^N^ M..
M._ -|
M._
m 3EE jj^^ggJE
*5>
1
IN
^ Ba ch.
M._ !
M..
Episode.
fff^srr^
r
B^ w,
M
S=£ffiS m ms
TF"T?~
fi »
1 1
M. Cont. m I
*i) Auxiliary part.
*2) From this point on, a very distinct intention of omitting the first tone of the
original M. is exhibited ; these two versions of the Motive — with and without the
initial accented tone — actually participate in the development, throughout the entire
composition (Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 19).
*3) The lower part does not appear with its Imitation of the M. until the upper
and inner parts have announced it four times. The upper part has the M. at the
same time, in parallel thirds such double announcements are not uncommon (see
;
measure 6).
*4) The derivation of this episodic passage is somewhat indirect, but manifestly
consistent.
*5) Here the M. appears be divided between the inner and upper parts. Such
to
interaction of the parts is, though not without occasional
naturally, very exceptional,
justification. See Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 1, second measure from the end; M.
in Contrary motion, announced by the upper part, but, after one beat, taken up with-
out interruption, and concluded, by the inner part.
EXERCISE 19c
A. Analyze the following Expositions

Bach, 3-voice Invention No. i.meas. 1-11.
ISO APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 67e.
B. Elaborate each of the following four Motives into a First Section, or Expo-
sition ; imitating the character and extent of those analyzed at A.
The pupil may choose any technical style, but he is advised to write for a key-
board instrument, — unless he may chance to be entirely familiar with the trio of
strings, or some other ensemble. The choice of vocal parts must be deferred for a
time.
Begin each example on a separate sheet, and leave ample space for its comple-
tion in the next lesson.
First review pars. 21 ; 28; 41 (thoroughly) ; 60; 61 entire (especially d, e); 62 ;
63 ; 64 ; and 65 (thoroughly)
1. Poco andante.*i) *2 )
2. Allegretto.
^^ft^^
3. Moderate
fcm
*5)
sa
*2)
^m &fllK *6)
4. Lento,
HE5^*g^ i4:
*7>
* 1 ) Poco andante, — with gentle, but quite palpable, motion. The tempo must
always be taken into consideration, as it affects, very directly, the question of
euphony, — the number, extent, and quality of dissonant combinations ; see par. 65^.
The more rapidly these pass by, the less objectionable they are ; and conversely.
See also par. 14.
*2) The final tone is optional, both as to pitch and duration.
*3) This M. is to begin in the inner part, with auxiliary Bass. It may also be
manipulated an 8ve higher, beginning in the upper part.
*4) Beginning in the inner part, with or without auxiliary Bass. Also a. j*4
higher (in a minor), as upper part.
*5) The prevailing rhythm should be quarter-notes.
*6) As lower part, — without auxiliary tones above.

*7) As upper part. Also a jth lower (in b minor), as inner part.
C. Write two Expositions, one in minor and one in major, upon original
Motives ; or upon Motives chosen at option from the list given in Exercise 7 A.
Par. 68. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 151
The Remaining Sections.
68. The details of the further development and conclusion of the

sectional form correspond exactly and
to those given in pars. 42, 43,
44, which review thoroughly.
a. Contrary motion of the M. is a peculiarly valuable resource, and

should be freely used in these remaining sections, Stretto-znnounce-
ments (for two, or for all three, parts) are most desirable in the later
Sections. Perhaps an Imitation inAugmentation (or Diminution) may

be successfully introduced in the 3-voice Invention, though these unusual
forms of Imitation are most likely to be applied to a portion only of the
Motive. Compare 41V.
b. The student should conceive this present Exercise chiefly as an effort to

discover and apply as many of the latent resources of his Motive as possible.
Therefore, he should employ the Motive (entire or in part) almost constantly, test-
ing every form of presentation which the chapter upon " Imitations " (Chapter IV)
designates, or which his own imagination may suggest, and introducing compara-
tively few and brief episodic passages. In pursuing this interesting and profitable
course of thematic experiment to a satisfactory conclusion, the number of Sections
may be increased to any reasonable extent (see par. 68^) and each Section, in turn,
;
may be devoted more or less exclusively to testing some certain (untried) resource of
thematic presentation (compare par. 39^) this will tend to individualize the several
;
Sections, while, on the other hand, the necessary unity and consistency of form may
easily be restored by establishing points of similarity and corroboration between the
Sections (par. 42c). See —
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 1, meas. n to end.
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 4, meas. 8 to end.
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 13, meas. 21 to end (new and more characteristic
counter-motive than in Section 1).
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 18; Motive in the upper part witti
full auxiliary accompaniment ; imitated in lower, in the 8ve ; Section 1 closes in
measure 5; the last Section (measures 18-27) is largely episodic, but derived strictly
from the Motive the last 3 measures are a Codetta.
;
Bach, Supplement (Peters ed. 1959), page 68, —

called " Fuga," but belonging
to the lower range of " Invention "forms irregular voice-texture.
;
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. VI, No. 29, second division, } time; two
Motives, in close alternation, —
M. 1 in upper part, measures 1-3 M. 2 in upper ;
part, measure 4. —Vol. VIII, No. 7.
Handel, Clavichord Suites, No. VII, Presto-movement of the " Ouverture "
largely episodic.
c. Sometimes the design of an Invention is extended to embrace

an unusually large number of Sections, or even Parts. The result is
either a Large Group-form *

; or, less frequently, the middle Sections are
approximately equivalent to a " Trio," followed by a broad Da capo of

all the anterior ones (quasi Song-form with Trio **). In such long lines
of development it is almost indispensable to introduce complete episodic
Sections, often of quite distinctly homophonic character, based more
upon harmonic figuration (in the prevailing rhythm) than upon thematic
recurrences. Compare par. 45, last clause and par. 84. ;
For illustration of this rare design see —

Bach, English Suite No. V, " Prelude " ; very broad sectional design ; Section 1
extends to measure 40, and is largely thematic Section 2 (to measure 52) is entirely ;
episodic, and almost suggestive of a new (auxiliary) motive, par. 52 Section 3, to — ;
measure 71, is again thematic, but largely ta»-voice texture; Section 4 is episodic,
and closes in measure 81 with a semi-cadence; Section 5 resembles Section 2, but is
longer (to measure 105), becoming strictly thematic, and, in its last six measures,
corresponding to the end of Section 3 Section 6 resembles Section 4, and closes
;
with a Dominant semi-cadence in measure 117 Section 7, from there to the end, is ;
a literal recurrence of Section 1 (i.e., a da capo)
Bach, " Ouverture a la maniere francaise " (Peters ed., 208, No. 1), first number,
second tempo (f time), is very similar; Sections 1, 3, 5, 7 are thematic; 2, 4, 6 epi-
sodic Section 7 is a da capo, abbreviated at the beginning.
; The first tempo ( (j>
time) is an Introduction, balanced by a Postlude of corresponding character ; they
belong to a different species of polyphonic form, and are not to be analyzed here.
Bach, Partita No. IV, " Ouverture," second tempo (\ time) 5 sections, the ;
final one of which (last 26 measures) reverts to nearly every characteristic trait of the
foregoing sections, and, during its last 1 1 measures, practically reproduces the First
Section (transposed).
Bach, English Suite No. IV, " Prelude " ; 14 comparatively brief sections, Nos.
13 and 14 a literal da capo of Nos. 1 and 2. The texture is largely ftw-voice, es-
pecially during the thematic passages ; but unmistakable evidences of multi-voice

counterpoint exist. — See, further, par. 71.
EXERCISE 20.
A. To each of the Expositions written as Exercise 19Z? add the concluding

sections, — preferably not more than two or three in number. Review again pais,
ior, 61 6, d, e, 63, 64, and 65.
B. Conclude the original work begun in Exercise 19C
Other Structural Designs.
69. a. The primary Two-Part Song-form. Review pars. 45 and

46 ; and analyze the following examples very thoroughly : —
* Homophonic Forms, par. 115.
** Ibid., par. 117.
Par. 69b. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 1 53
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 14 Part (or Section) I, already analyzed, closes in
;
measure 12, with a very distinct Dominant cadence; Part II (to the end) is charac-
terized by abundant stretti. —
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 23 Part ;
(or Section) I terminates in measure 6, Part II in measure 15 (somewhat indefi-

nitely) a Codetta, with evidences of four-voice texture, follows.
; Bach, Partita —
No. 1, " Praeludium" M. of one and one-half measures,' possibly two measures;
;
—
Part I ends in measure 14. —
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 15; two Motives in close
alternation, in different rhythms the Counter-motive is retained throughout, in
;
Natural Double-counterpoint (compare par. 58) Part I ends in measure 14. ;
b. The genuine Two-Part Song-form. Review pars. 47 and 48 ; and

see —
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 6; Part I embraces two Sections, closing respec-
tively inmeasures 11 and 18. —
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 9;
several Motives,- —
No. 1 in measures 1—8, No. 2 in measures 9— 12, No. 3 in
measures 13-15, and No. 4 in the Second Part (measures 8-10, etc.) Motive 1 re- ;
curs at the beginning of Part II Part I closes with a long Codetta (measures 18-
;
24), which recurs at the end of Part II (measures 19-27) with its two Phrases in
reversed order, and followed by a 4-measure Coda. Bach, French Suite No. — 3,
" Courante."
Handel, Suite No. VIII, " Allemande " largely 2-voice texture. Handel,
;
—
Suite No. IV, " Gigue " two Motives in close alternation (upper part, measures 1
;
and 2, respectively) Part II begins with the second Motive,

; not with Contrary —
motion of the principal Motive (par. 51.) —
Bach, Partita No IV, "Gigue"; Part II
is based upon a new Motive, which proves, after 6 measures, to be a Counter-motive
to the principal Motive of Part I, in connection with which it appears once (or twice)
the last 8 measures of the two Parts correspond. Mozart, "Gigue" in G major —
(Cotta edition, No. 22) Part II begins with a fragment of the original Motive,
;
answered by the same fragment in Contrary motion the two Parts are very similar ;
in contents a Codetta of 5 measures is added to the whole.

; Bach, English Suite —
No. 2, " Allemande " the M. of Part I appears first in the upper part, curiously con-
;
founded (on the 4th beat) with one of the lower auxiliary tones, compare the —
simple form as it occurs in the lower part in measures 6, 7 ; Part II has, apparently,
a new Motive throughout, but careful scrutiny reveals its origin in the modified
Contrary motion of the first Motive.
c. The conventional Gigue-form, with Contrary motion of the M.

as basis of Part II. Review par. 51, and see —
Bach, French Suite No. V, " Gigue."
Bach, English Suite No. Ill, "Gigue"; the original motion of the M. recurs
once, at the very end.
Bach, English Suite No. V, " Gigue."
Bach, English Suite No. VI, " Gigue."
Bach, Partita No. II, " Capriccio."
Bach, Partita No. Ill, " Gigue."
The above superb illustrations of the 3-voice Invention-species are to be analyzed

with more than ordinary attention and minuteness.
154 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 6gd.
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. I, Sonata No. I, 2nd movement
M. one measure, upper part, followed by another measure of episodic extension

(related to par. 72c) ; Part II, after 5 measures' exposition of the Contrary motion,
corresponds closely to sections of Part I, but in different order, with inverted voices,
and (partly) transposed. To be minutely analyzed.
Bach, Suite, Peters ed. 214, No. 3, " Gigue.'"
Bach, Suite, Peters ed. 214, M. 3 or 4 beats, in lower part
No. 5, " Gigue
" ;
curious insertion of auxiliary tones, before Imitation in each of the other higher
parts.
Bach, English Suite No. Ill, " Allemande " ;
M. one measure, lower part.
d' Albert, Pianoforte Suite, op. 1, movement 5 ("Gigue," — excellent example).
Handel, Suite No. VIII, " Gigue."
Handel, Suite No. VIII, " Courante " ; largely harmonic in general character,
and at times definite 4-voice texture the ; original motion of the M. recurs in measures
18 and 19 of Part II.
Handel, Suite No. XIII, " Gigue."
d. The primary Three-Part Song-form. Review pars. 49 and 49a;

and see —
Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 10 Part (Section) I closes, a little indefinitely, in
;
measure 11, as already seen; Part II embraces two Sections, closing respectively in
measures 22 and 25 in measure 26 a vague, but probably sufficient, intimation of
;
" the return to the beginning " (the distinctive condition of a " Third Part ") is
recognizable.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 3, second tempo (| time) Section ;
I ends in measure 10; Section II, based chiefly upon the Contrary motion of the M.,
closes in measure 17; the remaining (Third) Section is sufficiently indicative of a
recurrence of the early contents of Section I to represent the 3-Part form.
e. The genuine Three-Part Song-form. Review par. 50, and see —

Bach, French Suite No. 1, "Gigue"; Part II, based on the Contrary motion,
terminates 7 measures from the end, upon a strong Dominant semi-cadence ; what
follows a very obvious (though somewhat disguised) Third Part, or recurrence of
is
the beginning it opens with several stretto Imitations, in the original motion, and,
;
in the second measure, in Contrary motion (upper voice) ; the last two measures
correspond to the ending of Part I.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude No. 5 M. one measure long, with ;
an episodic extension of one well-contrasted lyric measure, which reappears at the

beginning of Parts II and III, but does not participate essentially in the thematic
development Part I has a Codetta of 4 measures Part II begins with the Contrary
; ;
motion, but utilizes the original motion also its ending, and the announcement of
;
Part III, are very distinct the latter diverges into the Sub-dominant key, in its 3rd
;
measure, and thereafter follows almost exactly the line of Part I, transposed, of
course, to the principal key.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 21 based throughout upon three ;
briefMotives (announced in measures 1, 9, and 13, respectively), see par. 52 Part — ;
II is 16 measures in length; Part III begins very definitely; a curious series of

Par. 6ge. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 1 55
double-announcements of the principal Motive, in simultaneous original and Con-

trary motion, appears in measures1 2 to 7 from the end.
Bach, Peters ed., Supplement (No. 1959), page 63.
In the following examples of the 3-part Song-form, the Third Part

is a more or less accurately transposed recurrence of the main contents
of Part I * :
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 9 M. 7 beats long, followed by

;
an episodic (lyric) extension the first Imitation is in measure 3 (lower part) Part I
; j
ends in measure 8 Part II ends in measure 14; Part III is a nearly exact trans-
;
posed recurrence of the First Part, ending, with an evaded cadence, in measure 22,
and followed by a brief Codetta, or plagal extension.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 4 Part I, closing in measure 17,;
manipulates the principal M. (upper part, measures 1-5 lower part, very much ;
modified, measures 5-7) Part II begins with a new (2nd) Motive, two measures in
;
length (inner voice), which is carried through thefirst of its Sections (to measure 27) ;
in measure 27 a third Motive appears (ij measures, upper voice), derived from the
auxiliary Bass at the beginning; this is retained to the end of Part II (measure 33) ;
see par. 52^; Part III (measure ^^) is, for 7 measures, a transposed recurrence of
the first 7 measures of Part I, with the M. transferred to the inner voice thereupon ;
it returns to the beginning and

reproduces these J measures in the original key, with
slight changes. The remainder of Part III embraces the following factors: Meas-
ures 45-49, an episodic passage, largely sequential; measures 50— 55, a transposed
reproduction of the Second Section of Part II; measure 56 to end, a reproduction
of the last 7 measures of Part I, the upper and inner voices inverted. See, again,
par. 58.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 19 ; Part I is analyzed in Exam-
ple 116; Part II begins with Contrary motion of the M., and uses it freely during
its two Sections Part III (measures 22-30) is an almost exact reproduction of Part
;
I, but transposed, and with inner and upper voices inverted (par. 58) a. Codetta of ;
2j measures is added.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 22 the M. is 5 measures long, ;
announced first in the inner part, and associated with contrapuntal fragments from
its first members; an "Auxiliary figure" appears in measure 7 (inner part), which
assumes vital importance in the total development see par. 523 Part II embraces
; ;
three Sections, beginning respectively in measures 16, 24, and 42 Part III (meas- ;
ures 55-70) is an accurate reproduction of Part I, transposed, and with inverted inner
and upper voices (par. 58) a Coda is added, the last 6 measures of which correspond
;
to the ending of Section 2 of the Second Part.
70. A very effective variety of the 3-Part Song-form is obtained, on

the basis of the idea expressed in par. 48a (second clause), by introdu-
cing in Part II a Counter-motive in more animated rhythm.
a. This implies that the original Motive should be of a rhyth-

mically quiet or stately form, with correspondingly quiet counterpoint
during Part I.
* ffomophonic Forms, par. iiq.
The characteristic Counter-motive of Part II may be nothing more

than an ordinary contrapuntal associate, in shorter note-values. But it
is not unlikely that its figures m3y be generated, by Diminution, out of

parts of the Motive itself •
and, in either case, it should be treated to a
certain extent as an " Auxiliary motive," i.e., recurring, entire or in
part, from time to time (freely modified, if necessary), in order to avoid
*3ie impression of desultory rambling. For example (Bach, 3-voice
Invention No. 7)
Lento
Auxiliary part.-
. See the original. *2 )
i
w mÊ*zjLzi
5 6 7 8 11 12 Cadence.
m 'im
Part II.
15:
?TTM._
Par. 70b. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 157
iJ_
~i~
~
*=q=»=rfEf^
=&*
_____
' •
.
*4)
-+- • — — — — — —— —l""T—
I I 1 1 I
V-
_____ feEa
________ ___
______ _____
*s)
fe 2___*gE__j_
*6)
^ Bach.
*i) The rhythm at this place (i6th-notes upon the accented'beat

irregularity of
only) is balanced by the recurrence of the same figure two measures
and justified
later compare par. 22e.
; Further, the i6ths are called forth by the purpose of connect-
ing the inevitable dt and d"i as smoothly as possible. —
*2) The First Part runs on
thus in a fundamental rhythm of 8th-notes, interrupted three times as in measure 3.
*3) This figure of four tones is the evident thematic germ of the new, character-
istic Counter-motive in animated movement, which begins abruptly at the outset of
Part II. The figure was doubtless conceived and adopted by Bach as the Contrary
motion of the first member of the principal Motive, in Diminution. — *4) The pecu-
liar "cross-relation " between the inner and lower parts here (dt-dtt ) is justified by
the structural joint (or light cadence) at the first beat compare par. iqd, and Ex. 57,
;
especially Note *y). —

*5) This Counter-motive agrees with the preceding one
throughout, but skilfully transposed to correspond to the interval of Imitation
adopted for the M. in the upper part (the 5th) therefore, the contrapuntal calculation
;
is identical, and harmonious union is assured. — *6) From here on the animated
contrapuntal figure is transferred impartially from one voice to another. — *y) The
animated rhythm is maintained, without a check, to the cadence of Part II, which is
made with much emphasis upon a. Dominant chord, in measure 37 (see Ex. 118).
The 2nd Section of the Part begins (measure 25) with the Contrary motion of the
animated Counter-motive (modified unessentially to conform easily to the altered
conditions) ; this reveals more clearly the origin of the figure indicated in Note *3) #
The original is to be thoroughly analyzed, up to measure 37.
b. If the characteristic Counter-motive in quicker rhythm is to dis-
tinguish Part II especially, it will be abandoned at the beginning of

Part III, and the latter will resume the original fundamental rhythm, —
possibly only for a few measures, however ; for the animated rhythm is
quite likely to assert itself again, either in the later course of Part III,
or in the Coda or Codetta, which, in such definite structural designs as
these, is almost indispensable. The first of these alternatives is illus-
trated in the continuation of the above example (Bach, 3-voice Inven-

tion No. 7), thus
Part III.
II
M_
._ ... _.. _^_ i'i. _ !\
a=
l
w &=±L 'P~
-=£
^£*E^
36 37
Ex.
(Cont. of Ex. 117.)
1 18.
m
1
$m .fei
-A
—4- u
=P=5=
—
^=T-
-1
¥=&=P
e i)
-+— •
£ê£ f=r=g4=?=
- I '
ll b
r— — 1
Bach.
m ±EES£
I I
fclt
w T=W-
f=f=f
4i
*2 )
42 43
W I
sfe^SI *==*b
F £ S
*i) At the beginning of Part III the original rhythm of 8th-not.es is resumed,
abruptly; but after two measures the characteristic Counter-motive reappears. As a
rule, the original rhythm should have more time than this, to re-assert itself.
*2) The rhythm of i6th-notes is carried on without interruption, up to the

cadence-beats. There is no Codetta in this instance.
See also— briefly, and solely with reference to the rhythmic design of the three
Parts and Coda — Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Fugue 19; Part I, measures
Par. 71. THE THREE-VOICE INVENTION. 1 5.9
1-20 ; Interlude, measures 20-22 ; Part II, measures 23-42 ; Part III, measures 42-49
Coda, to end.
The Song-form with Trio.
71. As intimated in par. 68c, an extension of the sectional line of

development to an abnormal length is not unlikely to resolve itself into
that broad homophonic design of three Divisions, the third of which is
a more or less exact " Da capo " (recurrence of the first), thus isolating
the second Division somewhat, — like the " Trio " of certain dance-
forms.
See Bach, English Suite No. VI, "Prelude," allegro-movement. The Introduc-
tion of 37measures is not to be analyzed at present. Section 1 extends to the 1 1 th
measure Section 2 utilizes the Contrary motion of the Motive Section 3 (measures
; ;
20-49) is preponderantly two-voice texture, and contains several effective episodic

passages, more in the style of harmonic figuration than polyphonic development
this closes with a strong Tonic cadence in the principal key, and terminates the
First Division. The following five sections constitute the Middle Division or
"Trio" (up to measure no) ; Section IV (measures 49-61) is mainly episodic, and
suggests the presence of an Auxiliary Motive ; Section V (measures 61—76) reverts
emphatically to the principal M., and contains a reminiscence of Section III ; Section
VI measure 90) begins with a novel treatment of the M., and then (measure 80)
(to
corroborates the main contents of Section IV; Section VII (to measure 106) begins
with a new form of treatment, but soon runs into the current of Section III, to
which, especially during its last 6 or 7 measures, it bears close resemblance ; Section
VIII (to measure 1 10) is a brief Re-transition. The remaining three sections (meas-
ure no to the end) are a literal recurrence of Sections I, II, and III, i.e., the First
Division.
Bach, English Suite No. II, " Prelude." This is preponderantly ftw-voice tex-
ture,and its First Division has already been analyzed in Exercise 13^. The Middle
Division (measures 55-110) begins with an episodic passage, based upon a new
(Auxiliary) Motive which distinctly governs the Division, though the principal M.
asserts itself from time to time, — somewhat analogous to par. 48^; in measure 87 a
4-measure Section occurs, corresponding exactly (excepting in key) to the Codetta of
the First Division immediately repeated, with transferred register and other
; it is
unessential changes measure 95 the Auxiliary M. again resumes its sway, and
; in
leads to an unusually impressive cadence in measure no, in the Relative key, fol- —
lowed immediately by the literal reproduction of the First Division, as " Da capo."
It is almost certainly only an accidental coincidence that the three Divisions should
each contain the same number of measures (55).
EXERCISE 21.
A. Write a complete example of the 3-voice Invention in 2-Part Song-form

(broad design, par. 69^), employing the same Motive in Part II, chiefly in the original
motion (par. 48a). An original M. is to be used, preferably in major. —
"
S. An example of the 3-voice Invention in the 2- Part Song-form, as " Gigue
(par. 6gc), — Contrary motion of the M. as basis of Part II. Original M., preferably
in minor, and f time.
C. Two examples (major and minor, but in different species of measure from
each other and from those above) in the 3-Part Song-form, par. 69 d and e. The-
matic basis of Part II optional. Motive original
D. An example (preferably major) in the 3-Part Song-form, with characteristic

counter-motive in animated rhythm during Part II, —
par. 700 and b. Either Motive
3 of Exercise ioi? may be used, or an original one of similar stately character.
Distinctions of " Style " in the Invention.
72. Distinctions of Style are necessarily less definite in polyphonic

than inhomophonic composition ; not only because Polyphony is, in
itself, so characteristic a " style " as to counteract the assumption of
other specific style-distinctions, to a large degree ; but also because
the peculiar restrictions of polyphonic writing render it difficult to real-
ize all the essential details of certain (especially the conventional)

styles.
But the broader distinctions of style may, nevertheless, be exhibited

definitely enough in an Invention (or any other polyphonic form for at
least three voices), as far as these distinctions rest upon the choice of
tempo, mode, rhythmic character, and similar general qualities or upon
;
the melodic character of the Motive; and it is therefore entirely feasible,

as it is desirable, to distinguish at least three broad divisions of poly-
phonic style, namely
a. The Light or Spirited style (with its kindred qualifications,
sprightly, joyous, vigorous, brilliant, capricious, flowing, etc.). The chief
characteristics of these species are a comparatively brief Motive, of
lively, flowing, gay, or rhythmically capricious (distinctly individualized)
character ; fairly rapid tempo probably (though by no means certainly)
;
the major mode ; and general brightness and vivacity of expression.
For example: Bach, 3-voice Inventions, Nos. 8, 6, 1, io, 14, 15; Well-temp.
Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 5.
b. The Serious style (with its kindred qualifications, grave, somber,

stately, pathetic, etc.), characterized mainly by a Motive of stately or
even heavy character, generally brief ;
quiet or moderately slow tempo
generally the minor, though not infrequently the major, mode; and
subdued, dignified expression.
Par. 72c. DISTINCTIONS OF "STYLE." 16
For example: Bach, 3-voice Inventions, Nos. 4, 9, 13; Well-temp. Clavichord,

Vol. I, Prelude 18; Vol. II, Preludes 9 and 17.
c. The Lyric (melodious) style characterized by a M. of distinctly ;
melodious nature, and generally of considerable length, often in regu- —

lar (4-measure) Phrase-form ;
graceful, flowing tempo ; major or minor
mode indifferently ; and unusual definiteness of structural design.
For illustration Bach, 3-voice Inventions, Nos. 7, 12,3, z (the last-named is to

:
be thoroughly analyzed it is largely episodic) Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II,

; ;
Prelude 4.
d. Another, scarcely less genuine, variety of the Lyric class, is dis-
tinguished by a brief Motive, or simple thematic Figure, out of which

(1) the broader lyric sentences are sometimes constructed, by sequen-
tial combination ; or which (2) enters still more incidentally into the
lyric texture, apparently as a mere figural accompaniment (or auxiliary
Figure) derived from the successive harmonies that underlie the princi-
pal melodic lines.
This is clearly illustrated in Bach, 3-voice Invention, No. 11, which is to be care-
fully analyzed ; the thematic Figure of four (or five) notes stands at the beginning of
the principal melodic part, but its connection with the latter is thereafter, almost
constantly, purely incidental ; the lyric sentences are built upon, not derived themati-
cally from, this Figure. The character of this Invention is distinctly lyric ; its form
is Sectional.
See further, briefly : Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Preludes 9 and 1 7
Vol. II, Prelude 21.
c. These distinctions of Style must be adopted and applied in a very general

sense only. It is as impracticable as it is obviously undesirable, to coerce a poly-
phonic composition into such definite agreement with the essential conditions of
" Style " as is found in some free homophonic structures. Consequently, even the
analytic definition will often be found doubtful and difficult, because the related
phases overlap so widely that both styles may be distinctly represented in the same
composition; a lyric Invention may inclinetoward either the light or the serious
style ; and even these extremes may touch, —
a serious Invention may contain viva-
cious episodes, and vice versa.
Furthermore, the number of parts employed influences the style to a certain
extent ; two-voice texture is most appropriate for the Light styles, three-voice for the
Lyric, and four- (or more) voice for the Serious. Examples in two-voice texture have
been cited in pars. 51 and 53. Three-voice texture is the only kind that may be
adapted to all three styles.
Finally, in an Invention expressly designed to represent one or another of these
styles, the episodic passages are apt to predominate somewhat, both in extent and
character ; for the relief from strict thematic treatment which they afford contributes
to the realization of the specific purposes involved. And, in general, the structural
1 62 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 73.
(formal) details advance proportionately in significance, and are defined more dis-
tinctly than in the more neutral varieties of polyphonic development. Compare pars.
45 and S3-
Exceptional Species of the Invention.
73. a. The Invention in Contrary motion (" per moto contrario ").
In this species the Motive appears throughout in nearly, or quite,

regularly alternating original motion and Contrary motion.
See Bach, Prelude of the " Preludio con f ughetta " for Clavichord, in e minor
(Peters ed. 200, No. 7). The thematic texture is exclusively two-voice, but an auxili-
ary third part is frequently introduced. —
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. VII,
No. measures 1-7, 11-18, 22-28 in measures 32-40 a similar association of the
58, ;
original M. with its Diminution and Contrary motion is effected.
b. The Invention with an Independent Lower part. The thematic

manipulation is restricted, largely or wholly, to the inner and upper
parts ; and the Bass accompanies these, chiefly as an auxiliary contrapun-
tal associate. The latter may (1) be based upon some more or less
characteristic figure, usually reiterated regularly, as in harmonic figura-
tion ; or (2) it may be a Running part, in a uniform rhythm of two (cr
more) notes to each beat.
The first species is most common in Organ music the peculiar diffi- ;
culties and limitations of Pedal-technique render it often expedient to

assign certain adapted figures to the Pedal-part, either quite indepen-
dent of the Motive, or as a modified (simplified) form of the latter.
In either case it is absolutely necessary to preserve a certain (if not

constant) uniformity of melodic delineation in the independent Bass
especially when it isa running part, which must be prevented from
deteriorating into a "rambling" part by consistency of formation,
i.e., by frequent recurrences, sequential or otherwise, of the leading
S
figures. Review par. iyc. For example :
Bach.
Lento.
1
Ex.
19
EEt
t.±_
a^#^^ 3^3i (73«)
§SE
M. cont.m. | etc.
Pedal.
asfe: 1
*o
Par. 73b. EXCEPTIONAL INVENTION-SPECIES. 163
2. Bach.
Allegro.
-?— •-
M.
t=t il^siîi
LB
—
m B:
»
-p •
f-
-p. ,-
etc.
M._
*i) The Pedal-part is based upon this independent M. throughout.
*2) Here the Pedal has, constantly, a simplified form of the first member of the
principal Motive. For further illustration
See Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 5 there are several brief thematic figures, the
;
principalone of which is first announced in the upper part (one measure long) the ;
form is Sectional, the style Lyric during the last 8^ measures, the inner part corre-
;
sponds exactly to the upper part ol the First Section. The Bass is an independent
auxiliary part throughout, in uniform harmonic Figuration.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 24 the Bass is an auxiliary run- ;
ning part in 8th-notes, with two or three brief interruptions the consistency of its ;
formation- is noteworthy the M. of the two other voices is one measure long, first
;
announced in the inner part, and imitated mostly in stretto ; in Part II the original
M. is abandoned, and in its place the modified Diminution is adopted as thematic

basis, resulting in greater rhythmic animation throughout the Part.
Bach, 30 Var. for the Clav. in G major; Var. 2.
Bach, Organ Compositions (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. I, Sonata No. IV, 1st move-
ment; the form embraces 3 Sections, with Coda, and an independent Introduc-
tion; the M. is 6 measures long, first announced in the inner part; the Pedal-part
(Bass) is entirely independent of the thematic voices; Section 3 (measure 25 from
end) is wholly episodic, but corroborative of the foregoing Sections.
The same Sonata, 2nd movement Pedal entirely independent design embraces
; ;
9 brief Sections; principal M. of two measures, announced by the upper part, carried
through first 2 Sections (measures 1-1 1) an auxiliary M., one-half measure in length,
;
is adopted as sole basis of Section 3 and (in Contrary motion) of Section 4 Section ;
(measures 22, 23) is episodic; the remainder is practically a reproduction of the

5
foregoing, transposed, — Sections 6, 7, and 8 corresponding closely to 2, 3, and 4,
extended by a 9th Section based on the principal Motive (last 5! measures).

The same Sonata, 3rd movement 4 Sections and repeated Codetta M. 8 meas-
;
;
ures; the Pedal takes the M. twice, —

as regular third announcement (measures
2 1-27), and again near the end, — in a simplifiedform, convenient for pedal-technique
otherwise the Bass is independent.
Gigue "-
Bach, same Volume, Sonata No. I, last movement ; 2-Part Song-form, "
species; the Pedal has occasional fragments of the M., but is chiefly independent;
Part II, after 15 measures devoted to the exposition of the Contrary motion, cor-
responds to the latter portion of Part I, but transposed, and with inverted voices
(par. 58).
The same Sonata, first movement ; 2-Part Song-form, closely corresponding

structure ; M. 1
J measures ; the Pedal is independent, excepting a very few imperfect
imitations of the principal figure of the Motive.
Mendelssohn, Pianoforte Capriccio, op. 5, middle Division (measures 135—290) ;
M. 8 measures, upper voice running Bass during Part I M. in Contrary motion

; ;
and running upper voice during Part II after 28 measures (3 complete announce-
;
ments) the M. appears in sequential succession, each time contracted more and more
at the end (up to the^ where another complete announcement is made) ; in Part
III the original motion of the M., and the running Bass, are resumed.
Mendelssohn, Prelude No. 4; 3-Part Song-form; Part I, Double-
(Pfte.), op. 35,
Period with Codetta ; Part II is based upon a new M. of 2

Motive, 2 measures ;
measures, in stretto Imitations, but also announces the principal M. Part III like I, ;
but abbreviated to Single Period with Codetta, and extended by a Period taken
from Part II, and brief Coda; the Bass is a running auxiliary part throughout, and
consists in strictly uniform harmonic Figuration.
EXERCISE 22.
A. Write a complete 3-voice Invention, with consideration of the essential

conditions of the Spirited Style (par. 72a), and the Serious Style (par. 72*), as fol-
lows Adopt the design of the 3- Part Song-form; develop the rapid M. during Parts
:
I and and the stately M. during Part II the second M. may be quite new (par.
III, ;
48^), or it may be developed out of the first Motive by Augmentation (of a portion
of the latter), —
see par. 31a. This arrangement of movements reverses the rhythmic
order given in par. 70a.
B. Write an Invention in the Lyric Style, according to par. 72^,- mode, tempo,
and form optional.
C. An Invention with a Running Bass (par. 73*).
D. An Invention for the Organ, with Independent Pedal-part (par. 73*).
CHAPTER VIII.
The Invention for More than Three Voices.
74. As the number of polyphonic voices or parts is increased, the

texture assumes a proportionately pronounced harmonic character ; and
the difficulty of preserving proper balance between the dissonances of
Pat. 75. FOl/R-VOiCE POLYPHONY. 1 6$
independent conduct " of the parts, and the

friction, inevitable in the "
consonances indispensable to their " harmonious union," becomes more

and more real and severe. Review par. 59, and par. 60.
Details of Four-Voice Polyphony.
75. a. As before, the sum of 4 parts may be successively accumu-

lated by adding contrapuntally first a second voice, then a third, and
finally the fourth voice, to the leading part, — in such order as appears
most convenient, and generally in brief stages of about five or six beats
at a time. Review, thoroughly, par. 6i£.
b. Or, probably better and easier, the three other voices may be led
more nearly, or exactly, abreast of the leading part, and of each other
their movements will then be controlled directly by the successive har-
monic structures, or chords (i.e., the vertical clusters of essential tones,
which are to represent the successive rhythmic pulses) and the vital ;
condition of voice-independence must be satisfied at the same time by

judiciously disguising these harmonic clusters. Review, thoroughly,
par. (j\c
The choice between these two processes wV.l p obab'y be determined by individ-
ual disposition ; some students will find the " cumulative " process easier, while others
will prefer the " harmonic " one.
c. The importance of the Tie, and of parallel movement in jrds or

6ths between two of the parts, is as great, here again, as in three-voice
texture, and must not for an instant be lost sight of. Review, thor-
oughly, pars. 61 //and e; also par. 6i_/".
d. The rules relative to the conduct of the lowermost part, to the

rhythmic conditions of the polyphonic texture, and to the adoption of a
temporary leading part, apply without modification also to the associa-
:i ki vi four contrapuntal parts. Review, thoroughly, pars. 62, 63, and
64; aL>j the summary, par. 65. Especial care should be taken to avoid
too great density of texture. To this end, it is wise to sustain the rhythm
of at least one of the voices as much as possible, as shown in Ex. 122 —
(Note *4) and, at
; all events, to avoid conducting all the parts together
in (simultaneous) rapid rhythmic movement, or in any fashion that pro-
duces a " jumbled " rhythmic effect.
e. The condition which probably increases most in significance,
in this fuller species of polyphonic writing, is that of the Rest ; not only
i66 APrLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 75ft
because the temporary cessation of one (or more) of the voices conduces
to greater variety of volume, and to greater clearness of texture but ;
also because it facilitates, very materially, the manipulation of the

whole. On the other hand, the indispensable discipline of strictly 4-
voice Polyphony obliges the student (for a time, at least) to abstain
from such frequent use of Rests, — especially protracted omission of
one or another of the four parts, —as would reduce the present task to
that of the 3-voice texture. Review, particularly, pars. 63$ and 63c.
For illustration of the domination of the harmonic principle, and the
methods of preserving voice-independence, etc.
M._
m
*
J^-A -J U-
3
Effi
*0
f= f^
Ex.
120.
M._
I
#-h«^
I
5££
M._
J -I 1 ^ mm
j j j
m
2fe
M..
*4)"
"-t
*7) M..
*3)'
*6) Ebl-II 7 V IV I IV 7 V 7 IAt?V 7 VI 7 Et>V 7 I VI IV
c-e-g(b-d). a-c-e. d-f-a. b^-f-a. c-e-g-b. f-a-c.

Par, 76. FOUR-VOICE POLYPHONY. J 67
*i) Last tone of M. lengthened (par. 30a).

*z) Shifted rhythm (par. 31^).
*3) First tone of M. lengthened (par. 30^).
*4) Suspension.
*5) Parallel 6ths in upper, and 3rds in lower, voices (par. 6\e).
*6) This line of Roman numerals indicates the harmonic basis ; compare with
par. 18 « to c
*7) The Triad upon the Leading-tone (sometimes marked VII) is an abbreviated
form of the Dominant 7th-chord.
*8) From the Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Prelude 7, measures 10-15; the student
is to continue the analysis, up to measure 24.
*9) From the same Prelude, measures 36-38 continue ; the analysis, with extreme
thoroughness and minuteness, to the end.
*io) The " chord-forms " are here indicated in letters, without regard to the
accidentals (which are always determined by the key), or to the chord-names.
*i 1 ) All tones foreign to the prevailing chord-form are marked + ; it will be

observed that they invariably obey the law of inharmonic tones, and progress con-
junctly. Compare par. 4a.
*I2) These two beats illustrate admirably the fundamental rule of rhythmic
relation of the voices (par. 65/).
Observe, also, how effectively the rhythmic movement of the other parts is
restrained (by heavy notes) while one part is active.
*I3) Indirect resolution of Suspension (Ex. 10).
*I4) These beats illustrate a very effective interaction ofadjacent parts, whereby
one part appears to cooperate with its neighbor in furthering some melodic or the-
matic purpose of the latter in this instance the descending scale passes, without a
;
check, from the Soprano into the Alto, and from that into the Tenor, describing a
long and powerful line, and unifying the parts without impairing their independence.
Compare Ex. 116, Note *5).
Analyze the following specimens of 4-part Polyphony ; very minutely,

but only with reference to the voice-conduct, — not thematically
Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 1, last 7 measures ; Vol. I, Fugue 12, last
6 measures; Vol. I, Fugue 14, last 9 measures; Vol. I, Fugue 17, last 8 measures;
Vol. I, Fugue 18, last 10 measures.
Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. II, Fugue 5, measures 1-16; Vol. II, Fugue 9,
measures 1-9; Vol. II, Fugue 23, measures 14-27.
The Four-Voice Invention.
76. Review par. 37. — When four polyphonic parts are used, they
are always named Soprano, Alto, Tenor, and Bass, in analogy with the
vocal quartet. Review par. 66a.
i68 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 11.
The structural designs are somewhat more limited, — in keeping

with the other specific limitations of 4-voice Polyphony ; hence, while
any of the forms already enumerated may be adopted for the 4-voice
Invention, the Sectional form is probably the most appropriate and
effective.
The First Section, or Exposition.
77. a. The Motive must, as a rule, be brief, comparatively narrow

in compass, and of quiet (or at least not too lively) rhythmic character.
The following Motives are used by Bach for 4-part development
2. Moderate.
121.
3. Allegretto. 4. Adagio. 5. Moderato.
^^trTTjfei^g^^^g p
6. Andante. 7. Andante.
^M
See also Ex. 120, Nos.
3PS 1 and 2; and Ex.
a&
:£=$!
122.
H: t* ±t£
mPB
b. The first announcement of the M. may occur in any one of the
four parts ;
and, as usual, one or two, or possibly all, of the other parts
may supply auxiliary lines (either contrapuntal, or simply harmonic)
until their turn comes to imitate the M. legitimately. Review par.
67 «, b, and c.
c. The order of Imitations at the beginning of a 4-voice Invention

may be regular ; i.e., each successive Imitation may appear in the part
nearest (adjacent) to the preceding imitating voice ; thus, after Soprano,
in the Alto ; after Bass, the Tenor ; after Alto, either Soprano or Tenor
after Tenor, either Bass or Alto.
But this regularity of voice-succession is by no means necessary in
the Invention, and the utmost freedom is exercised in the choice, both
of the interval of Imitation, and of the voice in which the Motive is
Par. 77c. THE FOUR- VOICE INVENTION. 169
next to appear, — not only at the beginning, but through the entire
Exposition. Compare par. 6"]d; and see also par. 67*.
For illustration
Lento. M .
*&- iîSl -1-
-»-*-!
s
^r^rr
Ex.
122. *o *2)
9M*
OE
^sâ^^î^
fSf*r©^S ^f= p?m^s
p c
3)
±
M
Episode. M._
iJLl^Ôirt 3^^
»—
* * M._
1
(5 See Original
^^JJ^PjSe^
Bach.*5)
*
M. , M.
a*— (Slj * ^-p *-

*3) Thus far the order of Imitation is regular, as concerns the part-succession,
— Soprano, Alto, Tenor. In the following measure the M. appears again in the
Alto,and during the next 3 (sketched) measures two other announcements are
made, in upper parts, before the Bass announces its legitimate Imitation, in the 9th
measure.
*4) Observe, here again, how carefully the inner parts are restrained in their
rhythmic movement, by long notes, while the outer parts are active. The same
disposition to preserve good balance of motion and to avoid " jumbled " rhythmic
effects is evinced throughout. See Ex. 120, Note *I2), second clause.
*S) From the Prelude of the
" Preludio con Fughetta " in d minor, for the
clavichord (Peters ed., 200, No. 6).
78. The remaining Sections of the 4-voice Invention are conducted

in the usual manner. Review par. 68 ; and analyze the following
Inventions, in sectional form, very diligently
The remainder of Example 122.
Bach, English Suite No. I, " Prelude " introductory cadenza of 2 measures M.
; ;
given in Ex. 121, No. 3 Section I ends in measure 9, and is extended by a Codetta
;
of 1 J measures Section II closes in measure 16, followed by a similar Codetta Sec-

; ;
tion III extends to 3rd measure from the end, and has the same Codetta, extended.
(Compare last two measures with Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 19, end.)
The texture is frequently 3-voice (compare par. 75*), and the register of the four parts
is somewhat obscure, at times.
Bach, Toccata for Clavichord in c minor, measures 12-29; M. given in Ex. 121,
No. 4. The rhythm is gradually accelerated.
Bach, Toccata for Clavichord in f% minor, second tempo (3-2 time) M. chro- ;
matic, first announced in Soprano Bass has the M. once only, abbreviated.
;
Bach, Air with 30 Variations (Clavichord); Var. 16, second tempo (3-8 time);
chiefly 3-voice texture.
Bach, Fantasia con Fuga in u minor (Clavichord), "Fantasia" (Peters ed.

208, No. 2) Section I, measures 1-12, is purely introductory, containing only allu-
;
sions to the Motive it is 5-voice texture, and harmonic in character, and recurs as
;
Section IV (measures 31-42), transposed; recurs again, as Section VI (measures

69-80), transposed; and once more, as final Section (last 12 measures), as a nearly
literal da capo. The M.
announced in Section II (Soprano, measures 11-13,
is first
— given in Ex. 121, No. and imitated, chiefly in stretto, during this and the next
2),
Section (to measure 31) in Sections V and VII (measures 42 and 80) the rhythm is
;
more or less persistently animated, —

somewhat after the manner of par. 700.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 12; the M., 2 beats long, is an-
nounced by the Soprano, and then followed by a lyric extension (or episode) before
an Imitation occurs, —
in Tenor the Bass is auxiliary, taking no evident part in the
;
thematic announcements the same is partly true of the Alto, also there are three
; ;
Sections, the last one containing fin measures 16-18) a fairly convincing indication
of a return to the beginning, and thus imparting the impression of 3-Part Song-form
(primary grade).
Par. 79. THE FOUR-VOICE INVENTION. 171
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I,Prelude 4 M. one measure^ Soprano part

;
the texture is largely 3-voice ; there is a strong Dominant cadence in measure 14,
which probably resolves the structure into a 2-Part Song-form (primary grade). The
manipulation of this M. is extremely ingenious and instructive; unique rhythmic
modifications, and the shifted rhythm, occur frequently analyze ; carefully.
Bach, Toccata for Clavichord in d minor, measures 15-32 ; M. 3 beats, in Alto.
Bach, Fantasia con Imitazione, Peters ed. No. 216, Section II (| time); M.
undergoes several modifications. Bach, Fantasia, Peters ed. 215, bottom of page 7
to page 10. Same volume, page 22, —
first 4 measures introductory; M. in Alto,
one measure. Bach, Fantasia, Peters ed. 1959, pages 94 to 97, first 14 measures —
introductory. Same volume, pages 99-100 (C time).
Mendelssohn, Var. se'rieuses, op. 54, Var. 10.
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. VIII, No. 8; independent Bass
(par. 73«).
EXERCISE 23.
A. Write a 4-voice Invention, in brief sectional form, in minor with an original ;
Motive, patterned after those shown in Ex. 121. Especial reference must be made
to par. 64 (Leading part) Ex. 122, Note *\) (sustained parts)
; par. d\d (Ties) par. ; ;
63 b,c (Rests). The Imitation in Augmentation, and also in Diminution (par. 31 a,

i), are both available in 4-voice texture, and must not be neglected.
B. A 4-voice Invention, sectional form, in major.
Other Structural Designs.
79. Besides those in sectional form, occasional examples of the 4-

voice Invention are found in the 2-Part or 3-Part Song-form. For
example, see —
Bach, Air with 30 Variations (Clav.), Var. 4; M. of 3 notes, Soprano part; first
Imitations in alternate original and contrary motion (compare par. 73a) definite 2- ;
Part Song-form.
Same work, Var. 22 ; M. of 2 measures, first announced in Tenor, after i£ intro-
ductory measures ; definite 2-Part form.
Bach, English Suite No. I, " Allemande " ; the M. of Part I is presented in a
mode of notation peculiar to ieyooard-instruments, and, as it represents harmonic
bulk rather than individual tone-/>««, scarcely justifiable in any other than these
; it appears thus, after 3 introductory beats,
inferior grades of polyphonic writing
Ex.
123,
and is imitated in this form without exception to the end of the Part: the Second
Part has a new M., announced in Bass after two preliminary beats the last 4 meas ;
ures of the Parts correspond.

Beethoven, Variations, op. 120, Var. 24 (M. for each Part, somewhat free).
80. The fullness and weight of 4-voice Polyphony leave less oppor-
tunity for distinctions of style than were definable in 3-voice texture,
and therefore the Serious or Stately style is almost the only consistent
variety (par. 72^).
a. But it is possible, by such use of protracted rests as will virtually
reduce the texture to three voices, for a time at least, to realize the
lyric, and even the moderately spirited styles. This is ingeniously
illustrated in Bach, Clavichord Sonata (Peters ed. No. 213), No. I.
" Gigue."
b. Another device, very common in the 4-voice Invention, and es-

pecially effective in the lyric style, is the adoption of a brief thematic
Figure, which is carried through the several voices more as an inciden-
tal than as an essential motive, and merely enlivens what is actually a
definite harmonic stratum. Compare par. 72*/. This was seen in
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Prelude 12, cited above.
See also Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 16 M. of 4 notes, an- ;
nounced at once in Soprano its recurrences, often much modified, are recognizable
;
more by the striking rhythm than by the melodic form; the first 3 Sections (4
measures each) are very similar.
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. T., Prelude 22 M. of 5 notes, Soprano, often
;
extended by sequence, and at times contracted to 3 tones 2-Part Song-form. ;
Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 1 ; the first 4J measures are an
Introduction, containing only intimations of the M., which first appears in its legiti-
mate form, in Bass, at the end of measure 5, where Part I begins ; the texture is
largely episodic ; the design is 3-Part Song-form, with transposed Third Part (meas-
ures 20-29 corresponding closely to measures 4^-13^. shifted one-half measure).
In organ music the association of three thematic parts with an

Bass
independent (pedal-part), as explained in par. 73^, is effective and
not uncommon, — especially in connection with the elaboration of a
chorale melody (to be considered later on).
See Bach, Organ Compositions (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. V, Nos. 1, 14, 16, 38,
56, and others.
The Five-Voice Invention.
81. An Invention for 5 parts is naturally rare. When so elaborate

a polyphonic apparatus is employed, it is mostly in the service of the
higher grades of Polyphony. It is, however, easily possible to expand

Par. 81. THE FIVE-VOICE INVENTION. 173
the 4-voice to an ostensible 5-voice texture, by the occasional addition of a

5th part, with entire freedom as regards register, though usually in
thematic form. The M. should be brief, narrow in compass, and of
„;uiet, if not heavy, rhythmic formation; the style will probably be
lyric, or stately.
See Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 1 1 M. of 4 notes, Soprano, ;
reproduced twice in same voice, in Contrary motion, before the regular Imitations
begin. The 'design is genuine 3-Part Song-form; Part I ends in measure 16, and is
followed by a complete sequential reproduction, before Part II appears (in measure
33). Texture largely 4-voice. Analyze minutely.
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. IV, No. 12. Same Vol., No. 11, —
second Division (Grave) M. 2 measures, Soprano
; observe, also, the frequent ;
ascending scale-passage, in whole measures.
EXERCISE 24.
A. Write a 4-voice Invention in 2-Part Song-form ; all details optional. Either

an original Motive or one of the following may be used
1. Sosten.
I
2. Andante con moto.
4
-U4
mP Tenor.
iifM^^^î Soprano.
3. (Exercise 19.)
•
gfee^ I*
=P=t
=r=t I
Bass.
B. A 4-voice Invention, in " Gigue "-form, moderately lively tempo, according

to par. 80a.
C. A 4-voice Invention in Lyric or Serious style, with Incidental thematic

Figure, according to par. 800.
D. An Invention for 5 parts ; form optional. Either the following or an origi-
nal Motive
Lento.
M ,
*£
iliEEE s-
-1 -1
T~l r
etc.
M.
CHAPTER IX.
Free Polyphonic Forms. — The Invention as PrSlude.

- — The
Fantasia, Toccata, Etc.
82. In a genuine Invention the principle of thematic Imitation pre-

vails with little or no interruption ; for though it represents the lower
grade of polyphonic writing (par. 37), it is nevertheless Polyphony ; the
thematic development is of primary, the structural design of secondary,
importance. In Homophony this relation of qualities is reversed,
the material subserves the Form.
But it is not always possible, or desirable, to separate these two
domains of musical thought absolutely, and many intermediate varieties
exist, in which a mixture (or the alternation) of the two ruling purposes
is exhibited. Thus, the Invention may very gradually deteriorate from
its original polyphonic rank, —
as the thematic treatment becomes more
and more loose and free, and the episodic passages more extended and
independent, in the pursuit of some more and more marked structural
purpose, — becomes partly (at times totally) homophonic in
until it
character and And, on the other hand, a genuine homophonic

effect.
form may, by the interlineation of more or less assertive and extensive

imitatory passages, assume a partially (at times distinctly) polyphonic
character.
Examples of such intermediate grades have been quite frequently
cited in the preceding pages, and in some instances their classification
among the " Inventions " has been doubtful, — in exact proportion to
the increasing importance attached to all essentially structural (formal)
conditions. See, especially, pars. 45, 51, 53, 72, 8o£.
It appears, therefore, that this primary division of the polyphonic
forms, for which the collective term " Invention " has been adopted,
embraces a number of subordinate varieties, inclining more or less posi-
tively toward the homophonic domain, and distinguished by certain

peculiarities of design or treatment.
The Prelude.
83. As its name indicates, the Prelude was not, originally, a sepa-
rate and independent composition, but always an adjunct of some
Par. 83. THE PRELUDE. 1 75
legitimate form (or of a collective set of pieces), in the inferior capacity

of a preliminary or introductory movement.
The inferiority of rank thus involved is exhibited in many and vari-
ous ways : either in looseness of form, or in freedom of technical detail,
or both ; and homophonic quality of episodes in
in frequency, extent, ;
indifference to the number —

the frequent employment of purely
of parts,
auxiliary tones or melodic fragments, and free interchange 0/2,3, 4 ( or
more)-part texture; or in a certain general superficiality and sketchiness
of character, suggestive, in extreme cases, of a mere improvisation.
Such a form, consisting mainly in a free exposition of the principal
harmonies of the key, perhaps with thematic allusions, may very appro-
priately precede, and prepare the hearer for, the more definite design
and thoughtful contents of the principal movement to follow.
The degree of inferiority depends mainly upon the function assigned
to the Prelude and likewise, while the species of texture (homophonic
;
or polyphonic), and the general style (lyric, dramatic, brilliant, etc.), are
almost entirely optional, they may be partly definable according to the
character and quality of the principal movement with which the Prelude
is connected.
a. The treatment of the Prelude is, as a rule, most serious when it
precedes the Fugue. In this connection it is likely to be a genuine

Invention, entirely (or largely) polyphonic. Generally it bears no other
relation to its Fugue than that of key; — time, tempo, Motive, and
character may be independent of the latter, though occasionally the M.
of the Prelude is derived from the Subject of the Fugue.
The does not appear in any of the 48 numbers of the

latter (thematic) coincidence
Well-temp. Clavichord, excepting, perhaps, in Vol. I, No. 23 (B major), where a faint,
probably accidental, resemblance between the first 4 notes of the Prelude and of the
Fugue, may be traced. In the 6 numbers of Mendelssohn's op. 35, also, there is
no thematic connection between Prelude and Fugue, save a brief coincidence in No.
4 (Ao ). On the other hand, see Rubinstein, op. 53, where thematic connection is
obvious between Prelude and Fugue in Nos. 1 and 6 and, more incidentally, in Nos.
;
3 and 4.
Generally the Prelude to a Fugue ends with a complete cadence on

the Tonic, becoming thus a separate piece, virtually independent of its
Fugue. In rare instances, however, especially when the Prelude is

brief, and of a looser, more extemporaneous character, it closes with
a Dominant semi-cadence, leading, as Introduction, into the Fugue.
See Rubinstein, op. 53, Nos. 1, 2, 4, and 6, — Dominant ending. In the Well-
temp. Clavichord, and in op. 35 of Mendelssohn, the Preludes are independent.
The texture is distinctly polyphonic (i.e., Invention-species) in the following

Preludes of the Well-temp. Clavichord, already analyzed: Vol. I, Nos. 4, 9, 12,. 14,
18, 23, 24; Vol. II, Nos. 4, 5, 8, 10, 11, 19, 21, and 22; also No. 3, 2nd division.
The texture is of a less strict type, including more episodes, or definitely
homophonic passages, in Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I, Nos. 17, 20; Vol. II, Nos.
9, 13, 17, 18. a more general imitatory character (less definitely thematic)
It is ai
in Vol. I, No. 16; Vol. II, .Nos. 1, 16. Prelude 11 of Vol. I is based upon Sequence
rather than Imitation. For all of these the term Prelude, (or Prelude-Invention) is
more appropriate than " Invention " would be.
See also, Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. II, Prael. 1 ; Invention,
3- to 4-voice, indep. Pedal, sectional.
Vol. II, Prael. 5 ; 2-Part Song-form.
Vol. II, Prael. 7 ; Invention, 4-voice, 2 motives (Pedal an indep., 3rd, motive).
Vol. II, Prael. 9; many motives, definite sectional form, ample confirmation,
4- to 5-voice.
Vol. II, Prael. 10; very similar to Prael. 9; 4-voice.
Vol. Ill, Prael. 1 ; long sectional form (ten Sections), free, but including genuine
polyphonic texture (Sees. 5 and 8) confirmations, and ; Da capo.

Vol. Ill, Prael. 4 3-Part Song-form. ;
Vol. Ill, Prael. 9 ; three divisions : Introduction, Invention (4-voice, 2 Sections),

Transition into Fugue.
Vol. IV, Prael. 2 ; two motives, sectional.
Vol. IV, Prael. 3; three divisions: Prelude, Thematic section, Coda.
Mendelssohn, Organ Comp., op. 37, Prael. 1 ; Invention, elaborate thematic

treatment; excellent illustration of fragmentary manipulation; 4-voice, long motive,
sectional (quasi 3-Part Song-form).
Op. 37, Prael. 2 ;
3-Part Song-form, motive for each Part ; distinctly thematic,
but homophonic (lyric) in character.
Op. 37, Prael. 3 ; 4-voice, six Sections ; a principal Theme with various counter-
motives, in different (accelerated) rhythms.
b. The Lyric Invention, with a long, melodious Motive (pars. 53,

72*:), belongs properly to the Prelude variety and when the lyric pur- ;
pose so overshadows the polyphonic that evidences of thematic imita-

tion are faint, and incidental in effect, it becomes ultimately a Prelude
as Aria, with, at most, occasional imitatory traits in the accompanying
parts.
See Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. II, Prelude 24, 14; Vol. I, Prelude 13, 8.
The extreme limit of touched in the following
this design is almost distinctly —
homophonic — Preludes of the Well-temp. Clavichord: Vol. II, No. 12; Vol. I, No.
10 (with long Coda, as Toccata, — par. 84), No. 1 (simple chord-figuration) ; Vol. II,
No. 3, first division (the same).
c. The Chorale-Prelude is an organ composition, designed to precede

the congregational intonation of the opening chorale in the Lutheran
Par. 83d. THE PRELUDE. 177
and other Reformed church-services, chiefly in Germany. Hence its

M. is derived recognizably from the first line of the chorale, and the
treatment isusually distinctly, sometimes severely, imitatory, as in the
Invention ; though evidences of the freedom of design and treatment
characteristic of the Prelude-species are seldom wanting, and sometimes
so pronounced as to lower the Prelude to the rank of a mere Chorale-
Fantasia, — especially in practical expositions, which are quite com-
monly actual polyphonic improvisations, i.e., made extempore.
Examples of this form will be cited in Chapter XI.
d. The Prelude as opening number of a Suite is more independent

than any of the foregoing, and may be isolated, as well as any other
number of the Suite. In this respect it resembles, and probably was
the incentive to, the variety treated at e below.
succeeding numbers of the Suite solely in point of
It relates to the
key and its texture may be selected, at option, from the whole range
;
of Polyphony very rarely, indeed, however, is it any more severe than

;
the genuine Invention (Bach, English Suite No. I) most commonly it is ;
of the looser fabric of the " Prelude "-species (as in Bach, English Suite
No. VI, first 37 measures ; Bach, Prelude to Suite, Peters ed. 214, pages
32 > 33> — fi rs t *5 measures introductory); sometimes of a general imi-
tatory character, without manifest thematic development (as in Handel,
Suites Nos. V, VI, VIII ; Bach, Sonata, Peters ed. 213, pages 4, 5 ; same
volume, pages 20, 21); possibly still more nearly, or absolutely, homo-
phonic (as in Handel, Suites Nos. I, III Bach, Prelude to Suite, Peters ;
ed. 214, pages 18, 19).

The Prelude as " Fantasia " is touched upon in par. 85.
e. The modern Prelude, as isolated piece. '

The propriety of the
title Prelude is apparently cancelled by isolation, for its relation as
" Prelude ''
to a subsequent movement is uncertain, if not utterly chi-
merical. But it is nevertheless possible to institute close analogy with
the legitimate Prelude-form, by preserving such traits as distinguish the
latter, or, at least, imply its origin in that early era of musical history
which gave rise to the conventional Prelude. The modern isolated
Prelude will therefore usually be found to exhibit some traces of this
origin, in remnants of the polyphonic bearing of earlier centuries ; in

the presence of certain scholastic details which suggest (if they do not
constitute) "imitation," "contrapuntal treatment," or other distinctive
traits of the traditional Prelude; particularly in the absence of that
178 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 83e.
dominating romantic expression, significant of the modern conception of

music. For example :
Mendelssohn, 3 Praeludien, op. 104 (No. 1, thematic, contrapuntal, but free, and
not imitatory No. 2, running parts; No. 3, elaborate figuration, quasi thematic).
;
Rubinstein, 6 Preludes, op. 24 (No. 1, elaborate running inner part No. 2, ;
already cited, Invention No. 3, imitatory,

; —
at times almost canonic No. 4, Toccata ;
No. 5, elaborate figuration; No. 6, imitatory).
Beethoven, Praeludium in / minor (Peters ed. 142) ; thematic, quasi Invention.

Chopin, Prelude, op. 45 elaborate figuration.
;
Bach, Praeludium, Peters ed. 1959, page 67 (Invention).

Schumann, Praeludium, op. 99, No. 10 elaborate figuration ;
Bach, Organ Compositions, Vol. VIII, No. 11.
Further, the title " Preludes " has been assigned by several modern
writers to a series of 24 pieces in each of the 24 major and minor keys,
partly in analogy with the design of Bach's Well-temp. Clavichord ; and
also partly because this device supplies the pianist with a piece (pre-
sumably brief, and either extemporaneous and sketchy in character, or
of the traditional "prelude" consistency) in every key, and therefore
actually available, if desired, as preliminary sentence to any number
upon a concert-program, — as far as the relation of key is concerned.
This is the modulatory disposition of the 24 Preludes of Chopin, op. 28, several
of which exhibit, furthermore, certain scholastic traits (Nos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 12, 14, 15
— the persistent reiteration of ab =gt, — 19, 21), while others are brief or extem-
poraneous (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 16, 18, 20, 22, 23) ; and others, again, are lyric and
definite enough in design to merit a more significant title (Nos. 13, 15, 17, 21, 24).
See further
Heller, 24 Praeludien, op. 81 (brief, rhapsodical, and extremely loose in respect
of formal design, —-with but few exceptions). Heller, 32 Praeludien, op. 119 (cer-
tain keys represented twice, or oftener). Hummel, 24 Preludes, op. 67 (all brief,
and distinctly extemporaneous and effect).

in design
Further: 2 Praeludien by Beethoven, op. 39 (Peters ed. 142) ; each is a modu-
latory study, the design being to describe the complete circuit of major keys, twice
— both are thematic, the first one (cited above) more definitely imitatory than the
second.
The Toccata.
84. This is one of the earliest forms of instrumental music, and

derived its name from the primitive mechanical act of manipulating the
keyboard (toccare, to touch). Originating thus, long before instrumen-
tal music had assumed any of its present definite structural designs,
the early Toccata was a formless succession of figures and runs, some-
Par. 84a. THE TOCCATA. 1
79
times purely harmonic, again imitatory and contrapuntal, often in-
coherent and indefinable. It was the legitimate forerunner of the

Fantasia, but has retained its own title to the present day, and has
gradually developed into a somewhat more definite and characteristic
style, the basis of which is the manipulation of a small Motive, or mere
brief Figure, usually of but two or three notes, — possibly strictly poly-
phonic, as in the genuine Invention, — much more commonly, however,
only partly polyphonic, or even purely homophonic ;
generally in lively,
vigorous tempo.
a. The Toccata as single movement
The Toccata as Invention is exemplified in Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I,
Prelude 22 (already cited) Prelude 15 Vol.

; Vol. I, ; and 7
II, Preludes 2, 6, 15, 23,
(the last more graceful than the ordinary Toccata). Bach, English Suite No. Ill,
" Prelude " (Figure of 3 tones, uppermost part texture variable, from one to five
;
parts; broad sectional design, par. 68^, —

with da capo). —
Bach, Toccata con Fuga, Peters ed. 211, page 4, Allegro moderate.
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. Ill, No. 2, "Toccata"; No. 3, "Toccata"
(approaching the Prelude-species).
assumes the looser Prelude consistency in Bach, Well-temp. Clavichord, Vol. I,
It
Preludes 2, 5, 6, and 21 Vol. II, Prelude 3, first 24 measures. Bach, Preludio con
;
Fuga, Peters ed. 211, pages 14-21 (two Motives, in close succession) same volume, ;
pages 28-31, Allegro. Bach, Preludio con Fuga, Peters ed. 214, pages 4, 5; same
volume, pages 10, n. Bach, Toccata, Peters ed. 215, pages 19-21. Bach, Organ
Comp., Vol. II, Prael. 2 Prael. 3 and Prael. 8. Vol. Ill, Prael. 5, and Prael. 7. Vol.
; ;
IV, No. 4, "Toccata" (encloses the Fugue, quasi as Prelude and Postlude).
See further, Schumann, Toccata for Pianoforte, op. 7 (largely homophonic,
but with occasional Imitatory, and even distinctly thematic, passages). Of kindred
texture and character is the last movement of Beethoven's Pianoforte Sonata, op.
54; and even the Finale of his Sonata, op. 26, might be called a Toccata.
It is left to the student to inspect such other examples of the Toccata, both
homophonic and polyphonic, as he may find in published literature for Pianoforte or
Organ.
b. The Toccata sometimes appears as collective form, of three, four,

and even more distinct divisions, or movements. In this broader and
more elaborate design it usually comprises as many distinctions of style
as there are divisions, and is therefore a composite of Invention, Pre-
lude, Toccata, Fantasia, — very frequently including also the higher
Fugue-species, — in apparently optional succession.
See Bach, Toccata for Clavichord in e minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 1), three brief,
totally independent sections, the 2nd (£, Allegro) a. Double Fughetta, to be consid-
ered later; a. Fugue follows, to which the Toccata may be considered to be a.
" Prelude." Bach, Toccata in f% minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 2), four different, but
l8o APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 85.
kindred, divisions I, an introductory " Toccata "

: II, a 4-voice Invention; III, a;
Fugue, connected with IV, a Double Fugue, by a curious sequential Interlude of 31

measures. Bach, Toccata in c minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 3), very similar: Move-
ment I, an introductory " Toccata " II, a 4-voice Invention III, 0. Fugue, connected
; ;
by a brief Interlude with IV, a Double Fugue, followed by brief Coda. Bach, Toc-
cata in d minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 4), three divisions: I, a brief introductory
"Toccata"; II, 4-voice Invention III, Double Fugue, followed by a Coda. Bach,
;
Toccata con Fuga in g minor (Peters ed. 211, No. 1), four divisions: I, introductory
Cadenza, three measures ; II, Aria, 12 measures ; III, an Invention, 2- to 4-voice; IV,
a Postlude, n measures. The "Fuga" which follows is entirely independent of the
Toccata, excepting in key. Bach, Toccata in Gmajor (Peters ed. 215, No. 3), three
movements : I, Toccata; II, 4-voice Invention; III, Fugue. Bach, Organ Comp.,
Vol. Ill, No. 8, "Toccata"; four divisions (31 measures introductory Cadenzas).
The Fantasia.
85. This is of still less definite and definable form and consistence
than the Toccata, though in many respects closely connected with the
latter in origin and character. It is, as its name indicates, a fanciful
combination of tone-effects. freedom of melodic
Irregularity of design,
and rhythmic treatment, and generally incoherent character, are there-
fore almost essential conditions of the species at the same time, the ;
domination of a central tonality, occasional concurrences of style (cor-

roboration of former sections), and the evidences of at least a broadly
consistent progressive design, cannot be wholly dispensed with.
The texture of the Fantasia, as a whole, is more likely to be homo-
phonic than polyphonic, though the latter style is frequently adopted for
certain sections, — probably in unconscious imitation of the technical
conditions under which, centuries ago, the Fantasia came into existence.
For illustrations see Bach, Fantasia for Clavichord in c minor (Peters ed. 212,
No. 1), already cited, as 2-voice " Invention." Bach, Chromatic Fantasia, d minor
(followed by a Fugue). Bach, Fantasia in g minor (Peters ed. 215, No. 5), introduc-
tory Cadenza, 2 measures, —
the rest a strictly polyphonic "Invention" in double
counterpoint, to be analyzed later. Bach, Fantasia e Fuga ("Peters ed. 1959, page
80, 21 measures) ; same volume, pages 84, 85, — quasi " Toccata." Bach, Clavichord
Sonata (Peters ed. 213, No. 3), first movement; no other title than the
this bears
tempo-mark, Adagio, but it is a" lyric Fantasia," quasi " Aria."
Handel, Clavichord
Suite No. 1, " Prelude," — clearly Fantasia in consistency. Bach, Fantasia con Fuga
in a minor (Peters ed. 208, No. 2), already cited, as " Invention." Bach, Organ
Comp., Vol. Ill, No. 6, " Fantasia"; 4-voice Invention, or rather, Invention-group,
2 Motives, for successive Sections treatment serious and strict form very definite.
; ;
Vol. Ill, Prael. 10; VoL IV, Prael. 1 and PraeL 5. Vol. II, No. 4, "Fantasia'
;
(elaborate).
Par. 86. THE FANTASIA. l8l
The Fantasia as more elaborate collective form, — like the broad Toccata,
is illustrated in the following
Bach, Fantasia con Fuga in D (Peters ed. zn, No. 3) five movements, viz,,
;
Introduction, Toccata, Interlude (similar to Introduction), Double Invention, Post-

lude (similar to I and III), — followed bya Fugue. Bach, Fantasia in a minor (Peters
ed. 215, No. i)j three movements, — Toccata, Invention, Toccata (similar to I).
Bach, Fantasia con Imitazione (Peters ed. 216, No. 7) two movements, Introduc- ; —
tion and Invention. Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. IV, No. 11 three movements (the ;
" Grave " already cited as 5-voice Invention).

General reference may also be made to the more modern, and almost wholly homo*
phonic, Fantasias Mozart, Pianoforte Fantasia (followed by a complete Sonata) in c
:
minor (Cotta ed. No. 18); Mozart, Fantasia for Pianoforte in ./minor (Cotta ed.
No. 23) ; ditto in c minor (Cotta ed. No. 24) ; ditto in C major (Cotta ed. No. 25), —
followed by a Fugue. Mendelssohn, op. 15.
Mixed Forms, of a General Imitatory Character.
86. Finally, there is a very numerous class of musical forms which

are neither definitely homophonic nor polyphonic, but a mixture of
both ;
partaking of the characteristics of the Invention, the Prelude, and
the Fantasia, though not strictly to be classified as any of these.
Such mixed forms rest upon a homophonic basis, and therefore ex-
harmonic and melodic traits, and, generally, well-defined
'hibit distinct
form. The polyphonic elements are exhibited, side by side with these,
and more or less sparingly, in incidental imitations, or a general imitatory
bearing, quite different from that continuous thematic development of
which Imitation is an essential factor, — the essential condition of the
genuine Invention, as has been seen, and, in a higher degree, of the
Fugue and Canon, as remains to be seen.
Many of the examples cited above, under the head of the Prelude, Toccata, or
Fantasia, belong properly to this mixed class, though designated thus definitely by
their authors, and, usually, approaching most nearly in general design the character
of the form in question.

"
The most characteristic examples are to be found in some of the " Allemandes
and " Courantes " (more rarely in the " Bounces," " Gavottes," " Minuets," and kin-
dred dances) of the French and English Suites, and clavichord Partitas, of Bach.
In these the " melody " is usually continuous, and sometimes as distinct as in purely
homophonic writing; the harmonic successions are everywhere clearly apparent,
and the design is almost always regular. But fragments of incidental imitation are
frequently introduced ; or, at least, the general impression of contrapuntal texture
(partial voice-independence) is sustained, —despite the entire freedom exercised with
regard to the number of parts employed, and the use of auxiliary tones.
" poly-
See particularly, Bach, Clavichord Partita III, " Allemande (decidedly
same
phonic in general effect, though no evidences of systematic imitation exist)
,
182 APrLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 87.
Partita, " Courante," " Sarabande," and

" Burlesca." Bach, Partita IV, " Alle-
mande" (quasi Aria) "
Courante" (quasi Invention,
; M. in contrary motion dur- —
ing a portion of Part II) " Aria" (general voice-independence, but little evidence of
;
even incidental imitation, —

the same is true of the following " Sarabande " and
" Menuet "). Bach, Partita V, " Allemande " (quasi Invention ; the M. evades strict
definition, being rather of a rhythmic than melodic consistency). Bach, Partita I,
" Allemande " (quasi Toccata, —
occasional incidental imitations) " Courante " (quasi ;
Invention, M. of one measure, in upper part, chiefly in sequential succession). Bach,

Partita II, "Allemande," is a genuine Invention, already cited; the following
" Courante " is quasi Invention, but the imitation is more incidental than essential
" Sarabande," —
incidental imitations, chiefly in 2nd Part.
Bach, English Suite No. I, " Courante I " (a few faint traces of thematic imita-
tion, and considerable incidental imitation the form is unusually regular and defi-
;
nite, the melody of measures 4 and 8 being similar, in both Parts the voice-texture ;
is treated with great freedom). Bach, English Suite No. Ill, " Courante," — excel-
lent example of incidental imitation, and general voice-independence, without a trace
of thematic development. Bach, English Suite VI, " Allemande " and the " Double " ;
of the " Sarabande." Bach, French Suite I, " Allemande " and " Courante " " Sara- ;
bande" (the first 5 measures of Soprano, in Part I, become the Bass in Part II, and
again Soprano, 4 measures later) " Menuet I," similar.
; Bach, French Suite V,
" Bourree II " French Suite VI, " Courante."
;
Handel, Suite for Clavichord No. I, " Allemande " and " Courante " ; the texture
is quite regular (3-voice, occasionally 4), but it is only of a general imitatory charac-
ter, Handel, Suite III, "Allemande" and "Courante";.
not definitely thematic.
Suite IV, "Allemande" and "Courante"; Suite V, "Prelude," "Largo," and
"Gigue." And so forth; the majority of Handel's clavichord pieces, excepting
the Fugues, are replete with incidental imitations, but not strictly thematic.
Scarlatti (Peters ed. No. 277), Suite No. I, "Preludio," "Sarabande"; Suite
II, "Courante," " Scherzo " (quasi Invention) ; Suite III, "Courante" (quasi Inven-
tion, several Motives, Large 2-Part form).
Mendelssohn, op. 7, No. 1, No. 2 (Nos. 4 and 7, — see par. 87), No. 6.
Mendelssohn, Var: serieuses, op. 54, Var. 2, Var. 3, Var. 4 (quasi Invention).
Also, Variations, op. 83, Var. 4.
Schumann, Jugend-Album, op. 68, No. 40 (" Kleine Fuge"), first 22 measures
(quasi 3-voice Invention).
D' Albert, Pianoforte Suite, op. 1 ,

••
Allemande," " Sarabande," " Courante."
Brahms, op. 76, No. 8.
Arthur Foote, op. 45, No. 1, Invention; 2-voice; 3-Part form.
Homophonic Forms with Polyphonic Episodes.
87. A mixture of the polyphonic and homophonic styles, of stiL

another kind, is obtained by introducing brief thematic imitations, oi
complete thematic sections, into a composition of distinctly homophonic
character and otherwise unalloyed homophonic texture.
Par. 87. MIXED FORMS. 1 83
Such incidental polyphonic episodes may occur in the course of a

homophonic design (as, for instance, during the Second Part of the
Three-Part Song-form) or the form may begin, like an Invention, with
;
genuine thematic imitations, which extend for a few measures and then
gradually (or even abruptly) relax and yield to pronounced homophonic
treatment or, more rarely, the polyphonic texture may be adopted near
;
the end, as a means of promoting interest or creating a climax, or as —

basis of the Codetta. For illustration
Beethoven, Pianoforte Sonata, op. 2, No. 1, "Trio" of the Menuetto (thematic

throughout, quasi Invention of the "Prelude" consistency). Sonata, op. 2, No. 2,
Finale, first 16 measures (a 3-Part form, in which Part II, measures 9-12, is imita-
tory). Sonata, op. i, No. 3, Scherzo (thematic throughout, quasi Invention, " Pre-
lude "-species). Sonata, op. 10, No. 2, Allegretto, measures 9-30 (Parts II and III,
imitatory). Same Sonata, Finale, entire; broad 3-Part form, quasi Invention with
homophonic episodes thematic imitation almost constantly, but within the definite
;
limits of a homophonic design. Sonata, op. 10, No. 3, Menuetto, Part II. Sonata,
op. 22, Adagio, measures 34-45. Sonata, op. 27, No. 1, Finale, measures 106-131
(thematic imitation). Sonata, op. 28, Finale, measures 29-35 > an<^ measures 79-101
(thematic, M. of 4 measures, upper part). Sonata, op. 54, Finale, first 28 measures.
Sonata, op. 109, Finale, Variation IV and Variation V. Beethoven, Variations,
op. 35, var. V, 2nd Part; var. V'l, 2nd Part. Variations, op. 120, Vars. IV, V, VI,
IX, XI, XIV, XXX (portions of each). Variations in A (Righini-Theme), Var. VII,
— 2-Part form, new Motive for Part II ; Var. XXI, 2nd Part.
Mendelssohn, op. 7, No. 4 (partly thematic, almost throughout) op. 7, No. 7 ;
(general imitatory character); op. 14, Principal Theme of Rondo; Prelude, op. 35,
No. 3 (quasi Toccata, practically homophonic, but with numerous imitatory epi-
sodes). Organ Sonata, '.p. 65, No. 5, Finale (Sees. I, III, and V are based upon
a Motive of two measures Sees. II and IV upon a new Theme, longer, and lyric,
;
with more animated accompaniment). —

See also, again, op. 37> No. 2.
Additional Miscellaneous Examples.
Schumann, Papillons, op. 2 : No. 3 ; No. 9, Second Part.
Schumann, Intermezzi, op. 4: measures 3-7, measures 17-24; No. 5,

No. 1,
" Alternativo," imitatory throughout, with harmonic accompaniment (in figural form
in Part III).
Schumann, Symphonic fetudes, op. 13: No. 1, measures 1-8; No. 8, thematic
Imitation throughout (quasi 4-voice); No. 12, measure 37 ("animato ") to 75, the-
matic Imitation, partly 2 Motives.
Schumann, Waldscenen, op. 82, No. IV ; also No. III.
Schumann, Kreisleriana, op. 16, No. 5, measures 5-14.
Schumann, Novellette, op. 21, No. 1 (5-flat signature).
Schumann, Romanzen, op. 28, No. 3, measures 1-24 ;

also " Intermezzo I,"
thematic Imitation throughout, quasi 4-voice.

1
Schumann, Gigue, op. 32, No. z., 3-voice Invention, sectional.

Chopin, Mazurka, No. 32 (op. 50, No. 3), measures 1-9, 33-41.
Chopin, Mazurka, No. 41 (op. 63, No. 3), measures 1-10 from end.
Chopin, Ballade, No. 4 (op. 52), measures 134 (cadenza) to 145.
Chopin, Scherzo, No. 3 (op. 39), measures 59-98 ; Motive in Bass, measures
59-66, and repeated, in octaves Imitation in inner voice, measures 75-82, and meas-
;
ures 83-90.
Chopin, Etude, op. 25, No. 11 ; the Motive (measures 1-2) pervades the en-
tire Etude, with figural accompaniment ; not strictly Invention, but thematic, and
generally polyphonic.
Schubert, Pianoforte Sonata, op. 143, principal theme of the Finale.
EXERCISE 25.
A. Write two examples of the Prelude as Invention (minor and major, respec-
tively), according to the general explanation given in par. 83, and with reference also
to par. 86.
B. An example of the Toccata (in one or two movements), according to par. 84.
C. An example of the Fantasia (par. 85).
D. Two or more examples of the homophonic Three-Part Song-form, with imita-

tory episodes as indicated in par. 87. Use a different mode, different measure, and
different style (par. 72) for each.
DIVISION THREE.
CHORALE-FIGURATION.
Introductory.
The contrapuntal elaboration of the Chorale (the characteristic representa-

88.
tive ofGerman ecclesiastic song since the days of the Reformation) has always
been regarded by serious German masters of the past three centuries as a most
important and truly indispensable part of the academic discipline of the composer;
and, while a portion of this conception may be due to religious enthusiasm, it is
nevertheless a just and wise pedagogic view. There is, unquestionably, no field of
contrapuntal training so reliable and wholesome, so stimulating to the determined
student whose aims are serious and genuine, and, best of all, so many-sided and
inexhaustible, as "polyphonic Chorale-elaboration,'' — or "Chorale-Figuration," as
it is more commonly called.
For this reason, although its immediate practical utility may not be apparent (as
available "composition"), its very thorough and conscientious exercise is warmly
Par. 89. CHORALE-FIGURATION. 1
85
urged upon the student ;

particularly upon him who desires to master the Fugue and
Canon, — forms which cannot (as a rule) be successfully realized with the compara-
tively limited contrapuntal technique that will have been acquired through the exer-
cise of the Inventions only. Chorale-figuration affords precisely the quality and
degree of supplementary technical discipline required for the proper achievement of
these higher polyphonic forms.
89. Chorale-elaborations are divided, according to their magnitude,

and certain distinctions of treatment, into two classes known as the
Small Species and Large Species.
CHAPTER X.
The Small Species of Chorale-Figuration.
90. In the small species the adopted chorale melody (called the
cantus firmus) is placed in the uppermost part, as regular Soprano, and
in its original metric condition, without extensions or interruptions.

The exercises are to be written for the Organ, and therefore the lower-
most part is Pedal keyboard, while the upper three parts are
for the
placed on two staves for the Manual keyboard (generally one, possibly
two).
The student who is unfamiliar with the technique of the Organ must first obtain
at least a general insight into the treatment of the Manuals and Pedals, before under-
taking the present tasks. The only information, that can be given here is, that the
compass of the pedals is, generally, as follows : 3&

~
and that the tones
of two adjacent manual-parts should always be well within reach of one hand.
Elaborate Harmonization.
91. As the basis of this species of polyphonic texture is again

mainly harmonic (see par. 75^), the student had best begin with experi-
ments of a specifically harmonic nature, and make a number of chorale
harmonizations, as ingeniously as possible and elaborately as desired,
in ordinary 4-part writing (with or without Pedal-bass), after the manner
of the following
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. V, No. 36 (analyze thoroughly) ;
end of No. 53; page 60, I; page 68, I; page 76; page 105. Further, Vol. V, No. —
27. — Vol. VI, No. 26 (5-voice). —

Vol. VII, No. 53 (chorale melody extended by
rests before and between the lines imitatory, but not thematic).
;
Thematic Accompaniment.
92. The number of parts ordinarily employed is four : the cantus

firmus, two inner parts, and the Pedal bass.
a. The three lower (accompanying) parts — including the Pedal —

are to be thematic ;a Motive (or brief Figure of one or two beats)
that is,
is adopted, and imitated in the usual manner, as contrapuntal harmoniza-

tion,or Figuration, of the given chorale. The cantus may be written in
J with
-notes, a thematic figure (below) in J* -notes or in
J -notes, with
;
figure in J* or J* -notes. Or, these values dotted (f or J^- time).

For illustration (beginning of a chorale) :
-I ypcd jjQ^^ p i
Ex. I Man. etc.
U.*%) M.
124
r^-t
i2. Longer Motive
s tj-QEr^=t
M.
etc.
m X =3
M.
^^B&ESit^
(cont. m.) M.
M.
S3
Par. 92b. CHORALE-FIGURATION. 1 87
*i) C. F. — the cantus firmus, or given chorale melody.

*2) The Motive, or thematic figure. In this instance it is only one beat long
in the next version it is a genuine " Motive," two beats in length.
*3) Imitation in contrary motion. Every conceivable device of Imitation may

be freely used, in this polyphonic task.
*4) Or an 8ve lower; the Pedal-bass is generally kept fairly low, though it may
cross the Tenor occasionally, without objection. See also Ex. 129.
b. The usual harmonic process must be pursued, more or less in-
sistently, in defining the chord-basis of each beat or tone of the cantus

firmus ; but the effect of the accompanying (Jigural) voices must be thor-
oughly polyphonic.
Much liberty may be taken with the adopted Motive as a rule, it
—
;
should be present constantly, in some part, in some shape or other,

Ex. 124, Note *3) though it may, briefly, be replaced by episodic
;
fragments, either derived from the M., or independent.

It is not necessary to have a separate chord for each tone of the
c.f. The same chord may be held through two successive tones, or
more or the harmony may change within one c.f.
; tone. Modulations,
both diatonic and chromatic, must be freely made, and may be as swift
as is compatible with perfect smoothness.

The Pedal-part should be kept somewhat more quiet (sustained)
than the inner parts. See also Ex. 124, Note *4).
The end of each " Line " of the chorale is designated bya^s; this,
however, merely serves to mark the lines, and is not to be respected, in
the Small species, — no check of the rhythmic movement is to occur,
anywhere. At the same time, these final tones (/*n) should produce a
certain cadential impression, and therefore they should, as a rule, be

harmonized with some triad, in fundamental form.
At the end, the thematic rhythm runs on, a beat or so (usually in one
or both of the inner voices), past the final c.f. tone. Or, better, the
final tone may be expanded to a whole measure, or more, while the
lower parts effect a plagal ending.

The following illustrations are to be analyzed very thoroughly and
minutely
Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. V, No. 22 (M. in Alto, one beat) No. 48 (M. in Tenor, ;
one beat) No. 33 No. 32 (M. in Pedal, two beats) No. 5 No. 2 (M. in Pedal, two
; ;
; ;
beats) No. 4, verse II (M. in Tenor, four beats)

;
No. 47 (manuals only) No. 31
; ;
(M. in Pedal, four beats, divided into two definite figures; inner parts
largely
episodic).
Table of German Chorales, for Use During This Entire

Third Division.
N. B. It is not obligatory to use the keys here given. The chorales

may, sometimes must, be transposed to other, higher or lower, keys.
1.
n\
ps^JF^P^^^Spg^
*
u=i
&E*3£f
-&—&-
^
fel
Pe&^Se^=E *=i4 s zgH- 'g-
-z^-
?
fe fet* S g'-hsi— •-*- -zsi--^ -<g— <&-|-zJ-
«> — (=-
o
ir g (*-v)
o—gi-
g -s<—z^- Sg^ -e>— -& ^:

Xs-*-
gs
'9—3— e—gt— &— -P=F —t=F
2— is-
m
(orrfV)
4.
pa^S 5
fSZ— <&- =SI F
1
5.
^^=3=EgE^. ttzzf: —
gi <g- 1=1
:
^-E£ S 3? -si-
Par. 92. CHORALE-FIGURA TION. 189
i=t -&
&—£— 3=t
*-- *—*-
-fg=5=4
&Z. — 1
<s> '-si-
^ fei^-J^^gESi^ggji^^j FT* 1
fl Vi 1
190 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. gz.
ESI SjrjzlJ^B
l=±t -g-hg- i
-*-•- ^= —:fc=tt=t
(=-
:^z
(=—(=-
t=t
«
—g£ t=t=&-1=2— S>
iit-. t=5f=tt=t
js
W^T^Ff^
t±t=t
13.
t=t pz&fc
iP^
$ = g=EÎJ=2 * szzg.
pfeg p^ gg Z^±g t=t

g-'- g, eJ
W-*— -g gj
- -g a <- a i
14.
is &—zi- -zt- f fg
t=4
-g>
8e >»—
ÊESFEÊ^ •- ~2gl-
a^s-
. if- ^=^
iEEEiEEEB
iS>
1 &< — g g; gv i a)
(2)1)
(or b V)
ÊEEJJEjgjg 3=3=:*
£
Par. 92. CHORALE-FIGURA TION. I
9I
16.
g^^^gpi^^î
aJJ.
21.
[
^fe^g^^gîaSiS^
Par. 92. CHORALE-FIGURA TSO/v. 193
EXERCISE 26.
A. Harmonize a number of the above chorales, according to par. 91. Write

the chorale in -notes, \ or f time limit the accompaniment to and occasional
J ;
J*-
fe -notes; ehvploy organ-notation (3 staves, including Pedal-bass).
B. Two 4-voice thematic elaborations of No. 1 of the given chorales, with a

Figure of one beat and two beats, respectively, according to par. 92 a, b. Use \
time, and imitate closely the Bach examples.
C. The 4-voice thematic elaboration of two or more other chorales, in any keys,
with a Motive one whole measure in length. The end plagally extended, f, f or ,
^
time may be used.
Independent Pedal-Part.
93. Partly for the sake of effective variety, and partly on account
of the limitations of pedal-technique, it is quite common to conduct the
Pedal-bass independent of the inner thematic voices. This is done (1)
either by so modifying (simplifying) the Motive as to adapt it better to
thf character and technique of the pedals or (2) by adopting an inde- ;
pendent (auxiliary) figure for the bass, in more sustained rhythm. See
par. 73^; Ex. 119; and the following
Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. V, No. 1 No. 13 (inner parts thematic, but largely
;
episodic) No. 14; No. 16 (running Pedal-bass) No. 28 (entire Pedal-motive 3 meas-
; ;
ures long) No. 38 (very characteristic Pedal); No. 40; No. 46; No. 50 (Augm. of
;
Motive, in Pedal observe rhythmic form of c.f.) No. 54 No. 55 (Pedal-motive, a

; ; ;
simplified form of figural motive) No. 56 (M. in Pedal related, but longer) No. 4,
; ;
Verse 3.
Brahms, " Choral- Vorspiel " (and Fugue) in a minor.
Embellished Cantus Firmus.
94. Although it is characteristic of the present task to restrict the
c.f. to the exact form of the original chorale, it is, nevertheless, both
natural and desirable (especially in actual practice) to modify cer-
tain tones of the given melody by means of unessential passing- or
neighboring-notes.
a. Such embellishment of the c.

f. may be limited to strictly unes-
sential auxiliary tones, introduced here and there in order to facilitate
the thematic development, but not altering or obscuring the original
chorale tones. Or it may consist in occasional slight changes of the
original even rhythm, by means of dots. For example
Par. 94b. CHORAL.E-FIG URA TION. 195
Original.
gjfeEJ pîiiiE
ex. ;
125. •
Slightly modified form.
i fa J^pE 3ÊEE
Bach.
-3^t
I jffiÊ i
iIff
£ S^^Sfe
Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. V, No. 22 (already cited) No. 25 (Pedal indep.) No.
(ditto)No. 41 (c.f. embellished thematically, i.e., according to figural Motive
;
and:
49 ;
Pedal, simplified form of M.) No. 53 (compare with above Table of Chorales, No. 22
; ;
the modification of the c. f. oversteps, somewhat, the present limit. Compare, also,
with reference to the c.f. only, the preceding and following numbers of Vol. V —
Nos. 52 and 54).
b. Or the modification may extend to a systematic ornamentation of the chorale
melody, involving all (or nearly all) and resulting often in a
of the original tones,
richly embellished form of the which the lower parts, though usually the-
c.
f, to
matic, appear to constitute a subordinate accompaniment. This variety of elabora-
tion will be considered in detail further on (par. 107).
Motive Derived from Chorale.
95. The motive of the thematic accompaniment may be, and very
frequently is, derived from the first line of. the c.
f. ; usually by simple
Diminution of the first group of (three or four) tones ; or by unessential
figuration of them. Thus :
First line of c. f = Motive.
P3=fC
Ex.
126.
iH ^ -• ?-
=53 I
2. Beg. of Chorale Motive. Bach.
m^
I
More
*
elaborate forms are
=t
shown
etc.
in Ex. 128
mm «n
I 96 APPLIED COUNTERPOufT. Par. 96.
See Bach, Vol. V, No. 21 (contrapuntal associate retained throughout) ; No. 12

(ditto).
96. Finally, each of the three accompanying (figural) parts may

have its own, separate, motive.- Each should be sufficiently character-
istic, especially in its rhythmic form, that of. the Pedal-bass being natu-
rally themost sustained and they are likely to differ in length. Each
;
part announces its motive independently, and without necessary regard

to regular association with the others.
In Bach, Vol. V, No. 9, the following 3 Motives are manipulated, more or less
independently of each other
^fi^tfiiu
Ex.
127.
^^^m
In Alto. In Tenor In Pedal-bass.
Analyze the whole number thoroughly, and see also Bach, Vol. V, No. 1 1 (less
thematic than " figural "; Alto and Tenor appear to cooperate in announcing a com-
posite motive, or figure, of one or two beats the Pedal is independent, and not
;
obviously thematic). — No. 1 7 (somewhat similar inner parts cooperate

; Pedal ;
plainly thematic).
EXERCISE 27.
A. Write a 4-voice example, with Independent Pedal-part, according to par. 93.

Select chorale from the table given in Exercise 26.
B. An example with slightly embellished c.f., as in par. 94a.
C. An example with a Motive one measure long, derived from the c.f. ; par. 95.
D. An example with separate M. for each part ;

par. 96.
Three-Voice Elaboration.
97. When two parts only are added to the c.f., they are most likely
to be an inner and lower part for the manual keyboard though a Pedal- ;
bass is of course possible.
The following specimens are all somewhat peculiar, especially those in which
the c.f. is placed in a lower part, instead of in the Soprano. Analyze carefully:
Bach, Vol. V, No. 30 (c.f. in Soprano, slightly embellished ; running inner part
Pedal independent). Vol. V, page 81 (Var. VI) — cantus firmus in Pedal-bass. Vol.
V, page 86 (Var. IX) — cantus firmus in Pedal, as inner voice ; two motives-
Par. 98. CHORALE-FIGURATION. 1 97
Five-Voice Elaboration.
98. For this an Alto, two Tenors, and Pedal-bass are added to the
c.
f. The motive is apt to be brief, and rests may be freely used. See
par. 8i.
Bach, Vol. V, page 91 (Var. XI) —

Pedal independent strictly 5-voice, through- ;
out. Vol. V. No. 42 (chiefly 4-voice; f. slightly embellished; separate M. for

<..
Pedal.)
Miscellaneous. Bach, Vol. V, No. 4, Verse I (two motives together, Double
counterpoint, in inner parts; Pedal employs motive exclusively). No. 6 {c. f. in 1 —
Alto, slightly embellished; M. two
Soprano; same simplified for Pedal).
beats, in
No. 24 (running Tenor, two alternating motives Pedal independent Alto uniform ; ;
rhythm with c. f. ; brief pauses between the Lines). Brahms, Choral-Vorspiele, —

op. 122: No. 2 t. /. in Sopr., emb.
; 4-voice; indep. Pedal.
; No. 5, c.f. in Sopr., —
3-voice — fine example. — No. 6, ditto, 4-voice. — No. 8, elab. harmonization; 4-
voice, c.f. richly emb.; each Part rep., with c.f partly in Tenor. — No. 11, ditto;
5-voice; c.f. in Sopr.; end of each line extended by two-fold "echo." — No. 9; c.f,
in Sopr., richly emb. ; Ped. independent.
EXERCISE 28.
One or two examples each of the 3-voice and 5-voice chorale elaborations.
CHAPTER XI.
The Large Species of Chorale-Figuration.
first variety : invention with chorale.
99. In this larger and more elaborate species, the thematic or

figural voices are the chief, essential factors, while the chorale melody
is (at least apparently) an incidental factor. The first Line of the c.f.
is preceded by an introductory exposition of the Motive ; similar the-
matic Interludes occur between the Lines of the chorale ; and a more
or less lengthy Postlude follows the final Line. Hence the chorale
melody has the appearance of entering incidentally, when convenient,
into the thematic texture, while the lower parts pursue the initiatory
development of the adopted Motive (precisely as in the Invention), as aim
and burden of the entire composition.
Of the Large Species there are several varieties, the first and sim-
plest of which is called " Invention with Chorale."
Cantus- Firmus in Soprano.
100. This —
as in the Small Species —
is the most natural, and
probably most common, location for the chorale melody (c.fi).
a. The Motive is usually at least a measure long, often much

longer. It may be invented "free," i.e., independent of the c.f., and
in that case it is wise to select some melodic progression (of two or

three tones) that occurs frequently in the course of the chorale (as, for
instance, the tone-repetitions in chorale No. 24 of the above table), and
invent the Motive as characteristic counterpoint to that figure ; this ensures
its availability at these points, at least.
b. But it is somewhat more likely that the Motive will be derived

from the first Line of the c.
f, — possibly, though rarely, from the last
line, some other (striking) line of the chorale.

or even The derivation
may be simple, as shown in Ex. 126 (which see). Or it may be elabo-
rate; for example, all the following motives (and many more) are
derived by Bach from the first line of the same chorale
Chorale Mel. (Table, No. ist Derivative (Vol. VI, Xo. 4).
wrr Tm
18).
Ex.
128. 3fe -et—ejr
mm j
*o
H
fflE
££
2nd Derivative (Vol. VI, No. 5).
rf •=*
3*± 23E m$ (EfeE
3S53
4
atzrfr
a
rd Derivative (Vol. VI,

3-*-
No
i§±
6).
»2)
r*n m hr~ff -
^^^^£
~Z *-« ! Mill
*3)
I
bb^=Hetc.
ilLi-a^ —H
4th Derivative (Vol. VI, No. 7).
^^m -*|v
Par. iooc. INVENTION WITH CHORALE. 199
nfttt
200 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. iood.
The c.
f. should not be modified, excepting by an occasional, strictly
unessential, passing-note by some other equally harmless change.

; or
Care must be taken not to proceed into a new chord or key so soon
after the final tone of each c.f. line, as to leave the latter (after its ces-
sation) an implied dissonance ; that is, the final tone should, for at least
a full beat after its conclusion, appear (in the hearer's recollection) to
harmonize with the thematic voices, and fade away in their subsequent
conduct.
e. The end of each " Line " is, practically, the termination of a
Section of the Invention, — though a definite cadence is not obligatory.
Each succeeding Section begins with an " Interlude," devoted to con-
tinued thematic development in the figural voices while the c.f. voice
pauses ; very similar in character and conduct to the " Prelude,"
but more free. The length of these Interludes is optional ; usually a

measure or two, often more, — the c.
f reentering, each time, when
convenient. Review par. 99.
f. The very last tone of the c.f. (the final tone of the last line) should
be a Root, if possible. The voice which has the c.
f — the Soprano,
in this instance — may, after prolonging the final tone a few beats, join
in the thematic elaboration, usually beginning its participation with an
announcement of the Motive. This extension, the " Postlude," may be
of any reasonable length.
101. In executing the task, the thematic (or figural) parts and the
c.
f (when the may be
carried along abreast of each
latter is present)
other, with constant regard to theannouncements of the Motive or the ;
M. alone may be inserted, beforehand, in one part and then another,

where it promises to agree well with the c. f. somewhat after the -
—
manner of leading parts (par. 64, which review).
At all events, the Motive should appear very frequently, if not
incessantly, in and therefore great freedom may
some part or other ;
(must) be exercised in rendering the M. adjustable, by altering the

quantity of its interval-progressions (rarely, however, by changing its
rhythm, excepting for possible Augmentations, complete or partial).
Contrary motion, shifted rhythm, and stretto Imitations are to be
freely employed.
The Pedal-bass should be conducted, in general, more quietly than
the manual parts. It may, occasionally, be independent (par. 93).
Progressions in alternate opposite direction, with or without skips, are
peculiarly adapted to pedal-technique :
Par. ioi. INVENTION WITH CHORALE. 201
1. Pedal-bass. 2. Bach.
Ex.
129 ^ IsSip^lpBîlpiilB
For general illustration of the process (No. 16 of the above Table
of Chorales ; Motive in large notes) :
Prelude.
W=
H?To
£tt± *-•-
p-»-
Ex.
130.
55P&
HE
^^fe^î^^t
*£
M.
m tranquillo. 8va alta

/4 llegrelto (or
12;
flz ^3§==?* •
m „ . Cantus firmus.
fe*:
££
-4 ±
wm cir
-*-?-
£J
>
i
+-*:*.• »-#
-•-*
»-f-F-fc=F -•-*
izÊEB^ ±E ££E§
^ -)
-si—
^ Seb
-*—* s
I
P3 Iff f
-5,»~
«tS—
*3)
£-" -*- -•-
-fc— —F-»-
• -
Ê
I
=t=t
1
It si-t
-
: ^H 'iRi=^-,-»
s=?
3=t 3£* tt
r*^ ~ Interlude.
Par. 102. INVENTION WITH CHORALE. 203
EXERCISE 29.
A. Two examples of the Invention with chorale (minor and major, respectively),
according to the above directions. Cantus firmus in the Soprano 4-voice the ;
;
Motive at least one or two measures long; fairly strict manipulation.
B. One example for 3 voices, preferably for manual (without Pedal-bass).
C- One example for 5 voices. Review par. 81. Pedal-bass low.
Cantus Firmus in Bass.
102. When used as lowermost part, the c.

f. is written for the Pedals,
of course. The final tone of each line must be a chord-root. Especial
care must be taken to avoid implied dissonance for a beat or more after
the cessation of each final tone (review par. xood, last clause). All
other details correspond precisely to those given above (pars. 100, 101).
For general illustration (chorale 2 2 of the Table)
^S3 ^ Hf-S_^
f^smm*
$t =K tE&i£3g£&9gi
M.
^§=
^ Ped.
:c.fc
GOETSCHIUS.
r™***'
î:
N.B.
etc-j
1
IP
*i) The Motive is derived from the first Line of the chorale (par. iooi).
*2) The c. /. enters with a harsh dissonance ; but its relation to the preceding
bass tone (organ-point e), and its location as lowermost tone, render it permissible
and extremely effective.
*3) From here on, the contrapuntal parts are purposely omitted, so as to exhibit
more clearly the manner and places in which the M. is inserted. See par. 101, first
clause.
Analyze, thoroughly, the following
Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VII, No. 35, Stanza II (meas. n to end) ; M. small,
series of 5 or6 diatonic tones 4-voice. ;
Bach, Vol. VII, No. 5153 Motives, •

— M. 1 during Part I, meas. 1-12 ; M. 2 from
meas. 13-19, thereafter in alternation with M. 1, to meas. 31 M. 3 from meas. 32 to ;
36, thereafter in alternation with M. 1 to end 4-voice. Vol. VII, No. 36 very elabo-
; ;
rate, quasi Fantasia (par. 109) ;

4-voice ; 2 motives in close alternation ; a new, 3rd,
M. is added for the last Line.
Cantus Firmus in Tenor.
103. The general details agree exactly with those given for the
Soprano.
Par. 103a. INVENTION WITH CHORALE. 20S
a. The may be
written in the Tenor part in the usual manner
c.f.
but it is and customary, so to arrange the parts that the
desirable,
chorale melody may be made prominent by being played upon a sepa-
rate (louder) manual of the organ. In this case it stands alone on the
middle staff, and, during its presence, the two thematic voices above it
(Soprano and Alto) must be so written that they are playable together
with one hand (i.e., within the compass of an octave). During the
Prelude and the Interludes, this restraint is, of course, removed.
b.Or, the c. f. may be assigned to the Pedals (written in Bass regis-

ter), and played with a 4-foot stop, so as to sound an octave higher, —
i.e., in Tenor register. The middle staff then belongs to the Bass
proper, and care must be taken to keep it below the c. f. (Tenor), as a
rule and, being played with the hand, it may be more free and lively
;
than an ordinary Pedal-bass.

See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VI, No. \2b ; 4-voice; c.f written in Tenor part,
somewhat embellished M. in Soprano, meas. 1-4, derived from c. f
;
Vol. VII, No. 56; 4-voice; c.f. written in Pedal (in Tenor register) M. in Bass, ;
\ measure (free).
Vol. VII, No. 63; 3-voice; c.f. in Pedal, as Tenor; M. in upper part, \ measure
(free).
Vol. VII, No. 59 4-voice 2-Part Song-form, M. for each Part, derived from
;
;
c.f. ; Bass chiefly independent, but based on a fragment of M. 1 c.

f. in Pedal, an ;
8ve below Tenor register.

Vol. VII, No. 38 3-voice ;
; c.
f in Pedal, slightly embellished ; each voice its
independent M.
Mozart, " Magic Flute," Finale of 2d Act, Adagio, -time, c minor (scene with $
"2 men in armor") 4-voice, c.f. doubled in 8ves; small motive, one measure, and
;
thematic Figure of 3 notes.
Cantus Firmus in Alto.
104. This is rare, especially in 4-voice counterpoint. Rules the

same as for Soprano.
See Bach, Vol. VI, No. 5 ;

3-voice, no Pedal ; 2 Motives (Soprano, meas. 3 and
meas. and occasional conjunction.
5) in close alternation
Vol. VI, No. 16; 3-voice, no Pedal; 2-Part Form, and 2 Motives, derived from
c.f
Vol. VII, No. 48, Stanza II; 3-voice, no Pedal ; small figural M.
Cantus Firmus in Alternate Voices.
105. Successive Lines of the chorale may be assigned to different
voices ; or, if definite 2- or 3-Part Form, different voices may assume

the successive Parts. Or, at any point where it appears desirable or
convenient, a change of voice may be made, — never, however, during

a Line of the chorale.
On the termination of its share of the c.f., the voice in question may
(as at the end, during the Postlude 100/) immediately join — see par.
the contrapuntal parts, usually, here again, with an announcement of
the Motive.
The voice to which the c.f. is next to be given must rest during the
whole (or a good portion) of that Interlude.
The choice of voice for the c.f. is wholly optional; but some atten-
tion is due to technical considerations ; and the voices should be so
written that, if possible, the c.f. may be played upon a separate manual,
— when not in the Pedal-bass (comp. par. 103a).
See Bach, Vol. VI, No. 6; 3-voice; some of the Lines are repeated; the rests
before thec. f. are very brief Pedal independent.
;
Vol. VI, No. 29, Division I (J time) 3-voice 2 Motives in conjunction ; ;
(Double counterpoint).
Raff, Pianoforte Suite, op. 71, "Preludio" (c.
f. original).
EXERCISE 30.
A. An example with c.
f. in Bass; 4-voice; one Motive; strict manipulation.
B. C. f. in Tenor, written on middle staff ;

4-voice.
C- C. f. in Tenor, written in Pedal ;

4-voice.
D. C. f. in Alternate voices; one Motive; 4-voice.
E. C. f. in Alto ;
3-voice ; one Motive.
F. C. f. optional ;
4-voice ; two Motives, one for each Part of chorale.
G. 5- voice; two Motives.
Second Variety : Chorale as Invention-Group.
106. This variety differs from the preceding only in that a new
Motive is devised and used for each Line of the chorale in succession.
Consequently, each Line appears to constitute a complete brief Inven-
tion by itself, usually with a fairly decided cadence ; and the whole is
a group of Inventions.
As a rule (though not necessarily), the Motives are each time
derived from the corresponding (following) Line of the chorale. They
will, therefore, be independent ; but they should all agree with each
other pretty closely in character, especially as concerns their rhythmic
formation. The first Motive may be reverted to, incidentally, at any
moment. All rules as before.
Par. 107. CHORALE AS ARIA. 207
See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VI, No. 14; 4-voice; c. f. in Soprano; new M.
for each Line, in almost regular alternation with the contrary motion, and in stretto
(comp. par. 73a).
Vol. VI, No. 23 ; 4-voice c. f. in Soprano.
;
Vol. VI, No. 1 4-voice c f. in Soprano Motives from chorale, but distributed
; ; . ;
irregularly.
Vol. VII, No. 43; 4-voice; c. /. in Soprano; M. for each Line, but only as
Prelude — not with the c. f.
Vol. VII, No. 58 4-voice c. f. in Soprano, slightly embellished M. in regular
; ; ;
and contrary motion, —

par. 73a.
Vol. VII, No. 48, Stanza III ; 4-voice c. f. in Bass four Motives, invented ; ;
free — not derived from chorale lines M. 4 " per moto contrario."
;
Vol. VI, No. 32 4-voice, manuals c.f. in Soprano M. for each of first 3 Lines,
; ; ;
invented without reference to chorale ; last Line in alternating voices, Double

counterpoint.
EXERCISE 31.
Two or three examples (minor and major) of the above variety.
Third Variety : Chorale as Aria.
107. This species of manipulation differs considerably from the

specifically polyphonic elaborations of the chorale-accompaniment, inas-
much as it affects, chiefly, the chorale-melody itself, while the accom-
panying voices may be simply of a general imitatory character, or nearly
(or quite) homophonic. Review, thoroughly, par. 94, especially b.
The main object is, so to embellish the c.
f. tones with auxiliary
notes (passing-, neighboring-notes, etc., in florid rhythmic form) that
the original stern chorale-melody is completely transformed into a grace-
ful (though dignified and impressive) lyric melody or " Aria." This
dissolution of the c. f. must be so effected, however, as to preserve the
original rhythmic disposition of the tones, i.e., the distinction of ac-
cented and unaccented tones, as closely as possible, — so that the
ornate product, reduced to its tonal elements (at accented points),
would correspond nearly to the original chorale. Hence, while the
embellishment may include many additional tones (perhaps distant from
the given ones), and may tend to shift certain of the given tones past
their primary place at the beginning of their respective beats, it is rarely
justifiable to evade the tone altogether, or to shift it entirely beyond its
beat, into the next ; and it is still more rare to anticipate a given tone,
by shifting it back into the preceding beat. At the same time, it will
be found possible to exercise considerable freedom, totally eradicating
all resemblance to the chorale, and still preserve the fundamental

melodic design of the original.
The chorale-Aria is almost always placed in the Soprano the lower ;
accompanying parts may be purely homophonic, —

slightly figurated,
— or imitatory, without being thematic or, more rarely, they may
;
adopt and manipulate a Motive, as in the 1st Variety. The Pedal-bass

is frequently independent, and of a quiet rhythmic character.
For illustration of the treatment of the chorale :
Original (Table, No. 18). Bach.
u'63
Ex.
& ^Dissolved form.
1
132.
Further
Chorale (Table, No. 25).
Im 3 etc.
Lento.
i -0=i
T=t=& -=H
m
Par. 108. CHORALE AS ARIA. 209
GOETSCHIUS.
-r
i lillil
&S
|i -l-*-*Z =Z— -
"•""etc
1
!_[J f •
5â33^^^^Ê5^SÊf
The following examples belong properly to the Small Species of chorale Figura-
tion, and supplement those given in par. 94a : —
Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. V, No. 10; 4-voice; accompaniment thematic.
Vol. V, No. 26 ditto. ;
—
Vol. V, No. 45 4-voice accompaniment, general ;
; imi-
tatory character ; Pedal independent.
Vol. V, No. 51 (the very last of Bach's compositions) ;
4-voice; thematic accom-
paniment.
For examples of the Large Species, see —
Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VII, No. 49 4-voice c, f. in Soprano, profusely em-
;
;
bellished Pedal independent inner pares imitatory, but not strictly thematic.
; ;
Vol. VII, No. 45 4-voice, c.f. in Soprano, copiously embellished, and extended
;
— each Line similarly in its course —

Pedal independent (running auxiliary part)
; ;
inner voices free.

Vol. VI, No. 9; 4-voice; 1..
f. in Soprano; inner parts thematic; 3 Motives
(meas. 1 in Tenor, meas. 2 in Alto, end of meas. 2 in both parts) in close alternation
and conjunction Pedal uses first M. frequently.
;
Vol. VI, No. 8 4-voice c. f. in Tenor, richly embellished and expanded; Pedal
;
;
independent thematic upper parts quite elaborate.

;
Fourth Variety: Ritornelle with Chorale.
108. In this variety the Motive (or, more properly, Theme) is much
longer than in the foregoing ;
generally a complete 8-measure Period,
or extended Period, or even Double-period. It is frequently a sort of
running voice, in nearly or quite uniform rhythm but sometimes a lyric ;
melody of striking, impressive character. It may be invented entirely

free, or (as is more common) may be derived from a Line or two of the
c. /., as an elaborate embellishment and radical modification of the
latter.
This Theme appears as an introduction (or Prelude), usually with

complete perfect cadence; recurs, generally at its full length, as an
2IO APPLJED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 109.
Interlude (once or twice, according to the length of the chorale), and

again as a Postlude, — hence the term " Ritornelle." During the
chorale lines it is present in fragments only.
See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol VI, No. 2 3-voice c.f. in Soprano Pedal inde-
;
: ;
pendent. Vol. VI, No. 17; 4-voice; c f in Bass; long Theme, in Tenor; upper
two parts constantly imitatory. Vol. VI, No. 3 2-voice, no Pedal c.f. in Soprano
; ;
M. from c.f, treated with great freedom. Vol. VII, No. 44; 3-voice; cf in Pedal,
as Tenor quasi running parts, independent rhythms.
; Brahms, Choral- Vorspiele,—
op. 122, No. 4; c.f in Sopr. 4-voice; Ped. indep.
;
—
No. 7; c.f. in Sopr. and Bass
alternately; 3 to 6-voice. —
No. 10; c.f. in Ped. as Tenor; 4-voice.
Fifth Variety : Chorale-Fantasia.
109. The c. f. may consist of a portion, or portions, of the original

chorale, instead of the whole ; possibly of one or two characteristic
lines only ; or even of certain distinctive members of the lines (natu-
rally the very beginning, or ending, of the chorale). These may appear
in optional succession and frequency, generally and
in different parts,
in different keys and registers.
The accompanying voices may be conducted with great freedom ;
they are generally imitatory, but not necessarily thematic ; and are
likely to contain many, more or less disguised, allusions to the chorale.
The form is optional, but is most likely to be sectional, or " group,"
design. A certain progressive structural idea should be embodied, as
general outline, and one or more effective climaxes introduced. Review,
carefully, par. 85.
See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VI, No. 22 3-voice c.f. embellished (at times)
; ;
in alternate voices accompaniment not thematic; treatment distinctly "Fantasia "-

;
like.
Vol. VI, No. 7 ;

3-voice; Pedal independent ; upper parts imitatory and generally
thematic ; form sectional, and very clear, with many confirmations ; first two lines of
chorale in Pedal, at the end.
Vol. VI, No. 15; 2- to 4-voice.
Vol. VI, No. 27; 3-voice; quasi chorale-Invention (par. no) ; chorale in Pedal,
during final Sections.
Vol. V, No. 34 4-voice built upon fragments of chorale definite Sectional

;
; ;
form; Pedal quasi "basso ostinato" (i.e., consisting in repetitions of the same
Figure, generally upon the same scale-steps).
Vol. VII, No. 36 (already cited ;
quasi long Invention with chorale, but of free
" Fantasia " character).
Par. no. CHORALE-INVENTION. 211
EXERCISE 32.
A. One or two examples of the Chorale as Aria.
B. One or two examples of the Ritornelle with Chorale.
C. One or two examples of the Chorale-Fantasia.
Sixth Variety: Chorale-Invention, or Prelude.
110. See par. 83^. In this variety the chorale, as . c. /., does not
appear. The whole is an Invention (as chorale-Prelude) of the usual
character, based upon a Motive, or Motives, derived from the first Line
of the chorale (or from some other characteristic Line).
See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VII, No. apA, and No. i,oB ; 4-voice; 3 Sections.
Vol. VI, No. 27 (already cited, quasi " Fantasia ").
Vol. V, page 70, Partita III (also Partita V, same Motive, different treatment;
3-voice)
Vol. V, page 73 (4-voice, chromatic).
Vol. V, page 83 (4-voice).
Vol. V, page 84 (4 to 5- voice, Pedal independent).
Chorale Variations.
111. A number of different elaborations of the same chorale, in the

various methods shown above, may be associated as a set of Variations.
-
The manner in which the Varieties of manipulation are chosen, and

the number of variations collected, are subject tono rule but decided
;
contrast (especially in reference to rhythm and measure) must be ob-

tained ; and the interest should be progressively increased, by choosing
the more elaborate and effective species for the final numbers.
See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. V, pages 60-67 68-75 76-9 1 ; Mendelssohn,
'< -
Organ Sonata, op. 65, No. 6, movements one to four (up to the Fugue). Brahms,
Motet, op. 74, No. 2 chorale in first verse, with contrapuntal accomp. the follow-
; ;
ing 3 verses (II, III, and IV) are elaborations with the c.f. (more or less embel.)
in different voices.
EXERCISE 33.
A. One or two examples of the Chorale-Invention.
B. One or more sets of Chorale- Variations.
In conclusion, attention is directed to a scholarly collection of " 200 Choral-

Vorspiele " by Carl Piutti, in which the principal varieties of manipulation are
represented.
212 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. H2-
DIVISION FOUR.
THE FUGUE.
Introductory.
112. The Fugue differs from the Invention chiefly in being a more
strict and serious contrapuntal form. Review par. 37. While the In-
vention is subject only to the general conditions of contrapuntal treat-
ment, the Fugue, on the other hand, involves certain special conditions
and limitations.
These special qualities, which distinguish the Fugue, are as follows :
(1) The Subject or Themeof a Fugue is usually more extended,

and has a more definite form, than the " Motive "
(2) The Subject is first announced alone, in a Fugue, unattended
by auxiliary tones
(3) During the first Section, or Exposition, the Subject is (as a rule)
announced alternately in the Tonic and Dominant keys, i.e., it is imi-
tated alternately in the 5th and 8ve and ;
(4) There is, throughout, less freedom of detail, and greater serious-
ness of character and manipulation.
The Fugue-Subject.
113. The thematic germ of a Fugue is called " Subject " or

" Theme."
The former term is used in a specific sense ; the term " Theme "as a general
designation of the thematic basis.
a. It is, with rare exceptions, definite in form, being either a com-

plete Phrase or (more rarely) Period, and closing as a rule with a
distinctly cadential effect. is optional,
Its from one large
length —
measure (Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 17) up to 6, 8, or even
more measures (Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. II, Fugue 15 Organ ;
Comp., Peters compl. ed., Vol. Ill, Fugues Nos. 3 and 8).
b. Generally it begins either upon the 1st, 3rd, or 5th scale-step of
the key but in any case the Tonic note should appear near (if not at)
;
the beginning. It may begin upon an accented beat, or upon the pre-
ceding unaccented beat but by far the best and most common practice
;
Par. 113b. THE FUGUE-SUBJECT. 213
is to begin the Subject with a brief rest, i.e., immediately after an accent
(Ex. 134).
It ends, frequently, upon the 3rd scale-step, or upon the Tonic
(more rarely upon the Dominant), of the principal key or upon the
;
Tonic or 3rd step of the Dominant key. Other cadences are possible,
but very rare. The final tone falls usually upon an accented beat, and
produces a decided cadential impression ; but there are exceptions to this
rule, and it is sometimes difficult to determine precisely where the Sub-
ject terminates (see Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 9, — doubtful
whether the Subject ends on 3rd beat of second measure, or on 1st
beat of third measure). The Subject may contain transient modula-
tions, in its course, but can scarcely end in any other than the principal,
or the Dominant, key ;
possibly in the Relative major, from minor.
c. As Subject of a Fugue, and as complete melodic sentence, it
should be distinctly individualized. Its melodic and rhythmic contents

must be serious, but characteristic, and pregnant (susceptible of mani-
fold polyphonic manipulation) ; and its delineation must be distinct and
moderately striking, — to the exclusion of vagueness, of a too lyric
melodic form, but also of eccentricity. Sequences are seldom absent, in

good Subjects ; the harmonic basis is clear, natural, and forcible ; and
there is usually at least one salient rhythmic feature (an effective tie,
syncopation, or contrasting figure). The compass of effective Subjects

seldom runs beyond an octave. Review par. 38a.
EXERCISE 34.
A. Inspect, minutely, every Fugue-Subject in both volumes of Bach's Well-
tempered Clavichord, with reference to each detail given above.
B. Write a large number of original Subjects.
The CoNSTRUcrioisr of the " Response."
114. As stated above, the Subject or Theme is to appear, during
the first Section (the Exposition) of a Fugue, first in the principal key,
then in the Dominant key, and so on, alternately in the Tonic and
Dominant registers, as far as the number of voices dictates.
The announcement (tonic)

first is called the Subject proper ; the
second announcement (dominant) is called the Response or Answer.
115. In order to place it in the Dominant key, the Subject must be

imitated in the perfect 5th above (or perfect 4th below). Hence, the
fundamental rule for the construction of the Response is
To imitate each tone of the Subject in the perfect fifth.
This gives what is known as the " real " Response or Answer. For
example
" Subject."
^FfS
'
Ex.
I2
134.S5 -4 • * -s-m-
- # • r m— -4-
*i)
C major.
" Response" (real). Bach.
'
G major.
*i) The adjustment is perfect, and no circumstance exists which would neces-
sitate an exception to the fundamental rule.
116. But this strict imitation often gives rise to awkward or abrupt
modulation, and a lack of adjustment at the extremes (beginning or
end) of the Response. The element invariably involved in such em-
barrassment is the Dominant. Hence, the first general exception to
the fundamental rule is :
That the Dominant element, wherever peculiarly conspicuous in

the Subject, is to be imitated in the perfect fourth, instead of 5 th.
a. This applies (1) to the Dominant tone at the very beginning or ;
(2) near the beginning (as 2d, 3rd, or 4th tone of the Subject, especially
when connected with the Tonic note) (3) to all tones inseparably con- ;
nected with this initial Dominant (as embellishment, repetitions, and the
like) (4) to a strong Dominant cAord-impTession at, or very near, the
;
beginning; (5) to the cadence in the Dominant key (at the end of
the Subject) ; and (6) to all tones that pertain inseparably to this final
Dominant. All such tones should be imitated in the perfect 4th.
This is called the " tonal " Response.
117. a. The Dominant note at the beginning. For illustration :
"Subject." Bach.
Ex.
135. m -4-*i)-
/ minor.
-H 1
—•--
-I
pE^miî
*i) The Dominant note at the very beginning would, if answered in the perfect
5th, transfer the Response abruptly, and bodily, into the Dominant key (c minor).
Par. 117a. THE "RESPONSE." 215
Thus:
i $$=& SE&^ etc.
The first tone,^-, would not adjust well with the cadence tone of the Subject (ab).
In a word, this initial g is the Second-dominant (Dominant of the Dominant) in the
f
key of minor thus far pursued; and while this comparatively remote tone, or any
other, can be reached in time, it is certain to sound abrupt at the very beginning of
the Response. Therefore the above Subject is imitated as follows, the first (Domi-
nant) tone in the 4th, and the remainder, as usual, in the 5th
_ V -0 IL if /V^V
Ex.
136.1
&
'Response" (tonal). " Subject.'
*i) /wv Bach.
tfe £^=
i ijfe -=?-f-
" Response" (tonal).
By this means the Response is retained for an instant in the original key, until
perfect adjustment, at the beginning, is secured. It is called the " tonal " Response
because of this (at least temporary) adherence to the tonality of the Fugue ; the
Tonic elements being answered by the Dominant, and the Dominant elements
(where salient) by the Tonic (imitation in the 4th).
*i) All large notes indicate the imitation in the 4th ; the small notes that in the 5th.
b. The Dominant note near the beginning
1. " Subject." " Response" (tonal). Bach.
Ex.
137, ^s^H E§Sii
—I- *~
2. '
Subject.' " Response." Bach.
etc. £ _,. etc.
&
em
:£ jf_
£
3 I
This always applies to the Dominant as second note of the Subject, when it fol-
lows the Tonic; and, in case the initial Tonic note is embellished, it may be the 3rd
or 4th tone of the Subject. Thus

1. Subj. Resp. Bach.
etc. +. etc.
Ex.
138, I§Sih ffi i=l!
^±
*i) **)
2l6 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 117c.

etc. _ etc.
-n=r-
tt=t
i&E
1-
1 1 1
1=
±±±3= 1
*i) The initial Tonic {/) is simply embellished ; therefore the Dominant (as 4th
tone, c ) is near enough to the beginning to be the second essential tone.
*2) The second tone of the subject (e) is here imitated in the diminished 5th (J> b).
Similar substitutions of the diminished or augmented 5th (and 4th) for the perfect
5th (and 4th) are quite common, and are due to the very same principle that gives
rise to the general exception under discussion (par. 116). See Note to Ex. 136.
Here the bb confirms the principal key, F major. — See also Ex. 146, No. 3.
*3) Same as Note *2).
c. Repetitions or embellishments of the Dominant, at or near the

beginning :
1. Subj. {e minor).

—
IEE =F? «=
:fczfc
-#
-I 1
r » .
! ! \
p-
I
m =^t£:
3=t
0 *-p-#-r
m
3. Subj. Resp. Faisst.
Sfe
^^n rtfF =J=u
p p t=£
Or, adding to this last Theme (Ex. 139—3) various embellish-

ments of the initial Tonic (as in Ex. 138), the results would be:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Ex.
140.
0mm Subjects. ,_êtc.
Responses to the above,

.etc. êtc.
wmm *2)'
.etc.
êtc. .etc. .etc. êtc.
wm^m 7fr»7
SP^ Ii
Par. ii7d. THE "RESPONSE." 1\J
*i) In every case (excepting No. 4) this g is imitated in the augmented 5th
, (d<f), because of the principal key. Comp. Ex. 138, Note *2).
*i) No. 4 is a regular (real) Response. The tone a in the Subject changes the
whole situation. Partly because the a does not pertain to the initial Tonic, and
partly for reasons given in par. 1 1 8, the Dominant b must be answered in the 5th.
See further Ex. 145, No. 6.
d. A cluster of tones at (or very near) the beginning, that constitute

a very obvious Dominant chord
Subj. Resp. Faisst.
etc. etc.
141
Ex.
I
fe
feî
&
DV_
=EP mm Dl
=E£=f=P
it±£ IB
m^m^^m^^^^m *-f^-4- s- etc.
See also Ex. 144, No. 3.
e. As declared in par. 116a (3), all tones that pertain inseparably

to the Dominant at or near the beginning of the Subject, share with it
in the exception to the rule. To this class belong the repetitions and
embellishments illustrated in Ex. 139 ; also a diatonic run from the
initial Tonic down to the Dominant ; thus :
m ^jgE^g^pg^Bg^
Subj. Resp. Bach.
Ex. ,_
142.BEI S=^ i^surg
Possibly also the nearly continuous run from Tonic up to Dominant
Subj.
Ex.
143. IwÊEIE -1^ ~Xr- -^ Gzztletc.
Resp. Faisst.
fe3i§
±M?^z •=3tL ^| etC
This comes under the head of Ex. 1 40 but there is a subtle distinction between
;
it and Ex. 140, No. 4 (which it, closely resembles), that is left to the student's
.
analysis.
218 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. ii7f.
f. Finally, the Dominant key, at the end of the Subject, when intro-
duced by a palpable modulation, is subject to the exception. Thus
1. Subj.
Ex.
144,
5 IzfcEE-Ej -i—» 3t=t=t=t S ±=5}*
&
Par. 117 a. Dom. key.
Resp. Bach.
Prin. key.
2. Subj.
i *
^^? "J--^" *"" T "*
1
i
*2)
-v-
Resp. Bach.
Iffi:
3E ggsgll
Par. 11 J d.
Resp.
t#» feBfesiîiig Dom. key.

g
Bach.
m&M
*i) An important question in connection with the final Dominant key is, how far
back from the end the imitation in the 4th is to extend. It is best solved according
to the principle of par. 117*; — all tones that are inseparable from the final Domi-
nant, as belonging obviously to the total impression of the " Dominant key," are
imitated in the 4th. In the above case the tonal imitation begins at the very point
where the 'modulation was made, in the Subject; and, further, at the rest which
marks a semicadence.
Par. ii7g. the -response:' 219
*2) Here Bach appears to regard the a (3rd measure of Subject) as inseparable
from the following modulatory movement into the Dominant key, and therefore
begins the imitation in the 4th at that point.
g. The puzzling questions can, in many instances, be determined

only by carefully testing the effect, and preserving a good, smooth, modu-
latory and melodic result. The trouble consists, as stated, simply in
deciding which tones are inseparably connected with the Dominant
and this may depend upon the melodic structure, the modulation,
rhythm, or other circumstances bearing upon the characteristic formation
of the Subject as a whole. Therefore, the ultimate decision is, here and
elsewhere, very often indeed a matter of common-sense judgment, or
individual taste.
118. Partly in keeping with this last idea, and partly for general
reasons, a third rule must be observed, which constitutes in a sense an
exception to the rule of tonal imitation (par. 116), and therefore reverts
partially to the fundamental rule, namely :
Under no circumstances shall any characteristic feature of the Theme

be violated.
Consequently, neither the real nor the tonal imitation can be in-
sisted upon at any point where they threaten any tone or figure of the
Subject that is significant or characteristic. For illustration
Subj. N.B.
Ex.
145. SEeS #F
Resp. N.B. Bach.

:p=—£=r—
mi ±=b±Ei]=E to si-
iW«t
Subj.
*2)
pj ^ 3^
Resp.
fefe
N.B.
Bach.
1
ISE£t ii^pigligpil
4. „ ,. Bach.
- u.
.
Sub]. Resp.
etc.
Bach.
j Subj. Resp.
^ ^fe^, gj ruJ r ii
/4 Major. N.B.
6. c , Bach.
— it
*
J* Subj. N.B. Resp.
*8)
*i) These tones are all harmonically inseparable from the Dominant modula-
tion; and the preceding interval (falling 7th) is so characteristic that it, too, is
included in the tonal imitation.
*2) This g is a conspicuous Dominant note, near the beginning; but it is
answered in the 5th, because of the sequential formation of the Theme.
*3) Bach evidently regarded this d (Dominant near the beginning) as an essen-
tial harmonic factor of his Theme, and imitates it in the 5th to preserve the triad-
effect of the first figure.
*4) A remote key, but unavoidable because of the definite chromatic character
of the Subject.
*5) Dominant as first tone, — imitated in the 5th, with its repetitions, appar-
ently because of the structure of the whole Theme. Comp. Ex. 149, Note *2).
*6) To Bach this was a tone-group inseparable from the Dominant (*), and
therefore the whole figure reappears in the 4th.
•7) Augmented 4th; see Ex. 138, Note *2).
*8) This peculiar leap of an Augmented 4th

is an inviolable trait of the Theme,
and therefore it renders the foregoing tones likewise inseparable from the final
Dominant key, —
back to the second tone of the Subject.
119. The single Dominant note at the end of a Subject is not to

be imitated in the 4th (tonal), unless it is strongly suggestive of the
Dominant key, or Dominant chord:
Par. ng. THE "RESPONSE." 221
N.B.
Dom.
3. Subj. Resp. Faisst.

:*i): — Nr
£e
IP^ff^SEI^^ fe2
^=x
N.B. N.B.
4. Bach.
SUB
Subj. Resp.
i^S£S3
If
*i) This final Dominant note is more strongly indicative of the Dominant
ckord than those of the preceding examples, because it occurs at the bar, where a
change of harmony (from the foregoing I) is expected. Therefore, it is imitated in
the 4th, — although the 5th (d) would have been entirely defensible.
*2) At the points marked N. B. the necessity of using diminished (instead of

perfect) 5ths, in order to obtain a sensible and natural total modulatory result, is
strikingly illustrated. Comp. Ex. 138, Note *2).
*3) This case is similar to No. 3, being an accent, and therefore suggesting a
change of harmony (from I to V). Besides, the whole Theme is so brief, and so
nearly all Tonic, that the final Dominant seems near enough to the beginning to
demand tonal treatment (par. 117^).
120. a. When the Theme begins with the Dominant note, and also
ends in the Dominant key, it may be possible, and necessary, to imitate
the initial Dominant in the 5th. Thus
Ex.
147. mz
Resp.
Subj.
s p
m
:9^
EE 1
etc.
f *i)
£gf
*i) As the Dominant key has already been reached, there is no danger of imper-
fect adjustment, and therefore the " real " imitation is entirely feasible.
b. Further, when the Dominant effect prevails decidedly through

the whole or a great part of the Theme, it may be necessary to imitate
it in the 4th throughout. Thus :
Bach.
Resp.
2. Subj. par. xiyd.
H S *
3" If*
1
^ it
Resp. Mendelssohn (adapted).
i=t P^S
—
P
:l
1
-• *-*-
Dominant appears to be
w
In both of these cases all that is not actually insepar-
able from the prevailing Dominant effect.
M ISCELL ANEOUS
1. Subj.
J=£
Ex.
149. 1ESE£
fi:
•1)
*tf=*=^ ZtZE I
„ Resp. Faisst.
i N.B. -T *> i
i ;î
*2)
^^JjllfeEii
+**+* ^f*rV^l'*- N.B (j)
ir
Resp.
3.
m^mmS=f 3^Sm
Subj. (0) (a)
*>—
a fcHE
5
I
w
I
5
I
etc
Very doubtful.
Par. 120b. rafi "RESPONSE: 223
(0 if)
gi^Hi •^^ttei *=d=4 Si

^g
Possible, and not improbable. Probably the best Response.
Resp- 11
Mozart.
4. Subj.
gjg^^^^£ gggjj|j|P |
fc
#*
•4)
1
5.
v tot
Subj
m^jfc^J
^^. Resp.
Pa:
Bach.
I *±JL
J| •
fc ' •
1
6. Subj.
iP&es Itflit
*6)
^S K§ etc.
Bach.
Resp.
i 3=P-/-*-
=*=»
N.B.
-3—u
SS|g etc.
7. Subj.
§±e -si-
s -f — •-
It
^1
*7)
Resp. Weinlig.
^s £1 t=f II
N.B.
8. Subj.
E9%#
St
*8)
SI etc.
m
Resp. Mozart.
N.B.
$=m=^$ etc.
*i) This initial Dominant is answered in the 5th (contrary to par. n6«), because
of the characteristic formation of the Theme. Comp. par. 118.
*2) The initial Dominant is here simply one of a series of unimportant passing-
notes leading into the Tonic, and is therefore answered in the 5th. Further, Bach
224 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. hi.
chooses/It for the 3rd tone of the Response (instead of the expected /J), in order to
preserve for an instant the impression of the original key.
*3) In case Response (c) were to be chosen, this would be it) in preference to
6 b. Otherwise, the latter is more probable.
*4) The final tone is imitated in the augmented 4th, to preserve closer relation
to the original key, — probably because the Subject is brief. Compare Ex. 138,
Note *2).
*5) Same as Note *4).
*6) The striking modulation into the Dominant key, so near the beginning,
must be answered in the 4th, — similar to par. 1 \"]d.
*7) The prominent Leading-tone, when absolutely indicative of the Dominant

chord (as here), and not merely an embellishing note of the Tonic (as in Ex. 138,
No. 1, 2nd tone), is subject to tonal imitation, with all that is inseparable from it.
Comp. par. wjd.

*8) Like Note "7).
EXERCISE 35.
A. Analyze all the Responses in the Well-temp. Clavichord of Bach.
B. Write the Responses to all the original Subjects invented in Exercise 34.
And invent a numb«r of new Themes (and Answers), with reference to the above
traits.
CHAPTER XII.
The Four-Voice Fugue. — The Exposition.
121. The Exposition or first Section of a Fugue contains as many
announcements of the Theme (Subject and Response alternately —

par. 114) as there are parts employed. In the 4-voice Fugue the order
is, therefore (when regular), Subject, Response, Subject, Response.
a. Response may begin simultaneously with the final tone

The first
of the Subject (Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 8). Or immedi-

ately after the Subject ends (Vol. I, Fugue 6). Or still a little later,
so that one or more tones must be added to the Subject, as intervening
figure (Vol. I, Fugue 1, one intervening tone Vol. I, Fugue 2, ditto ;
;
Vol. I, Fugue 12, two intermediate tones Fugue 1 1, three tones Fugue ; ;
3, four tones Fugue 7, seven tones,

; more than this number could —
scarcely be justified). Or, more rarely, the Response may enter before
the cadence tone of the Subject, as brief stretto (Vol. I, Fugue 9 ; the
Par. i22. THE EXPOSITION. 225
Response overlaps the Subject one beat, possibly three, — the length
is somewhat uncertain).
of Subject
b. In the third of these possible cases, where intermediate tones are

used, the latter must be carefully chosen, in keeping with the conduct
of the Subject, and with a view to their subsequent employment as
thematic basis of the episodic passages (as in Vol. I, Fugue 7).
122. The first counterpoint — which follows the Subject in the

that
same part, as contrapuntal associate of the Response —
is sometimes
called the " Counter-subject " ; as this term is misleading (in the Single
Fugue), it will be spoken of here simply as the " Counterpoint."
Comp. par. 34.
It is a very important factor in the Fugue (or may become so), and
especial pains must, therefore, be taken with its formation. It may be
derived from the figures of the Subject itself
Response.. Bach.
Ex. )
150.\
m a <r
w .
ssa
IS3E
Subject..
:*i):
Counterpoint..
^H
*i) Both of these figures of the Counterpoint are derived from those of the
Subject, in contrary motion. See also Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 5.
Or the Counterpoint may be more or less independent of the Theme,

its conduct being governed by the general conditions of good contra-
puntal association.
Or it may assume a characteristic rhythmic or melodic form, in in-
tentional opposition to the current of the Response, or as a wholly indi-
vidual factor of the entire Fugue. Thus
i^^
Subject..
fe
|3 -*—+
Ex.
151.
mM
226 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 122
^Counterpoint.. „Bach.
*fe T=F
*—*- i 5££â£fl
f *£
lite^^g Jt s
s Response.^
^B5f fct
i
*i) The Counterpoint is admirably individualized by the line of sequences. See
further, Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. Fugue 18, similar; Vol. I, Fugue 2
I, — rhythmic
contrast with the Theme ; Vol. I, Fugue 12 Vol. II, Fugues io, 1 1, 16,20
; (rhythmic),
22 (chromatic).
In any case, but especially in the last mentioned, the first Counter-
point is more than likely to reappear from time to time in connection
with later announcements of the Theme, as part of the thematic mate-
the composition
rial of and this possible use must be kept in mind,
;
and must emphasize the thoughtfulness and strictness of technique with

which the Counterpoint is to be devised. It is well to make several
experiments, in various styles, and choose the most promising version.
EXERCISE 36.
A. Examine the formation of the first Counterpoint in every Fugue of the

Well-temp. Clavichord.
B. Write, upon one or two staves at option, each of the Subjects of the pre-
ceding Exercise, in the most convenient register, followed by the Response in the next
higher or next lower part, and add the Counterpoint (as in Exs. 150, 151). Each
Subject is to be manipulated twice, — with the Response respectively above and
below.
123. These and the succeeding announcements of the Theme, dur-

ing the regular Exposition, are determined by the following formula
(1) Subject, — in either one of the four parts ;
(2) Response, — invariably in the next higher or next lower part
(3 ) Subject, — in the parallel part to that in which the Subject first

appeared, an octave higher or lower than the former announcement
(4) Response, — in the remaining part, i.e., the parallel to the part
in which the first Response appeared, and an octave higher or lower
than the latter.
In other words, the Subjects appear in parallel parts, and the

Responses, likewise, in the other parallel pair of parts.
Par. 124. THE EXPOSITION. 227
N. B. Parallel parts are those which are separated by one part, namely, Soprano
and Tenor, Bass and Alto.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 5 Bass, Tenor, Alto, Soprano. :
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 17: Tenor, Bass, Soprano, Alto.
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 18: Tenor, Alto, Soprano, Bass.
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 20 Alto, Soprano, Bass, Tenor. :
Beginning with Soprano, the order would be Soprano, Alto, Tenor, Bass. :
124. In some, comparatively rare, instances the Exposition is
irregular, for some valid reason, and in one of the following respects
(1) The order of the parts ;
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, No. 1, — the order is, Alto, Soprano, Tenor,
Bass, instead of Alto, Soprano, Bass, Tenor ; i.e., the 3rd announcement is not in
the parallel of the first part.
(2) The alternation of Subject and Response

See, again, Fugue 1, Vol. I the order is Subject, Response, Response, Subject
;
(the second announcement of the Subject is in the parallel of the first part, but
occurs too late —
as fourth voice). See also Vol. I, Fugue 12; Subject, Response,
Subject, Subject, in Tenor, Alto, Bass, Soprano. Vol. I, Fugue 14; Vol. II, —
Fugue 17.
(3) The number of announcements, which may be more (very rarely

less) than the total number of parts.
The announcement is rare in the 4-voice Fugue, though common in the
" extra "
3-voice. See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 17 the Exposition is irregular, ;
as already seen; and a 5th announcement ("Subject") is added in Bass, meas.

13-15. Vol. II, Fugue 23, extra announcement (Bass), in meas. 19-22. Bach, Org.
Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. II, Fugue 3, extra announcement, somewhat abbre-
viated, in Bass, meas. 45-49. Vol. IV, Fugue 2.
125. a. After the first Response' (second announcement of the
Theme), an episodic interlude of one or more measures is generally

inserted, partly by way of variety, but chiefly as a means of modulating
back into the original key, and preparing for the next announcement
of the Subject. The episode must, of course, be strictly in keeping with
what precedes, and is usually derived directly from it. Review par.
\\b. For illustration, Ex. 150 continues thus:
Bach.
1 Seq. «—
Ex.
152A 1
ggg= == S*
(Ex. 150 continued.;
lifegp^
„ .
Subject.
.T" etc.
228 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Pat. 125b-
See further, Bach, Well-temp. Cl„ Vol. I, Fugue 14, meas. 7 (derived from end
of meas. 2); Fugue 17, meas. 3-4 (sequences in Bass, followed by modified form
of the Counterpoint); Vol. II, Fugue 5, meas. 4; Fugue 7, meas. 13; Fugue 22,
meas. 9-10.
In Vol. I, Fugue 18, there is no episode before the second announcement of the
Subject and the same in Vol. I, Fugue 23, and Vol. II, Fugue 9.
;
In Vol. I, Fugue 5, the episode is made of new material, but rhythmically related
to what precedes.
Vol. I, Fugue 20, meas. 7, new figure (scale-line) Vol. I, Fugue 22, meas. 6-9,
;
new, but closely related to the foregoing; rhythm curiously shifted (a figure of 6
beats in a 4 beat measure).
Vol. II, Fugue 8, meas. 5-6; new, but partly derived from Subject.
b. As a rule, there is no further episodic interlude (in the 4-voice

Fugue) before the last (4th) announcement of the Theme, the last —
Response. But when the latter is finished, an episode, more or less
lengthy, is almost obligatory, as a means of establishing the key in
which, at this juncture, the Exposition is expected to close. It is during

this final episodic passage that an extra (5 th) announcement of tke
Theme (as " Subject," probably) may occur. See par. 124 (3).
126. The Exposition ends, as a rule, with a perfect cadence in the
Dominant key (from a major beginning), or in the Relative key (from
a minor beginning). Other keys, especially the original key itself, are
possible, however, and not infrequently chosen. The perfect cadence
is often (perhaps most commonly) made fairly strong, by the emphatic
succession V-I in Bass, Tonic in Soprano, on an accented beat. But

sometimes it is much lighter and occasionally it is so transient and
;
indefinite that the actual close of the Exposition can be defined in a

general way only, or not at all. In no case, however, no matter how
strong the harmonic form of the cadence may be, is any decided check
of the rhythmic movement permissible. Review par. 40A.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 23 ; the Exposition ends in meas. 9,
firmly,on the I of the Dominant key there are no episodes ; at all.
Vol. I, Fugue 5, meas. 6, cadence in Dominant key, fairly firm ; no second
episode.
Vol. I, Fugue 16, meas. 12, firm perfect cadence in Relative key second episode,
;
meas. 8-12, designed like the first one.

Vol. I, Fugue 17, meas. 7 (2nd beat), or meas. 10 — probably the latter, but very
indefinite in either case.
Vol. Fugue 18, meas. 11, cadence in Dominant key from minor beginning.
I,
Vol. Fugue 20, meas. 14, ditto; by altering the chord-3rd (g) to gt, the I of
I,
the Dominant key is changed, in a characteristically abrupt manner, into the V of

the original key.
Par. 127. THE FUGHETTA. 229
Vol. II, Fugue 5, meas. 10; light Dominant cadence.

Vol. II, Fugue 7, meas. 30 strong Dominant cadence.
;
Vol. II, Fugue 8, probably meas. 1 1 very vague. ;
Vol. II, Fugue 9, meas. 9 Dominant cadence, 3rd in Soprano.

;
Further, Vol. I, Fugue 1 Exposition irregular ends in meas. 7, with

; ; light Tonic
cadence.
Vol. I, Fugue 14; Exposition irregular; ends in meas. 20, with firm Dominant
cadence (from minor beginning).
The Fughetta.
127. The Fughetta is a small Fugue, containing no more than

one Section (the Exposition, possibly extended by one or two extra
announcements of the Theme) or perhaps two Sections, the Expo-
;
—
sitionand one additional Section. In the first of these cases, the
Exposition must terminate with a strong perfect cadence in the original
key.
Bach, Air with 30 Var. (Clar.), Var. 1 o ; two " Parts "or Sections.
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol V, No. 7 ; No. 18 (irregular Exposition,
two Sections).
Schumann, "Fughettas" for pianoforte, op. 126; No. 2 (two Sections, very
vague cadence begins with " Response " ) No. 3 (three Sections, cadences vague)
; ;
No. 4, ditto; No. 5, ditto (new, characteristic counterpoint in Sec. Ill) No. 7 (three ;
Sections, cadences fairly clear, stretti in Sec. III). These are all scarcely more than
elaborate Inventions.
EXERCISE 37.
A.Write several examples of the Exposition of the 4-voice Fugue, using some
of the Subjects of the preceding Exercises. Employ major and minor Subjects
alternately, and different rhythmic styles and tempi.
B- Write two or three examples of the complete 4-voice Fughetta of one Sec-
tion ; an Exposition closing with perfect cadence in the original key.
i.e.,
The Sectional Form.
128. The Exposition (first Section) is an essential and characteristic

factor of this form of composition, appearing in every genuine Fugue,
no matter what its subsequent development (its design as a whole)
may be.
That which follows the Exposition, however, is not (as a rule) subject
to any further specific conditions, — excepting such as may be involved in
some "special design " of the Fugue as a whole (to be considered further
on). The constraint of special rules is relaxed ; in the second Section,
and other following ones, it does not matter how often the Theme
appears, in which parts, nor on which scale-steps. The subsequent
conduct of the Fugue may be as free as that of the Invention, always
excepting that a certain dignity and general seriousness of style should
be maintained. After the Exposition the writer is free to realize more
definite structural purposes; to carry out more extensive modulatory

designs ; to develop the thematic resources of the subject, both as a
whole, and in its component figures ; and to pursue some broad (quasi
dramatic) design, leading in successive stages to effective climaxes, at,
or near, the end.
129. The most convenient and common design for the Fugue is the
simple Sectional form ; for this provides the most natural means for the
simple progressive development of the resources of the Theme. Review
par. 39.
The number of sections is optional (from 3 to 6 or 8). Their
cadences, and the modulatory design of the whole, correspond to the
directions given for the Invention.
130. a. The second Section may begin with an announcement of

the Theme, in any part, and in any next-related key, preferably the one
in which the Exposition closed.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 16 (meas. 12); Fugue 18 (meas. 11).
And, as already stated, this section, and all which follow, may con-
tain as few or as many successive announcements as appears convenient
or desirable, — as a rule, however, not in the same part twice in imme-
diate succession.
b. Or the Section may begin with a carefully planned Episode.

This seems to be the best and most common practice.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 5 (meas. 6, — episode derived from
Theme).
Vol. I, Fugue 23 (meas. 9-1 1 derived, with quaint rhythmic modification, from
;
Theme, and containing frequent allusions to the first figure of the Counterpoint,
descending scale).
Bach, Org. Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. II, Fugue 1 (meas. 19-28, derived from
Theme).
Vol. II, Fugue 2 (meas. 17-26).
c. Such an episode is likely to acquire a certain independent impor-

tance in the Fugue, and to reappear, in the same section or in later
ones, —
not literally, but in the same general thematic form in differ- ;
Par. 130c. THE SECTIONAL FUGUE. -23!
ent keys, naturally, and in various inversions. This is the case with
the episodic passages in general.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. 1, Fugue 17; the episode in meas. 11 (with
sequence in following measure) reappears in meas. 14, 15, and 19, 20, each time in a
different key, and with inverted parts. Also Vol. I, Fugue 14 ; similar episodes in
meas. 7, 18, and 28.
These recurrences of the episodic material not only institute well-

defined variety (as opposed to the thematic announcements), but con-
tribute to the unity and definite form of the whole. In some instances,
especially in the broader organ fugues of Bach, the episodes assume an
importance fully equal, if not superior, to that of the thematic portions,
and lend (by their frequency, extent, and characteristic treatment) a
very effective physiognomy to both form and contents.
See, for example; Bach, Org. Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. Ill, Fugue 3 ; the epi-
sodes are constructed, throughout, in very similar fashion upon an auxiliary motive
(derived from a figure of the Counterpoint); they appear in meas. 15-17, 25-28,
36-42, 50-56, 64-66 (new episode), 67-70, 78-80, 88-100, 108-114, etc., etc. Also
Vol. II, Fugue 4 episodes after nearly every announcement of the Theme : meas. 7-9,
;
12-14, 18-21, 28, 32-36, 39-43, 47-50, 54, 57-65, 68-79 (similar to preceding one),
82-93 (ditto), 97-100 (like 47-50), 106-109 ('ike 32-36).
Each succeeding Section of the Fugue may (perhaps should)

131.
some new traits,

contain —
most naturally, new " Counterpoints " to the
Theme. And each Section should be more interesting and effective
than those which preceded. Therefore it is customary to introduce the
contrary motion of the Theme, in later Sections ; and, near the end,
good stretto-imitntions are desirable. Review, very thoroughly, par. 33
(Ex. 83).
Analyze, very minutely, the following Fugues from the Well-temp. CI. of Bach
Vol. I, Fugue 23 Section II begins in meas. 9, with episode, followed by one
;
announcement of Theme (Tenor) Sec. Ill begins in meas. 13, with same episode,
;
followed by Theme in Alto; Sec. IV begins in meas. 18, with Theme in contrary
motion (Soprano), followed by same in Alto, then original motion in Bass and in
Tenor Sec. V begins in meas. 26, with former episode, followed by Theme in Alto,
;
and then in Soprano.

Vol. I, Fugue 16; Sec. II begins in meas. 12, with impressive solo-announce-
ment of Theme, —
further, Theme in Bass, Soprano, then Bass and (2 beats later)
Alto in stretto ; the Alto Theme extends partly over into Sec. Ill, which begins in
meas. 18, and contains Theme in Bass, Soprano, and Alto this section closes, pecu- ;
liarly, with a firm perfect cadence in the principal key ; Sec. IV is exclusively epi-
sodic, and seems to be a Retransition, leading back to the beginning, intimating —
(in connection with other traits) that this Fugue is designed in the 3-Part Song-form
(par. 136) ; Sec. V begins in meas. 28, with a stretto of the Theme in Alto, Tenor,
232 • APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 131.
and Bass (the latter only fragmentary), followed, after an episode, by Theme in Alto
(meas. 31), and, finally, in Tenor.
In Vol. II, Fugue 5, the stretto-design is more elaborate. Analyze minutely.
There are eight sufficiently definite sections; in Sec. V (meas. 27) a 2-voice stretto
appears ; in Sec. VI (meas. 33) a 3-voice stretto ; and in Sec. VIII (meas. 44) a
4-voice stretto.
In Vol. II, Fugue 8, there is a double-announcement of the Theme in simultane-
ous original and contrary motion, in Soprano and Tenor, in the Codetta (last four
measures).
In Vol. I, Fugue 5, there is a definite and characteristic arrangement of episodic
passages ; homophonic episode, derived,
Sec. Ill begins (in meas. 9) with an almost
by Augmentation, from the Theme, and continued during two measures it recurs ;
at the beginning of Sec. IV (meas. 1 7) inverted, and extended to three measures

and again in meas. 21 in the original form.
See further, Bach, Org. Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. II, Fugue I Sec. II begins in ;
meas. 19, with an episode, followed by Theme in Tenor; Sec. Ill begins in meas.
35 with Theme and characteristic (new) Counterpoint Sec. IV, in meas. 55 with ;
new episode Sec. V, in meas. 85 with remainder of Theme announced in preceding

;
measure (Tenor) . These sections are considerably longer than in the Fugues of the
Well-temp. Clavichord.
Also Vol. IV, Fugue 2 ; the Exposition contains an extra (5th) announcement,
in meas. 28 Sec. 2 begins in meas. 34 (cadence light) with an episode then Theme
; ;
in Alto, episode, Theme in Tenor, episode, Theme in Soprano, episode, Theme in
Bass; Sec. Ill begins in meas. 71, with a long episode (to meas. 83); Sec. IV, in
meas. 105, with remainder of Theme in Alto, and closes in meas. 132; from there to
end, Coda. The first Counterpoint is retained approximately, throughout (par 132).
The episodes alternate almost regularly with the thematic announcements.
As intimated above, it is quite common to retain the first

132.
Counterpoint,and to use it more or less constantly with later announce-
ments of the Theme. This retention of the " Counterpoint " is not,
however, to be too persistent in the " Single " Fugue, — such constant
recurrence of a contrapuntal associate being a distinctive condition of
the " Double-fugue," as will be seen.
It may be retained during the Exposition only perhaps recurring ;
from time to time in later sections or it may be abandoned after the ;
first Response, and recur later ; it may be used entire, or in part ; and
may be modified to any extent.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 14; Subject in Tenor, Response in
Alto ; during the latter a characteristic Counterpoint is carried by the Tenor ; it recurs
in Alto (meas. 8-10) against Theme in Bass, extended at the beginning by an antici-
pation of the first figure; it recurs again in Bass (meas. 15-17) against Theme in
Soprano, with the same introductory extension; and again in Alto (meas. 25-27), in
Soprano (meas. 29-31), and, somewhat modified, in Alto (meas. 37-39). This reten-
tion of the Counterpoint is almost as persistent as in the Double-fugue.
Par. 132. THE SECTIONAL FUGUE. 233
Vol. I, Fugue 23; the Counterpoint lies first in the Tenor (meas. 3-4, begin- —
ning with the characteristic descending scale, out of which, by the way, all the epi-
sodes are largely constructed) ; it recurs in Alto (meas. 5-6), and in Soprano (meas.
7-8), — that is, it is retained during the Exposition. But it does not occur again
(save as occasional fragmentary allusion) until near the end (in Alto, meas. 31-32),
against the Theme in Soprano.
Vol. II, Fugue 8 ; the Counterpoint is characteristic, consisting of 4 sequential
figures (Ex. 151) j it recurs at each following announcement of the Theme, in Tenor
(meas. 7-8), Bass (meas. 9-10), Soprano (meas. 15-16). Then it is once absent,
reappearing next in Bass (meas. 19-20), and in Tenor (meas. 21-22). Itthen disap-
pears altogether.
In Vol. II, Fugue 9, the Counterpoint runs thus
*=
Ex.
153. 9*fe
#J3i X
'un< Lai
EÊ
X E
It occurs in Bass (meas. 3), recurs in Tenor (meas. 4-5), and Alto (meas. 6). It
reappears episodically (without the Theme) in Tenor (meas. 8). In meas. 11-12 it
appears, somewhat modified, in Tenor and immediately afterward in Soprano,
;
curiously modified thus,
Ex.
154
ikk it
Augmentation.
feE
in which form it is at once carried through the four parts, episodically, as stretto after
a half -measure (Soprano, Alto, Bass, Tenor). It reappears in its original form in So-
prano (meas. 36), Alto (37), and Tenor (38), — the last time extended sequentially.
Vol. II, Fugue 22 the Counterpoint; is largely chromatic, occurring first in Alto
(meas. 5—8), then again in Alto (meas. 11-14), then in Bass (meas. 17—20). When
the Theme appears, later, in contrary motion, the Counterpoint, also in contrary
motion, again accompanies it : Alto, meas. 42-44 ; Tenor, meas. 46-48 ; Alto again,
52-54 and a fragment
; in Soprano, meas. 59-60.
Vol. II, Fugue 23 a very striking Counterpoint is retained throughout the
;
Exposition only ; Bass, meas, 5—8 Tenor, meas. 10-13 Alto, meas. 14—17 Soprano,
; ; ;
meas. 19-21. It is absent during the remainder of the Fugue (which, as a whole,
will be cited again as a " Double-fugue ")
EXERCISE 38.
A. Analyze, very minutely
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 18.
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugues 5, 8.
Bach, Org. Comp. (Peters ed.), Vol. II, Fugue 1 ; Fugue 3 (seven sections ;
Counterpoint retained nearly throughout, — absent in Sec. V and part of Sec. VI

one stretto in Sec. VI).
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. Ill, Fugue 5 (various Counterpoints ; many episodes).
Bach, Clavichord works, Peters ed. 212, No. 4 (p. 66).
B. Write a number of complete 4-voice Fugues (at least two) in Sectional form.
Both major and minor. Different species of measure, and different character and
tempo, to be adopted for each example.
Additional Miscellaneous Directions.
133. Review, thoroughly, par. 41a and par. d\a. As repeatedly

shown, and confirmed by the analysis of the authoritative contrapuntal
works of Bach and other great polyphonic writers, the original source
of all multi-voice music is the chord ; and the prime impulse of all
associated voice-movements is, obviously, the natural law of chord-

succession (par. 18). For a certain period, the choice of tones and
the melodic movements will be, and must be, dictated by the rules of
chord-progression the voices or parts cling, for a time, to the harmony
;
for their support, as children (so to speak) are led by their older and
stronger associates. But the time finally arrives when (in the growing
experience and skill of the student) the " voices " outgrow this guardian-
ship of fundamental harmonic law, and exercise greater independence
in their movements ; and, in fact, the exercise of independent melodic
will may become so imperative as to reverse the conditions, so that the
parts dictate the chord-successions. In other words, as the student's
command of melodic conduct increases until he can trace the course of
three or more simultaneous melodic parts unerringly, so that each part
by a perfect melody, moments will arrive when these individual
itself is
voice-movements will determine the succession of harmonic nodes,

called " chords " when, instead of the parts moving obediently towards
;
the several harmonic points fixed by each succeeding chord (in the
pre-defined order of natural chord-progression), the parts themselves
assume the lead, and dictate what the chord-successions shall be. For
ifeach part describes a faultless melodic line, and the parts harmonize,
the result will be acceptable and legitimate, whether it conforms to the
common law of chord-sequence or not.
For example, the chord-successions in the following examples cannot be satis-

factorily defined in accordance with the common rules of chord-progression ; and yet
the result of the three or more associated melodies is good.
Ex.
a^^^^S J
Bach. Bach.
155
Et>VAt>?? ? El? IV I
Par. 133 THE SECTIONAL FUGUE.
Bach. 4.
t^r=f=r^f
4 ft ?f#V I 4 ? d#_
N.B.
^g=lPl s
fe^SBry^rrw MBrahms.
isîÊîÊ^gii
* -=r*-
s-
EI EV_ J
*i) " Passing-chord "; this effect is very common in Wagner.

*2) Sequence in the Alto-part. The harmonies are simple and regular, but the
passing- and neighboring-notes create totally unexpected chord-effects.
When this result is achieved, the product belongs to the highest

grade of polyphonic thought. But it is scarcely conceivable that this
lofty phase of polyphonic effort can be often reached or long sustained ;
even works of Bach and Brahms, unmistakable evidences of eman-

in the
cipation from natural harmonic law are rare in those of Beethoven and;
other great homophonic masters, naturally still more so. And in the
more modern writings of Wagner, Rich. Strauss, and others, where such
evidences are again more frequent, one cannot always quite escape an
uncomfortable sensation of harmonic bewilderment. The growing vigor
and independence of melodic conduct may incite to occasional success-
ful rebellion (so to speak), but the student will never wholly outgrow the
necessary and wholesome habits of harmonic action contracted during
early studies. The habits formed during the discipline of deriving
all melodic movements from the sub-current of natural harmonic
sequence, will, in polyphonic texture of greatest power and stability,
never cease to assert themselves.

Hence, the present student will apply this most eminent resource
of polyphonic development chiefly as a means of defining the choice
between many possible chord-structures which await each coming beat
and far more rarely, with much caution, as a legitimate device for
obtaining unexpected harmonic clusters, and evolving greater freedom
and opulence of harmonic movement. Review, further, pars. 59 and
60; and, particularly, pars. 61 c, d, and e. Also par. 75.
134. a. The voice-movements should be conjunct, in largely prepon-

derant measure. and should not be avoided
Skips, of course, can not
altogether but they must be made with caution, and may require care-
;
ful testing. They are always good when occurring within any un-
changed chord, or when the first of the two tones is common to the
following chord. It is best to avoid leaping to any sharply dissonant,
or inharmonic, tone.
Transient harsh effects, even extreme, cannot be precluded ; they
are as essential in effective polyphony as are the pure consonances ; but
the manner of their approach and departure must be very guarded, —
abrupt dissonances are usually objectionable.
b. Review, thoroughly, par. 64. It is absolutely necessary that one

of the four parts should assume the lead, for a more or less extended
period, — until another of their number becomes in turn the " leader."
This function devolves, naturally, upon the part which has the Theme,
though not to the exclusion of some concurrent part, especially Soprano
or Bass, — one of which is very likely indeed to contribute most
noticeably, in this way, to the tracing of the Form.
A good illustration of this vital condition is seen in Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol.
I,Fugue 22, meas. 6-12 in Soprano. See also Vol. II, Fugue 18, meas. 85-93 in
Bass. Vol. II, Fugue 9, last 6 measures in Soprano.
Mendelssohn, Organ Fugue, op. 37, No. 1, — the "leading" character of the
Soprano, especially, is obvious in many places; see meas. 18-19, 20-22, 41-45.
Without such definite, and, if need be, lengthy melodic lines, a Fugue can hardly
escape monotony, diffuseness, and vague, ineffective form.
c. For this very reason, sequences are of the utmost importance.

Review par. 41^.
d. Review par. 63^ and c; par. 75^. It is well to avoid long rests
during the Exposition, until the four parts have all appeared with the
Theme. Short rests are always good (Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I,
Fugue 23, meas. 5-6) ;
especially in the Theme itself (Vol. II, Fugue
Par. 134c THE SECTIONAL FUGUE. 237
22), or in the first Counterpoint (Vol. I, Fugue 12). And longer rests
are not only permissible, but desirable, in the later course of the Fugue.
It is positively unwise to keep all four parts constantly present and
moving.
e. In the Exposition avoid any circumstance that tends to obscure

the successive announcements of the beginning of the Theme.
Observe how effective the entrances of the parts are in Vol. II, Fugue 9 and
Fugue 8. In Vol. II, Fugue 7, the last note in meas. 6 interferes somewhat with
the Response in the next. Observe, further, the entrances in Mendelssohn, op. 35,
Fugue 1, especially in meas. 6.
f. The character of the Subject influences its Exposition to a cer-

tain extent. A heavy Theme is somewhat likely to appear first in Bass
or Tenor (i.e., low). A Theme that ends higher than it begins must
appear first in a high voice, to avoid interference with its next imitation,
and vice versa.
The tempo of the Subject must be taken into account also ; it in-
fluences the number of parts, the number of rests, the degree of liveli-
ness (or of stateliness) in the rhythm of the first Counterpoint, and, in
fact, of the entire Fugue ; and, somewhat, the number, extent, and
quality of dissonances. Attention is again directed, particularly, to
Par. 33-
Continue the work of thorough analysis with the following sectional
4-voice Fugues
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. Ill, Fugue 10 3 sections; brief ;
and simple, but effective many episodes. ;
Vol. IV, Fugue 5 3 sections 5 announcements in Exposition, ending with vague

; ;
cadence (meas. 20) Pedal in last section only.

;
Vol. IV, Fugue 9 for manual organ 4 sections and free Coda
; ; ; Counterpoint
retained approximately throughout many episodes. ;
Vol. VIII, Fugue 10 ; manual organ ; very regular, " Subject " and " Response "
throughout ; cadences vague.
Vol. II, Fugue 10 ; three different thematic counterpoints, besides several inci-
dental characteristic ones ; thus :
Cpt. a.
-P5s*-
1
m&^&mm^ • J- m
238 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. i34f.
Char. Cpt. *.
Theme.
*= i=^^f^| *m
and
Par. 135. TWO-PART SONG-FORM. 239
EXERCISE 39.
Write a large number of 4-voice Fugues, in sectional form major and minor
;
alternately; different species of measure, different style and tempo for each example.
The Song— Forms.
135. The Two-Part Song-form. The chief difference between this
and the sectional design is the distinctly marked cadence (usually

perfect) in or near the middle of the Fugue.
The First Part is likely to consist of the Exposition, and one addi-
tional section ; the latter may be brief and largely episodic, or it may
be longer and more independent but in either case it leads into a well-
;
prepared and fairly emphatic cadence in the Dominant key (possibly the
Relative major, in a minor Fugue, or some other next-related key).
Part II is often individualized to some extent ; most commonly by
adopting the contrary motion of the Theme (for a time), or by means
of a new and characteristic Counterpoint. At the same time, Part II
may (perhaps should) exhibit more or less distinct parallelism with its
First Part, — especially in its episodes ; and, as usual, the last few
measures may corroborate the ending of Part I. A Codetta or Coda
may be added. Review par. 45.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 14; Part I (the Exposition, and 3 epi-
sodic measures) closes in meas. 20, with a strong Dominant cadence. Part II begins
with Theme in Alto in contrary motion; then Theme in original motion in Soprano
with disguised beginning (meas. 25), leading to cadence in meas. 28, thus dividing —
the Second Part into two sections. In meas. 35-36 the episode of meas. 19 reap-
pears, followed by Theme in Soprano. The contrary motion occurs again in Bass,
meas. 32-34.
Vol. I, Fugue 17 ; Part I ends in meas. 16; a very faint intimation of a Third
Part occurs in meas. 27.
Vol. II, Fugue 2; Part I is 3-voice texture throughout; it closes in meas. 14
with a positive perfect cadence in the Dominant key. Part II is characterized by
two announcements of the Theme in Augmentation, and, further, by the addition of
a 4th voice. The last 5J measures are a Coda.
Vol. II, Fugue 7 ; Part I closes in meas. 30; Part II largely episodic.
Mendelssohn, Organ Fugue, op. 37, No. 3; quasi sectional, —

suggestion of a
separation into two Parts in meas. 32 ; the last 25 measures are Coda.
Organ Sonata, op. 65, No. 2, last movement; Part II characterized by a more
animated counterpoint (partly thematic) few episodes until near the end. ;
136. The Three-Part Song-form. Part I the same as in the 2-Part

Song-form. Part II is here again generally characterized in some
manner ; and is led into a more or less distinct semicadence upon the
Dominant of the original key, usually confirmed by an emphatic (some-

times quite extended) organ-point.
Part III must be, as usual, a well-marked " Return to the begin-
ning " ; but it does not need to contain any more than the first few
measures (two or three) of Part I, —
enough to establish key and for-
mal design ; its subsequent contents are 'likely to be entirely independ-
ent, and should be more elaborate and interesting than any preceding
Section hence, stretto-imitations are peculiarly appropriate, and more
;
brilliant (even partly homophonic) episodes are legitimate and desirable.
A Coda or Codetta is frequently added. Review pars. 49, 50 ; also 33.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 16; already cited among the sectional
forms there is a strong indication of a " Return to the beginning " in meas. 28.
;
Vol. I, Fugue 23 ditto intimation of Third Part in meas. 6 from the end.
; ;
Schumann, op. 72, Fugue 4 ; in Part II (piit vivo) two different modified forms
of the Theme appear
Moderate.
Modified form a.
^m
Schumann.
h4^+u=±^
¥ Modified form b.
"
=t=t
*=$.
jf"*
-
Tr
i
EXERCISE 40.
A number of 4-voice Fugues in the 2-Part and 3-Part Song-forms.
Thk Fugue with Special Design.
137. No good Fugue is barren of some structural design, as the

foregoing paragraphs show. But it is possible to pursue some special
plan in the manipulation of this polyphonic form, evolved more particu-
larly out of the resources of its Theme, and therefore peculiarly iden-
tified with the processes of Thematic Development.
The formal plan is usually that of the sectional Fugue ; and the
" special design " consists in assigning to each Section in succession
some specific method of thematic treatment, resulting in a systematic
Par. 137. FUGUE WITH SPECIAL DESIGN. 241
presentation of such possibilities of manipulation and combination as

are latent within the Theme (e.g., effective stretti, contrary motion, etc.).
These possibilities, or resources, are usually determined beforehand by

most thorough examination and experiment with the Theme ; and more it is
than likely that these resources may be systematically multiplied by

judicious revision and alteration of the Subject, possibly created —
outright in draughting the Theme.
Review Chap. IV; especially pars. 29, 33, 36.
Analyze, most thoroughly, the following
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vo). I, Fugue 20; the "design" is strikingly manifest;
Sec. I a regular Exposition, to meas. 14 Sec. II is an equally complete Exposition
is ;
of the Theme in contrary motion, to meas. 27 Sec. Ill is the exposition of a strctto ;
in the 8ve after two beats (Soprano and Tenor) carried through all the parts, up to
meas. 48 ; Sec. IV is a similar exposition of the same stretto in contrary motion
(Alto and Tenor) through allsomewhat abbreviated in the last measures,
the parts,
62-64 ! Sec. V is the condensed exposition of a new stretto, after two beats in the
5th, first in original motion (meas. 64-65, Bass and Tenor), then in contrary motion
(Soprano and Alto) ; Sec. VI, meas. 73, contains miscellaneous stretti, to the cadence
in meas. 83 ; the rest is Coda.
Vol. II, Fugue 22, is similar ; Sec. I is a regular Exposition up to meas. 25 Sec. ;
II is the Exposition of a remarkable stretto, after one beat in the 7th (meas. 27,
Tenor and Alto) ; Sec. Ill, meas. 42, is an Exposition of the Theme in contrary
motion IV, meas. 67, the same stretto as before, but in contrary motion (Alto
; Sec.
and Soprano). Thus far, to meas. 77, the Fugue consists of two similar double-
sections, one in regular and the other in contrary motion. Sec. V, meas. 80, is the
Exposition of a new stretto, after one beat, in regular and contrary motion (Soprano
and Tenor). Near the end, as climax (meas. 96), there is an extraordinary double-
stretto, regular and contrary motion, each Theme doubled in the 3rd (the first one
part of the way in the 6th).
Vol. II, Fugue g ;
" Gregorian " Theme ; Sec. I, Exposition ; Sec. II, meas. 9,
stretto in 4th aftertwo beats (Alto, Tenor, Bass, Soprano) Sec. Ill, meas. 16, new ;
stretto, in 5th after one measure (Alto, Soprano, Bass, Tenor) Sec. IV, meas. 23, ;
new stretto, in 5th after one beat, with modified form of the Theme (Soprano, Alto,
Bass, Tenor) Sec. V, end of meas. 26, Exposition of the Diminution (Soprano, Alto,
;
Tenor, Bass); Sec. VI, meas. 30, contains original Theme, and its Diminution, in
regular and contrary motion, —
faintly suggestive of Sec. I; Sec. VII, meas. 35, is
substantially the recurrence of Sec. II from meas. 38 to end is in the nature of a;
Coda.
Vol. I, Fugue I the special design is not as obvious as in the above examples,
;
but the persistent stretto-treatment of the Theme after the Exposition (meas. 7-24),
especially the 4-voice stretto in meas. 16-18 (Soprano, Alto, Tenor, Bass), seems to
be more than merely accidental.
Bach, " Art of Fugue," Fugue 3 appears to begin with " Response," instead of
;
" Subject," —
(a peculiarity of irregular Exposition par. 124 seen also in Bach, — —
Orf*. Comp., Vol. Ill, Fugue 4, and Vol. IV, Fugues 1 and 4).
The " Subject " (meas. 5) runs thus
1=F=M=
ia
Ex. T=£
158.[=ggH3p: -Z5l-
± 3 ~^-
I
There are four Sections, separated by very vague cadences, but distinguished by
their thematic contents ; Sec. I is the usual Exposition ; Sec. II (meas. 23) presents
the Theme in the following form :
-•- m-f2- -m-
5^ •-4W
iP= 5
V-l*-
=SE fc£
-x=x sfe iiB
Sec. Ill (meas. 39) returns to the original form ; Sec. IV (meas. 55) uses the
following form twice,
^
i IE 3=F *=st -
g*-— :•— ^-
and also the original form. The first counterpoint (partly chromatic) is retained
nearly throughout.
Bach, " Art of Fugue," Fugue 1 2 ;

4-voice ; Special Design in 2-Part Song-form
Part I is a regular Exposition, with a thematic Counterpoint (par. 163) retained;
Part II is an exposition of the Subject in more richly embellished form than
still
those illustrated in Ex. 158. The following Fugue (No. \2b) is the exact Contrary
motion and Inversion of the preceding ; compare them minutely.
Mendelssohn, No. 5 very elaborate sectional form about nine Sections

op. 7, ; ;
(including the Exposition) and a brief Coda Sec. Ill, contrary motion Sec. IV, ; ;
Augmentation Sec. V, Diminution Sec. VI, episodic, animated tempo and rhythm
; ;
Sec. IX, stretti.
EXERCISE 41.
Two or more Fugues with Special Design.
CHAPTER XIII.
The Fugue with Less or More Than Four Parts. — The

Three-Voice Fugue.
138. The Exposition. The three parts are called lower, inner, and
upper, without reference to voice-compass, though they are likely to
represent adjacent registers. The regular Exposition contains Subject,
Par. 139. THE THREE-VOICE FUGUE.. 243
Response, and Subject (comp. par. 123), the last Subject always either
an octave higher or lower than the first Subject.

The enlargement of the Exposition to four announcements is, how-
ever, quite common in the 3-voice Fugue the last announcement is
;
again " Response," usually an 8ve lower or higher than the first
Response.
See Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 19; the 4th announcement is made
noticeable by the peculiar leap in Bass (meas. 5-6).
Vol. I, Fugue 8 (meas. 12). Vol. II, Fugue 11 (meas. 21). Vol. II, Fugue 19
(meas. 7).
139. The Theme of a 3-voice Fugue is likely to be of a more spir-
ited rhythmic character, and possibly wider compass, than that of the
4-voice Fugue otherwise there is no essential difference.
; The struc-
tural designs and all details of treatment are the same.
140. Sectional form. Review pars. 128 to 132, and analyze the
following, most thoroughly
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 9 Exposition

; to meas. 5 ; Sec. II to meas.
17; episode in meas. 13-15, recurring in meas. 23-24; in meas. 19 there is an inti-
mation of a return to the beginning (quasi 3-Part Song-form). Vol. I, Fugue 11,
four Sections.
Vol. II, — Fugue 6 (contrary motion and
Fugue I. employed stretti in later
course). — Fugue 10 (episode in

meas. 18-20, corroborated meas. 47-49; charac- in
teristicCounterpoint recurs — Fugue (quasi 2-Part Song-form

occasionally). 1 1 j
Exposition meas. 29 many

to — Fugue
; Fugue Fugue
episodes). 12. 15. 19.
Bach, Clavichord Comp., Peters ed. 212, No. 2 (p. 59). Peters ed. 213, No. 1,
2nd movement; elaborate episodes. Peters ed. 213, No. 2, 2nd movement (p. 21)
broad sectional form; elaborate episodes, largely similar. Peters ed. 214, No. 2
(p. 12); many fairly strong cadences, Sections small; compare minutely with the
" Variante," p. 48. Peters ed. 215, p. 23. 216, p. 50 (No. 8, fifth movement). 216,
No. 10 (p. 57) ; many cadences, Sections brief.
Bach, Musikalisches Opfer, No. 1 (Riccrcata, — same as Fuga).

Rubinstein, Fugue op. 53, No. 2 (contrary motion and stretti ingeniously used).
Schumann, op. 126, No. 1 (2 Sections, cadences vague); No. 6, 4 Sections.
Jadassohn, Fugues and Preludes, op. 56 Fugue No. 6 also Nos. 2 and
Pfte. ; ;
3 the latter contain effective stretti and the Contrary motion, cited again, among —
the Concert -fugues (par. 148).
141. Two-Part Song-form. Review par. 135, and analyze the

following
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 6 ; Part I closes in meas. 21 (almost ex-
actly in the middle of the Fugue) with a strong perfect cadence in the Dominant
key; Part II uses the contrary motion freely, and later, from meas. 31 on, corrobo-
rates Part I closely ; the last 5 measures of each Part correspond exactly (except in
key).
The Fugue as Gigue form (par. 51), with contrary motion as basis of Part IT, is
illustrated in Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. I, " Pastorale," last movement.
142. Among the many devices adopted for the characterization of

the Second Part (the most common being the contrary motion of the
Theme, pars. 48^, 51), there is one that is peculiarly effective in the
Fugue, namely, the introduction of a new and striking Counterpoint,
retained more or less constantly throughout the Part, as new thematic
member. This process was touched upon in Ex. 156, which see. For
illustration see —
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 13; Part I (Exposition and episodic exten-
sion) closes in meas. 11 ; the new "thematic counterpoint" appears in meas. 12-13
in Bass,and twice later; it grows out of the foregoing episodic figure (meas. 7).
Fugue 21 Part I to meas. 32 the thematic counterpoint is in Soprano,
Vol. II, ; ;
meas. 33-36, and reappears often the two Parts close alike. ;
Vol. II, Fugue 24 the form is sectional (no decisive cadence to mark 9 First
;
Part) the thematic counterpoint first occurs in meas. 29-32, in Bass

;
Handel, Clav. Suite, No. 4, 1st movement ;

4-voice.
This design is the type of the Double-fugue, Third Species (par. 178, class i\
143. The Three-Part Song-form. Review par. 136, and see —

Schumann, op. 72, Fugue 2 ; light cadence at end of Part I (Exposition) the ;
first figure of the Counterpoint is used constantly the contrary motion of the Themf
;
appears in later course of Part II ; Part III contains only fragments of Theme, —a
end in Augmentation.
The Second Part is strongly characterized by an animated rhythmic counter-
point in Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 19; Part I ends in meas. 20; an
interlude of 3 measures follows, leading into Part II (meas. 23) ; the animated
counterpoint is not exactly " thematic " (that is, it has no definiteand permanent
thematic form), but based upon a. set of similar figures Part III, meas. 42, falls
is ;
back into the original quiet rhythm, which again yields to the animated form during
the Coda (meas. 49). This form corresponds to par. 70. Comp. also par. 142.
The 5-Part Song-form (two digressions, Parts II and IV, and two returns to
the beginning, Parts III and V) is illustrated in —
Rubinstein, Pfte. Fugue, op. 53, No. 5 ; effective use of Diminution and stretti.
144. The Special Design. Review par. 137, and see —

Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 8; the Exposition ends in meas. 19; See
II contains stretti,and a curious partial Augmentation (Alto, meas. 24-27) Sec. Ill ;
meas. 30, is an Exposition of the contrary motion Sec. IV, meas. 44, closely resem ;
hies Sec. II (in contrary motion) Sec. V, meas. 52-61, contains triple stretti in regu-
;
Par. 145. THE TWO-VOICE FUGUE. 245
lar and contrary motion, and one regular (single) announcement of the Theme ; Sec.
VI, meas. 61-83, an Exposition of the Augmentation (Bass, Alto, Soprano) the
*s ;
rest is an extremely beautiful Codetta. Vol. I, Fugue 15; Sec. I, Exposition, to

meas. 20 followed by an Exposition of the contrary motion and later, various
; ;
stretti; analyze thoroughly. The episodic sections in this Fugue are very distinct,
and corroborative of each other.
The 2 -Voice Fugue.
145. The Fugue with two parts only is naturally rare, because such
slender means are inadequate to the dignity and richness that distin-
guish this polyphonic form.
The Theme must be of a lively rhythmic character, and ample com-
pass. Episodes are frequent and somewhat free (brilliant) ; and the
occasional addition of an auxiliary part, or parts, is permissible, —
almost necessary. See —
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 10; very clearly defined 2-Part Song-form j
Part I closes (with a unique passage in intentional octaves) in meas. 20, in the Sub-
dominant key ; Part II, which follows immediately, is an exact reproduction of the
First Part, but with inverted voices, and, on the
beat of meas. 29, a shift to the
first
next higher step, in order to cadence upon the original keynote, e, instead of d (as
would be the case if the preceding Subdominant modulation were pursued). Com-
pare meas. 29 with meas. 10. Part II ends, with the same octave-passage, in meas.
39 the rest is Codetta (Theme in Soprano, pried asunder by an interposed measure,
;
with imitation of first half in Bass).
Rheinberger, op. 5, No. 3.
Bach, Duetto II (Peters ed. 208, No. 4), 3-Part form. Also Duetto III (with
exceptional auxiliary part at beginning — par. 112, 2) j
3-Part form.
The 5-V01CE Fugue.
146. The extra, 5th, part is either a second Soprano, second Tenor,
or second Bass (rarely an additional Alto) ; and the compass as a whole
is somewhat expanded, either by adding to the height of the usual
Soprano, or the depth of the Bass, or both.
Review par. 123. The Exposition consists of Subject, Response,
Subject, Response, Subject. The " Subjects " must be an octave apart;
the " Responses " likewise. Parallel parts (those which are to announce
the " Subject "), be it recalled, are separated by one (or three) parts.
Five-voice Fugues are seldom effective for the pianoforte, but en-
tirely so for organ. In any case, however, it is desirable to use rests
frequently ; especially protracted rests which reduce the texture occa-
sionally to 4-voice, or even 3-voice. Review, carefully, par. 134// and

par. 75*.
The Subject is usually brief, stately, and narrow in range.
The very positive difficulties attending the addition of a 5th part
may be minimized (1) by preserving a perfectly distinct consciousness
:
of the chord-basis, and the harmonic progressions in general (2) by ;
sustaining at least one of the partsupon some lengthy tone, important

in the chord (as root), or in the key (Tonic, Dominant), that is, by —
refraining from leading all the parts abreast, in active rhythm; (3) by
using many parallel 3rds and 6ths and reciprocal figures, illustrated in
Exs. 113 and 114 (which see) ; and (4) by judicious use of brief rests.
Ex.
159. s
IE
1.
*i)
X
g
S:
r
g-
r™
^^r^n?r r r
fe£s
Bach.
-*-» A *î a
§HE
r T r
n r N.B.
¥
N.B.
1
7
V 7 (IV) I Bt?V
Bach.
unj_AAî
EE i
-r—f-
nJ *-4J
1—1 r-i
4 -e-
1
J
mi J J
r—
+4 nCF^
idt=fe
I
I (III) I V V Kb V 7
Par. 146. THE FIVE-VOICE FUGUE. 247
*6)
3.
I ib^fe^ffiffi
ts^^Wa
al- -F I V- -dV*
Bach.
*6)
^S X ^
^^f ^ *8)
\J1±.
jss. tatt
1
aV -I Bt>V
7
I=FIV- -I-
*i) Observe the profusion of parallel 3rds. *2) Parallel 3rds and 6ths. *3)
The two basses run in 6ths constantly. Observe the thematic character of the first
(highest) bass part; the very definite melodic conduct of both outer parts; and the
chord-analysis. *4) From here on, 4-voice texture. *5) A neighboring-chord. *6)
The Motive (in 8th-notes). *y) Cfl substituted for the expected c\ (par. 19c).
*8) Probably" the Dominant of F; see par. 133, Ex. 155.
Analyze, very minutely, the harmony, thematic texture, and form

of the following
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 22 Two-Part Song-form ; Part II, begin-
;
ning in meas. 25, contains three well-defined Sections; in the last Section there is a
double announcement of the Theme in 3rds (in the two Sopranos), and a five-fold
stretto (beginning in meas. 9 from the end).
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. II, Fugue 5 a fine example 5 Sections many differ-
; ; ;
ent effective " Counterpoints " ; after the Exposition the rhythm is more animated
Sees. Ill and V are largely 3- and 4-voice texture.
Vol. II, Fugue Theme is brief, and almost constantly

7; Special design; the
present few episodes) the texture is 4-voice up to Sec. VI, when the Pedal
(i.e., ;
enters with Augmentation of Theme (to the end) Sec. II, meas. 8, begins with a
;
striking sequential Counterpoint in the Soprano (see par. 134^) Sec. IV is an Expo- ;
sition of the contrary motion Sec. V contains stretti in regular and contrary
;
motioa
Vol. II, Fugue 6; Two- Part Song-form ; 6 announcements in the Exposition;

in Part II there is a new thematic Counterpoint (see par. 142), utilized first in abbre-
viated form, as a long 3-voice episode (meas. 59—86).

Vol. Ill, Fugue 4; begins with "Response"; 7 Sections and Coda; many
effective episodes, somewhat homophonic in character.
Vol. IV, Fugue 1, also begins with " Response"; it is 4- voice texture, with
occasional brief intimations of a 5th part.
Jadassohn, Pfte. Fugues, op. 56 ; Fugue No. 9 ; sectional.
Fugue with Six and More Parts.
147. It is very uncommon to employ more than five parts in the
Fugue, or any other strictly polyphonic form, not only because of the
technical difficulty, but chiefly that of rendering the form intelligible.
As the parts are multiplied, the style becomes more and more harmonic,
and all voice-individuality is lost. The most effective device consists
in so using protracted rests that, for the most part, no more than 5 of
the voices appear at one time together. In any case, the extent will
rarely exceed that of a Fughetta.
See Bach, Musikalisches Offer, No. 2, Ricercata (i.e., Fugue) for 6 parts.
An example of 6-voice writing may be found in Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. VI,
No. 13 (Fugue-group, par. 157).
Further, Bach, " B-minor Mass," No. 20 (Second Division, Pleni sunt coeli) ;
vocal fugue, par. 152 ;

properly speaking, only a Fughetta.
Bach, 8-voice motets (vocal, —

Peters ed. 28), No. 2, Allegro non tanto ; 8-voice
double quartet; first announcement of Theme in 1st Soprano, accompanied; followed
by 8 Imitations in the other parts.
Motet No. 4, letter C to D 8-voice Exposition.
; Also the following Vivace.
EXERCISE 42.
A. Four or more examples of the 3-voice Fugue, respectively in sectional form
(par. 140), 2-PartSong-form (pars. 141 and 142), 3-Part Song-form (par. 143), and
with Special Design (par. 144). Employ different species of measure and different
tempo for each, and alternate major and minor modes.
B. An example of the 2-voice Fugue.
C. Two examples of the 5-voice Fugue, for organ.
D. A Fughetta (one Section) with 6 parts, for organ.

Par. 148. THE CONCERT-FUGUE. 249
CHAPTER XIV.
Miscellaneous Varieties of the Fugue-form. — The

Concert-Fugue.
148. It is entirely feasible, and permissible, so to elaborate the

Fugue-form that, without violating any of its essential conditions or
materially modifying the dignity of its character, it may exhibit those
qualities of brilliancy, passion,and freedom which better adapt it for
public concert use, or, in a word, enhance its effectiveness and external
beauty. Such a version bears about the same relation to the more
genuine, serious Fugue that the Prelude bears to the Invention.
Review par. 83.
The consequent relaxation of fugue law, and general freedom of
treatment, will affect (1) The Theme itself, which may be more char-
:
acteristic (2) the tempo, which is usually more lively (3) the number ;
—
;
of parts, very frequently limited to three fundamental parts, but

freely augmented by the occasional addition of auxiliary lines or whole
"bunches" of auxiliary tones (incidental chords); (4) the episodes,
which are both more frequent and more extensive, and often nearly or
quite homophonic and " figural " .in character (5) the form, which is;
perhaps most likely to be definite 2- or 3-Part Song-form, with firm

cadences, — often embracing purely homophonic (or at most " imita-
tory ") transitional passages, or complete contrasting sections ; (6) the
dramatic design, embracing more pronounced dynamic and rhythmic
contrasts, and the steadily progressive development of one or more
brilliant climaxes.
The strictest fidelity to the Theme is, however, indispensable ; not
necessarily to the whole Theme, nor constantly, but to its pregnant or
salient figures. This (the original Theme, entire, and in fragments), the
contrary motion, possibly Augmentation, stretti, and an effective variety
of " Counterpoints," constitute the thematic material of the Concert-
fugue ; to which are to be added striking episodes (as usual, largely
corroborative of each other), and all the factors which contribute to an
impressive dramatic design, as a whole, and brilliancy of detail.
The most of these traits are forcibly exhibited in Mendelssohn, Pfte. Fugue in
e minor (with Prelude), op. 35, No. Ij 4-voice; definite 3-Part Song-form; after
Part I the tempo and rhythm are gradually and persistently accelerated; Part II
contains the contrary motion of the Theme (further transformed by substituting

staccato for the original legato), and leads to a splendid climax in Part III, which,
after a powerful bass cadenza, culminates in a distinct Coda consisting of an original
chorale with running bass ; the latter gradually subsides to the original tempo and
rhythm, and is followed by a second brief Coda with the Theme in major, treated
more homophonically. Analyze, further
Mendelssohn, Pfte. Fugue, op. 35, No. 3 3- to 4-voice; distinct 3-Part Song- ;
form, contrary motion throughout Part II in Part III, regular and contrary motion;
in stretto.
Op- 35. No. 5 ;
3- to 4-voice ; sectional, quasi 3-Part Form.
Op. 35, No. 6 4-voice sectional, quasi 3-Part Song-form.
;
;
Op. 7, No. 3 4-voice large 2-Part Song-form.

; ;
Fugue in e minor (with Prelude, no opus-number) 4-voice ; ; sectional, quasi 3-

Part Form.
Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.J, Vol. II, Fugue 2; 4-voice stretti in j
last Section many and lengthy episodes,

; the Theme appears (after the Exposi- —
tion) in periodic single announcements, isolated between effective episodes (mostly
of consistent thematic origin, but brilliant and free).
Vol. II, Fugue 4 similar to the above quasi 3-Part Song-form.

; ;
Vol. II, Fugue 8; 4-voice; sectional; similar to above.

Vol. Ill, Fugue 8; 4-voice; sectional; characteristic Counterpoints; first
Counterpoint retained, approximately, until last Section. Many episodes.

Vol. IV, Fugue 3; 4-voice; 10 Sections; many episodes, similar in substance;
first Counterpoint retained, approximately, throughout.
Vol. IV, Fugue 4 4-voice about 4 Sections, cadences vague appears to begin
; ; ;
with " Response " many effective episodes, lengthy, and free, but related to the
;
Theme and to each other.
Bach, Clavichord Comp., Peters ed. 211, No. 2; 3-voice.

Bach, " Chromatic" fugue for Clavichord (with Prelude) ;
3-voice; sectional.
Rubinstein, Pfte. Fugues and Preludes, op. 53, Fugue 3 ; 4-voice ; definite 3-
Part Song-form.
Brahms, op. 24 (" Handel "- Variations for Pfte.), Finale.
Raff, Pfte. Suite, op. 71, Finale ; 3-voice.
Other miscellaneous examples of the Fugue of more or less free structure, or in

(and influenced by) homophonic surroundings, may be found as follows
Beethoven, Pfte. Sonata, op. no, Finale. Pfte. Variation, op. 35, Finale.
Saint-Saens, Pfte. Etudes, op. 52, No. 5 ; 4-voice.
Paderewski, op. 11, Variations and Fugue (Finale") ; 3-voice.
Nicod£, op. 18, Variations and Fugue (Finale) ; 4-voice.
MacDowell, op. 10, No. 5, 4-voice Fugue; independent Coda.

MacDowell, op. 13, Prelude and Fugue; 4-voice.
Guilmant, Organ Comp., op. 25, No. 3 (4- to 5-voice). Op. 40, No. 1 (4-voice). —
— Op. 49, No. 6 (4-voice). —
Op. 44, No. 2 (4-voice). Op. 69, No. 4. Op. .72. — —
Organ Sonata, Op. 50, Finale. —
Op. 86, Movement III (quasi Double; counter-
point retained).
Par. 148. THE CONCERT-FUGUE. 25 I
Arthur Foote, op. 15, N0..1, Prelude and Fugue; 3-voice.
J. K. Paine, op. 41, No. 3, Fuga giocosa ; 3-voice.
Aless. Longo, op. 9, Fantasia e Fuga {stile libero).
Clementi, Gradus ad Parnasmm, Part III of the revised edition by Max

Vogrich (Schirmer) No. 89 (orig. ed. No. 13); 4-voice.
; No. 90 (orig. ed. 18) 3- — j
voice; brief Introduction. — No. 91 25); 4-voice;

(orig. ed. brief Introduction.
No. 92 (orig. ed. 45), 4-voice; with Prelude. — No. 93 (orig. ed. 43). — No. 94 (orig.
ed. 40). — No. 95 (orig. — Nos. 99 and 100
ed. 69). (orig. ed. 56, 57), Prelude and
Fugue.
Rheinberger, op. 78, No. 2; 3-voice; 3-Part Song-form; in Part II a brief

J.
auxiliary chromatic Motive is thematically treated (alone, per moto contrario, par.
158), and reappears in Part III, at times in conjunction with the Theme. Many
more fine examples of the Fugue may be found in the Organ Sonatas of Rhein-
berger (and of other writers also).
Raff, Suite, op. 72, Finale; 3-voice; 3-Part Song-form; contrary motion freely
used also stretti and Augmentation in Part Ilia new Counterpoint appears, which
; ;
assumes considerable importance in subsequent episodes, and in the Coda.

Jadassohn, Preludes and Fugues for pianoforte, op. 56, Fugue 1 4-voice 2- ; ;
Part form stretto in 2nd Part.

; —
Fugue 2 3-voice sectional stretti and contrary ;
; ;
motion. —
Fugue 3 3-voice ditto. Fugue 4 4-voice
;
; — ; ; sectional ; various effective
Counterpoints, in successively accelerated rhythms. — Fugue 5 ;
4-voice ; 2-Part
form ; much parallel movement in thirds and sixths. Some of these Fugues, and
particularly those which follow, are quite strict in design and treatment : Fugue 6
3-voice ; sectional. — Fugue 7 ;
4-voice ; sectional ; stretti. — Fugue 8 ;
4-voice ; sec-
tional ; animated Counterpoint in last Section. — Fugue 9 ;
5-voice ; sectional.
Reinecke, op. 157, No. 4 ; Fugue ;

4-voice; sectional form Augm. ; in last Section.
An exceedingly interesting work, well worthy of most thorough scrutiny and

analysis, is: and Fugue for Pianoforte, in b minor, by Cesar
Prelude, Chorale,
Franck (ed. Litolff, 1578). The
three numbers are coherent, and to some extent
thematically inter-related the chorale is original, and bears no relation to the tradi-
;
tional German church-melody it occurs, rather episodically, during the Fugue, and
;
even in brief (fragmentary) connection with the Theme (not as shown in par. 154)
the Fugue is ostensibly 4-voice, but very free ; an animated thematic Counterpoint
appears in a later Section.
Emile Bernard, Prelude and Fugue in g minor, op. 14 ;

3-voice ;
3-Part form.
149. The Concert-fugue seldom, if ever, appears as an isolated com-

position, but either as a movement of a larger work, or at least in
company with an Introduction or Prelude.
The latter, as stated in par. 83a, may be connected thematically
with the Fugue, or may be a totally separate piece, independent of the
Fugue in every respect, excepting in key, which should be the same.
Review par. %->a, thoroughly; and examine, again, the Preludes of
Bach, Mendelssohn (op. 35, 37), and Rubinstein (op. 53).
EXERCISE 43.
Several examples of the Concert-fugue of various types, major and minor alter-
nately. They may be written for Pianoforte (for two, or for four hands), or Organ.
N. B. Each Fugue must be preceded by an effective Prelude, polyphonic, semi-
polyphonic, or homophonic, at option.
The Fugue for Other Instruments.

150. For String-quartet. The four instruments used are first and
second Violin, Viola, and Violoncello. Their notation and average
compass are as follows :
Violin I & II. Viola. 'Cello.
Ex.
160 XL^l P==EE^fl»=^= B
The Viola is written in a C-clef (the so-called Alto C-clef), and the student,
if not yet familiar with it, should embrace this opportunity of learning it thoroughly.
In performing this task, the student should adopt the following system : The C-clef
should be learned by itself, and not by comparison with, or reference to, the G- or F-
clefs. That is, the name of each line or space must be independently mastered. The
clef-sign indicates the letter c1 (the " middle " c of the pianoforte). Thus
( |3)
Par. i5i. THE VOCAL FUGUE. 253
Mozart, String-quartets (Peters ed. 10370), No. 1, G major, Finale ; Exposition

of one Theme at beginning, and of another 30 or 40 measures later.
Beethoven, String-quartets, op. 18, No. 4, Andante ; a partial Exposition in
first 19 measures. —
Op. 59, No. 3, Finale ; Exposition (irreg.) in first 40 measures
or so. —Op. 131, whole of first movement. —
Op. 95, second movement, meas. 34-
64, and again later Counterpoint retained.
; —
Brahms, String-quintet, op. 88, portions
of Finale.
151. The Fugue more Solo instruments

for Pianoforte and one or
and treatment from the
(Violin, 'Cello, etc.) will derive its character
technical nature of the instruments employed but will be, in any case,
;
more free and more effective than the pianoforte Fugue.

For examples, see Brahms, Sonata for pianoforte and 'cello, op. 38, Finale,
first 53 measures, — and again further on.
Tschaikowsky, Trio op. 50 (a minor), 2nd movement, Var. VIII.
Bach, Sonatas for Clavichord and Violin, No. 1, 2nd movement. No. 3, 2nd —
movement. —
No. 4, 2nd movement. —
No. 5, 2nd movement. —
No. 6, 4th move-
ment (Adagio). All very free; more like elaborate Inventions than Fugues.
The Vocal Fugue.
152. The constraint of technical treatment is most imperative in

the Fugue for vocal parts. The compass of each voice must be re-
spected, constantly and rigorously awkward intervals, rhythms, or any
;
other circumstances which impair the melodiousness and " singable-

ness " of the several parts, must be scrupulously avoided ; and good
balance of effect (excluding wide spaces, though not an occasional
crossing of the parts) must be preserved.
The form should be fairly definite (strict) and intelligible. Episodes
are necessary, but they must be of a more sober character than in the
instrumental Fugue, and must be held well within the general thematic
atmosphere of the Subject. Particular attention should be directed *~
the uppermost voice, which is mainly responsible for the clear d/id
effective melodic form of the whole.

The Theme should always be a striking setting of some brief, preg-
nant text-sentence, — melodious, but rhythmically characteristic, — and
it accompanies the same words throughout. The voices not occupied
with the Theme, however, are generally written without regard to the
text, — the latter being subsequently adjusted to the finished tones, with
strict regard to grammatical sense and order, and to the correct
prosodic disposition of accented and unaccented syllables and words.
Rests are indispensable ; short ones for breathing, and occasional

protracted silence (especially before an announcement of the Theme)
for variety and contrast.
153. If, as is almost invariably the case, the Vocal fugue is to be

accompanied, the instrument chosen (pianoforte or organ) may either be
limited (1) to an exact duplication of the parts, unisotw ; or (2) may
double either outer part, especially the Bass, in octaves, perhaps adding
an occasional full chord to support the vocal parts where their effect is
somewhat meagre or (3) the accompaniment may add materially to the

;
bulk, or to the rhythmic movement (or both), of the vocal parts, even —
to the extent of introducing independent imitations and announcements
of the Theme. Further, the accompaniment may provide a brief instru-
mental Introduction, occasional Interludes, and a Postlude, if necessary
or desirable.
See Bach, " B-minor Mass," No. 6 Gratias agimus, 4-voice Accompaniment; ;
simple. Compare No. 34. —

No. 3, Kyrie, 4-voice. No. 1, Kyrie, 5-voice thematic — :
instrumental Prelude and Interlude; large 2-Part Form. No. 13, Patrem omnipo- —
tentem, 4-voice; partly harmonic Accompaniment, otherwise elaborate. — No. 12,
Credo in unum Deum ; 5-voice ; Running Bass in Accompaniment.
Mendelssohn, "St. Paul," No. 29, Is this He? — simple Fugue, with homo-
phonic Interlude, derived from the Counterpoint to Theme. — No. 43, See what love;
irregular Exposition. — No. 15, Behold now total darkness; Running Accompaniment,
chiefly Soprano.
Haydn, "The Creation," No. 11, For He both heav'n and earth; Accompani-
ment elaborated. —
No. 29, We praise Thee now , Running Accompaniment (figural).
Handel, " Messiah," No. 26, He — No. And He shall purify
trusteth in God. 6, ;
free, somewhat irregular; homophonic — No. 37, And their words Expo-
episodes. ;
sition irreg. (Response, Response, Subject, Subject). — No. Amen; an Exposi- 52,
tion, Interlude, and long episodic passages, with fragments of Theme.
Handel, "Judas Maccabaeus," No. 26, 2nd Part, W'here warlike Judas ; Expo-
sition irreg. (4 " Subject "-announcements).
Mozart, " Requiem," No. 8, Quam olim ; independent Accompaniment, quasi

harmonic.
Cherubini, " Missa solemnis " (in D), Kyrie eleison (Allegro moderato) ; Accom-
paniment partly harmonic, partly running rhythm, and partly single duplication. —
Dona nobis pacem ; observe different forms of accompaniment.
Mendelssohn, "Elijah," No. The harvest now is over; effective Imitation
1,
(echo) of last member of Themeharmonic episode.

; briefNo. 22, Though thou- —
sands languish ; Accompaniment partly harmonic. No. 29, Shouldst thou, walking —
in grief. — Final chorus, Lord, our Creator.
Handel, " Israel in Egypt," No. 4, They loathed to drink. — No. 10, He brought
(hem out with silver and gold. — No. 16, And believed the Lord; homophonic epi-
Par. 153. THE VOCAL FUGUE. 255
sodes. — No. 1 8, T will sing, and For He hath triumphed ; two Themes in fairly
regular alternation, — not together (camp. par. 52). —
No. 26, Thou sentest forth Thy
wrath. — No. 13, He led them through the deep ( Double-chorus, 4- to 8-voice texture)
characteristic Counterpoint, thematic (quasi " Double "). — Etc.
Brahms, "German Requiem," No. Ill, final tempo (Der Gerechten Seelen The —
soulsof the righteous) the entire Fugue rests upon a persistent Tonic organ-point.
;
No. VI, final tempo {Herr, Du bist wiirdig —

Thou art worthy) powerful thematic ;
episodes variety of Counterpoints. Brahms, Motet, op. 29, No. II 2nd movement
; ;
and Finale.
Horatio W. Parker, " Hora Novissima," No. 4, Pars mea, Hex meus. No. 10, —
Urbs Syon unica (unaccompanied). —
No. n, quartet, Urbs Syon inclyta ; Subject of
unusual length, n
measures (cited again in par. 189). H. W. Parker, " St. Chris- —
topher,'' Act III, Scene 2, Quoniam Tu solus sanctus (Contrary motion; Augmen-
tation).
Beethoven, "Mass in C," op. 85, Cum sancto spiritu ; simple Exposition; Inter-
lude, chiefly harmonic; new Exposition with chromatic Counterpoint. Et vitam
venturi ; instrumental Interludes, and vocal Soli. Osanna in excelsis. —
Beethoven, "Mass in D," op. 123, In gloria Dei patris, Amen; elaborate;
Counterpoint retained through the Exposition partly double-quartet. Osanna in ;
—
excelsis (both versions).
Verdi, " Falstaff," Finale, Tulto nel mondo e burla ; large chorus, but practically
4-voice ; Counterpoint retained during first section, and used later episodically ; fre-
quent contrary motion.
EXERCISE 44.
A. Two Fugues (each with brief Introduction, or Prelude) for String-quartet,

— major and minor ; different measure and tempo for each.
B. A Fugue, with Prelude, for Pianoforte and Violin.
C. Two or more Fugues for mixed quartet (or chorus), with organ or pianoforte
accompaniment. The text may be taken from any of the above examples, or from
any part of the Bible.
Fugue in Connection with Chorale.
154. Fugue with Chorale. This form corresponds in design exactly
to the Invention with Chorale, but differs from the latter in that greater
degree of seriousness and strictness which distinguishes the Fugue in
general from the Invention. All the specific directions are given in
paragraphs 99 to 105, which must be thoroughly reviewed.
The introductory measures (par. lood) are usually a regular Expo-
sition (par. 121, etc.), during the later course of which the chorale
melody appears, in the part left vacant for the purpose. Thereafter the
form is that of the ordinary sectional Fugue, into the texture of which
the chorale Lines are successively interwoven, apparently as incidental
addition, — though naturally they influence (or even dictate) the pro-
gressive development.
The Subject is almost invariably evolved out of the first Line of the
chorale, with more or less freedom.
Analyze minutely: Bach, Organ Comp. (Peters compl. ed.), Vol. VI, No. 30;
3-voice Cantus firmus in Bass long Theme, independent of the chorale, with two
; ;
very quaint modifications. —

Vol. VII, No. 39a; 4 -voice c. f. in Soprano; Theme ;
derived from first two Lines of chorale ; a. stretto-Imitation, with which the Fugue
begins (after two beats, in the 5th), recurs frequently; other stretti, and contrary
motion, also appear. This is an extremely interesting and instructive example.
Compare it carefully with the next, Vol. VII, No. 39*, which it closely resembles in
all essential respects 4- voice c. in Tenor.
; ;
f
Guilmant, Organ Sonata, Op. 80, Finale.
Mendelssohn, " St. Paul," No. 36, But our God ; 5-voice chorale in 2nd ;
Soprano two Themes, in fairly regular alternate Sections, both independent of the
;
chorale.
155. Chorale as Fugue-group. This is the parallel form of the cho-

rale as Invention-group, explained in par. 106, which review thoroughly.
Out of each successive Line of the chorale a Subject is evolved
each Subject in turn is carried strictly through the parts, as Exposition,
in which the chorale finally participates, as usual. Thus the whole
constitutes a group or chain of Fugues (or Fugue-Expositions, —
Fughettas) , corresponding to the number of Lines in the chorale.
See Bach, Organ Comp., Vol. VI, No. 21 4-voice i.f. in Soprano, each time ; ;
as last announcement of the Theme. —

Vol. VI, No. 28; 4-voice; c.f. in Soprano,
as Augmentation of Theme. Vol. VII, No. 37 —
4-voice; c.f. in Soprano, some- ;
what embellished, and each time as last announcement of the Theme a new (10th) ;
Motive for the Coda, in animated rhythm. Vol. VII, No. 50; 4-voice; the last —
announcement of Theme each time in Bass, as Cantus firmus. Vol. VII, No. 55 — ;
4-voice; the Pedal is added as duplication of the Bass at end of each Exposition, to
emphasize the c.f. Vol. VI, No. 13 —
6-voice; c.f in 1st Bass, as Augmentation
;
of the Theme; several thematic Counterpoints. — Brahms, Chorale- Vorspiele, op.

122, No. 1. Brahms, Motet, op. 29, No. 1 ;
5-voice; c.
f in 1st Bass.
The Chorale-Fugue. Somewhat allied to the Chorale-Invention,

156.
par. no, which review. The Subject, or Subjects, are derived from
the first, or later, Lines of the chorale, and manipulated in the usual
manner. But the chorale-melody, as such, is absent.
See Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. VI, No. 33 4-voice many stretti two auxiliary, ; ; ;
or episodic, Motives. Vol. VI, No. 1 1 —

3-voice thematic Counterpoint in later; ;
Sections. —
Vol. VI, No. 20 4-voice special design. Vol. VII, No. 41
; ; 4- to 5- — ;
voice secondary Motive, derived from Counterpoint.

; Vol. VII, No. 60; 4-voice- —
basse ostinato in Pedal (transposed recurrences) ; thematic Counterpoints.
Par. 157. THE FUGUE-GROUP. 2$?
A smaller variety, the Chorale-Fughetta, is illustrated in the follow-

ing:
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. V, No. 20; 3-voice. Vol. V, No. 43, 3-voice. VoL — —
VII, No. 61 3-voice.
;
—
Vol. VII, No. 40c; 4-voice Exposition in stretto. Vol. ;
—
VII, No. 54 3-voice the Subj ect, and two secondary Motives, are derived from
;
;
three Lines of the chorale Line 4 is intimated by the descending scale, constantly
;
present in the Counterpoints.
The Group- (or Motet-) Fugue.
157. The Fugue-group is similar to the form described in par. i55 )
but is usually broader in design, and by no means necessarily identified

with the chorale. Different Subjects — usually, though not neces-
sarily, of similar character (and perhaps related in contents) — are
successively, sometimes alternately, manipulated as separate complete
Fugues (or Fughettas), more or less extensively and independently.
See Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. Ill, Fugue 6 ;

4-voice ; large 3-Part form ; the first
Subject is the basis of Part I ; a totally different Subject (chromatic) is manipulated

in Part II, as separate Fugue, so to speak ; in Part III the first Subject is resumed
this Part isa nearly exact recurrence of the first Section of Part I, abbreviated at the
beginning, and extended at the end. —
Vol. Ill, Fugue 7 4-voice the first Division ; ;
is a Double-fugue (to be analyzed later) the second Division is a brief Interlude

;
(free, similar to the Prelude to the whole number) the third Division is based upon;
a rhythmically modified Augmentation of the first measure of the preceding Fugue-

subject; animated rhythmic Counterpoints in later course. Vol. Ill, Fugue 9; 4- —
voice interjoined with the Praeludium (meas. 1-39)
; Division I is a Double-fugue ;
(see later), to meas. 62 Division II has a different Theme, though somewhat related
;
to the preceding; an independent Coda, similar to the Introduction, is added.

Vol. VI, No. 10 ; Chorale-fugue (chorale itself absent), in group-form 3-voice three ; ;
sections; two different Subjects alternating (returning to first). — Vol. VI, No. 34;
ditto; 4-voice; 5 Themes (or Motives, — quasi Invention-group).
Bach, "B-minor Mass," No. 19, last Division (Vivace e allegro'), El exfecto and
Amen ; 4 Themes.
Mendelssohn, " St Paul," No. For all the Gentiles, and Now are made mani-
23,
fest ; 5-voice; large 3-Part form, quasi Song with Trio. —

No. 20, The Lord He is
good, and For His word ; successive Expositions, and then close alternate treatment
(not " Double-fugue "). — Final chorus, Bless thou the Lord, and All ye His angels
4-voice ; two Subjects.
EXERCISE 45.
A. One or two examples of the Fugue with Chorale (par. 154).
B. One or two examples of the Chorale as Fugue-group (par. 155).
C. An example of the Chorale-Fugue (par. 156).

D. One or two examples of the Fugue-group (par. 157). To each of the latter
a Prelude, or free Introduction, is to be prefixed.
Irregular Fugue-Species
158. The Fugue in Contrary motion (per moto contrario). In this
species the first and third Imitations of the Theme are made in Con-
trary motion, so that the 4-voice Exposition consists of the alternate

" regular " and " contrary " motion (the latter standing each time for
the usual " Response "). This arrangement may extend through the
entire Fugue ; or it may be confined wholly (or nearly) to the Exposi-
tion ; and, further, the alternation may be more or less irregular (for
instance, in the Exposition, or later, the regular motion twice, followed
by the contrary motion twice ; etc.).
The relation of the contrary motion to the original form of the

Theme is generally that defined in par. 29a, particularly Ex. 72, which
review. See also Exs. 73 and 74. The Theme in contrary motion may
be announced in the original key, or, as usual, in the Dominant key (by
simple transposition to the upper 5th or lower 4th).
Analyze, thoroughly, Bach, " The Art of Fugue," Fugue No. 5. The Exposi-
tion runs as follows
Andante con moto.
tfkr
Ex.
162.
Par. 158. IRREGULAR FUGUE-SPECIES. 259
r '
etic.
Theme. _
Six measures later (in meas.

TT
--¥
^^Ê^
J
1 7)
=t=4
1.
the Exposition closes, with a vague cadence.

JL lu-
The Fugue has a Special Design, extending through 5 Sections; Sec. II (meas. 17-
33) is very similar to the preceding one; Sec. Ill (meas. 33-46) is based upon a
motion Sec. IV (meas. 47-65) upon a stretto in parallel motion,
stretto in contrary ;
afterone and one-half measures Sec. V (to meas. 86) upon a parallel stretto, after
;
one measure. The Coda (last 5 measures) is based upon a simultaneous (or double)
announcement, in regular and contrary motion. "Art of Fugue," Fugue No. 13; — -
3-voice per moto contrario, absolutely regular alternation

;
frequent episodes, all ;
similar; cadences vague. The following number (13^) is the exact contrary motion,
and partial Inversion, of the preceding. — " Art of Fugue," two Fugues for 2 piano-
fortes ; both 4-voice, xndper moto contrario ; the Fugues are different manipulations
of the same Subject. Compare them minutely.
Brahms, Fugue minor for Organ, first 27 measures 4-voice Counter-

in cfo ;
;
and contrary motion.

point retained, in regular
Handel, "Israel in Egypt," No. n, Egypt was glad, first 30 measures; 4-voice;
the Dominant (b in e minor) is answered by the Tonic (e), in the first " Response "
the two following announcements are both in the original motion later the alterna- ;
tion is more regular.
Mendelssohn, 'Elijah,'' No. 16, The flames consume; Exposition in contrary
motion.
Beethoven, String-quartet, op. 127, Scherzando vivace ; Exposition in contrary
motion ("fugato," —
i.e, in fugal style, imitatory, but not exactly a Fugue).
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. VII, No. 39^ ; Fugue per moto contrario, with Chorale
5-voice Cantus firmus in Bass stretto-imitations throughout.
; ;
159. The Fugue in Augmentation, or in Diminution. In this species,
which very similar to the above, the Augmentation, or Diminution,

is
of the Subject is substituted for the contrary motion or, in rare in- ;
stances, is combined with the latter.
See Bach, " Art of Fugue," Fugue No. 6 this is a 4-voice Fugue in " Diminu- ;
tion and Contrary motion"; probably 3 Sections and Coda; the Exposition begins
thus:
260 APPLIED COUXTERPOINT. Par. 160.
Th. Dim. and Cont. Motion ,
I ^= Sostenuto. J.
ziz^t
f-5 ^g-i-
l
-i-£ j ufl^ JTs
i+-W m f=*H
Ex.
w -¥^=i
r«rtr~iror
163. Th. Diminution.. _etc.
?V=P¥
§ffi
Theme._
gE%=f
"Art of Fugue," Fugue No. 7; 4-voice Fugue in "Augmentation and Contrary
motion " ; contains also a series of Double-augmentations, and fragments of the
Diminution (end of 7th measure, in Soprano) cadences very vague the form is either
; ;
simply one broad section, constituting the Exposition of the Double-augmentation,

through the four parts (Bass, Tenor, Alto, Soprano, alternately in contrary and regu-
lar motion) ; or it contains four Sections, with one announcement of the Double-
augmentation in each.
Handel, "Messiah," No. 33, Let all the angels ; Fugue in Augmentation.
160. The Fantasia-fugue. This somewhat contradictory term may-

be justified in the case of those Fugues which begin seriously, and con-
tain a more or less legitimate Exposition, but thereafter degenerate into
a free, fantastic series of sections or sentences (passages), based upon
fragments only of the Theme, possibly in distorted forms.
A beautiful and entirely defensible illustration occurs in Bach, Well-temp. CI,

Vol. II, Fugue 3 ; it is 3-voice, sectional form ; the Exposition is in stretto, and
Contrary motion (Subject in Bass, i\ measure), ending in meas. 7; in Sec II
(meas. 7-11) the 2nd half of the Theme is reconstructed; Sec. Ill (meas. 11-14) is
episodic; Sec. IV (meas. 14-17) reverts to the original form of the

Theme; the last
Section (meas. the end) does not contain the original Theme entire, but is one
1 7 to
long episode, or Fantasia (18 measures), in which intimations of the Diminution,
Augmentation, and a unique mixture of other thematic fragments occur. See also —
Bach, Clav. Comp., Peters ed. 216, No. 6, "Capriccio"; the purpose is evidently
that of a Fugue, but the extensive episodic passages (quasi homophonic figuration),
and the general treatment, make the title " capriccio " more appropriate.
Kindred forms are (1) the Recitative-fugue
See Mendelssohn, Pfte. Sonata, op. 6, Adagio movement no definite measure

;
;
4- to 5-voice ; large 2-Part form, with a homophonic (lyric) section as Interlude, and
Postlude, in J time.
and (2) the Harmonic fugue, i.e., a fugal thematic design, but of
marked harmonic character, or with distinctly harmonic auxiliary parts.
See Schumann, op. 32, No. 4, " Fughetta." — Bach, Clav. Comp., Peters ed.
211, No. 3.
Par. 161. THE DOUBLE-FUGUE. 26
EXERCISE 46.
One example each of the Fugue in Contrary motion (par. 158), and the Fugue
in Augmentation, — or in Diminution, at option, — (par. 159).
CHAPTER XV.
The Double-Fugue.
161. The Double-fugue is one in which two Subjects appear, and

are manipulated, simultaneously.
It is not to be confounded with the forms cited in par. 52, par. 106, par. 155,
and par. 157, in which two (or more) Themes are treated successively, each by itself
for the time being; but takes its name from the fact that its thematic basis is a
Double-theme —thematic duet.
It is not necessary that the two Subjects should always be together,

for, as will be seen, either (or each) may be announced alone, or even
have a separate Exposition ; but, in order to achieve the idea and
purpose of the Double-fugue, the Themes must appear in conjunction,
distinctly, and during a reasonably extended section of the whole.
162. The Double-fugue has its inception in that variety of the single
Fugue in which, as shown in par. 132, the first Counterpoint is retained,
more or less persistently, throughout a part, or the whole, of the Fugue
for such companionship between the Subject and its Counterpoint ap-
proaches the effect of an intentional double thematic basis. Review
par. 132, and context, thoroughly. But there still remains a character-
istic difference between such examples of retained Counterpoints and
the genuine Double-fugue.
163. An important intermediate grade, sufficiently independent to

merit separate treatment, is
The Fugue with Thematic Counterpoint.
Anordinary contrapuntal associate of the Theme, such as is found

in the majority of simple Fugues, could not be called " thematic," even
if " retained " and introduced occasionally in subsequent announce-
ments, for the reason that it provides no especial thematic feature, does
not enrich the thematic resources, and takes no active part in the devel-
opment of the design.
In order to be thematic, the Counterpoint must be to a certain
extent characteristic, must contain rhythmic and melodic features which
distinguish somewhat from the Theme must recur often enough and
it ;
emphatically enough to become a recognizable (though not obtrusive)

line in the physiognomy of the Fugue must influence the development,
;
and enter actively (though not vitally, or perhaps even essentially) into
the thematic texture as a whole. All this the " Counterpoint " may be,
without becoming a genuine Secondary Theme, or subject to any special
conditions with regard to time, place, frequency, or accuracy of recur-
rence.
To this class belongs, properly speaking, the example already cited in par. 132 :
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 9; see Ex. 153. Also Vol. I, Fugue 14;
Fugue 22.
possibly also Vol. II,
More genuine examples of the Fugue with Thematic Counterpoint are the
following, — to be carefully analyzed
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 17 j
4-voice; sectional form ; Subject and
Counterpoint as follows
j^Êgî^Sjg
Lento.
Ex.
164.
Subject..
Response..
Thematic Counterpoint..
The Thematic Counterpoint is absent during 3 or 4 announcements of the Theme,

and is often freely modified.
Further, Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. IV, Fugue 7 ; 4-voice ; 4 sections ; Counterpoint
retained throughout, but modified freely. — Vol. IV, No. 10, " Canzona" (equivalent
to Fugue), Division I; 4-voice; 2 sections; few episodes; Thematic Counterpoint
retained, but modified.
Bach, Clavichord Comp., Peters ed. 212, No. 3; 3- to 4-voice. In the same —
volume (212), No. 5, the same principle is somewhat extended, inasmuch as two
different Thematic Counterpoints appear, in different rhythms; this approaches the
idea of par. 179.
Further, Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 2 ; 3 voice ; sectional form
Subject and Counterpoint as follows :
Moderate
165.
Subject..
Response.
'M J_ ai & -B-
wi^"i *•
=#r=
it*
1
Thematic Counterpoint..
In order to perceive the melodic beauty and thematic validity of this Thematic
Counterpoint, it should be played or sung alone. It accompanies the Theme every-
where, with but one exception (in the Codetta, last 2\ measures), and participates in
allthe episodes. For these reasons the Fugue barely escapes being " Double " it ;
would be unquestionably so were the Counterpoint more nearly coordinate, in char-

and importance, with the Theme proper.
acter
the same class, closely approximating the Double-fugue, belong Fugue 3 and
To
Fugue 7 of Vol. I (Well-temp. Clav.) and Fugue 13 of Vol. II.
; Also Partita No. —
6 (Clav.), " Gigue "; large 2-Part form; Contrary motion in Part II ; Thematic Coun-
terpoint retained, but considerably changed in Second Part.
164. During the Exposition the Thematic Counterpoint appears, at
each succeeding announcement of the Theme, in the part which last

contained the latter; i.e., the Counterpoint follows the Theme, each
time, in the same part (whether interrupted by episodes or not). After
the Exposition, however, the location of the Counterpoint, like that of
the Theme, is optional ; and it may be occasionally omitted, or more or
less modified.
EXERCISE 47.
One or two examples of the Fugue (3- or 4-voice) with Thematic Counterpoint.
The Genuine Double-Fugue.
165. In the authentic Double-fugue, the two Subjects are strictly

coordinate. The secondary Theme (sometimes so called merely by
" thematic counterpoint,"
way of distinction), or Counter-theme, is not a
but an essential part of the thematic material, subject to precisely the
same specific limitations as the principal Theme.
Rule 1. Each Subject must be a perfectly good melody, in and by
itself. Hence, each must be tested alone, in order to verify its indi-
vidual validity as thematic sentence.
Rule 2. Each Subject must be well individualized ; must differ from

its fellow (chiefly as regards its rhythmic formation) sufficiently to con-
trast perceptibly in character, though not obtrusively. They should
not begin exactly together, nor need they end upon the same beat.
Rule 3. The two Subjects must constitute peculiarly faultless coun-
terpoint, — not by any
means to the exclusion of characteristic disso-
nances, but without any awkward irregularities. They should not cross
each other; and, as a rule, should not run much beyond an octave
or tenth apart, in their original associated form, when designed for a
Fugue with 4 or more parts.
Compare these rules with the primary definition of polyphony on page 1, of
which they are simply a singularly severe and just exposition.
Rule 4. After the Double-subject has been completed, it must be

tested in inverted form, i.e., the parts so exchanged that the upper
becomes the lower. Also, though less urgently, in their joint Contrary
motion.
This is necessary, not only because it is impossible to avoid Inversion, in the

development of the Double-subject, but because the art of the Double-fugue consists
in a great measure in these, and many similar, changes in the relations of the two
Themes to each other. Review pars. 55 to 58, especially par. 57 ; and refer, briefly,
to Artificial Double-counterpoint, par. 169, etc.
Examples of Double-subjects
1. Moderato.
Theme A. *i) ^ ^
GOETSCHIUS.
Ex. fc^
166. 33 1
i Ssrfêf^=fftgf
Theme B
2. Allegro.
Theme B GOETSCHIUS.
r trr
3. Allegro.
rrr-r
% ~M 4U St
iI Th. B *^f
Bach.
j-^rn
g Qf^j
IE
IrT
W
4. Vivace. Bach.
Th. |A.
Th. B.i i i I
I
" ! ! ! "M-H ^^
5. Allegro moderate).
iHC
1 *z
P^ Theme B.
1
1 I _
I
-p-f"
I I
i^fee^^ -* ——* *- *-
Theme A.
Bach.
I SE — ^^—EH
p=t=pzg, —#__7&—=— ^_,—=j=B i
E
1
I
F-i-Pf-MH^FP-FF-*-!!
_ 1 1 -
2&
Efe
—
ttt
«-j-« -
^teÊEg
6. Molto allegro, Mozart.
Th. B.
^.
I
^- j-^ Jî
fc
l¥.
Th. A.
I
7. Andante con moto. Rubinstein,
Th. A.
^fe^£B*JffiK&J rfTT-sN
Th. B.
8. Animato. Saint-Saens.
Th. B.
^3
i Ett H=SEELi I
Tfrf ft ajETPfil r
Th. A.
*i) The Themes are marked thus, A and B ; generally in the order in which
they appear, — A being the first. — *2) A fine example. Play each Th. alone.
See further, Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 12, meas. 4-6; Theme B
begins with iU in the 3rd beat of the 4th measure. — Vol. II, Fugue meas. 5-9;
16,
Theme Z? begins one i6th-note after A. Fugue 18, meas. 97-101 — B ; Theme begins
on the 3rd 8th-note. —
Fugue 20, meas. 3-5 Theme B commences with the 32nd-
;
notes. —
Fugue 23, meas. 27-30.
166. Double-fugues are divided into three classes or Species, ac-

cording to the degree of importance assumed by Theme B.
The First Species of Double-Fugue.
167. In this Species, the two Subjects are announced together at the
beginning of the Fugue.
a. They may appear in any two of the parts to be employed, but

are almost certain to be in neighboring parts (either the upper, inner,
or lower pair). During the Exposition, for instance in 4 parts, the
rules of par. 123 (which review) apply to each Theme independently
of the other ; i.e., each one takes its way through the four voices in the
usual order. For instance (assuming them to start in the inner pair of
voices)
Soprano, A..B.. B..A.. B..A..

Alto, A..B A B.. A..B
°r : ° r:
Tenor, B A . . B . . A B..A
Bass, A..B.. B..A.. A..B..
If announced in parallel parts, a collision is possible, but always easily to be

avoided. Thus
Soprano,
Par. 167b. THE DOUBLE-FUGUE. 267
The formal designs, and all other structural details, correspond

exactly to those given in Chapters XII, XIII, and XIV.
Analyze, very minutely, the following examples of the First Species :
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. II, No. 6, Praeludium ; the whole is a brilliant example
of the Concert-species (par. 148), in 3-Part Song-form; Section I
is a largely homo-
phonic introduction, exactly reproduced at the end as Sec. V, or Third Part the ;
Double-fugue begins with Sec. II (meas. 25) and extends through Sees. II, III (Part
II) and IV ; it is 4-voice, and slightly irregular, as regards the order of voices, in
the Exposition.
Vol. Ill, No. 9, Fuga, first Division; 4-voice; 2 Sections (meas. 39-63 of whole
piece).
Vol. IV, No. 8, Fuga ; 4-voice ; 4 Sections and Coda lengthy episodes Theme
; ;
B enters two measures later than Theme A ; Exposition somewhat imperfect.

Vol. IV, No. 10, "Canzona," Division II (§ time); the First Division has al-
ready been cited as Fugue with Thematic Counterpoint; this Second Division is a
Double-fugue, based upon the same Themes, rhythmically and melodically modified
form sectional, cadences vague ;
4-voice.
Bach, Clav. Duetto, No. I (Peters ed. 208, No. 4).
Bach, Clav. Toccata in d minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 4); Third Division,
Presto ; 3-voice, sectional, very free ; the first 2 measures in lower part are introduc-
tory auxiliary tones, derived from Theme A, and frequently recurring; Theme B
begins in meas. 3 another auxiliary Motive appears later.
; Same Toccata, Finale; —
3-voice also very free the first 1 1 measures are introductory.
; ;
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. VI, No. 18; 3-voice per moto contrario ; Chorale- \
fugue. —
Vol. V, No. 23 3-voice Double-fughetta.;
;
Handel, Clav. Suite No. 6, 3rd movement.
Beethoven, op. 120, Var. 32 4-voice ; ; in final sections a new thematic Counter-
point, in animated rhythm, is introduced.
Rubinstein, op. 53, No. 6 ;

4-voice ;
3-Part form ; Concert-species.
Clementi, Gradus ad Parnassum, Schirmer ed., No. 97 (orig. ed. No. 54), Fugue,
with Prelude; 4-voice; contains Retrograde Imitations (par. 29^). Also No. 98 (orig.
ed. No. 74) ;
4-voice.
Haydn, to His name, and He sole on high exalted

"Creation,'' No. 27b, Glory
reigns. Also No. 33, Jehovah's praise for ever, and Amen; Theme B fragmentary, and
not constant.
N. B. In some of these examples Theme B might, probably, be more justly
regarded as a Thematic Counterpoint only.
Handel, " Israel in Egypt," No. 9, He smote all the first-born.
Cherubini, " Missa solemnis," Cum sancto spiritu. Also Amen of the Credo.
Mozart, " Requiem," No. 1, Kyrie ; reproduced as Finale, with different text.
EXERCISE 48.
A. Invent a large number of Double-subjects, in various styles, tempi, keys,

and modes.
B. Write two 2-voice Inventions, with Double-subject, ist Species. Models

for this work will be found in Bach, 2-voice Inventions, Nos. 5, 6, 9, 11, 12, and 15 ;
and Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Prelude 3 ; Vol. II, Prelude 20 ; analyze thoroughly.
C. Two Double-fughettas (one or two Sections), major and minor respectively

4-voice and 3-voice.
D. Two complete Double-fugues, ist Species, 3-, 4-, or 5-voice; for Pianoforte,
Organ, String-quartet, or Vocal parts.
The Second Species of Double—Fugue.
168. In the Second Species, Theme B enters as first contrapuntal

associate, in connection with the second announcement of Theme A (i.e., with
the first " Response "). It therefore corresponds, in this respect, to the
Fugue with Thematic Counterpoint ; but all the conditions detailed in

par. 165must be strictly observed.
The order of voices during the Exposition is simpler than in the
First Species, because Theme B naturally (and almost invariably) fol-
lows Theme A in the same voice, — precisely as shown in Exs. 164, 165,
excepting that the contrapuntal associate is a genuine Counter-theme,
and not merely a thematic counterpoint. But, as Theme A thus ap-
pears once alone, the Exposition is generally extended by one extra
announcement, in order that Theme B may appear in every part ; i.e., in
the 4-voice Fugue the Exposition usually embraces five announcements
of Theme A, the 5 th time in the voice which began the Fugue.
See Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 12 ; Theme A is announced in Tenor,
then in Alto (meas. 4), Bass (meas. 7 — this is irregular — par. 124), Soprano (meas.
13), and again in Tenor (meas. 19); Theme B follows, each time, in the same voice;
the Exposition closes in meas. 22. Exactly the same in Vol. II, Fugue 16, in every
particular, excepting that the order of parts is regular ; the Exposition closes in meas.
24. — In Vol. II of the Org. Comp., Fugue 9, the Exposition is not thus extended.
The distinction between the ist and 2nd Species is limited, thus, to
the Exposition alone. The subsequent development is identical. Ana-
lyze, very carefully, the following ; observe, here again, the degree and
quality of freedom of detail exercised, and endeavor to recognize the
factors that must be regarded as vital and inviolable
Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. I, Fugue 12 ;
4-voice, sectional ; the 6 tones imme-
diately following the cadence of Theme A (meas. 4, beats 1 and 2) are intermediate —
see par. 121b ; they constitute the staple of all the episodic passages, which are of
frequent and very regular occurrence throughout this Fugue ; Theme A appears
alone in meas. 40—43. — Vol. II, Fugue 20 ;
3-voice, sectional.
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. II, Fugue 9 ;

4-voice ; definite 3-Part Song-form, Part
III an exact reproduction of Part I, modified only at beginning; Concert-species;
Par. 169. ARTIFICIAL DOUBLE-COUNTERPOINT. 269
many brilliant episodes, in animated rhythm. — Vol. Ill, Fugue 7, first Division ;
4-
voice, sectional.
Bach, Clav. Comp. (Peters ed. 211, No. 1), Fugue, with Toccata; 4-voice, sec-
tional, regularand simple Contrary motion frequent.
;
Duetto No. IV (Peters ed. 208, No. 4) 2-voice, sectional. Toccata in /

; —
minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 2), Division IV, £ time; 4-voice, sectional. Partita No. —
VI, " Toccata " 3 Divisions, embracing the Double-fugue (3-voice, sectional) be-
;
tween a thematically related Prelude and Postlude. (Same Partita, "Gigue"; —

already analyzed, as Fugue with Thematic Counterpoint).
Handel, Clav. Suite No. II, Finale.
Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. VII, No. 47 Fugue with Chorale ; 4-voice ; cantus
—
;
firmus in Bass. Vol. V, No. 39 chorale-fughetta, 3-voice.

;
Handel, " Messiah," No. 23, And with His strifes. — " Samson," No. 9, Part II,
Was ever the most High.
Bach, " B-minor Mass," No. 4, Et in terra pax.
EXERCISE 49.
A number of Double-fugues, 2nd Species ; 3-, 4-, or 5-voice ; different character

and tempo; instrumental or vocal. Some of the Double-subjects of Exercise 48^
may be utilized.
Artificial Double-Counterpoint.
169. The term " artificial " is adopted (in its most serious sense) in
distinction to " natural," with reference to those varieties of Double-
counterpoint in which the harmonious result is not a matter of course,
but must be assured by calculation. Review par. 55.
As stated in pars. 55^ and 56, when the Double-counterpoint is

obtained by inversion in the 8ve, no change of interval-relations takes
place,and an equally harmonious agreement results, naturally. But no
such natural guarantee exists when any other interval of inversion is
used. Therefore, Double-counterpoint in the 8ve, without any other
modification, is the only Natural kind, while Double-counterpoint in any
other interval, or with any other modification of either part, belongs to the
Artificial kind, and is to be determined only by calculation or experi-
ment.
170. Double-counterpoint in the Twelfth. Double-counterpoint is
obtained by transferring one part towards and past the other ;

and the
species is defined by the interval of inversion involved. For example,
ifthe lower part remains, and the upper part is shifted downward a
12th (an 8ve and a 5th, or perhaps two 8ves and a 5th) the result is
Pouble-cQunterpoint in the 12th. For illustration :
2J APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 170.
(a) The Original Counterpoint.

Th. B.
J 67
(b)
Th. A
Inversion
sio
r wmm
in the 12th (affecting Th. A).
Th. A.*i)
A. .
^
LA
Th. B
*i) Theme A is shifted up, past its fellow, a 12th; Theme B remains where
it was.
*z) Such modifications as this (/ changed to ft by the accidental) are often
absolutely necessary, and are to be freely employed, with discretion, in favor of better
modulatory agreement. Their use is entirely legitimate, inasmuch as the two forms
(the Original and the Invention) never appear together. The change, however, may
only affect the accidental, — never the letter.
An apparently new result is obtained by moving the other Theme

down, past its fellow, a 12th. But this, or any other movement of both
parts together, equivalent to the 12th. represents simply a transposition
of the Inverted form. Thus :
(a) Inversion in 12th (affecting Th. B)
Th. A..JJ — JL' -J.

-ni 1 'S, s
Ex. *-!"- AY-
=P=i: (fe)=
168. =r=#-»
Th. pl '
I
*!
(#) <tt)
(6) Inversion in the 12th (affecting both Themes).
4z5
11,1
^nmw — l
1 "
^ 1
171. The invention of a Double-subject (or any two-voice- sentence)

which may thus submit to Inversion in the 12 th — or any other interval
excepting the 8ve —
so largely a matter of incessant experiment, tone
is
for tone, that scarcely any valid rules can be given. At the same time
there is a certain device for each separate species of Double-counter-
point, which systematizes and simplifies the formation to some extent.
The device for Double-counterpoint in the 12 th consists in the fre <
quent use of the interval of a 3rd {or 10th) in the Original form; for this
interval, when inverted in the 12th, results again in a 3rd; for example:
_n »-._+ (#) ^_
Ex. 1 becomes, when ~ " '*
169.
~jf
inverted in
~3 3 3
fl
11
{f*\ _ I j*
U
t^^T
B-S
S
3
a:
»
A? ' the 1 2th: .-*
A. TJfx
(#)
» •
(jp
This point, and others, are illustrated in the following
1. The Orig. Cpt.
%f F==Wg=}=±±h±&
j
Inv. in the 12th. Bach.
m PS Th. A (as before). *i)

-«P
1
wt
3* =t=t #t 1st at=tt
Th. B (12th below).
2. Orig. Cpt.
SBtfc
^3fi 3&Ss3P
Th. B.
Th. A.
§*?f 4*
m Inv, in the 12th.
Th. A. (12th higher).
Th. B. (as before).

:§fc #*
e^3
i==W=i
^ Bach.
^fe^sfeSSiîl m
3. Andante.
Orig. Cpt.
J?a~W .«i>
F^rfTf i, L
,^,-
^£ sill
I k>=
f^^SE fe^^ l
pqf
wo
5 — 1
'
—
p«i i
Inv. in the 12th.
B (5th higher).
A (as before). *i)
<£& :
N- N5^
=3q 1 1 n r j=i
*T-
Brahms. *2)
§ ws ^ •-*-•
333 !-# -*--*- Si
-& —ff
1 §±i*!F*
§" S HE
i=t=^ PB
*i ) That is to say, the same Awz« ( letters ) as before. The change of register
makes no difference, as long as the parts pass each other, in the stipulated interval.
*2) From the orchestral Variations upon a Theme by Haydn, op. 56, Var. IV.
See also the next 20 measures, whick are followed by a similar exact Inversion in tke
lath.
See also Bach, " The Art of Fugue," Fugue 9 Original counterpoint in meas.
35-43 (Sopranp and Tenor) ; Inversion in the, 12th in meas. 45-53 (Tenor and Alto).
Same work, Canon IV j Original counterpoint in meas. 9—35 ; Imitation in 12th in

meas. 42-68 (the upper part is shifted down a 12th, while the lower part retains the
same tones, shifted up two octaves) ; a long and instructive example, to be carefully
analyzed.
172. Double-counterpoint in the nth. Frequent use of the interval

of a 6th will, as a rule, yield a good Inversion in the nth (the 6th
becoming again a 6th). For example :
Orig. Cpt.
B.
-S—*—*=btjz*
$=£ 3fc±a£ *#=* J — — -44-
^ I
Ex. 3 ER4
171.EW I tf-
~6 "' 6 6 6 6 6
Inv. in the nth.

A (as before).
B (nth lower).
* _JL J-
(b)
* r- CErf- -Cf
^^
# #
This species, Double-counterpoint in the nth, is the companion (the counter-
part) of that in the 12th; and, because of the harmonic similarity between the 6th
and the 3rd, is scarcely distinguishable from it. One is, technically speaking, simply
the 8ve-inversion of the other. For illustration : invert the parts in Ex. 1670 (in the
octave), and also invert Ex. 167* in the same manner; upon comparing the two
results with each other they will be found to constitute Double-counterpoint in the
nth.
173. a. Double-counterpoint in the 10th. The best device for Double-

counterpoint in the 10th consists in doubling one of the Themes in the
3rd, and counterpointing the other Theme against this double line. In
order to yield counterpoint in the 10th, the duplication must fall between
the principal lines as a so-called inner 3rd ; i.e., it must be the lower
third of the upper voice, or the upper third of the lower. Thus
Th. A. Bach.
*i ) The large notes constitute the Original counterpoint ; the inner part (small
notes) is a. duplication of the upper Theme in the lower or inner 3rd, in order to
provide for Double-counterpoint in the 10th by inverting the parts, thus
Th. B. (as before).
J J L J. *
Ex. -x- -s-
173.
f=tF lh
1
Th. A. (
V
10th lower)
T
Although Double-counterpoint always implies Inversion of the parts (as stated
b.
in par. 55), it must be understood that the principle is the same whether the Inver-
sion actually takes place or not; and therefore Ex. 172 is as certainly Double-coun-
terpoint, with its duplication of one part in the 3rd, as Ex. 173, or any other of the
inverted forms.
c. Such a duplication in the 3rd is less difficult and hazardous than

might be suspected, and will quite frequently be found practicable with
little or no change, in any ordinary counterpoint. The only necessary
condition or limitation is, that the parts shall move in contrary direc-
tions (at those points where both are moving). This may be verified
in Ex. 172. It is applied, with precisely equal certainty, to the other
part (Theme B) of the a"bove example, by Bach himself. Thus
Th. A.
* a-
g^fll
Ex.
i Double-cpt. in 10th.
uw '
i i r
174. 1
1 ! I rrfl
Srvgfey
.
9 $==
ryt»V
j
Th. B.
t=t T
53!
t=F m 1
W. B. Each lower part alone must be valid with the upper.
Par. 173d. ARTIFICIAL DOUBLE-COUNTERPOINT. 275
d. Further, exactly the same result is obtained by duplicating either

part in the outer 6th (instead of inner 3rd, as in Exs. 172 and 174).
Thus
Ex.
175 mmmiv3=sm
Th. A.
<£
Th. B.
*-•
¥=F f-\
E=F
b£tt.
N. B. Play each duplicated part «/»«* with the other. And write out the
Inverted forms of each example, complete, as in Ex. 173.
174. Double-cpt. in the 13th (or 6th). This is the companion-species

of that in the 10th, and is obtained by duplicating either Theme in the
outer jrd (pomp, par. 173a), or inner 6th (par. 173^). For example:
4- i 3e
If
Ex. Th. A.
176.
^
Th. B.
V
Im^mm*
('
^^T^
^^ 5 m '# tt=t
-^-^
1
Th. B (as before).
jn.*T )
etc.
1 n the
Inverted l 13th : [3ZS—S
Th. A
w
(13th lower).
1
N. B. Play each upper part alone with the other. Write out the example also
with duplication of the lower part in the outer (i.e., lower) 3rd. Write out each
example in its Inverted form, complete.
175. It is sometimes possible to apply the device of duplication in
the 3rd (or 6th) to both parts at once. Thus :

*i) Slightly changed from the Original (Bach, Well-temp. Clav., Vol. II, Fugue
16, meas. 59-63). Comp. with meas. 9-13; and see, also, meas. 45-49; 51-55;
69-73-
The complication of Double-cpt. " Species " involved in such two-

fold duplications can be defined only by reference to the Original form
(here shown in large notes) it is exceedingly confusing,
: and no —
doubt wholly unnecessary.
'A long and instructive example of Double-counterpoint in the 10th may be
found in Bach, "Art of Fugue," Canon III meas. 5—39 are inverted in the 10th in
;
meas. 44-78 the lower part one 8 ve higher, and the upper a 1 oth lower, than before.
;
Bach, 3-voice Inv. No. 8, meas. 17-18; upper, part duplicated in the inner 6th.
Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 22, meas. 6-3 from the end (double duplications,
partly in 6ths, and partly in 3rds). — Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. VI, No. 18, meas.
22-23 j Theme A in Bass, Theme B doubled in 3rds, slightly embellished, in upper
parts<
176. Double-cpt. in the 9th, and its companion, in the 7th. For
these extremely difficult and rare species there is no other guide than
the rigid application of the two general principles, of (1) stepwise pro-
gressionand (2) contrary direction. For example :
a) Orig. Cpt
ra^^^^^S
(
-•- -^-•-,
Th. B.
Th. A.
rgs- ±3t.
^ 1
(&) Inversion.
I
p Th. A (as before). *2)
Th. B (7th lower). *i)
î: 5—?
:£=E=E
w=ss
Th. B (9th lower).
-=1—*-
:j^t
i
*^
f f r tr f
g
*i)
* id^dEdET^H
-Tff
Theme B
*=t
is
^ -h
es;
written out in both species of Double-cpt. at once, in this

I
instance, because they produce, together, a somewhat fuller and more plausible har-
monic result than either would alone. This, however, is not (or should not be)
necessary.
*2) The addition of another part, as here, is often of the utmost consequence in
denning more fully the harmonic intention.
A double-subject, devised thus strictly in contrary directions, and

•with exclusive stepwise progressions, will generally prove available for
every species of Double-cpt. That is the case with Ex. 178, as the
student may (and should) verify.
Other Varieties of Artificial Double-Counterpoint.

177. These are purely experimental, and cannot be obtained by any
method of calculation. They consist in multiplying the relations of the
two Themes to each other by applying the ordinary modifications (Con-
trary motion, Shifted rhythm, Augmentation, or Diminution) to either
Theme alone, while the other retains its original form. For illustration,
Ex. 167 chances to admit of transformation as follows
Th. B, as before.
'rrm I' l-^HT\ 1 1 1 .
Ex.
179,
,
r-tTf *T
m
Th. A, in Contrary Motion.
278 APPLIED COUXTERPOINT. Par. 177
Th. B, in Shifted rhythm.
SP ^ -*!)
J1_i r_ g- j.
I I I I
J-
Th. A, as in Orig. cpt.
And Ex. 170, No. 2, reappears later thus:
Th. A, as before. Bach.
g3Ê g£gJâSligf£l^fl
Th. B, Shifted rhythm.
*i) See Ex. 178, Note *2).
See further, n Original cpt. in meas. 1—2, Theme

Bach, 2-voice Invention No. ;
A in upper, Theme B in lower part inverted in meas. 3-5, Theme A as before, but
;
in lower part, Theme B in upper part in Contrary motion and Shifted rhythm. — •
B.ch, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 23 ; comp. meas. 60-63 with meas. 27—30
(Theme B in Shifted rhythm).
EXERCISE 50.
A. A number of Double-subjects in Double-cpt. in the 12th (par. 171). Each

example is also to be written out in the 8ve-Inversion, and in complete Contrary
motion (i.e., both Themes together in Contrary motion). See par.' 165, Rule 4.
B. Double-subjects in Double-cpt. in the nth (par. 172). Each to be subjected
to the same Inversions as at A.
C. The same in Double-cpt. in the 10th (par. iyâ-e).
D. The same in Double-cpt. in the 13th (par. 174).
E. The same in Double-cpt. in the 9th, — and in the 7th.
F. The
Double-subjects invented in Exercise 4SA are to be subjected to very
thorough experimental tests, with reference to the duplication of either, or both, of
the Themes in the inner, or outer, 3rd.
G. All of the above Double-subjects (including Exercise 48.^) are to be ex-

haustively examined with reference to the experimental species of Artificial Double-
cpt., illustrated in par. 177.
The Third Species of Double-Fugue.
178. In this species, which may be regarded as the most genuine

and distinctive of the Double-fugue, the entire Exposition (first section)
is devoted to Theme A alone. And, in the broader Song-forms, this
Par. 178. DOUBLE-FUGUE, THIRD SPECIES. 279
Exposition may be extended a section or more, so as to complete the

measure of a full First Part.
The following sections or Parts may then be designed in either of
two ways
(1) Theme B may simply join Theme A, so that they appear in

conjunction the rest of the way ; or (2) Theme B may also be first
manipulated alone, for one section or Part, and the conjunction of the
two Subjects follow in the final Sections, or Third Part.
In the latter case, where each Subject is manipulated alone before they appear
together, care must be taken to avoid contrapuntal associates that resemble the other
Theme too closely, especially with regard to their rhythmic formation otherwise the
;
subsequent conjunction of the Themes will not be striking enough, and the product
may be monotonous.
An incipient type of the first class is shown in par. 142, which review.
The first class is illustrated in the following (to be thoroughly
analyzed)
Bach, "The Art of Fugue," Fugue 9; 4-voice; 3 Sections, cadences vague;

Theme A
alone to meas. 34 ; A
and B together from meas. 35 to the end. Con-
tains Double-cpt. in the 12th. —
Same work, Fugue 14; 4-voice; Theme A alone
to meas. 21 A and B together from meas. 22 to the end; in Section III (meas. 34)
;
there is a regular Exposition of an auxiliary Motive, derived from the first Counter-
point (meas. 6-7) ; in Sec. V (meas. 67) another brief auxiliary Figure appears.
Contains Double-cpt. in the 1 oth and 12th.
The second class is illustrated in the following
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 18; 3-voice; 3-Part Song-form; Theme A
alone to meas. 60 ;Theme B alone from meas. 61 to 96 A and B together from
;
meas. 97 to end. The first counterpoint differs but little from Theme B, but the
latter is nevertheless characteristic enough.

Vol. II, Fugue 4; 3-voice; Theme A
alone 10 meas. 19; in meas. 20-21 Theme
B is introduced tentatively, once (in upper part), and in modified form meas. 24-29 ;
Theme A again alone, Exposition of Contrary motion in meas. 30 Theme B is again ;
"attempted" (lower part) in still another modified form; meas. 35-39 Theme B, in
correct form, has a regular Exposition alone A and B together from meas. 48 to ;
end. Artificial Double-cpt. freely applied.
Bach, " The Art of Fugue," Fugue 10 this is practically the same as Fugue 14
;
(analyzed above), with which it must be very carefully compared ; it differs from No.
14 in containing an additional first Section (meas. 1-22), devoted to the Exposition of

Theme B; i.e., it begins with the "secondary Subject";
thereafter it corresponds
very closely to No. 14. Hence it contains : Theme B alone in Sec. I, Theme A alone
in Sec. II, both together the rest of the way. The Subjects are well contrasted.
Bach Org. Comp., Vol. IV, No. 6 4-voice 3-Part Song-form Theme
;
in ; ; A
Part I Theme B in Part II, both together in Part III ; the last 14 measures are an
independent Postlude, quasi free Fantasia. The Pedal announces both Themes
almost invariably in simplified rhythmic form ; frequent perfect cadences in course of
the Sections ; few episodes until near the end. Themes well contrasted.
Bach, Well-temp. Vol. I, Prelude 7; 3 rhythmically contrasted Divisions;

CI.,
texture more free than in the genuine Double-fugue.
Mendelssohn, Pfte. Comp., op. 35, Fugue 4 4-voice 3-Part Song-form Theme
; ; ;
A in Part I, to meas. 46 ; Theme B alone to meas. 96, often in modified form A ;
and B together, with some freedom of treatment, from meas. 97 to end. Themes
rhythmically contrasted.
Analyze, further, the following miscellaneous examples (irrespective

of class)
Bach, Partita (Clav.) No. 5, " Gigue " ; large 2-Part form, Gigue-species.
Bach, Clav. Comp., Toccata in c minor (Peters ed. 210, No. 3) ; Divs. I and II
are introductory; Div. Ill, lengthy Exposition of ThemeA (3-voice, Concert-species)
a brief interlude follows, and then Div. IV, with Themes A and B together. — Fan-
tasia e Fuga in a minor (Peters ed. 208, No. 2) ; excellent example ; 4-voice ; 3-Part
Song-form.
Mozart, String-quartet (Peters ed. 1037a), No. 1, G major, Finale; Double-
fugue in homophonic surroundings (as Sonata-movement). Regular Exposition of
two different Subjects, one at the beginning, and the other 30 or 40 measures later;
both together in final Division (the " Recapitulation ").
Raff, Pfte. Suite, op. 69, Finale.
Saint-Saens, Pfte. Etudes, op. 52, No. 3, Fugue with Prelude only a very ;
concise Exposition of Theme B, and no more than brief fragmentary conjunction

with Theme A, in last Section.
Rubinstein, Pfte. Fugues and Preludes, op. 53. Fugue 1, 3-voice. Fugue — 4,
4-voice 5-Part Song-form * contains Contrary motion, and Augmentations.
;
;
Handel, Clav. Suite IV, first movement 4-voice. ;
Vocal: Handel, "Israel in Egypt," No. n, Egypt was glad (Fugue in Contrary
motion). —
-The same, No. 21, And I will exalt Him, and I will exalt Him.
Mendelssohn, " St. Paul," No. 22 ; Sing His glory, and Amen.
Bach, " B-minor Mass," No. 19, Confiteor, and In remissionem ; near the end a
Cantus firmus is interwoven, first in canonic imitation, and then single, in Augmen-
tation.
Irregular (4.TH) Species of Double-Fugue.
179. An irregular variety of the Double-fugue, which might be desig-

nated as the 4th Species, consists of one principal Theme, with two or
more contrasting thematic Counterpoints, one or the other (or all) of which
may assume the importance of a genuine secondary Theme.
* Homophonic Forms, Chap. XVI.

Par. 179. DOUBLE-FUGUE, FOURTH SPECIES. 28
The thematic Counterpoints (or Counter-themes) are likely to appear

in successive sections, or Parts, of the usual forms.
Analyze, thoroughly, Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. II, Fugue 23; 4-voice; the first
27 measures are an Exposition of the principal Subject, with a characteristic the-
matic counterpoint, appearing first in meas. 5-8 (Bass) ; after meas. 27 it is perma-
nently abandoned. In Part II (meas. 27-74) a second thematic counterpoint, or,
rather, a genuine Counter-theme, appears, first in Soprano in meas. 60-62 it is ;
shifted backward a half -measure (par. 177); and Double-cpt. in the 12th abounds
throughout. the beginning of Part III (meas. 75) Theme
At occurs once alone. A
This example resembles those of par. 142 (which see), but is more nearly a
genuine Double-fugue.
See further, Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. Ill, Fugue 1 ; 5-voice 3 distinct Divisions,
;
— somewhat like the Fugue-Group (par. 157) ; Div. I, £ time, Exposition of principal
Theme ; Div. II, f time, contains an Exposition of the First Counter-theme alone, in
slightly modified form, and the conjunction of this with the principal Theme (rhyth-
mically modified on account of the change in measure) ; Div. III,^ time, consists in
a similar Exposition of the Second Counter-theme alone, and its conjunction with
the principal Theme, again with modified notation. Analyze minutely, and compare
with the next-following Fugue.
Vol. Ill, Fugue 2 ; 4-voice ;
3-Part Song-form
the First Counter-theme is asso- ;
ciated with the principal Theme

and II (to meas. 70) as a Double-fugue
in Sections I
of the 2nd Species the Second Counter-theme has an independent Exposition in
;
meas. 70-128, as Part II Part III begins with one conjunction of the First Coun-
;
ter-theme with the principal Theme, but consists thereafter of the association of
the latter with the Second Counter-theme. Neither of these examples must be
confounded with the Triple-fugue (par. 180), for nowhere are all three Subjects
combined.
Bach, Clav. Comp. (Peters ed. 212, No. 5); 4-voice; two different thematic
Counterpoints, in different rhythms, and slightly modified, — i.e., not genuine
Counter-themes.
Raff, Pfte. Suite, op. 91, first movement ; elaborate Introduction, as Fantasia;
announcement of Fugue-subject interwoven with last vanishing chords of the
first
Introduction two different thematic Counterpoints, in accelerated rhythms.

;
Beethoven, " Mass in D," op. 123, Et vitam venturi ; two different Counter-
themes.
EXERCISE 51.
A. A number of Double-fugues, 3rd Species, 3, 4, or 5 parts, for pianoforte,

organ, string-quartet, or vocal parts. Any Double-subject of former Exercises may
be used, preferably those of Exercise 50, with a view to manipulation in both
Natural and Artificial Double-cpt.
B. One or two Double-fugues of the 4th Species, according to par. 179.

CHAPTER XVI.
The Triple-Fugue.
180. The Triple-fugue is based upon three different coordinate

Themes, which appear together, as a threefold Subject, during some
portion of the composition.
All the rules of par. 165 apply strictly, and must be reviewed. The
chief difficulty in devising a Triple-subject is, so to individualize each
one of the three Themes that it constitutes by itself a wholly independ-
ent and characteristic melody, especially in its rhythmic formation ; and
that, furthermore, each one may serve equally well as Soprano, Bass,
or inner part. Compare par. 57.
Probably the best plan is to follow the principle of par. 61b (which
review), i.e., to invent the Theme A, in stately
Themes successively ; first,
rhythm (preponderantly a and J - notes) then to add Theme B to this ;
in more animated rhythm (J - notes), and then Theme C to these, in

still another form of more active rhythm. This is, however, by no
means imperative.
Illustrations of the Triple-subject
Th. A tr
n
.
I
1
_J. J 1 1
I
^ !
Ex. f Th. B.
'"
'
ISO.
(^ *Bfc ^
Th. C.
2.
Bach. n
Th. A.
^MmMs&M^ J3 •&
Beethoven. *2)
j E*i>
r-
f P^l p-m-0-m-\ m jtZtr-
Th. C.
7— o-t-F
^-*±£
W~x~
£= -3-3-
Th. B,
m
tP
fe±£ rfcP
p?=q=f^
m
Par. 181. THE TRIPLE-FUGUE. 283
Brahms.
Th. B.
m =n=p:
&m e-t-m-
Th. C.
fl*
I
Th. C.
4.
Brahms.
r=^
--^-U
_p=jr i?=
=fe
ee
^gg^Ss^P^ CH= =* gl
Th. B."
§3E i—p fc-I

IPh*
Th. A.
*i) Themes A
and B end here, while Theme C runs on a few beats. In the
other illustrations be seen that the 3 Themes usually' close exactly, or nearly,
it will
together. But observe that they do not begin together.

*2) From the String-quartet, op. 18, No. 4, second movement, meas. 64-68
from the Double-bar.
See also Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 9, meas. 3-4.
Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Prelude 19, first 2 \ measures. — Vol. I, Fugue 4,
meas. 51-54 (Tenor, Bass, Soprano). — Vol. I, Fugue 21, meas. 9-12.
181. The Inversion of a Triple-counterpoint yields a fivefold result

(or 6 forms in all), thus
c Theme A, ( A, B, B, C, C
Original cpt, ) Theme B, Inversions, 1 C, A, C, A, B
B, C, A, B,
a. As in Double-cpt., it is generally a foregone conclusion that the

8ve-in versions will all be possible (par. 56), though some embarrass-
ment, with regard to register, may be encountered and ; it may be neces-
sary at times both to cross the parts and to allow them to diverge
widely.
b. On account of the multiplied complications, only the Natural

species (8ve-inversion) need claim attention. The Artificial species
are exceedingly difficult to obtain, though sometimes one or another of

the devices shown in par. 173 and par. 177 may be ferreted out by
patient and exhaustive experiment.
Bach.
in N.B. A.
*2)
I
WQJ_
HSîS —j -•l-Jx*-t-
* I
B.
4=r
*i) Each Theme starts with the letter a 4th above the original first tone, Theme A
being transferred to a lower, B and C to a higher register. — *2) Each Theme in the
7th of the original counterpoint, excepting the first tone of Theme B. The counter-
point is therefore in each case Natural Species.
See Beethoven, Pfte. Sonata, op. 2, No. 3, Finale, meas. 55-62 ; very simple.
182. The Triple-fugue, like the Double, may also be divided into
three Species.
In the First Species, all 3 Subjects are announced together at the
outset* and the order of voices during the Exposition is to be defined

strictly according to par. 167a; that is, each Theme passes from part to
part in the established order (par. 123), independently of the others —
common sense being employed to avoid collisions. For example (4-
voice) : •
Sop., Th.A. , C*i). .
A. C . ,
B .A. .
B.
Par. 183. THE TRIPLE-FUGUE. 285
Analyze, thoroughly, Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Prelude 19; 3-voice; the first
tone in Bass is auxiliary; the Triple-subject is 2 \ measures long; the design is 3-Part
Song-form; Part I is a regular Exposition, to meas. 12 Part II (meas. 12-17) begins ;
with the original counterpoint; Part III (end of meas. 17) contains two announce-
ments.
Beethoven, String-quartet, op. 18, No. 4, second movement, measures 64 to 81
from the Double-bar ; original counterpoint given in Ex. 1 80, No. 2 a complete ;
Exposition, 4 announcements.
183. In the Second Species, Themes A and B begin together, and

Theme C follows immediately (usually in one of the same voices).
See Bach, 3-voice Invention No. 9 Theme A in inner, B in lower part the first
; ;
Bass note is auxiliary in meas. 3, Theme A appears in the upper, B in the inner,
;
and C is added to these in the lower voice the form is sectional analyze thor-
; ;
oughly. — Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. I, " Passacaglia," Finale; 4-voice, sectional
(quasi 3-Part form) ; Exposition to meas. 29, with brief cadence in meas. 21, contains
5 announcements, in order that each part may exhibit all three Themes Theme C ;
occasionally modified at its end. —

In Vol. II, Fugue 4, there are many passages in
and even some evidences of Triple-fugue design.
Triple-cpt., Vol. VIII, No. 12; —
somewhat irregular.
4-voice; sectional; Beethoven, 3rd Symphony, Adagio, meas-
ures 10-29 from second change of signature (i.e., back to 3 flats); Theme A in half-
notes, and B in quarters and eighths, together in Viola and 2nd Violin followed ;
immediately by Theme C, i6th-notes, in 2nd Violin; a complete Exposition, 5

announcements.
A sub-variety of the Second Species is illustrated in Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol.
I, Fugue the 3 Subjects enter successively (in closer analogy to the 2nd Species
21 ;
of the Double- fugue) 3-voice; sectional; Theme C, meas. 9-12, in upper part, is
;
very fragmentary, but thoroughly characteristic and persistently retained (with slight
modifications).
Also Brahms, Fugue with Chorale (O Traurigkeit) for organ, in a minor cho- ;
rale in pedal-bass Theme A derived from first Line of chorale per moto contrario
; ;
throughout (par. 158) ; orig. cpt. given in Ex. 180, No. 4.
184. In the Third Species, Theme A is manipulated alone during the

whole Exposition, or Part I thereafter, several different designs are
;
possible and equally legitimate. For example, among many possible —

arrangements, in successive Sections (or Parts) :
Theme A alone. B alone, C alone, A, B, and C

or A and B or A and C together.
together. together,
or B and C
together.
Analyze diligently Bach, Well-temp. CI., Vol. I, Fugue 4; 5-voice, Two-Part

form; Theme A alone in Part I (to meas. 35); Theme B begins with Part II, in
Soprano, as counterpoint to one other announcement of A

Theme A in Tenor ; after
and B (meas. 44), Theme C
Tenor; the 3 Themes are then
joins them, in meas. 49,
developed pretty steadily together to meas. 81-84, whereupon Theme B gradually
withdraws entirely, leaving the rest of the Fugue to A and C these, in meas. 94, ;
begin a series of extremely powerful stretto-announcements together, extending nearly

to the end. — Vol. II, Fugue 14; 3-voice, Two-Part form; Theme A alone in Part I
(to meas. 20) ; Theme B then follows, in Bass, slightly modified at its end, and is
manipulated alone, in somewhat abbreviated stretti, to meas. 28 ; at the end of meas.

28 Theme A appears (inner voice), Theme B following in Bass two measures later
in meas. 36 Theme C enters (inner voice, i6th-notes), and is developed alone to meas.
51 ; after one announcement of A alone (meas. 52-54, inner voice), the 3 Themes are
combined (A at end of meas. 54 with disguised beginning, upper voice, C in next —
measure, Bass, —B in meas. 56, inner voice), and remain together to the end.
Bach, "The Art of Fugue," Fugue 8; 3-voice, sectional; design as follows
(Themes named A, B, and C, in the order of their appearance C being the princi- —
pal Subject) Sections I and II, Theme A alone Sec. Ill (meas. 39) and IV, Themes
: ;
A and B Sec. V (meas. 94), Theme C Sec. VI, (meas. 125), Themes A and B Sec.
; ; ;
VII (meas. 147), Themes A, B, and C. Compare carefully with same work,
Fugue n. The latter uses the same Themes as No. 8, but begins with the principal
Theme ; further, the Themes are all in the Contrary motion of the former. It is
much longer and more elaborate, introducing a characteristic chromatic counterpoint
(to one of the secondary Themes) which is retained and much used, almost as 4th —
Theme (meas. 28-29), though all four do not appear anywhere together, thus escaping
the design of a Quadruple-Fugue (par. 185). The design is as follows (Themes
named as in No. 8) : Sec. I, Theme C ; Sec. II (meas. 27), Theme A, with thematic
counterpoint " D" ; Sec. Ill (meas. 71), Theme C in Contrary motion; Sees. IV
(meas. 89) and V, Themes A and B (also two isolated announcements of C) ; Sec.
VI (meas. 146), Themes A, B, and C to the end. Same work, Fugue 15; the 3 —
Themes are strikingly contrasted in rhythm and character (the third one based upon
the notes " b-a-c-h ") . This Fugue was interrupted by the master's death, after the
Exposition of the 3rd Theme, and before all three Subjects were united. — Bach,
Org. Comp., Vol. VI, No. 31 ; chorale as Fugue-group (par. 155) 4-voice; cantus ;
firmus in Bass ; new Theme for each Line Double-cpt. during first Line Triple-cpt.
; ;
in all following Lines. — Thiele, Fugue (with chromatic Fantasia) for organ; 4-
voice ; A alone, then A and B together, and then all three. Brahms,
Theme —
Fugue a b minor for the organ 4-voice sectional Thematic Counterpoint in first
in ; ; ;
Sections stretti, augmentation, diminution, and shifted rhythm in final section all
; ;
per moto contrario. A superb masterpiece, worthy of most diligent analysis.
Quadruple and Quintuple Counterpoint.
185. The invention and employment of a complex of more than

three Subjects, for the Fugue-form, is so difficult and of so little prac-
tical effectiveness as to be naturally very rare ; and even for technical
discipline it is of but limited value.
Par. 185. QUADRUPLE-CO UNTERPOINT. 287
Brief examples of good 4- or 5 -voice counterpoint with well-con-

trasted, independent parts, may be introduced episodically in the course
of a Fugue, and reproduced in inverted forms (in 8ve-cpt. only) with
good results.
A brilliantspecimen of Quintuple-cpt. may be found in Mozart, Symphony in

C major (sometimes called the " Jupiter" symphony), Finale. The complex of 5
Subjects, which first appears in meas. 40 from the end, is as follows (in the orchestral
String-quintet)
Allegro molto.
Th. A.
iVÊl
Th. B.
Wl t=£ £ :*=*
-#— *t±* -#Tg-
Th. C.
Ex.
182. w§=
-1=-
y=H=0
Th. D. _,_. _,_ _»
£' ftfit.*
m -tr-
ffi g
Th. E.
-S>-
33 ^f#-=^
(<5Va bass a)
This is followed by a complete Exposition, 5 announcements in all, up to meas.

22 from the end. But this is not all the entire Finale is, in fact, a Quintuple-Fugue
;
of the 3rd Species, molded in the form of the " Sonata-Allegro," and so designed
that nearly all of the Subjects appear successively, and are manipulated, alone or
together, in stretti, contrary motion, diminution, and even retrograde imitation, before
their ultimate conjunction in the final Coda. Analyze thoroughly, from the orches-
tral score.
In conclusion, the student is recommended to analyze the 48 Fugues of A. A.
Klengel Canons and Fugues in all the keys " 2 vols., Breitkopf & Hartel ed.).
(" ;
This distinguished and interesting work, to which frequent reference will be made in
the next Division, has been intentionally omitted in the preceding pages, in order to
provide opportunity for an extended course of independent analysis. The Fugues
are almost exclusively " Single " Contrary motion, Stretti, Augmentation, and Dimi-
;
nution abound, and even Retrograde Imitation occurs in one instance (in the unique
2-voice Fugue, Vol. I, No. 16).
EXERCISE 52.
A. Invent a number of Triple-subjects, in various styles, and write out all five
8ve-inversions of each.
B. Two brief Triple-fugues, or Fughettas, one in the First, vhe other in the
Second Species, major and minor.
C. Two or three complete Triple-fugues, Third Species.
D. A few experiments in Quadruple- and Quintuple-counterpoint, with Inver-

sions (as explained in pars. 180-181).
DIVISION V.
THE CANON.
186. The Canon-forms differ from the foregoing classes of poly-
phonic composition two respects (1) The Imitation is entirely, or
in :
nearly, strict (par. 26) and (2) it is continuous ; that is, not limited, as
;
in the Fugue, to the Subject alone, but extended to include all that
follows in the same voice, to the end of the Section, or Part, or entire
composition.
187. a. The part which begins, or leads the canonic progression, is
called the Leader (propositi) the following or imitating part

; is called
the Follower, or responding part (risposta).
b. The principal distinction between canonic species (among many)
is defined, precisely like the stretto, according to the distance of the Fol-
lower from the Leader in time, and in melodic interval ; for instance,
" Canon in the 8ve (or 2nd, 3rd, etc.) after one measure (or two, or
more)."
c. Another important distinction is made between the Unaccom-
panied (or Independent) and Accompanied Canon and further, be- ;
tween the Round and the Progressive Canon. Other traditional

distinctions will either be defined in the following pages, or will be
intentionally omitted because of their doubtful utility ; for the latter
the curious student may consult Dr. Baker's " Dictionary of Musical
Terms," or Grove's " Dictionary."
Par. 188. THE ROUND-CANON. 289
CHAPTER XVII.
The Round, or Round-Canon.
188. The simplest and most venerable application of the principle

of Continuous Imitation is made in the so-called Round-canon. This
is usually written for at least three, sometimes four, but seldom more,
weal parts, and is nearly always a Canon in unison (or 8ve) Imitation.
The Leader begins with a distinctly lyric (melodious) Phrase,
commonly 4 measures long, with a fairly definite semi-cadence more ;
rarely it is a 2-measure member, or a Period (8-measure, or irregular)

with the usual two cadences. Thereupon the first Follower reproduces
(or imitates) this leading phrase, while the Leader continues with a
counterpoint, similar in character but melodically well contrasted (see
par. 35a, and par. 165, Rules 1, 2, 3), if possible with a modulation, to
avoid monotony. After the leading phrase is thus again finished, the
second Follower enters and announces it, while the first Follower con-
tinues with the preceding " counterpoint," and the Leader adds a new
contrapuntal phrase to these, again well-contrasted. At this juncture
the original counterpoint (in a 3-voice Round) is complete, and repre-
sents a Triple-subject, exactly as in par. 180, but with less rhythmic
diversity,and so contrived that the 3 parts (A, B, and C) constitute a
continuous melody in phrase-group form, and returning to the beginning
(whence the designation " Round ").
What follows, as the voices continue their rotatory Imitation, or fol-
lowing, of the Leader, is simply Inversion of the voices, and presents
nothing new, — in the unison-canon not even the effect of Inversion
therefore the Imitation is generally extended only until the last Follower
has finished the entire phrase-group, whereupon a free cadence, of any
length, is added, to terminate the Canon.
low voice (Alto or Tenor) is used in company with two high ones, or if, in
If a
any way, the Triple-subject is so devised as to embrace different registers, the 8ve-
Imitation may also be employed and in that case the effect of Inversion will be
;
secured, subject to the usual tests (par. 1810).
For a 4-voice Round the process is the same, but the desirability of
8ve-Imitation, in company with the unison, is greater ; hence, parallel
voices are likely to be chosen (2 Sopranos and 2 Tenors, or Altos and
Basses). The text must be so chosen as to cover either the leading

phrase only, or exactly the entire group of 3 (or 4) phrases.
For illustration (3-voice Round-canon) :
Leader.
Ex.
183, I?SBEBE5Z ££ ozf
:? :
dfatEt
Dif fi - ci - le lee - tu mi - hi mars et jo - ni - cu jo - ni-
im -*.*| g
i*-
pg&£ S333
cu dif-fi - ci le, lectulec-tu (etc.)
1st Follower.
I Ê3E ^=t ^=*t

w Dif-fi - ci-le
s> <*-
^m=m =f^^=s;
* r**-*-+
-• —
EfeSE
g-»l-
fH^
=5R^f
:t±
2nd Follower.
-=)- -r-5-
Dif - fi ci-le
Mozart.
w^^n^-
I d- -d-
m
^ =P=P=T
U-P- N-si— s<
Dif
II
&£ ]=F£^
:*±=bfc* I&jfc*
-»3t3t -* *~
*3>
1
*4)
&=t P^=PC -*—

-g>- *-w — -•^-•-tsf-
etc. *5>
*i) From here to Note *2) appears the union of the three voices, or the
"Triple-subject" which constitutes the body of the entire Canon. — *2) Here the
Par. 188. THE ROUND-CANON: 29I
Leader ends the canonic melody, and returns to the beginning. — *3) The Fol- 1st
lower continues with the third Period (that of the Leader at Note *i) — *4) The 2nd
.
Follower continues with the 2nd Period (meas. 8). *5) In the Original, the 3 —
voices continue thus together for 14 measures, or until the 2nd Follower has finished
the canonic melody. The student is to write out these measures, and, if possible,
have the whole Round sung. _
It is evident that the single canonic melody — the upper staff alone up to Note
*2) — is all that need be written in order to indicate the contents of the whole. The
3 singers may all read from this single staff, but beginning successively, at each new
Period, and continuing as long as desired. Or, it is also possible to write out the
Round in score, precisely as shown from Note *i) to *£). In that case each singer
begins with the lowermost staff, passes successively to the next 'higher, and finally
around to the lowermost again, and so on. This method is illustrated in the fol-
lowing :
3rd Follower. Mozart.
fegJ3l 3Ej^ ^ft TOz Efr5g -.J&,.-

ve, a - ve Ma-ri - a, a
2nd Follower.
to
^FE
Ex.
I £$E -*-r
^?
" 3rd Foil."
184. A ve Maria, Ma-ri a, a -
1st Follower.
m m* to
ii P<-
n =8*
ve Ma - ri - a.
"2nd Foil."
J 6 3.(1 61'
Begin- to
ning. '
1st Foil.'
ve Ma - ri - a, a ve Ma - ri - a.
Write out this Round in its complete form, beginning as in Ex. 183, and continu-
ing until the 3rd Follower has completed the canonic melody. Mozart made no
provision for a perfect cadence (Tonic); the Round is therefore "endless." Such
provision could, however, easily be made by adding a free codetta of one (or
more) measures, when, as here, the Canon is written in score. Or a stopping-place
may be indicated, either for each part successively, or for all together, by the n\
sign.
These examples are both taken from the Breitkopf & Hartel ed. of Mozart's
complete works (Serie Nos. 41 to 61).
7,
See further, from the same, No. 46 Round for 3 voices, unison Follower be-
; ;
gins after 10 measures (irreg. Period-form); ends with perfect cadence. No. 47 — ;
3-voice, unison, after 14 measures (Group of 3 phrases, extended) perfect cadence. ;

—
No. 52 Round for 4 voices, unison, after 6 measures the Canon is " endless," but
;
;
provision is made for a cadence. — No. 45; 4-voice, unison, after 8 measures; no
2g2 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 189.
cadence. — No. 55 ;
4-voice, unison, after 4 measures ;
" endless," but a stopping-place
is marked. — No. 56 ;
4-voice, unison, after 3 long measures ; no cadence. — No. 57 ;
4-voice, unison, after 6 measures ; no cadence. — No. 59 ;

4-voice, unison, after 8
measures; no cadence. — No. 60; 4-voice, unison, after 4 measures; "endless," but
cadence provided for. — No. Round 44, for 6 voices; all unison, after 4 measures
no cadence. —
No. 48 6-voice, first Follower in unison, the other four in lower 8ve
; ;
after 2 —
measures; no cadence.. Brahms, Round-canons, op. 113, No. 1; 4-voice,
unison, after 4 measures ; cadence provided for. — No. 2 3-voice, unison, after 7
—
;
measures. — No. — No. — No. — No.

3. 4. 5. 7 ;
3-voice, unison, after 10 measures.
No. 10. — No. — No. — No. 13;
11. 12. 6-voice, in the following unique disposition:
4-voice Canon in upper parts, unison, after 9 measures ; and, as accompaniment,
2-voice Canon in lower parts (8ve, after one measure).
Many other examples of the Round, both classic and popular, may be found in
various collections of vocal music for instructive or social purposes.
189. Closely allied to the Round, but inclining toward the structure
of the ProgressiveCanon, is a form of very pronounced Lyric character,
in which (as a rule) there is no return to the beginning, and conse-
quently no such rotation of parts as in the Round. The leading sen-
tence is often of considerable length — 8, 12, or even 16 measures, in
very definite Period, or Double-period, form ; the number of voices is
usually 3 (sometimes 4) and the form generally extends no farther

;
than through the announcement of the leading sentence by the last Fol-
lower. A simple harmonic accompaniment is added (par. 2011/).
Probably the most masterly example of this form is the famous mixed quartet
in Beethoven's " Fidelio " (No. 3, in the First Act). The leading sentence is a regu-
lar Period of 8 measures this, and the succeeding canonic counterpoints, are imi-
;
tated in the usualmanner by the Followers (in the unison by the other female part,
and lower 8ve by the two male voices), until the last Follower has finished the
original leading Period, whereupon a free homophonic coda of 12 measures is
appended. The rhythm of the accompaniment is gradually accelerated from quar-
ters and 8th-notes to i6th-triplets.
Rossini, " Semiramide," Act I, No. 3, Quartet, second division, Di tanti Regi ;
3-voice, auxiliary 4th voice during last announcement independent Coda. A beauti-
;
ful example.
Rossini, " Moses in Egypt," Act III, Finale, Quartet, Je tremble et soupire ; 4-
voice ;slightly irregular near end. Also Act II, No. 8, Quintet, O toi dont la climence;
5-voice ; transposed announcements of leading Period ; irregular ; independent Coda.
Of similar design is the Quartet, Urbs Syon inclyta, from " Hora novissima "
(H. W. Parker), No. 11, already cited among the vocal Fugues.
Mozart, No. 61 of the above volume, is an example of this kind, as far as lyric
style is concerned ; but the imitation isextended to the characteristic rotation of the
Round (cadence indicated by /rv ), and there is no accompaniment. It is 3-voice,
unison, after 11 measures (extended Period).
Par. 190. THE PROGRESSIVE CANON. 293
EXERCISE 53.
A. Write two or more examples of the Round for 3 voices, in unison, unaccom-
panied ;
" endless," but with provision for a cadence.
B. One or two Rounds for 4 voices, in unison and 8ve, with Coda.
C. One or more Lyric canons for 3 voices (unison and 8ve), accompanied, with
Coda, according to par. 189.
CHAPTER XVIII.
The Progressive Canon.
190. In the Progressive Canon the same principle of strict continu-

ous imitation prevails ; but any other interval (or species) of imitation
may be used quite as well as the octave ; and the time-interval is gen-
erally much shorter, — i.e., the risposta follows the proposta, or Leader,
earlier than in the Round; and, finally, there is less distinctness or
regularity of form, and no such characteristic recurrence of the leading
sentence, — excepting the distinctive return to the beginning necessary
when the 3-Part Song-form is chosen, or when Part I is to be repeated.
The Two-Voice Canon, Unaccompanied.

191. In the 8ve. Either part may be chosen as Leader. A simple
melodic motive is devised, very similar in contents and character to the
Motive of an Invention or a short Fugue-subject, but without cadence.
Its lengthdepends upon the time-interval between Leader and Follower.
This most commonly one measure, sometimes two measures, or one-
is
half measure in any compound rhythm more rarely one beat, or any ;
other uneven fraction of a measure, for it is desirable that the prosodic

effect of Leader and Follower (disposition of accents) should agree.
This leading motive is then imitated in the other voice, either an
8ve higher or lower, while the Leader proceeds with a contrapuntal
associate devised in strict conformity to the rules in par. jâ, which review.
The Follower imitates this Counterpoint, while the Leader again pro-
ceeds with a new one, — and so on, to the end of the Canon. If, for
instance, the time-interval is one measure, the contents of every (or any)
measure in the Leader will be literally reproduced in each following
measure in the Follower ;
— though a duet, the contents of one voice alone
will represent the entire melodic material of the composition. For
illustration
Follower (in upper 8ve, after one

j± Allegro.
—
Ex.
i
3^3 q fttf—
3S
Leading M.
m-^-u
-
— a
185.< Leader.
Mii ^ *—+-
t=x
Leading motive :
iM
—
#- -m-'
1st
S^
^=f
Counterpoint :
—
Clementi.
measure)
gJtjfrEggS
2nd Counterpoint :
—
192. There are two characteristic difficulties persistently present
in the constructive process of an unaccompanied Canon in the 8ve,
namely
a. The difficulty of avoiding monotony.
The 1 st counterpoint is, presumably, a peculiarly fitting associate of the leading

Motive. When it reappears in the Follower (3rd measure of the above example) it is
necessary to devise an equally good, but new, associate, as 2nd counterpoint, whereby
the natural temptation to fall back upon the leading M. must be resisted. In other
words, constant care must be taken to use new contrapuntal intervals in successive
measures also intervals occasionally foreign to the key, in order to effect necessary
;
modulations. But no liberties are to be taken with the Follower ; in the 8ve-canon
the imitation is absolutely strict. It is also necessary to avoid monotony of rhythm
and monotony of register. All of these considerations are skilfully observed in the
following
Leader.
Follower (in lower double-8ve, after one measure.)

Par. 192b. UNACCOMPANIED CANON. 295
_n» (ti. OSS "^" l l-TTI ,— ILEMENTI.
etc.
*i) The last beat of this measure was harmonized, in the Leader (preceding
measure), with b, d, and dt here a ; totally new result
is obtained by using fQ, This,
and the Mediant c (in this whole measure of the
persistent evasion of the distinctive
Leader), prepares for the unique modulation (or change of mode) into a minor, at
Note *2). —
*3) The diversity of register during these 5 measures is noteworthy;
from the high e of the Leader to this low e a range of 4 octaves is covered. *4)
—
Diversity of rhythm is here effected and sustained by the heavy syncopated forma-
tion of the Leader.
b. The difficulty of obtaining intelligible form.

The student soon discover how galling the constraint of persistent strict
will
imitation is; every desirable melodic aim is hampered, apparently to *. fatalistic
degree and this is especially palpable at the cadences, or at any other point in the
;
structural design where it is necessary to conduct the Leader in a certain definite

direction. The dogged pursuit of the Follower is in itself a circumstance that mili-
tates against clear cadential effects, because the Leader can perform no act alone.
At the same time, it is absolutely necessary (particularly at the beginning, and
from time to time in later sections) to preserve, at least approximately, the effect of
regular Phrase- and Period-formation to provide for a firm cadential separation at
;
the end of the First Part and, in case a repetition of Part I is required, or when the
;
3-Part form is used, to lead the voices back to the beginning.

The best device for such recognizable (if not strictly regular) syntactic forma-
tions a judicious use of Rests in the Leader. The rests should not be so brief as to
is
appear breathless, or so long as to sever the continuity of the sentence (excepting

at strong cadences, where a whole-measure rest may be used) nor should the rests ;
be so frequent as to defeat their own purpose.

In a word, it is mainly necessary to impart to the Leader a good and intelligible
melodic and syntactic form —
as far, and as continuously, as is possible under the
canonic constraint. The Follower may then be left to take care of itself, as far as
the "form" is concerned. For this reason, also, it is wise to introduce from time to
time some striking melodic or rhythmic figure in the Leader ; not only because these
contribute to the intelligibility of the form, but because they emphasize the relation
of the Follower to the Leader, i.e., render the canonic imitation, as such, more
recognizable. But see par. 202.
The "formation" is very distinct in the following:

Allegro. .^-
Ex. t^d^^^^fe^
187,
&&&W
ig6 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 192a
"M&f r t \
^
^ later: *4 )
*—n—d—3— £ -=1— =1-
•-
cj-j
p
^ =l-=q-
^^
<r
=
9*
^-4-
111 v- i |_,
1 1 y 1 1
Clementi.
*i) These rests mark the end, or semi-cadence, of the first 2-measure phrase-
member.
*2) Here the second phrase begins, with the first melodic member (i.e., parallel
construction, regular Period-form).
*3) Perfect cadence, marking the end of the First Part (meas. 26).
*4) This striking rhythmic figure is not only an important feature in the melodic
delineation of the Leader, but also defines the canonic imitation clearly when it
reappears (next measure) in the Follower.
c. The time-interval is a significant factor in the Canon, as it affects

both the difficulty of structure and the recognizability of the imitation.
The shorter the time-interval, the greater and more insistent is the
canonic constraint. The imitatory effect can scarcely be brought out
clearly when the time-interval is very brief, nor, on the contrary, can
the connection between Leader and Follower be easily traced when
more than two ordinary measures intervene. Long time-intervals may,
however, conduce to regularity of design; for instance, a 4-measure
interval is likely to resolve the Canon into a perfectly regular Phrase-
group form. K
far. 192c. UNACCOMPANIED CANON. 297
The following is a unique example of short time-interval
%ro vivace.
V iP 1 1
later: Klengel.
Ex.
188. etc.
r^r*
Bfê^gî||pp (After \ beat.)
d. The canonic may extend to the very end,

imitation in which —
case the Leader may pause, or may be a free counterpoint, during the
final time-interval. Or it may be discontinued one, or several, meas-
ures before the final perfect cadence ; the final measures will then
assume the character of a free codetta or coda.
e. The Canon in Unison is very rare without accompaniment.
Analyze the following examples very minutely

Clementi, " Gradus ad Parnassum," Schirmer ed. (Vogrich), No. 62 (orig. ed.
No. 63) 8ve, after one beat near the end the Leader is conducted back to the
; ;
beginning and repeated; therefore it is, to that extent, " endless," but the last meas-
• ure provides the perfect cadence. — No. 64 (orig. 26) ; 8ve, after one long measure
cited in Ex. 187. — No.
65 (orig. 67); double-8ve, after 1 measure; 2- Part form,
Part I repeated ("endless"); cited in Ex. 186. No. 67 (orig. 75); 8ve, after —
1 measure Part I " endless " cited in Ex. 185.
; ;
Klengel, 48 Canons and Fugues, Vol. II, Canon 5 8ve, after \ beat cited in ; ;
Ex. 188. —
Vol. II, Canon n
8ve, after 4 measures (see par. 192^); last 16 meas-
;
ures free. —
Vol. II, Canon 23; 8ve, after 1 measure; the first 10 measures are
monotonous (see par. 192a).
Bach, " Art of Fugue," Canon II ; 8ve, after 4 measures.
Beethoven, C-minor Pfte. Variations, Var. 22 ; 8ve, after one beat (very slight
modification).
Mozart, No. 43 (Breitkopf & Hartel, Serie 7) vocal Canon in Unison, after 2 ;
beats ;" endless," returning to beginning after 1 1 measures no cadence. ;
Many other examples will be cited, later, among the Accompanied Canons.
193. In the 2nd. The Follower imitates the Leader, at the chosen
time-interval, either in the 2nd above or the 7th below. The latter dis-
tinction is wholly unnecessary (though customary), for, as explained in

Ex. 67, Note *2) which see, — —
the imitation of any letter in the 2nd
willbe the next higher letter, whether placed above or below the lead-
ing part.
298 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. ig3a.
Each canonic Interval has its peculiarities, and it is left largely to

the student to discover and learn to master them.
a. Probably the most characteristic difficulty of any other than the

8ve-canon, is that of preserving the natural harmonic relations of the
tonality; it is the direct opposite of that shown in par. 192a, for these
varieties of the Canon are apt to be too restless, and to contain too much
variety. The constant uniform shifting of the parts tends to an unvaried
which must be prevented from destroying the unity
sequential structure
of key, and must be mitigated by the best possible collective formal
arrangement. See par. 192^.
b. Good modulatory results are impossible without free use of the
changes in interval-quality, defined in par. 28a, — which review, in con-
nection with the Notes to Ex. 69. Therefore, it is entirely legitimate to
substitute the major 2nd for the minor 2nd, or vice versa, at any point
or even the augmented 2nd for either. But the letter must not be
changed ; i.e., the interval-quantity must be respected.
c. All the formal conditions correspond to those of the 8ve-canon.
For illustration
m ^m
Andante.
*i>
Ex.
189.
e#
I§ss
ri f
4)
In the 2nd, below.
*2 ) GOETSCHIUS.
i
w mm&
fftre
*i) This rest defines the syntactic arrangement of the phrase in
mm'W two 2-measure
1
members.
*2) Here a definite semi-cadence is made on the Dominant of the leading key.
•3) It is often necessary, and always permissible, to cross the parts, as here.
*4) The first 2nd is minor, the next major.
See Bach, Air with 30 Variations for clavichord, Var. 27, Part I.
Other examples will be given among the Accompanied Canons.
194. In the 7th. This is the counterpart of the Canon in the 2nd,
and exhibits precisely the same peculiarities, merely reversed. For

example
Par. 195. UNACCOMPANIED CANON. 299
Ex.
190.
tpE^^fe" -3 =1 =1 =1-
rrrmTrrf
±t^
j: V-i •- *
tt
Bach.
— —
I I
:J=«!=t== =&
Iw -=l q- -=l =1-
BrrFfTfgTT 1
•t bt: etc.
195. In the 3rd. This interval is somewhat easier to manage than

the 2nd, though the same difficulties exist, and similar remedies are
necessary (par. 193 a and U).

The same applies to its counterpart, the Canon in the 6th. For
illustration
a. In the 3rd ( or 10th)

*i) tr
Pb3=
mm i
Ex.
191. Andante.
tr
mm
ttSEEtE^
*±
&=$
SE ^s^gggf
KLENGEL.*2)
fc£ eS =P=i=i«:
^
P-F-
a*-*-
a
Cad. etc.
^-»
aa^pî i:tP:
5fe£±*:
b. In the ,6th.
t^^fe*->—*- £^-
wIE =^sf
A llegro.
h 252E I=t^ =f=*=

30o APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 196.
GOETSCHIUS.
ifcj M g5g
ffi=^|*
fe&^=Î
At the end of Part I (meas. 27) the Leader is conducted back to the begin-
*i)
ning, and the Part is then repeated, with 1st and 2nd ending. *2) From "48 —
Canons and Fugues," Vol. II, Canon 18. Analyze carefully. See also Bach, "Art —
of Fugue," Canon III in 10th, ; —
with Artificial Double-cpt. in 10th.
196. In the 5th, and its counterpart, in the 4th. For illustration :
Ex.
192.
m ti
In the 5th.
-0-^-0- »f •? * ^gfr^rr^
P'â^y
Klencel. *i)
1
\k±k J"3 .
J^jgg j;
*i) " 48 Canons and Fugues," Vol. I, Canon 19. Analyze to the end. See
also Vol. II, Canon 3 (in 5th, after 2 measures).
Bach, " Art of Fugue," Canon IV ; in the 5th, with Double-cpt. in the 12th.
For an example of the Canon in the 4th, see Klengel, Vol. II, Canon 6; after 4
measures.
EXERCISE 54.
A. Two examples (major and minor, different time and tempo) of the Unac-
companied 2-voice Canon in the 8ve. Review par. 192 a, i, c, d.
B. Examples of' the Unaccompanied 2-voice Canon in the 5th, 4th, 3d, 6th, 2nd,
and 7th. Either write one brief example of each ; or a continuous example in sec-
tional form, with a different interval in each section. Some experiments must,
however, be made in 2- or 3-Part Song-form, with repetition of Part I.'
Other Species.
197. The Canon in Contrary motion. Here the choice of " corre-
sponding tones " is of great importance. Review par. 29a thoroughly.
Par. 197. UNACCOMPANIED CANON. 301
As there demonstrated, the best results are obtained either by answer-

ing Tonic by Mediant, or Tonic by Dominant.
All other conditions correspond to those of the above species. See,
particularly, pars. 192^ and 193a.
For illustration
Allegretto.
193.
Ex.
E4:
m =t
»i) *
tf S3 J3_ etc.
*i) *i) The Tonic e in the Leader

is answered by £•(, the Mediant, in the Fol-
lower, throughout and vice versa

; —
the Mediant by the Tonic (g% everywhere by e).
*2) "Gradus ad Parnassum," Schirmer ed. No. 66 (orig. No. 73). Analyze
to the end. It is " endless," but with an added cadence.
See also, same work, No. 63 (orig. No. 10) exactly the same Tonic=Mediant,
; ;
after 1 measure, " endless," but with cadence.

Klengel, Vol. II, Canon 20; Tonic = Dominant, after 2 measures.
Brahms, Handel-Variations, op. 24, Var. 6; Fart I, parallel 8ve-Canon, after

• 1 beat; Part II, Contrary motion; Part III, again parallel.
198. Canon in Augmentation. The two parts generally begin to-

gether or nearly so, usually in the 8ve and the Augmentation con- ;
stantly widens the distance between Leader and Follower, so that it is

of course impossible to imitate the entire Leader. Usually, therefore,
the second half of the leading voice is a free counterpoint to the por-
tion of the Follower still due ; but many devices, such as exchanging
the parts, or substituting Diminution after a while, may be resorted to.
For example :
Allegro vivace. —— ,~ Goetschius.
gî^sHii^fe
^
Ex. etc.
194.
She 1
8ve, in Augmentation.
Bach, Art of Fugue," Canon I ; Augmentation and Contrary motion.
199. In Diminution. Here the distance between the parts is con-

stantly decreased, so that the Follower overtakes the Leader after the
first time-interval has been exactly doubled. Thereafter the calculation

is reversed, and the imitation becomes " Augmentation." For example :
Allegretto.
GOETSCHIUS.
*,)
-«—*- ±=*=
±&z
i **
=f* :etc.
=i=?t t
T f T
In Augmentation.
*i ) The parallel octaves at the confluence of the parts are of course inevitable.
From here on, the upper part is, practically, the Leader.
EXERCISE 55.
A. Two examples (major and minor) of the 2-voice Canon in Contrary motion.
B. One example, each, of the Canon in Augmentation and Canon in Dimi-
nution, (the latter beginning with time-interval of 4, 6, or 8 measures)
CHAPTER XIX.
The Two-voice Canon, Accompanied. Instrumental.
200. This is by far the most practicable and valuable form of the
Canon, because the added part (parte libera), or parts, disguise the con-
straint of the canonic imitation, and may contribute very significantly
to the beauty and effectiveness of the whole. Any of the above canonic
Par. 2oi. ACCOMPANIED CANON. 303
species may be thus treated, but the most common is that in the 8ve,
parallel, — more rarely contrary.
201. The auxiliary (accompanying) part may be placed above, be-

low, or between the canonic voices, at option but much depends upon ;
the degree of importance it assumes.

a. It may be distinctly subordinate (unessential), serving no other
purpose than that of emphasizing the rhythm ; or of supplementing the
harmony where needed. For example
Allegro assai. Klengel. *i)
Auxiliary.
*i) Vol. II, Canon 16; 8ve, after one beat. Analyze to end.
Schumann, Studies for Pedal-piano, op. 56, No. 1 ; 8ve, after \ measure ;
auxiliary Bass.
b. Or the auxiliary part may be coordinate with the canonic parts.

In this case may be a carefully conducted running voice (comp. par.
it
73#) ; or it may borrow its melodic and rhythmic figures from the
Canon itself. For example :
1. Andante caritabile. Klengel. *i)
Ex.
197.
iPzz« "^^=^ Follower ( in unison.)
$33$
xtat
etc.
Auxiliary, running part.

2. Allegretto. Leader.
Klengel. *3)
s
fees:
*-#*
:ifi
ziL-2
tfc
V? *-±-
'4 etc.
Auxiliary.
— G— m* -•^+4-
W-mM-M — m
m
1 \-m l-m - I
t*=#
1 1
r*Tib
Bizfc|i2=
=lzOfir p
v w
Follower. *2)
3°4 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 201b.
*i) Vol. I, Canon 18. Analyze.

*2) In Contrary motion, Tonic = Tonic (comp. par. 197).
*3) Vol. II,Canon 12. Analyze to end, and see also —
Klengel, Vol. I, Canon 8 Contrary motion (Dominant ; = Tonic), after one
measure ; auxiliary upper part, beginning in 3rd measure. — Vol. I, Canon 1 1 ; unison,
after 2 beats ; auxiliary Bass. — Vol. I, Canon 16 ; Contrary motion (Tonic = Tonic),
after one measure ; auxiliary Soprano, beginning in 2nd measure. — Vol. I, Canon
17; in the 2nd, after one measure; auxiliary Soprano, beginning in 8th measure.
Vol. II, Canon I; 8ve, after one measure; inner part a running auxiliary. — Vol. II,
Fugue 6, middle Division ; unison, after one measure, during Part I ; running aux-
iliary Bass ; in Part II the canonic voices appear in fairly exact contrary direction
Part III as before. — Vol. II, Canon 10; Double-8ve, after 2 measures; inner part
auxiliary. —Vol. II, Canon 13 ; 8ve, after 2 measures; auxiliary Bass, beginning 2
measures before canonic parts. — Vol. II, Canon 15; 5th, after ^ measure; auxiliary
Bass. — Vol. II, Canon 21 ;
5th, after one measure; auxiliary Bass.
Bach, Air with 30 Variations, Var. 3 (unison, after one measure, auxiliary Bass).
Var. 6 (in 2nd, after one measure, auxiliary Bass beautiful example). Var. 9 (in ;
6th, after one. measure, auxiliary Bass). Var. 12 (Contrary motion, Tonic =Domi-
nant, after one measure, Bass partly coordinate). Var. 15 (ditto; Bass coordinate).
Var. 18 (in 6th, after J measure, auxiliary Bass ; fine example). Var. 21 (in 7th, after
\ measure, auxiliary Bass). Var. 24 (in 8ve, after 2 measures, auxiliary Bass).
Klengel, Vol. I, Canon 22, is in Augmentation, later Diminution (in 8ve), with
auxiliary Bass ; the canonic parts begin on first beat ; the Augmentation, in inner part,
extends to meas. 13 J; Imitation in uniform rhythm follows (6-measure time-interval)
to meas. 25^ then Diminution to end of meas. 28 then again Augmentation to meas.
; ;
35 then uniform Imitation (after 3 measures) in meas. 40 the time-interval

; ; is short-
ened to 2 measures the Coda, last 3 measures, is in Diminution.
;
Sometimes two such coordinate parts accompany the 2-voice Canon.

This is rare, however, excepting in the free harmonic manner shown in
d below.
See Klengel, Vol. II, Canon 8; in 8ve, after one measure, two inner auxiliary
parts. —
Chadwick, Canonic Studies for Organ, op. 12, Canon 2; in 8ve, after 2
measures ; two upper parts auxiliary.
c. Or the auxiliary part may be so conducted as to appear, as

far as external effect is concerned, to constitute the essential element,
which the canonic parts merely serve to sustain. Here the danger of
incoherent or unintelligible form is greatly reduced. For example
Ex.
198.
h&-Ei mm§§si
Allegro moderato.
Auxiliary.
Follower.
±
-&-*-
1
i
nReader. r
Par- 2oid. ACCOMPANIED CANON. 3°5
i|£i f^= gSip^^^l -i j

Klengel. *i)
etc.
» e:
-j-
^ f- f=
i
*i) Vol. I, Canon 7 analyze to end, and
; see also —
Vol. I, Canon 10 in 5th, after \ measure
; ; auxiliary upper part. — Vol. II, Canon
7 j in 2nd, after two beats in 3-4 time ; auxiliary Bass, beginning two measures
before canonic parts.
d. Finally, the accompaniment may assume a distinctly harmonic

character, imparting a more or less preponderantly homophonic effect
to the whole.
It may be limited, as before, wholly (or largely) to one single
auxiliary part, which exhibits the underlying harmony in broken-chord
form (i.e., as harmonic figuration, in flowing rhythm). One of the
canonic parts is almost certain to be given to the Soprano, the other to
the inner voice, more rarely Bass. Thus
Andante.
*i) Pfte. Variations, op. 9, Var. 14; Canon in the 2nd, after 2 measures. See
also Var. 15; in 3rd, after one measure; auxiliary inner part. In both of these
examples occasional, very slight, licences occur. —
See further, Klengel, Vol. \\,
3o6 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 2oid.
Canon 19; unison, after \ measure; auxiliary Bass. — Vol. I, Canon 3; in the 4th,
after 2 long measures auxiliary Bass.
; — Vol. I, Canon 5 ; in the 7th, after one brief
measure auxiliary Bass, partly coordinate.
;
Or, the auxiliary homophonic accompaniment may consist in con-

crete harmonic bulk, with little (or no) regard to the number or conti-
nuity of parts (i.e., variable volume). Here, again, one of the canonic
parts is assigned to the Soprano, almost without exception ; the other
may be placed in any lower part, but (unless in Bass) is frequently so
confounded with the harmonic accompaniment as to be unrecognizable
as a "canon." See par. 202. For example:
Follower.
1. Molto espresswo.
IE&
52z ± ESfe
-«— 4-
Leader. „
Ex.
200.
4U--S5
Baa-;—
~7 ;-i-s-i-
u.
rft
&
m
J- 1
•^
Schumann. *i)
$ t5 g?
g^g m 1
\
i^ ^^Â,—g £ T
;
»^#P|
2. Andante. Brahms. *3>
M m
a— —
agiÊî I
r a '
Fi
*i) Pedal-piano Studies, op. 56, No. 2 Canon in unison, after one measure.
;
Analyze ; and see same work, No. 3 in 4th, after J measure Prelude and Posthide
; ;
added. — No. 5, in 8ve, after one measure; auxiliary accompaniment in inner parts
and Bass; exquisite example.
*2) The Leader is in the Soprano ; the Follower (8ve) in lower voice, in this
broken form, throughout ; an auxiliary Bass is added later.
*3) Pfte. Variations, op. 9, Var. 8 ; analyze carefully.

See also Ex. 201.
Par. 202. ACCOMPANIED CANON. 307
202. In order to appreciate the significance of the Canon-form, it should be

contemplated in the abstract, aside from its uninviting mathematical aspect. As has
been observed, each successive time-interval (one measure, or whatever section it
may be) of the Leader is a counterpoint to the preceding section; that is, each such
member is a product of the preceding one, through the strictest and most obvious
process of logical derivation, or cumulation. The fact that the leading voice may
thus accompany itself, may fit into itself, member by member, indicates a degree of
cohesion and consistency of evolution which vindicates the rank of the Canon
among those art-forms whose merit is founded upon close logic. This being the
case, it is evident that the essential properties of the form are all present in the
Leader alone, whether actually accompanied by the Follower or not and though it ;
might be injudicious ever to advocate the complete omission of the Follower,* it is

interesting to question to what extent the presence of the Follower should be em-
phasized, — what degree the canonic imitation should be made
in other words, to
clearly recognizable. acknowledged that the merit of a Canon in-
It is generally
creases as the evidences of canonic labor decrease that the more freely and naturally
;
the leading voice runs, the more perfect the Canon the less it betrays of its contra-
;
puntal origin, the dry mathematical fact that one part is obstinately dogging the
other, the better. Hence, the doctrine may be defensible, that a Canon need not be
recognizable as such but with one limitation, namely, not incessantly recognizable.
;
The beauty and attractiveness of the act of Imitation, the calling of voice to' voice,
is so real, and so greatly appreciated by even the untutored musical listener, that it
should not be banished from an art-form which, at its best, does not exhibit an
excess of external beauty and grace. The proper balance between unimpassioned
logic of structure on the one hand and romantic charm on the other, is most nearly
achieved in the 8ve-Canon, with harmonic accompaniment, in which provision is
made for clear formal arrangement, and for fairly frequent evidences of the canonic
imitation. Review par. 192^.
203. When the last of the above varieties (par. 20id) is chosen, it
is possible to mould the Canon in any of the Conventional styles of
musical composition, as, for instance, the March, Minuet, Romanza,

feude, etc., etc. This is very desirable, as it lends definiteness of
character and purpose to the Canon, and invites a certain legitimate
freedom of treatment without violating any distinctive canonic condition
(par. 186). For example:
1. Minuet. Goetschius.
J
A— ^.4jJ-.jggfl~
L=Effz-.-V^g—r=f—Fip—
— e-
li b_ ir
~i
„ -Hi
Ex.
201.
.3 .
*
1
3=i=3F £ fe£
* This actually takes place in Jadassohn, Vocal Canon, op. 38, No. 1, during Div. I.
3o8 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 203.
GOETSCHIUS.
Additional miscellaneous illustrations
Schumann, Jugend-Album, op. 68, No. 27 (in the 8ve) ;

3-Part Song-form
canonic voices exchanged in Part II. — Jugend-Sonata, op. 1 18, No. 2, second move-
ment (8ve) ; 3-Part form, with all repetitions. — Albumbldtter, op. 124, No. 20 (Sve).
Symph. Etudes, Etude 4

op. 13, (8ve).
Guilmant, Org. Comp., op. 40, No. 3 (8ve).
Grieg, Lyric Pieces, op. 38, No. 8 (8ve).
Jadassohn, Pfte. Preludes and Fugues, op. 56; Prelude 2 (8ve). — Prel. 3
(8ve). —Prel. 6 and 8 (ditto).
Moszkowski, op. 15, No. 4.
Leschetizky, op. 36, No. 2 (Gigue) ; almost wholly unaccompanied.

Raff, Friihlingshoten, op. 55, No. 10.
Cesar Franck, Violin Sonata, A major, Finale ; Sonata-allegro form, the Prin-
cipal Theme each time an 8ve-Canon, in different modes of treatment.
G. W. Chadwick, Canonic Studies for Organ, op. 12; Nos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8;
different intervals; all accompanied.
EXERCISE 56.
A. An example of the 2 -voice Canon, with subordinate auxiliary part (par.
2010). Any interval may be used.
B. A 2-voice Canon with coordinate auxiliary part (par. 201*). Any interval,
or Contrary motion.
C. A 2-voice Canon with essential auxiliary part (par. 2oi«).

D. A number of Canons with harmonic accompaniment (par. 20\d). For each,
some conventional Style may be chosen (par. 203).
The Two-voice Canon, Accompanied: Vocal.
204. Among the conventional styles, frequently chosen for the outer
vestment of the Canon, none is more effective than the vocal duet, with
instrumental accompaniment.
Par. 204. ACCOMPANIED CANON. 309
The interval most commonly employed is the unison (when the

voices are of similar register), or the octave (when parallel voices are
used). But any interval is possible, and even Contrary motion is some-
times encountered. The time-interval is apt to be brief, as in the
instrumental Canons.
The text is generally the same in both voices. The accompaniment
is almost necessarily devoted, also, to an independent Prelude, occa-
sional Interludes, and a Postlude and, in general, it may assume con-
;
siderable importance and independence of character. Sometimes the

canonic Imitation extends to the end, but it is more common to add
a free ending (par. 192^). For illustrations see —
Jadassohn, 9 Vocal Canons, op. 36. — 6 Vocal Canons, op. 38.
Henschel, 3 Vocal Canons, op. 4.
Mrs. H. H. A. Beach, Sea-Song for 2 Sopranos; in Part II the time-interval is
enlarged ; in Part III the voices are exchanged.
Haydn, 3rd (" Imperial ") Mass, Credo in unum Deum ; Leader in Soprano and
Tenor in 8ve-duplication, Follower (after one measure in the 4th) in Alto and Bass
although the complex thus embraces four voices, it is evidently only a 2-voice Canon
Brahms, Motet, op. 29, No. II, 3rd movement (in 2nd, accomp.).
EXERCISE 57.
A number of examples of the 2-voice Canon as vocal duet, with instrumental

accompaniment.
CHAPTER XX.
The Canon for More Than Two Parts.
205. The 3-voice Canon. This consists of a Leader and two Fol-
lowers (similar to the 3-voice Round). In order to decrease the very
great difficulties of this contrapuntal form, it is necessary, or at least
customary, that the same melodic interval and time-interval should prevail
between the first and second Follower, as preceded, between Leader

and first Follower; in other words, that the contrapuntal relations
between successive voices shall exactly correspond, thus ensuring at
least this degree of continuous agreement. For instance, if the first
Follower is in the.8ve, after one measure, the second Follower will also
be in the 8ve, after one additional measure (or two measures from the
3io APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 205.
beginning) ; or, if the first Follower is in the 5th, the second Follower
will be in the next 5 th, or in the 2nd from the Leader ; if in the 4th, the
second Follower will be in the 7th, and so on. Thus
m
in 2nd. in 4th. in 7th.
1.
. aFoil. in 5th.
Ex.
202. r-EE
1
1. Foil.
-%h. J^ 4th. 4th.
Leader.
In any other than the 8ve-8ve species, the same modifications of interval quality
(not affecting the letters) are necessary, for the sake of smooth harmonic and modu-
latory succession, as were noted in par. 193*.
The difficulty of obtaining intelligible form is greatly enhanced but much may :
be accomplished by wise and generous use of Rests. Review par. 192*, thoroughly.
The 3-voice Canon is rarely accompanied, though the addition of one or even
more auxiliary parts is possible.
1. Allegro. 2nd Foil. *i) Klengel. *2)
Leader.
2. Waltz tempo. Klengel. * 3 )

3 Moderato _
fii ai *4ifc
"tr
—^ etc. Leader.
cp-*-
aa-^ *=*- 3z
2:
Klengel. *4)
Auxil. Bass.
Par. 205. THE THREE- VOICE CANON. 31 I
*i) The 2nd Follower is not again in the " 2nd from the Leader," but in the
2nd from the preceding Follower, or 3rd from the Leader ; the Canon is therefore
"in the 2nd and 3rd," after one measure, respectively. The contrapuntal relations
between the inner and upper parts in measure 3 therefore correspond exactly to
those between the lower and inner parts in measure 2 and so on continuously, from ;
measure to measure, throughout.
*2) Vol. I, Canon 14. Analyze minutely.
*3) Vol. II, Canon 9 ; in 8ve and 8ve, after one beat ; an extraordinary example.
*4) Vol. I, Canon 20; in 3rd and 5th; like the preceding, this has also a very
brief time-interval (one beat), and is even more unique, in some respects ; analyze
carefully ; the auxiliary Bass is coordinate.
*5) See Ex. 189, Note *3).
See further, Klengel, Vol. I, Canon 2 ; in 3rd and 5th, after one measure, unac-
companied. — Vol.
- I, Canon 4 ; in 7th and 6th, after one measure, unaccompanied.
— Vol. I, Canon 9 8ve-8ve. ; — Vol. I, Canon 12 ; in 6th and 4th, after six measures
very definite form, in consequence of long time-interval. — Vol. Canon 13 I, ; in 5th
and 2nd, after one measure. — Vol. I, Canon 23 ; 8ve-8ve. — Vol. Canon I, 24
8ve-8ve. —Vol. II, Canon 2 ; in 4th and 7th, after one beat ; at first unaccompanied j
later a running Bass is added, and still later an auxiliary upper part (5-voice texture)
Prelude and Postlude. —
Vol. II, Canon 14 8ve-8ve, after z\ measures. Vol. II, ; —
Canon 17; and 2nd, after 2 beats; at first unaccompanied; in Part II an
in 5th
auxiliary Bass is added later the canonic parts are shifted down (to 3 lower parts),
;
and the upper part becomes a running auxiliary. Vol. II, Canon 22 in 3rd and 5th, — ;
after 4 measures. —
Vol. II, Canon 24 8ve-8ve. Vol. I, Canon 1 in 2nd and 3rd ; — ;
after \ measure auxiliary running Bass.

;
Vol. I, Canon 6 8ve-8ve, in simulta- — ;
neous Diminution the 3 parts begin exactly together, the Leader

and Augmentation ;
in inner voice 14 measures of the Leader are imitated in Augmentation (to meas.
;
28), and 28 measures are imitated in Diminution the latter (upper part) becomes, ;
therefore, "free " after meas. 14, and all the parts are free from meas. 28 to end.
Mozart (Breitkopf & Hartel, Serie 7), No. 42 ; Unison. — No. 50 ; unison and
8ve. — No. 51 in 2nd and 3rd.
;
Both vocal.
G. W. Chadwick, Organ Canons, op. 12, No. 9; in 4th and 7th, after one
measure ; auxiliary Bass. — No. 10 ; in 2nd and 3rd, ditto.
206. Contrary motion is employed as follows The first Follower is :
the Contrary motion of the Leader, in any of the usual methods of cor-
respondence (Tonic =
Dominant being probably the best) ; the second
Follower, being the Contrary motion of the first one, returns to the
original direction, and the corresponding series of interval-relations is

obtained by giving to the 2nd Follower, in every case, the exact tones
of the Leader (i.e., 8ve-imitation of the latter). Thus
^_ Tonic.
;--
''
j_j],_ ,; agfc|» T
Z^-
^-m- GOETSCHIUS.
Goetschius.
_
-
^
l „
Tonic.
ps
*i) The 2nd Follower imitates the Leader in parallel direction, in the double
8ve. The successive intervals described by Leader and 1st Follower (beginning with
the 8ve, as indicated) are exactly reproduced between 1st and 2nd Followers, but,
naturally, in inverted forms. This will be the invariable result, no matter what the
location of the 1st Follower is, if the 2nd Follower corresponds thus to the Leader.
207. The 4-voice Canon. The principles of par. 205 apply here also,
simply extended to include the 4th voice. For example (8ve-8ve-8ve,
after one measure)
Allegro.
, A
p g ^=s
Ex.
205. \
LJ_L *t
gg= T FPr=r
Goetschius.
AIM
I
w % §A 3=t
N.B.
±±-
.
-• * p-rf i
^ *_I
etc.
î:
±A±A J ±. ±
- ^ tL^
%=*j • P-
1
r Pf^t ft
See also Klengel, Vol. I, Canon 15 ; in the 6th, 4th, and 2nd (comp. Ex. 202),
after one measure respectively ; unaccompanied.
Mozart (Breitkopf & Hartel, Serie 7), No. 54; vocal ; all unison, after 4
measures.
dementi, " Gradus ad Parnassum," Schirmer ed. No. 68 (orig. ed. 33), is a 4-
voice Canon, in unequal melodic intervals ; the succession is 4th, 5th, and 8th;
hence, the second pair of parts (2nd and 3rd Followers) correspond in their relations
Par. 208. THE DOUBLE-CANON. 313
to the first pair, but the interval-relations between the first and second Followers are
so shifted as to involve Artificial double-cpt. Analyze minutely.
Brahms, Round-canons, op. 113, No. 6; in contrary motion ; indep. cadence.
EXERCISE 58.
A. An example of the 3-voice Canon in 8ve-8ve; unaccompanied; for piano-
forte, organ, or string-trio.
B. Two or more examples in other intervals of Imitation, according to Ex. 202 ;
with or without auxiliary part, at option.
C. A 3-voice Canon in Contrary motion.

D. One or more 4-voice Canons, for string-quartet.
CHAPTER XXI.
The Double-Canon, Etc.
208. Like the Double-fugue, the Double-canon has two Leaders, or

a " Double-leader," imitated by two Followers. The number of canonic
parts is therefore four ; to these an auxiliary part may be added, but it
is rarely done.
The two Leaders may begin together, but it is more common to
introduce the subordinate Leader (so-called) a beat or more, possibly a
measure or more, later than its fellow. The rules of par. 165 apply, to
a certain extent, and may be reviewed.
The interval of Imitation is optional, the 8ve being here again pos-
sibly the most convenient. The time-interval is apt to be a little longer
than in the single Canon, but must be adhered to by both Followers
i.e., the second pair of parts must agree with the first pair in time-rela-
tion. Any two of the four parts may be chosen for the two Leaders.
For example
2nd Leader.
Allegro.
tk-
1
Par. zio. CHORALE AS CANON. 315
Leaders, imitated in the unison, after \\ measures, by a quartet of Followers, and

I \ measures later by still another quartet it is designed as a Round, with cadence
;
indicated.
EXERCISE 59.
A. One or two examples of the Double-canon ; all conditions optional.

B. An
example as " Song-form with Trio," for pianoforte, 4 hands the princi- ;
pal Song a Double-canon, with auxiliary (subordinate) Bass the Trio a brief Triple- ;
canon, in the 8ve, unaccompanied.
CHAPTER XXII.
Canon as Chorale-Elaboration.
210. Chorale as Canon. In this species the chorale-melody itself
appears two voices as Canon, while the other parts provide a contra-
in
puntal accompaniment.
Theinterval of canonic imitation, and the time-interval, are optional. But the
relationsadopted at the beginning should be, as a rule, maintained uniformly through-
out the chorale therefore it is usually necessary to experiment repeatedly with the
;
whole, before valid relations can be determined and it is not considered unpermissi-
;
ve, in case the advantage is manifest, to adopt new relations for a new Section (or
even for some single line) of the chorale. It is greatly preferable, however, to over-
come the necessity for such changes of canonic relation by judicious (slight) rhythmic
modification, or strictly unessential melodic embellishment, of the chorale-melody,
in the manner shown in Ex. 125. For example (Table, Exercise 26, Chorale 29)
First version ; canon in the 5th, after one measure.

*i)
n;^=* i3i £
Ex.
207-ES Z -— Hs* — ±gl
,•
—r-T-T'f
-«>-*—\-*Sf
« m
g^f^ Pffy
Second version ; canon in the 2nd,
,*2)
f>
I
-tS-
after
^ f
one (longer) measure.
<sJh=—(2-J-g— S>-
1
r r . r r
I
etc.
ifji&EEzO t±rz:*i)_ S!=P^lfe

!^=:
r tr r u t- j ft f
3i6 APPLIED COUNTERPOINT. Par. 211.
—GOETSCHIUS.
mrffTw"* :t»tt
*r
|e«.
T r
i '
f?=
*-
si!r rr
*i) Observe the slight modifications of the original chorale-melody.
*2) The ft\ simply indicates, as usual, the end of a Line, and is not respected.
*3) In the completed elaboration of this first version the canonic parts are
Soprano and Pedal-bass, — the latter two 8ves lower than here written. The inner
parts are thematic, as in the " Invention with chorale " (par. 99), preceding the
Leader by two measures.
*4) Canonic parts are Soprano and Tenor Pedal independent ; ; Alto pursues
constantly a Figure of its own comp. pars. 93, 96.;
211. The which accompany the canonic voices are in a sense

parts
their " auxiliaries," but should be strictly contrapuntal, and thematic
(based upon some Motive or Motives), as described in par. 92, which
review. See also pars. 99 and 93.
The number and choice of these accompanying parts, and the loca-
tion of the canonic voices, are wholly optional. Either the small or
large species of chorale-figuration may be employed.
For general illustration •
1. Moderate). Piutti.
Leader (c. f.).
^=i=^
-*—*^± *-*-
:
'-- -* * tt
r r
Ex.
20S.
§5E
^
-• 9
Follower (in8ve).
(-^ P-
î etc.
:p*
is 4=1=1=1=
-* • . -r S=S
2. Moderate.
'
-> K&- —f— F-
Par. an. CANON WITH CHORALE. 317
Bach
6=*=* j=t=
^X
Follower (in 5th).
i 1^3 *i)
j j- 1
^r 1
Leader (c. f.).
etc.
m rqz 3EEB =t=t 4= 1

*i) Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. V, No. 3. — See Bach, Vol. V, No. 8
further, ; in
8ve, outer parts; 2 auxiliary thematic parts. — Vol. V, No. 19; voice Canon 4- ; in
8ve, Soprano and Tenor Bass independent running Alto.

; Vol. V, No. 29 4-
;
•
— j
voice; Soprano and Alto, in 5th, after 2 beats; running Tenor, independ. Pedal.
Vol. V, No. 37, 5-voice Soprano and Alto, in 5th.
; Vol. V, No. 44 4-voice Bass — ; ;
and Alto, in 5th, after 2 beats. —

Vol. V, No. 35 4-voice Double-canon (in 8ve) for ;
;
24 measures then single Canon, with longer time-interval, for 7 measures then free
; ;
Coda (6 measures). In this example the triplet notation differs from modern usage
(i.e., JJJ = J ). — Vol. VI, No. 19; 5-voice; Canon in two Tenors, after 2 long
measures Pedal independent, Soprano and Alto thematic.

;
Vol. VII, No. 52 5- — ;
voice Soprano and Tenor, 8ve Pedal independent, other two parts imitatory the
; ; ;
canonic imitations alternate at each Line time-interval changed once.

;
A superb masterpiece is found in Bach, Vol. V, page 100; Canon in Contrary

motion; Sec. I (to meas. 14) in upper parts, Tonic = Mediant, Pedal auxiliary ; Sec.
II (to meas. 27) the contrary motion of Sec. I, = Tonic, Pedal new
Mediant ; Sec.
III (to meas. 39), Canon in lower parts, Dominant = Mediant, two upper parts
auxiliary; Sec. IV (to meas. 52) contrary motion of Sec. Ill Sec. V is a Coda, con- ;
taining Diminutions of first Line, and a remarkable stretto of all 4 Lines together.
212. Canon with Chorale, i.e., canonic accompaniment to the single
chorale-melody.
All conditions are optional. Additional auxiliary parts are some-
times employed. For example
Lento. Goetschius.
C. F. ,rs I
ife - P=;
1
-
W^ I
Ex.
209.
H
§i|IE=^g
U. T
Leader. ^
7
M
^T^gtE •—*-5-n
etc.
Follower (in 7th).

See Bach, Org. Comp., Vol. V, page 92 Canon in 8ve, after \ measure, in outer ;
parts c.f. in Pedal as Tenor Large species (with Prelude, Interludes, and Postlude).
; ;
— Vol. V, page 94 Canon in 4th, after \ measure; other conditions similar to pre-
;
ceding. — Vol. V, page 96 ; Canon in 7th, Pedal-bass and Alto; c. f. inSoprano;

additional lyric auxiliary part in 2nd Soprano. — Vol. V, page 98 ; Canon in Aug-
mentation, Soprano and Bass, in 8ve; the Leader ends in meas. 21, the Follower in
meas. 42 (end of the composition) ; c. f. in Pedal as Tenor an auxil. Tenor is added.
;
EXERCISE 60.
A. Two or more examples of the Chorale as Canon (pars. 210, 211), for Organ.
B. Two or more examples of the Canon with Chorale (par. 212).
" Canonic " Compositions.
213. When the canonic imitation falls short of the characteristic

requirements of the legitimate Canon (par. 180), either in being inter-
rupted (periodic instead of continuous), or in containing more or less
frequent licences (instead of being strict), the product forfeits the title
of " Canon," and is called simply " canonic " composition.

To this class belong also the fairly numerous examples of homo-
phonic (or even polyphonic) forms with canonic sections, or passages.
See Beethoven, Pfte. Var., op. 120, Var. 6 (1st section of Parts I and II) ; Var.
19 (the same) ; Var. 20 (similar). — Pfte. Var., op. 35, Var. 7 (Parts I and III ; Part
II harmonic). — 2nd movement, portions of the "Trio."
Pfte. Sonata, op. 101, —
Symphony No. IV, first movement, meas. 103-119 of Allegro. Violin Sonata, op. —
30, No. 2, "Trio " of Scherzo. —
Pfte. Sonata, op. 7, 3rd movement, Part II. Op. —
31, No. I, Fin'ale, meas. 86-97.
Schubert, Trio, op. 100, Scherzo.
Schumann, op. 56, No. 4; Parts and III; in 4th, at first after 3 measures,
I
then after one; Part II free, but imitatory. —

No. 6; Sec. I, 8ve-canon, harmonic
accompaniment ; Sec. II, a 4-voice Fughetta Sec. Ill again canonic. ;
Chopin, Mazurka 34 (op. 56, No. 2) ; Part V, meas. 32-17 from end.
Brahms, Var., op. 9, Var. 10 ; contains several brief canonic passages, and
duplications in simultaneous regular and contrary motion (belongs to the once po'pu-
lar species called " Quodlibet," a contrapuntal medley ; see the Finale of Bach's
"Air" with 30 Variations).
Brahms, Motet, op. 74, No. 1, 2nd movement. — Op. 118, No. 4, Divs. I and III.
Jadassohn, op. 56, Prelude No. 5 ; Song-form with Trio ; Principal Song homo-
phonic, Trio an 8ve-canon.
Bach, " B-minor Mass," No. 14, Et in unum Dominum. — Org. Comp., Vol. V,
No. 15. — Vol. VI, No. 24.
The End.

Goetschius Applied Counterpoint

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Goetschius Applied Counterpoint

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Goetschius Applied Counterpoint

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

..

BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME OF THE

SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND

3 1924 022 381 143

The original of this book is in

the Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in

An Exhaustive Treatise on the Structural and Formal Details of the

FOR THE USE OF

General anto Special g>tubents of ifflussic

PERCY GOETSCHIUS, Mus. Doc.

Price, net, $3.00

ACHIEVEMENTS" IN THE SERIOUS

This book is a sequel to the Homophonic Forms, and the system

Experience in practical teaching has confirmed the author's belief

necessary than the course of harmony given in the Material used in

years of diligent application to Material is by no means too much, pos-

of polyphonic forms. Hence the title of the book.

the carefully collected references, as a very significant and distinctly

The following works, to which constant and vital reference is made,

3-voice Inventions the English Suites the Organ Compositions (Peters

compl. ed.), Vols. II, III, IV, V, and VI.

tions, op. 37 and op. 65.

Besides these, frequent reference is made to —

(The figures m parentheses refer to paragraphs.)

Chapter II. Association of Two Melodic Parts 19

Chapter III. Rhythmic Relation of the Melodic Parts 55

Chapter IV. Various Modes of Imitation 61

Chapter VI. Rules of Three- voice Polyphony 136

Chapter VII. The Three-voice Invention 146

Chapter IX. Free Polyphonic Forms 174

Chapter XI. Large Species of Chorale-figuration 197

Chapter XII. The Four-voice Fugue ... 224

Chapter XV. The Doubi.e-Fugue 261

Chapter XVI. The Triple-Fugue 282

Chapter XVII. The Round-canon . 289

Chapter XVIII. The Progressive Canon 293

Chapter XIX. Two-voice Canon, Accompanied 302

Chapter XX. Canon for More than Two Parts . 309

Chapter XXI. Double-Canon, etc 313

Chapter XXII. Canon as Chorale-elaboration 315

Condition 2 : Harmonious Union ;

Condition 3 : Independence of Parts ;

each of which will be successively treated in the chapters of Divi-

CONDITION 1 " PERFECT MELODY."

to lead each single part as smoothly and evenly as possible. Conjunct

2. Diatonic conjunct movement is preferable to chromatic.

See also Ex. 82-1 ; 26-5.

b. A chromatic succession should, if possible, be approached in the

/*/*/< \\,\ \ \ Possible.-

c. It is generally unmelodious to separate a chromatic succession by

3. Disjunct progressions are qualified as narrow leaps (major or

a.Narrow leaps are generally permissible.

repetition. For instance

iin =«* anggpig

These skips are, however, objectionable in the other direction (i.e.,

that corresponding to the natural tendency) ;

shifts (or reproductions) of it.

d. Unusual, and otherwise doubtful, skips sometimes occur at (im-

///< \\,\ \ \ Possible.-

2) Bach. N.B. 3 ) Bach.